HomeMy WebLinkAboutTaylor Ball of California Inc; 1998-01-12; 32441 Part 3 of 3B. All hose/check valves shall be UL listed and/or FM approved for use with the CV-90
INERGEN valve as manufactured by Ansul Fire Protection.
5.7 DISCHARGE NOZZLES:
A. Discharge nozzles shall be of two-piece construction and sized to provide flow rates
in accordance with system design flow calculations.
B. A nozzle inlet orifice plate shall be included. The orifice size shall be determined
by a computerized UL listed flow calculation program.
C. Orifice(s) shall be machined in the nozzle body to provide a horizontal discharge
pattern based upon the approved coverage arrangements.
D. Nozzles shall be permanently marked with the manufacturer’s part number. The
nozzles shall be threaded directly to the discharge piping without the use of special
adapters.
E. Nozzles shall be UL listed as manufactured by Ansul Fire Protection.
5.8 ORIFICE UNION/NIPPLE ASSEMBLIES:
A. An orifice union/nipple shall be included in the manifold to reduce pressure in the
downstream pipe network.
B. Orifice union/nipple assemblies shall be rated at 2000 lb. Class minimum.
C. Orifice union/nipple assemblies shall be permanently marked with the
manufacturer’s orifice code. The union orifice/nipple shall be threaded directly to
the manifold piping without the use of special adapters.
D. Union orifice/nipple assemblies shall be UL Listed and/or FM Approved for use with
the INERGEN system.
5.9 SYSTEM CHECKOUT AND TESTING:
A. The completed installation shall be inspected by factory authorized and trained
personnel. The inspection shall include a full operational test of all components per
the equipment manufacturer’s recommendations (including agent discharge).
B. Inspection shall be performed in the presence of the owner’s representative,
architect’s or engineer’s representative, insuring authority and/or the local authority
having jurisdiction.
C. All mechanical and electrical components shall be tested according to the
manufacturer’s recommended procedure to verify system integrity.
20 October 1997 Fire Protection - Clean Agent Suppression
Carlsbad City Library 15310 - 17 96013
D. Inspection shall include a complete checkout of the detectiori/control system and
certification of cylinder pressure. A written report shall be filed with the .owner.
E. As-built drawings shall be provided by the contractor (2 copies) indicating the
installation details. All routing of piping, electrical conduit and accessories shall be
noted.
F. Equipment installation and maintenance manuals shall be provided in addition to the
as-built drawings.
G. Prior to final acceptance, the contractor shall provide operational training in all
concepts of the system to the owner’s key personnel. Training shall consist of:
1. Control system operation
2. Trouble procedures
3. Abort procedures
4. Emergency procedures
5. Safety requirements
6. Demonstration of the system (excluding INERGEN release)
H. The quantity of agent shall reflect the actual design quantity of INERGEN agent.
I. A functional test shall be completed prior to the concentration test consisting of
detection, release, alarm, accessories related to the system, control unit and a
review of the cylinders, piping, fittings, hangers and cylinder pressure.
J. Concentration testing shall be performed under the supervision of the contractor’s
authorized personnel in the presence of the owner’s representative, local authorities
and any other insuring authority.
K. INERGEN test procedures shall be rewm.mended by the equipment manufacturer
and/or the INERGEN equipment supplier.
L. The contractor shall provide a gas analyzer capable of automatically recording
sampling points. Concentration recording shall continue until authorities are
satisfied with hazard integrity or until 10 minutes have elapsed.
M. The sampling point(s) shall be located at a strategic area(s) but no higher than the
highest combustible contents.
20 October 1997 Fire Protection - Clean Agent Suppression
Carlsbad City Library 15310 - 18 96013
N. If the test results indicate that the design concentration was not achieved and/or
held, the contractor shall determine the cause of the failure. After determination of
the cause, the system shall be recharged and again placed in operation. The
contractor shall only be responsible for retest based on equipment design failure.
PART 6 WARRANTY 0
6.1 WARRANTY:
A. All INERGEN system components furnished under this contract shall be guaranteed
against defect in design, material and workmanship for the full warranty time which
is standard with the manufacturer and/or supplier but not less than one (1) year
from the date of system acceptance. In addition, the installing contractor must
guarantee the system against false actuation or leakage due to faulty equipment,
design or workmanship for a period of one (1) year from final acceptance. In the
event of INERGEN agent leakage or system discharge from any of the above
conditions, the installing contractor shall completely recharge and recondition the
system at no cost to the owner.
-END OF SECTION***
/- 20 October 1997 Fire Protection - Clean Agent Suppression
Carlsbad City Library 15310-19 96013
PLUMBING
PART 1 GENERAL 0
1.1 SUMMARY:
A. The “Mechanical General Requirements,” Section 15050, is a part of this section
and applies as fully as if repeated herein.
B. The work under this section includes everything necessary for and incidental to
executing and completing the plumbing work, except as hereinafter specifically
excluded.
C. Work included shall be as indicated on the drawings, including, but not limited to,
the following:
1. Sanitary Soil, Waste and Vent System.
2. Roof Drains and Down Spout System.
3. Hot and Cold Water System.
4. Condensate Drain From Air Conditioning Units.
5. Natural Gas System.
6. Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment.
D. Related Work:
1. Mechanical General Requirements Section 15050
2. Fire Protection - Wet System Section 15300
3. Fire Protection, Clean Agent Suppression Section 15310
4. HVAC Section 15800
F- 20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Plumbing
15400 - 1 96013
PART 2 PRODUCTS 0
2.1 PIPE AND FITTINGS:
A. Soil, Waste, Vent and Rainwater Piping and Fittings Above Ground:
1. Cast-Iron (Hubless): CISPI Standard 301, ASTM 888, Service weight, cast-
iron soil pipe and fittings, with stainless steel shield, clamp assembly and
neoprene gasket, conforming to CISPI Standard 310.
2. Where space does not permit the use of cast-iron piping, install DWV copper
drainage tubing and cast brass fittings. Except copper is not permitted at
urinals.
B. Soil, Waste, Vent, and Rainwater Pipe and Fittings Underground:
I. Cast-iron (Hub End): ASTM A74, Service weight, hub and spigot soil pipe
and 5ttings. Pipe and fittings shall have a heavy coating of coal tar varnish
or asphaltum.
a. Neoprene Compression Gaskets: ASTM C564.
2. Option: CISPI standard 301, ASTM 888, hubless cast iron soil pipe and
fittings with ‘MG’ cast iron coupling, including stainless steel bolts and
neoprene gasket.
3. Option: PVC ASTM D2665 Schedule 40 pipe and DWV fittings, with solvent
cemented joints; DWV plastic fitting patterns shall conform to ASTM D3311.
a. Solvent: ASTM D2564.
C. Domestic Water Pipe and Fittings Above Ground:
1. Copper: ASTM 888, Type L Water Tube, drawn temper with ANSI B16.22,
streamlined pattern wrought copper solder-joint fittings.
a. Solder: ASTM B32, 95-5, tin-antimony.
D. Domestic Water Pipe and Fittings Below Ground Within Building:
1. Copper : ASTM 888, Type K Water Tube, soft temper. ANSI B16.22,
streamlined pattern wrought copper solder-joint fittings where required.
a. Solder: BAG7 silver.
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Plumbing
15400-2 96013
/- b.
/-
Pipe shall be encased with a “Plastisleeve” Manufactured by
Specialty Products for pipe sizes l/2” through 2”, or 8 MIL “Poly
Tube” encasement manufactured by Northtown for pipe sizes 3”.8”.
C. Single short lengths of water tube may be double tape wrapped with
10 MIL. x 2” wide polyethylene tape.
E. Domestic Water Pipe and Fittings Below Ground Outside of Building:
1. Copper: ASTM B88, Type K Water Tube, annealed temper with ANSI
816.22, streamlined pattern wrought copper solder-joint fittings.
a. Solder: BAG7 silver.
F. Condensate Drain Pipe and Fittings:
1. Copper: ASTM 888, Type M tube, drawn temper. ANSI B16.22, streamlined
pattern wrought copper solder joint fittings.
a. Solder: ASTM B32, 50-50 lead-tin.
G. Natural Gas Pipe and Fittings Above Ground:
1. Steel: ASTM A53, Grade A, ERW, Schedule 40, black steel pipe. Piping 2”
and smaller shall be threaded; piping 2l%” and larger shall be welded.
Threaded fittings shall be malleable iron ANSI B16.3, Class 150, standard
pattern. Threads shall conform to ANSI B1.20.1. Weld fittings shall be
standard weight steel, ASTM A 234, seamless or welded.
H. Natural Gas Pipe and Fittings Below Grade:
1. Steel: Piping (as specified for above ground) shall be coated with factory
applied continuous seamless coating of high density polyethylene having a
minimum thickness of 23 mils. Joints shall be finished with thermoshrink
seal. Fittings shall be field wrapped.
2. Polyethylene (PE): Yellow pipe APWAIULCC PE2406 gas pipe and fittings
with butt fusion joints conforming to ASTM D2513. Pipe shall be labeled
gas. Manufacturer shall be Plexco, DuPont or approved equal.
I. Gas Flu Vent Pipe and Fittings:
1. Metalbestos, Amerivent or approved equal, Type B, double wall design
approved for the connected appliance, provide complete with spacers, roof
jacks and raincap.
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Plumbing
16400-3 96013
2.02
A.
B.
C.
2.3
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
INSULATION:
All domestic hot water supply and tempered piping shall be insulated with 1” thick
Manvilie “Microlok” Fiberglass, or Gustin Bacon Fiberglass pipe insulation, or
approved equal, with pressure sensitive closure system jacket. Laterals to fixtures
no longer than 12 feet in length may have l/2 inch thick insulation.
1. Fittings and valve bodies shall be finished with ‘Zeston” premolded PVC
insulated ftiings.
2. Exposed pipe insulation shall be covered with glass fabric and coated with
finishing cement until a smooth paintable surface is obtained.
Plumbing fixture traps and supplies to fixtures accessible to the handicapped shall
be insulated with ‘Truebro” Lav-Guard, white vinyl, protective wver or McGuire Pro-
Wrap, white vinyl, protective cover or approved equal..
All refrigerated water and condensate drain piping and the first twenty feet of waste
piping laterals above grade, within building, receiving cold condensate shall be
insulated with l/2” thick, Schulier (Manville) Rubatex R-180 FS one piece pipe
insulation with Rubatex 373 adhesive, or imwlock l/2” thick polyoiefin pre-slit/pre-
glued insulation, or approved equal.
PIPING SPECIALTIES:
Tracer Wrre: Provide on all buried plastic pipe No. 10 AWG, TW insulated copper
wire. Spiral wrap around complete length of all buried plastic piping at
approximately 2’ intervals, terminate above grade.
Buried Utility Warning Tape: 6” wide plastic labeled buried utility warning tape.
Tape shall be labeled with the appropriate service. Provide above all buried piping
outside of building 12” below finished grade.
Unions, Copper Piping: ANSI 816.24, Class 150, hexagonal stock, with ball and
socket joints, metal-to-metal bronze seating surfaces, female threaded or solder
ends.
Unions, Steel Piping: ANSI B16.39, Class 150, black malleable iron; female pattern;
brass to iron seat; ground joint.
Flanges Steel Piping: 150 psi, ANSI B16.5 forged steel slip-on flanges.
1. Gaskets: l/16 inch thick.
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Plumbing
15400-4 96013
F. Flanges Copper Piping: 150 psi ANSI B16.24 bronze flanges.
2.4
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
M.
N.
A.
B.
1. Gaskets: l/l6 inch thick.
Isolation Unions: EPCO, W & K, Watts, or approved equal dielectric unions or
flanges, same size as pipe.
Water Hammer Arrestors: in accordance with PDI-WH-201 standards, J.R. Smith
5000 series or Zum Z-1700 series, bellows type, or approved equal. Size as
indicated in drawings. Water hammer arrestors concealed in walls shall be provided
with an access panel. Zum, J.R. Smith or approved equal.
Trap Primer: Precision Plumbing Products, Inc. “Prime Rite” trap primer valve with
single or multiple distribution unit where required. Trap primers concealed in wall
shall be provided with an access panel. Zurn, J.R. Smith or approved equal.
Thermometer: 9 inch adjustable angle, aluminum case, brass stem, separable
socket, 2 degree temperature increments and O-160” F. range; Trerice A405,
Weiss, Marsh, or approved equal.
Pressure Gauge: 4-l/2” size, black cast aluminum case, stainless steel ring, glass
window, white dial with black figures and graduations, red tipped black adjustable
pointer, brass/bronzed movement, phosphor bronze bourdon tube, l/4” NPT forged
brass socket. 1% accuracy over middle half range, O-l 00 psi dial range. Trerice
No. 600 Series, Weiss, Marsh, or approved equal. Provide system pressure rated
gauge cock between gauge and pipe.
Gas Appliance Connector: Brasscraft series ‘SC’ or approved equal, A.G.A
approved corrugated, Armorblast coated seamless brass tubing with straight F.I.P.
end fittings.
Flexible Connectors for Water Piping: Brasscraft, Nelson Dunn, or approved equal
braided stainless steel connectors series Sl-A with adapters as required.
VALVES:
Water: All shut-off valves for water service shall be ball valves except valves 2-l/2
inch and larger.
Ball Valves, 2” and Smaller: Class 150, 600 psi W.O.G., bronze, two piece body,
blowout proof stem, full port, TFE seat ring, screw or solder ends. Nibco 585-70
series, Watts, Apollo or approved equal.
f- 20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library Plumbing
15400 - 5 96013
C.
D.
E.
F.
2.5
A.
B.
C.
2.6
A.
B.
C.
2.7
A.
Ball Valves, 2-l/2” and 3”: 600 psi W.O.G., 3 piece body, blowout proof stem, full
port, bronze, 316 stainless steel trim, TFE seats, threaded or solder, Nibco 595-Y
Series, Watts, Apollo or approved equal.
Gas Cocks, 2” and Smaller: 125 psi W.O.G., iron body, square head, bronze plug
and washer, Crane 1228, Rockwell-Nordstrom or approved equal.
Gas Cocks, 2-l/2” and Larger: 175 psi W.O.G., semi-steel, lubricated plug, flanged,
Rockwell-Nordstrom 143, Homestead ACF or approved equal.
Check Valves, Swing, 2-l/2” and Smaller: Class 125, 200 psi W.O.G., bronze, Y-
Pattern, horizontal swing, renewable disc, threaded or solder; Nibco 413 Series,
Lunkenheimer, Crane or approved equal.
CLEANOUTS:
Floor Cleanout: Zum ZN-?400-BP-NL; J.R. Smith Fig. 4023, or approved equal with
nickel bronze non-skid adjustable round or square top with NEO-LOC or SPEEDI
set gasket.
Wall Cleanouts: Zum Z-1446-BP; J.R. Smith Fig. 4512, or approved equal with
stainless steel or chrome plated access wver and screws with No-Hub ‘T fitting and
bronze plug
Outside Cleanout: Zum Z-1474-IN; J.R. Smith Fig. 4253 or approved equal
cleanout access housing with double flange, cast iron body and wver with cleanout
and bronze plug. Cover shall be marked “Cleanout”. Encase anchoring flange in
18 inch square x 6 inch thick concrete pad, set top of cleanout housing flush with
top of concrete, and top of concrete 2-inches above finished grade.
FLASHINGS:
Furnish and install on each pipe passing through the roof a “Stoneman” No. 11004
or approved equal, four pound, seamless lead flashing assembly. Flashing shall
have reinforced boot complete with cast-iron counter flashing sleeve and sealed
with Permaseal waterproofing compound.
All vent pipes shall be terminated seven (7) inches above the roof.
Flashing for roof drains and overflow drains shall be per architectural drawings.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS:
Hangers and supports shall comply with the currently accepted edition of the U.P.C.
and the IAMPO installation standards.
20 October 1997 Plumbing
Carlsbad City Library 16400-6 96013
B. Hangers and Supports:
r- 2.8
2.9
1. Hangers: Adjustable “J” hanger B-Line #B3690, Elcen, Grinnell, or
approved equal.
2. Concrete Inserts: B-Line, Elcen, Grinnell, or approved equal.
3. Trapeze Hangers: B-Line #B22, Elcen, Grinnell, or approved equal channel
with pipe clamps and guides as required (include type to be used in
submittal).
4. Riser Clamps: B-Line #B3373; over 4-inch B-Line #B3131, Elcen, Grinnell,
or approved equal.
5. Cffset Pipe Clamps: B-Line #B3148, Elcen, Grinnell, or approved equal.
6. Pipe Strap: B-Line #B3180 or Elcen, Grinnell, or approved equal.
7. Pipe Isolation: B-Line #3195 Elcen, Grinnell, or approved equal.
8. Pipe saddle: (at hangers for insulated piping) B-Line #B3154 Elcen,
Grinnell, or approved equal.
ACCESS PANELS:
A. Access Panel for valves, trap primers and Water Hammer Arrestors: stainless
steel, size as required for easy access (Minimum size shall be 12” square, unless
noted otherwise), allen key latch, concealed hinge and flange face. Elmdor, Milcor
or approved equal.
PLUMBING EQUIPMENT:
A. The equipment described in this Section is to be furnished and installed complete
under this section of the specifications. See “Equipment Schedule” on drawings for
size, capacity and electrical characteristics.
B. All water heaters shall be listed in the State of California Energy Commission
Directory of Certified Water Heaters.
C. Water Heater, ITEM WH - 1 & 2
1. Electric water heater; glass-lined; A.O. Smith DSE Series, Rheem, or
approved equal.
/- 20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Plumbing
16400-7 96013
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Electric water heater shall be certiied by the Undetiriters’ Laboratories
w.
Model, storage capacities and operating characteristics shall be as
scheduled on the drawings.
Heater shall have 150 PSI working pressure.
Heater shall be equipped with extruded high density anode rod.
Electric heating elements shall be medium watt density with zinc plated
copper sheath.
Element shall be controlled by an individually mounted thermostat and high
temperature cutoff switch.
The outer jacket shall be of baked enamel finish and shall be provided with
full size control compartment with hinged front panels.
Heater tank shall have three (3) year limited warranty.
Submit certification that unit is C.E.C. approved.
D. Water Heater: Item WH-3:
1. Electric Instantaneous; Chronomite, Hot Aqua or approved equal, low
pressure type, thermostatically controlled instantaneous water heater,
replaceable filter at inlet connection. Set at maximum 100 degrees F
temperature.
E.
2. Water heater shall be certified by the Underwriters’ Laboratories (UL).
3. Electrical characteristics shall be as scheduled on the plans.
Water Heater, Item WH-4:
1. Gas-fired; glass-lined; A.O. Smith BT Series, Rheem or approved equal.
Provide ball valves on cold water piping to heater, thermometer on hot water
piping from heater and temperature and pressure relief valve; pipe relief
valve discharge, valved heater drain to service sink or as shown and metal
floor base. Controls shall be standard and burner shall be UL listed.
2. Gas-fired; water heater shall be certified by the American Gas Association
(AGA) .
20 October 1997 Plumbing Carlsbad City Library 16400-8 96013
3. Type, storage capacities and operating characteristics shall e as scheduled
on the drawings.
4. Submit certification that unit is C.E.C. approved.
F. Potable Water Expansion Tank, ET-I and ET-2:
1. Watts series DET, Raypack or approved equal pre-pressurized steel tank
with an expansion membrane of flexible butyl that prevents contact of water
with the air in the tank.
2.10 PLUMBING FIXTURES, GENERAL:
A. General: Provide plumbing fixtures and trim, fittings, other components, and
supports as specified in “Plumbing Fixtures” at the end of Part 2 of this Section.
1. Provide new fixtures, approved, free from flaws and blemishes with finished
surfaces clear, smooth and bright.
2. Fixtures shall be the product of one manufacturer. Fittings of the same type
shall be the product of one manufacturer.
3. Protect fixtures against use and damage during construction.
4. Unless otherwise specified, provide fittings fabricated of brass with a
polished chrome-plated finish.
5. Fixture supplies shall be Brasscraft heavy pattern, Wolvemive Brass, or
approved equal, loose key, angle type, Compression inlet by compression
outlet, stops with flexible risers.
6. Fixture traps above floor shall be chrome-plated cast brass “P” traps with
bronze nuts unless otherwise indicated. Trap arms shall be 17 gauge
chrome-plated brass.
7. Insulate the trap and supplies of lavatories where indicated on drawings as
handicap fixtures. See insulation specifications.
8. Do not install toilet seats, aerators or shower heads until final inspection or
before the complete water system has been flushed.
9. Individual loose key stops or, when so specified, screw driver stops, shall be
provided for all supplies.
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Plumbing
15400 - 9 96013
10. Unless stops are integral with valves or faucets and unless they are
otherwise approved by Architect, they shall be mounted under the fixture.
11. Supplies and waste piping through the wall shall be provided with polished
chrome-plated cast brass wall escutcheons.
B. Fixture Supports:
1. Water closet carriers shall have an additional faceplate and coupling when
used for wide pipe spaces. Provide tiling frame or setting gauge with
carriers for wall-hanging water closets.
2. Reinforcement: Provide steel plates attached to studs to secure wall hung
fixtures.
3. Provide fixture support having the features required to match each fixture.
C. Job Conditions:
1. Check millwork shop drawings. Confirm location and size of fixtures and
openings before rough-in and installation.
D. Available Manufacturers: Subject to approved equal compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but
are not limited to, the following:
1. China and Enameled Cast-Iron Fixtures:
a.
b.
::
American Standard, Inc.
Crane Plumbing/Fiat Products.
Eljer; A Household International Co.
Kohler Co.
2. Stainless Steel Fixtures:
Elkay Manufacturing Co.
Just Manufacturing Co.
3. Water Coolers and Drinking Fountains:
E:
C.
Elkay Manufacturing Co.
Halsey Taylor; A Household International Co.
Haws Drinking Faucet Co.
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Plumbing
15400 -10 96013
4. Toilet Seats:
a.
b.
C.
Beneke Div,; Sanderson Plumbing Products, Inc.
Church Seat Co.
Olsonite Corp.
5. Flushometers:
a.
b.
Sloan Valve Co.
Zurn Industries, Inc.; Flush Valve Operations.
6. Commercial/Industrial Cast-Brass Faucets:
a.
b.
::
American Standard, Inc.
Chicago Faucet Co.
Kohler Co.
Elkay
7. Pressure Balance Bath/Shower Faucets:
::
C.
Powers Process Controls; A Unit of Mark Controls Corp.
Speakman Co.
Symmons Industries, Inc.
8. Sensor-Operated Faucets and Devices:
it:
C.
Chicago
Sloan Valve Co.
Zurn Industries, Inc.
9. supports:
it
C.
Josam Co.
J.R. Smith Mfg. Co.
Zurn Industries, Inc.
10. Disposers:
a.
b.
In-Sink-Erator Div.; Emerson Electric Co.
ThermadorNVaste King; A Masco Co.
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library Plumbing
16400-11 96013
11. Water Filters:
a. Ametek.
b. Aqua-Pure.
C. Aqua-Master
12. Drains and Receptors:
;:
d.
Josam Co.
J.R. Smith Mfg. Co.
Zum Industries, inc.
2.11 PLUMBING FIXTURES:
A. WATER CLOSET - ITEM WC- 1 : (ULTRA LOW FLUSH)
I. Bowl: American Standard Afwall Aquameter #2257.103. Wall hung, direct-
fed siphon jet, vitreous china with elongated bowl, l-1/2” top spud. Flushes
on 1.5 gallons.
2. Flush Valve: Sloan Royal #l 1 l-Y0 flush valve. Exposed, chrome plated,
oscillating handle, integral screwdriver stop, vacuum breaker and seat
bumper. 1.6 gallon flush cycle maximum.
3. Seat: Olsonite #95-SS. Heavy duty, solid plastic, white, open front, comfort
curve seat less cover with self-sustaining hinge and check hinge.
4. Support: Zum Z-1203 Series or J.R. Smith series 200 fixture support for
siphon jet water closets.
B. WATER CLOSET - ITEM WC-1A : (ADA ACCESSIBLE):
1. Bowl: Same as WC-1 , except mount at 18” from finished floor to top of
toilet seat.
2. Flush Valve: Same as WC-1
3. Set flush valve height so as not to interfere with grab bar.
4. Seat: Same as WC -1.
5. Support: Same as WC-l, except with modifications required for high
mounting.
20 October 1997
Carisbad City Library
Plumbing
15400 - 12 96013
.f- C. WATER CLOSET - ITEM WC-2 :
1. Bowl: American Standard Madera Aquameter #2234.015. Floor mounted,
direct-fed siphon jet, vitreous china with elongated bowl, l-112” top spud.
Flushes on 1.5 gallons.
2. Flush Valve: Same as WC-l.
3. Seat: Same as WC -1.
D. WATER CLOSET - ITEM WC-3 : (ADA ACCESSIBLE):
1. Bowl: American Standard Madera, Aquameter #3043.102. Floor mounted,
direct-fed siphon jet, vitreous china with 18” high, elongated bowl. Flushes
on 1.5 gallons.
2. Flush Valve: Same as WC-l.
3. Set flush valve height so as not to interfere with grab bar.
4. Seat: Same as WC -1.
E. URINAL - ITEM UR-1:
1. Urinal: American Standard, Washbrook, #6501 .OlO, wall hung, vitreous
china, washout urinal, 314” top spud and wall hangers. 1 .O gallon per flush.
2. Flush Valve: Sloan Royal #Optima Model 186-1 ES-S, Electronic EL-l 50
sensor with electrical box, cover plate, non-hold open feature and exposed,
chrome plated flush valve, with integral screwdriver stop, vacuum breaker.
1 .O gallon flush cycle maximum. See Plan for transformer size and location.
3. Support: Zum ZR-1222 plate type system or J. R. Smith Fig. 635 or 637.
F. LAVATORY (HANDICAP) - ITEM L- 1 :
1. Lavatory: American Standard “Aqualyn” #0476..028 oval, countertop,
vitreous china, self rimming, size 20” x 17” with 4-inch center faucet holes.
2. Faucet: Sloan Optima ETF-80 electronic sensor operated with connection
box, solenoid valve, separate transformer, 4” centerset, chrome plated
brass, integral sensor throat plate, solenoid valve and filter, aerator outlet
with 2.0 g.p.m. flow rate. See Plan for transformer size and location.
r 20 October 1997
Carisbad City Library
Plumbing
15400 - 13 96013
3. Drain: American Standard #2411 .Ol5 perforated chrome plated brass grid
drain with 1-W tailpiece.
G. LAVATORY- ITEM L-2 :
1. Lavatory: American Standard ‘Lucerne” 0355.012, wall hung, vitreous china,
cencealed arm, size 20” x 18” with 4” center faucet holes.
2. Faucet: Same as L-l
3. Drain: Same as L-l
4. Support: Zum Z-1254 or J.R. Smith 723 Series concealed arm support. Bolt
to backing plate.
H. LAVATORY - ITEM L-3 : (ADA ACCESSIBLE)
1. Lavatory: American Standard “Lucerne” #0355.012, wall hung, vitreous
china, concealed arm, size 20” x 18” with 4” center faucet holes.
2. Faucet: Same as L-l.
3. Drain: Same as L-l.
4. Support: Zum Z-1254 or J.R. Smith 723 Series concealed arm support.
Bolt to backing plate.
5. Mount at ADA accessible height per architectural drawings.
I. SINK - ITEM S- 1 :
1. Sink: Elkay “Lustertone” LR-2219, 22” x 19’1M” x 7-l/2” deep, single
compartment, 18 gauge, Type 302 stainless steel self rim sink with ledge,
S-hole ounching and undercoating.
2. Faucet: Elkay Model LK4102F, deck mounted, single lever kitchen faucet
with swing spout, swivel aerator and 2.5 gpm flow control.
3. Strainer: Elkay #LK-99 stainless steel basket strainer with chrome plated
brass body and l-112” tailpiece.
F. SINK - ITEM S-2:
1. Sink: Elkay “Lustertone” #LR-2219, 22” x 19-112” x 7-W deep, single
compartment, 18 gauge, Type 302 stainless steel self rim sink with ledge,
20 October 1997
Carisbad City Library
Plumbing
15400 - 14 96013
,-
4-hole punching and undercoating. Fourth hole shall be on left side for
instant hot water dispenser.
2. Faucet: Same as S-l
3. Instant Hot Water Outlet: Elkay, the Hot Water Machine, Model LKH-180,
750 watt, 1209v/lph/60hz, cord with three prong plug, adjustable
thermostat, self closing dispenser faucet with gooseneck, and thermal
insulated housing. Locate tank on left side wall and dispenser in left side of
sink ledge.
4. Filter: Aqua-Pure #AP200 dual purpose water filter for taste, odor and dirt.
Maximum 2 gpm flow rate, 5 micron filter, 100°F maximum temperature.
(For service to cold water and instant hot water outlet only.)
5. Strainer: Same as S-l
6. Water filter, hot water machine, trap and waste, supplies, shall be installed
below sink to allow clearance for service.
7. Provide “T* branch with needle valve and l/4” copper tubing from filtered
water system to refrigerator.
K. MOP RECEPTOR - ITEM MR-l:
I. Sink: American Standard “Florwell”, #7741 .OOO acid resisting enameled
cast-iron, corner model with #7745.811 vinyl-coated rim guard.
2. Faucet: American Standard #8344.111, with 314” hose thread outlet,
vacuum breaker, pail hook and wall brace, integral screwdriver stops.
3. Drain: American Standard #7721.038 with strainer and socket for 3” outlet.
L. SHOWER - ITEM SH-1: (ADA ACCESSIBLE)
1. Shower: “Aquarius” Model G424884F ADA Accessible, glass fiber reinforced
polyester resin shower stall without ceiling dome with 2” brass drain in rear
of stall, ADA compliant grab bar, stainless steel curtain rod, with 3-year
limited warranty.
2. Shower Valve: Symmons Temptrol Package Unit #96-500-B24-X pressure
balanced, level handle, shower valve with shower head, hand held shower
and diverter valve and integral stops.
c- 20 October 1997
Carisbad City Library
Plumbing
1!5400-15 96013
3. Wheelchair Transfer Seat: “Aquarius” 195 PCS folding shower seat with
padded cushion seat. Mount on opposite wall from shower.
4. Provide all backing support required for ADA accessories.
M. ELECTRIC WATER COOLER - ITEM EC- 1:
1. Electric Water Cooler: Haws Model HWCF8-2 wall mounted handicap
drinking fountain with two fountains mounted to a common backing.
Receptors and back plate shall be 18 gauge, Type 304 stainless steel with
Satin finish. Each fountain shall be independent of the other and shall have
handicap push bar self closing operator. Each fountain shall have its own
waste and water supply. Each water supply shall have an angle stop.
2. Cooling Unit: Haws cooling unit with stainless steel ventilating grille,
installed below fountains. Cooling unit shall be tube type. Minimum cooling
capacity to be 8 gph from 80°F inlet water temperature to 50°F outlet water
temperature in 90°F ambient. Unit shall be l/5 HP, 120V/single
phase/60Hz.
3. Mounting Frame: Unit shall be complete with steel mounting frame.
N. FLOOR DRAIN - ITEM FD- 1:
1. Floor Drain: Zum ZN-415B or J.R. Smith #2005-A cast iron body, flashing
clamp, with 5” diameter nickel bronze adjustable strainer.
2. Provide trap primer connection where noted on plans.
3. Trap: Cast iron.
0. FLOOR SINK - ITEM FS-I:
1. Floor Sink: Zum #ZN-P1901-K-2, or J.R. Smith #315OY-8,12-l/2” x 12-l/2”
nickel bronze rim and l/2 grate by 3” deep cast iron flanged receptor with
acid resistant coated interior, flashing clamp and aluminum dome bottom
strainer.
2. Provide trap primer connection where noted on plans.
3. Trap: Cast-iron.
20 October 1997
Carisbad City Library
Plumbing
16400 - 16 96013
P. FLOOR SINK - ITEM FS - 2:
:-
1. Floor Sink: Zum #ZN-1910-K-2 or J.R. Smith #3100-12, 8-l/2” square
nickel bronze rim and l/2 grate by 6” deep cast iron flanged receptor with
acid resistant coated interior and aluminum dome bottom strainer.
2. Provide trap primer connection where indicated.
3. Trap: Cast iron.
cl. DECK DRAIN - ITEM DD-1
1. Deck Drain: J.R. Smith 162OT, 6 inch diameter, 1-314“ high dome strainer,
cast iron body with bronze flashing and 4” deep body.
R. ROOF DRAIN - ITEM RD- 1:
1. Roof Drain: Zum #Z-121-C or J.R. Smith #131 O-C, 12” diameter, cast iron
body roof drain with flashing clamp, gravel stop, polyethylene dome, and
underdeck clamp.
S. ROOF DRAIN - ITEM RD - 2:
1. Roof Drain: Zurn #Z-125-C or J.R. Smith #1330, 8-l/2” diameter cast iron
body roof drain with flashing clamp, gravel stop, polyethylene dome and
underdeck clamp.
T. OVERFLOW DRAIN - ITEM ORD - 1:
1. Drain: Zum #Z-121-89-C or J.R. Smith #1310-C water dam, 12” diameter
cast-iron roof drain with polyethylene dome, underdeck clamp and 2” high
water dam.
U. OVERFLOW DRAIN - ITEM ORD - 2:
1. Drain Zum #Z-125-89-C or J.R. Smith #1330-C water dam, 8-l/2” diameter
cast-iron roof drain with polyethylene dome, underdeck clamp and 2” high
water dam.
V. HOSE BIBB - ITEM HB- 1:
1. Hose Bibb: Acorn #8121, wall type hose bibb, cast brass, cartridge
operated, lockshield bonnet and removable key handle, integral vacuum
breaker. Finish shall be rough chrome plated.
.f--- 20 October 1997
Carisbad City Library
Plumbing
16400-17 96013
W. HOSE BIBB - ITEM HB - 2:
1. Hose Bibb: Same as HB-1 with brass finish.
X. HOSE BIBB - ITEM HB - 3:
1. Hese Bibb: Acorn #8151, Neptune stainless steel recessed hose box with
wall flange for single temperature. Box shall be 18 gage type 304 stainless
steel with satin finish exterior. Flange shall be 16 gage stainless steel and
be polished to a.satin finish. Valve shall be cartridge-operated type with
vandal-resistant lockshield, removable loose key wheel handle and
screwdriver operated stop. Hose attachment outlet shall have vacuum
breaker. Door shall be 16 gage satin finish with removable hinge and
cylinder lock.
Y. EMERGENCY SHOWER AND EYEWASH - ITEM EES - 1:
1. Emergency Shower: HAWS, Model 8200 combination shower and free
standing eyewash. Emergency drench shower shall be with 1” stay-open
ball valve and ABS plastic shower head. Eyewash shall be plastic wrap-
around spray with plastic l/2” hand or foot operated stay-open valve.
Complete unit shall be mounted on l-1/4” painted, galvanized pipe with
base flange. Anchor base flange to concrete with hole size x 3” long
concrete expansion bolts and brace unit to wall 6” below shower head
elbow.
PART 3 EXECUTION m
3.1 EXAMINATION:
A. Verify all dimensions by field measurements. Verify that all drainage piping and
specialties may be installed in accordance with pertinent codes and regulations, the
original design, and the referenced standards.
B. Verify all existing grades, inverts, utilities, obstacles, and topographical conditions
prior to installations.
C. Examine rough-in requirements for roof drain connections to verify actual locations
of piping connections prior to installation.
D. Examine walls, floors, roof, and plumbing chases for suitable conditions where
piping and specialties are to be installed.
E. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
20 October 1997
Carisbad City Library
Plumbing
15400-18 96013
#- 3.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
GENERAL PIPING INSTALLATION:
General Locations and Arrangements: Drawings (plans, schematics, and diagrams)
indicate the general location and arrangement of the piping systems. The location
and arrangement of the piping layout takes into consideration pipe sizing and friction
loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. So far as practical,
install piping as indicated.
All pipe and fittings shall be carefully cleaned before installation.
All exposed piping shall be installed to maintain headroom and keep passageways
and openings clear.
Conceal all pipe installations in walls, pipe chases, utility spaces, above ceilings and
below grade or floors unless indicated to be exposed to view.
Install piping tight to slabs, beams, joists, columns, walls, and other permanent
elements of the building. Provide space to permit insulation applications, with l-
inch clearance outside the insulation. Allow sufficient space above removable
ceiling panels to allow for panel removal.
Install all piping at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are not
permitted unless expressly indicated.
Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying full
insulation and servicing of valves. Support groups of pipes from trapeze hanger
system where practical.
Install piping free of sags or bends and with ample space between piping to permit
insulation applications.
Install drains at low points in mains, risers, and branch lines consisting of a tee
fitting, 3/4-inch ball valve, and short 3/4-inch threaded nipple and cap.
Protect all openings in piping at all times. Do not permit any foreign materials of any
kind to be put into the system. Any system which has been found to contain foreign
material shall have that portion of the system removed and replaced with new
material to guarantee proper system flow, at no additional cost to the owner.
Bending or forcing of pipe will not be allowed. Use fittings for all offsets, changes
in direction and branch piping.
Proper provision shall be made for expansion and contraction by means of fittings,
anchors and supports. Anchor piping to ensure proper direction of expansion and
contraction. Install expansion loops and joints as indicated on the Drawings.
#-- 20 October 1997 I Plumbing
Carisbad City Library 15400 - 19 96013
M.
N.
0.
P.
Q.
R.
S.
T.
U.
V.
W.
Street elbows, bushings and long screw ftiings will not be allowed.
All piping penetrating any component of the building framing, including wall studs
and blocking, shall have a minimum clearance of l/4” all around the pipe.
Exception, floor or foundation wall sleeves
All piping shall be isolated from other piping, studs, ducts, any part of the building,
framing, conduit, etc., with l-inch strips of hair felt or pipe isolators.
The ends of threaded steel pipe shall be reamed out full-size with a long tapered
reamer so as to be partially bell-mouthed and perfectly smooth.
Install water shutoff valve at service entrance outside building. When located inside
building, install valve with pressure gauge and test tee unless otherwise indicated
on the drawings.
Install water hammer arrestors at all flush valves, foot valves, dish and clothes
washers and quick closing valves per PDI-Wli-201 standards, and as indicated on
drawings.
Unions shall be installed after each screw-type valve, connections for all equipment,
appliances, and as required for erection and maintenance. No unions shall be installed in concealed locations. Install isolation unions on all connections between
dissimilar metals (galvanized steel, black steel, or cast iron to copper).
No holes for pipe or equipment will be allowed in any structural member without
written consent of the Architect. Where pipes are to pass through or interfere with
any member, or where notching, boring or cutting of the structure is necessary, the
work shall be done by the General Contractor as directed.
Any minor changes in work, which has not been installed, shall be made by the
Contractor without additional compensation, except changes which are caused by
architectural revisions which increase or decrease the size of the materials specified
or indicated on the drawings. The Contractor shall submit an estimate of the cost
or credit for such changes he does not consider being minor in nature and shall
proceed only upon the written authorization of the Architect.
Flush out all water mains, sanitary, storm and condensate drains with water so as to obtain free flow. Remove all obstructions and defects discovered. Remove and
replace pipe already laid and found to be defective or which has had grade or joints
disturbed at no additional cost.
Buried utility warning tape shall be located I2 inches below finished surface of all
exterior utilities.
20 October 1997 Plumbing
Carisbad City Library 16400-20 96013
X. Copper Pipe Encasement or Wrap:
3.3
f-
1. Buried copper water piping within the building shall be wrapped or encased
by plastic. The encasement shall be unbroken in length and extend to
above the floor slab. Where ftiings occur or ends of pipe terminate into floor
drain trap primer the fitting or end shall be tape wrapped with 10 MIL x 2”
wide polyethylene tape overlapping the encasement and to a distance 6”
from the fitting.
2. Where joints occur in the encasement, the joints shall be tape wrapped with
10 MIL x 2 inch wide polyethylene tape.
3. Short lengths of buried copper water piping within the building may be
wrapped with 10 MIL x 2” wide polyethylene tape. The tape shall be
wrapped with a 1” overlap, and extend to above the floor slab.
Y. Piping in Concrete:
1. Any pipe which will come in direct contact with poured in place concrete
where sleeves cannot be used shall be wrapped with a l/8” thick x 6” wide
polystyrene with a 3” overlap. The wrap shall be installed in two directions,
and the ends shall be sealed with 10 MIL x 2” wide polyethylene tape.
SLEEVES:
A. Sleeves through foundation walls shall be standard weight black steel pipe, flush
with walls and two pipe sizes larger than the pipe passing through. Sleeves shall
be caulked with oakum to within one inch of the wall lines and then completely filled
with bitumastic compound. Sleeve diameter for piping through masonry wall above
grade or through floors shall be #lO gauge galvanized sheet steel, and shall extend completely through the walls or floor, finishing flush on both sides. Sleeves shall be
1 inch larger than the pipe with oakum caulking to make opening airtight. Sleeves
through fire walls or floors shall be packed with fireproof material having the same
rating as wall or floor. Provide and install polished chromium plated brass floor
ceiling or wall escutcheons for all pipes which are exposed in finished portions of
the buildings.
3.4 SANITARY SEWER, STORM DRAIN, WASTE AND VENT PIPING
A. Install No-Hub and Bell end cast iron piping per No-Hub Cast-Iron Soil Pipe Institute
Pamphlet #IO0 and the IAMPC IS-6.
B. Install copper DWV piping per IAPMO IS-3
C. Install PVC DWV piping per IAPMO I S-l and 1 S-9.
/c 20 October 1997 , Plumbing Carisbad City Library 15400 - 21 96013
3.5
D. Lay underground piping beginning at low point of systems, true to grades and
alignment indicated with unbroken continuity of invert. Place bell ends of piping
facing upstream. install required gaskets in accordance with manufacturer’s
recommendations for use of lubricants, cements, and other special installation
requirements. Maintain swab or drag in line and pull past each joint as it is
completed.
E. Sanitary sewers, storm drains, waste lines and vent lines shall be installed so as to provide a smooth and uniform invert. Water shall not be allowed in the trenches
while the sewer lines are being laid. Dirt, cement, or any other superfiuous material
shall be carefully removed from piping as the work progresses. Constant inspection
shall be made of pipe and fittings during and after all installation for possible
fractures and failures caused by installation. Backfill so as not to disturb pipe or
joints.
F. Make changes in direction for sanitary sewer, storm drain, waste and vent piping using appropriate 45degree wyes, half-wyes, or short or long sweep quarter, sixth,
eighth, or sixteenth bends. Sanitary tees or quarter bends may be used on vertical
stacks of drainage lines where the change in direction of flow is from horizontal to
vertical. No change in direction of flow greater than 90 degrees shall be made.
Where different sizes of drainage pipes and fittings are connected, use standard
increasers and reducers of proper size. Reduction of the size of drainage piping in
the direction of flow is prohibited.
3.6
CONDENSATE DRAIN PIPING:
A. For condensate piping, provide trap, vent and plugged cleanout tee at each
equipment connection.
GAS PIPING
A. Gas pipe installation shall conform to the requirements of NFPA 54 (National Fuel
Gas Code).
B. Make gas pipe reductions in pipe sizes using eccentric reducer ftiings installed with
the level side down.
C. Gas Drips and Sediment Traps: Install a drip leg at points where condensate may
collect, at the outlet of the gas meter, and at equipment connections in a location
readily accessible to the permit cleaning and emptying.
1. Construct drips and sediment traps using a tee fitting with the bottom outlet
plugged or capped. Use a minimum of 3 pipe diameters in length for the
drip leg. Use same size pipe for drip leg as the connect pipe.
D. Connect gas branch outlet pipes to the top or sides of horizontal gas lines.
Connections to the bottom of horizontal gas lines are not allowed.
20 October 1997 Plumbing
Carlsbad City Library 16400 -22 96013
C E. Install unions in gas pipes 2 inches and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final
connections, each piece of equipment and elsewhere as indicated. Unions are not
required on flanged devices. Unions shall not be concealed.
F. Buried Coated Steel Piping:
1. Pipe joints shall be field coated with high density polyethylene heat shrink
sleeves internally coated with blended adhesive and having the same
manufacturer as the pipe coating system.
2. Pipe ftiings shall be field coated with double wrapped 2” wide x 10 Mil. thick
polyethylene tape. Tape wrap shall have 1” overlap and second wrap shall
be in the opposite direction as the first.
G. Installation of polyethylene (PE) gas piping shall be per IAMPO IS-12 and shall be
by qualified installers. Qualified installers shall be certified by the manufacturer’s
requirements and be certified with the regulations of the Department of
Transportation, Materials Transportation Bureau, contained in the Code of Federal
Regulations Title 49, Part 192. Section 192.285 of these regulations details the
procedure to be used to qualify persons to join polyethylene pipe.
H. Riser to gas meter, pressure regulators and building risers shall be plastic covered
steel with approved corrosion-resisting wrapping and shall be encased in concrete
at or near grade in an approved manner.
I. Plastic gas pipe risers shall be special manufactured steel to plastic pipe material
installed in accordance with manufacturers requirements.
J. Exterior steel gas piping exposed to the elements such as piping on the roof shall be cleaned and wire brushed by contractor for painting under Division 9.
3.7 JOINING PIPES AND FITTINGS:
A. Copper Tubing: Solder joints in accordance with the procedures specified in ANSI
B9.1, AWS Solder Manual, and IAMPO 1 S-3 and 1 S-21.
B. Brazed Joints: Comply with the procedures contained in the Brazing Manual and
IAPMO 1 S-3 and 1 S-21.
1. CAUTION: Remove stems, seats and packing of valves and accessible
internal parts of piping specialties before soldering and brazing.
2. Fill the tubing and fittings during soldering and brazing with an inert gas
(nitrogen or carbon dioxide) to prevent formation of scale.
3. Heat joints to proper and uniform temperature.
,/-- 20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Plumbing
15400 - 23 96013
.3.8
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
A.
B.
C.
Cast-Iron Soil Pipe: Make compression joints and hubless joints in accordance with
the recommendations in the CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook,
Volume I.
Threaded Joints: Conform to ASME B1.20.1, tapered pipe threads for field-cut
threads. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
1. Note the internal length of threads in ftiings or valve ends and proximity of
internal seat or wall to determine how far pipe should be threaded into joint.
2.
3.
Align threads at point of assembly.
Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to the external pipe threads
(except where dry seal threading is specified).
4. Assemble joint wrench-tight. Wrench on valve shall be on the valve end into which the pipe is being threaded.
a. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe with corroded or damaged
threads. If a weld opens during cutting or threading operations, that
portion of pipe shall not be used.
Flanged Joints: Align flange surfaces parallel. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt
tightening to make initial contact of flanges and gaskets as flat and parallel as
possible. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten bolts gradually and
uniformly with a torque wrench.
Welded Joints: Comply with the requirements in ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code, Section IX.
PVC DWV Pipe: Joining and installation of PVC drainage pipe and fittings shall
conform to ASTM D2665.
INSTALLATION OF PIPING SPECIALTIES:
Install backwater valves in piping as indicated and as required by the plumbing
code. For interior installation, provide cleanout cover flush to floor and centered
over backwater valve cover. Cleanout cover shall be of adequate size to remove
valve cover for service.
Install expansion joints on vertical risers as indicated and as required by the
plumbing code.
Cleanouts: Install in piping as indicated.
1. Install as required by plumbing code.
20 October 1997 Plumbing
Carlsbad City Library 15400 -24 96013
.-
.---
D.
E.
F.
G.
3.9
A.
B.
C.
3.10
A.
2.
3.
Install at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees.
Install at minimum intervals of 50’ for piping 3” and smaller and 100 for
piping larger than 3”.
4.
5.
Install at base of each vertical soil, waste or storm drain stack.
Cleanouts shall be caulked into or clamped to pipe. Install under counter
tops where they occur in walls to avoid exposed condition. Cleanouts shall
be accessible in all cases and shall be brought to surface on “yll branches.
6. Cleanout Covers: Install floor and wall cleanout covers for concealed piping,
types as indicated.
Flashing Flanges: Install flashing flange and clamping device with each stack,
cleanout, and drain passing through waterproof membranes.
Vent Flashing Sleeves: Install on stacks passing through roof and secure over
stack flashing in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
Install trap primers with piping pitched towards drain trap with a minimum of l/8 inch
per foot (1 percent). Adjust trap primer for proper flow.
Install pressure-regulating valves with inlet and outlet shutoff valves. Install
pressure gauge on valve outlet or as shown on the drawings.
VALVE INSTALLATIONS:
Install valves in accessible locations and protected from physical damage. Tag
valves with a metal tag attached with a metal chain indicating the piping systems controlled by valve.
Install a gas cock upstream of each gas pressure regulator. Where two gas
pressure regulators are installed in series in a single gas line, a manual valve is not
required at the second regulator.
Install pressure relief or pressure limiting devices so they can be readily operated
to determine if the valve is free, so they can be tested to determine the pressure at
which they will operate and so they can be examined for leakage when in the closed
position.
INSULATION INSTALLATION:
Install insulation after piping has been installed, tested, and accepted and after
pipes are in a clean, dry condition.
20 October 1997 Plumbing
Carlsbad City Library 15400 - 25 96013
B.
C.
D.
3.11
A.
B.
C.
3.12
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
All joints in insulation shall be butted firmly together and sealed with jacket lap strip
or insulation manufacturers sealant.
Apply insulation to all fittings and valve bodies. Flanges and unions shall not be
covered.
Where the insulation supports the weight of the pipe, install an insert of rigid “Kaylo”, 12 inches long, between the pipe and hanger with galvanized saddle.
CONNECTIONS:
Sanitary Sewer, Waste and Vent Piping Runouts to Fixtures: Provide piping runouts
to plumbing fixtures and drains, with approved trap, of sizes indicated, but in no
case smaller than that required by the plumbing code.
Water Piping Runouts to Fixtures: Provide hot and cold water piping runouts to
fixtures of sizes indicated, but in no case smaller than that. required by plumbing
code.
Mechanical Equipment Connections: Connect hot and cold water piping systems
to mechanical equipment as indicated. Provide shutoff valve and union for each
connection. Provide drain valve on drain connection. For connections 2-l/2 inches
and larger, use flanges instead of unions.
PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS:
Installation shall comply with the currently accepted edition of the U.P.C.
Piping shall be firmly held in place by hangers, supports and pipe rests, located
adjacent to fitting at each offset or change of direction, at the ends of branches over
5’ long, at base of riser pipes and along piping where necessary to prevent sags,
bends or vibration.
All hangers and supports shall be of design which will support weight of pipe, fluid
and insulation and prevent sagging.
Pipe clamps shall be heavy gauge iron, factory fabricated to fit against supporting
surface when installed. Makeshift devices will not be acceptable. Plumbing tape
is m allowed.
Equipment shall not bear the support of piping.
Provide isolation at all hangers and supports for water piping. Hanger shall be sized
for installation of isolator.
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library Plumbing
15400 - 26 96013
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
0.
P.
All insulated piping shall have hangers or supports sized for insulation,
Seismically brace all piping and equipment as specified in Section 15050.
Hangers supported by concrete structure shall be attached by cast-iron
manufactured concrete inserts installed at the time concrete is poured. Each insert
shall be provided with through rods lapped over structural reinforcing.
Hangers supported by structural steel shapes shall be attached by cast-iron clamps
designed for use on the specific steel shape and equipped with retainers.
All hangers shall be attached to hanger rod by means of adjustable swivel,
turnbuckle or double nut arrangement to allow height adjustment.
Vertical piping shall be suitably supported from the building structure where required
by means of malleable iron or steel pipe clamps of ample size, either bolted or
welded to the pipe and supported at the floor slab. Supports shall also act as
anchors to allow for expansion and contraction of the piping. Provide rubber
isolators for clamps where required for elimination of vibration and sound
transmission to the structure. Vertical “no-hub” components shall be secured at
each joint and at each floor.
Miscellaneous Supports: Floor and wall brackets, etc., shall be provided where
required in accordance with the best standard practice of the trade. Provide
structural members between joists or beams to support piping where floor or roof
deck cannot support piping. Structural member size and attachment shall be
calculated by a structural engineer. In the event additional structural steel is
required to transmit loads to main structure, same shall be provided at no additional
cost to the Owner.
Provide floor support in equipment rooms at all pipe drops 6 inches and larger and
at all pipe drops that are greater than 10 feet in length (center-line to center- line).
1. Provide pipe anchors using American Standard channels or American
Standard I-Beam structural members. Piping shall be welded to structural
beams then beams shall be securely anchored to surrounding concrete
structure. Diagonal structural members may be required.
Prime coat steel hangers and supports exposed to weather.
Place a hanger within one foot of each horizontal elbow.
20 October 1997 Plumbing
Carlsbad City Library 15400 - 27 96013
Q. Horizontal Cast-Iron Piping:
1. Supports shall maintain alignment and prevent sagging and shall be placed
within eighteen (18) inches of the hub or joint. “No-Hub” or “Compression”
gasket joints shall be supported. at least at every other joint. When the
developed length between supports exceeds four (4) feet, they shall be
provided at each joint.
2. Supports shall also be provided at each horizontal branch connection.
Supports shall be placed on or immediately adjacent to the coupling.
Suspended lines shall be braced to prevent horizontal movement as
specified in Section 15050.
3. Support multiple No-Hub fittings with ‘V 10 gauge galvanized steel,
extending 3-inches beyond the last No-Hub band. Strap to pipe with
stainless steel bands at 4l-O” minimum intervals and support to structure as
scheduled for standard length pipe.
4.
5.
Hanger rod sizes shall be as follows:
PiDe Pod Diameter
l-l 12 inch to 2 inch Pipe 318 inch
2-l/2 inch to 3 inch Pipe l/2 inch
4 inch to 5 inch Pipe 518 inch
6 inch to 8 inch Pipe 718 inch
Trap arms and similar branches shall be firmly secured against movement
in any direction. Closet bends shall be stabilized by firmly clamping and
blocking. Where vertical closet stubs are used, they shall be completely
stabilized against all horizontal movement.
R. Horizontal Copper Tubing and Steel Piping:
1. Hanger spacing shall be as follows:
PiDe t&XXI
112 inch 5 feet-0 inch
314 inch 5 feet-0 inch
1 inch 6 feet-0 inch
I-114 inch 7 feet-0 inch
l-1/2 inch - 2 inch 8 feet-0 inch
2-l/2 inch & larger IO feet-0 inch
Steel.
6 feet-0 inch
8 feet-0 inch
8 feet-0 inch
10 feet-0 inch
10 feet-0 inch
10 feet-0 inch
20 October 1997 Plumbing
Carlsbad City Library 16400 - 28 96013
‘-
S.
3.13
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
2. Rod diameters shall be as follows:
PiDe Rod Diameter
314 inch to 2 inch 318 inch
2-l/2 inch to 3 inch l/2 inch
4 inch to 5 inch 518 inch
Vertical Piping:
1. Hanger spacing shall be:
Material Maximum Soacing
Copper, Steel, At Each Floor and as listed
Cast-iron For horizontal piping.
FIXTURE INSTALLATION:
All plumbing fixtures and trim shall be bedded and caulked along joint at walls,
counter tops, and other intersecting surfaces with Polyseam Seal white adhesive
caulking.
Install plumbing fixtures level and plumb in accordance with the fixture
manufacturer’s written installation instructions, roughing-in drawings and referenced
standards.
Install floor-mounted, floor-outlet water closets with closet flanges and gasket seals.
Install floor-mounted, back-outlet water closets with ftiings and gasket seals.
Install wall-hanging, back-outlet water closets with support manufacturer’s tilting
frame or setting gauge. Anchor front plate and rear ear to floor.
Install wall-hanging, back-outlet urinals with gasket seals.
Fasten wall-hanging plumbing fixtures securely to supports attached to building
substrate when supports are specified or to building wall construction where no
support is indicated.
Fastening of floor-mounted fixtures and special fixtures having holes for securing
fixture to wall construction shall be to the reinforcement built into walls.
Fasten wall-mounted fittings to reinforcement built into walls.
Fasten counter-mounted fittings to reinforcement built into walls.
I- 20 October 1997 Plumbing
Carlsbad City Library 16400 - 29 96013
K.
L.
M.
N.
0.
P.
Q.
R.
S.
Secure supplies behind wall or within wall pipe space, providing rigid installation.
Install stop valve in an accessible location in each water supply to each fixture.
Install trap on fixture outlet except for fixtures having integral trap.
Install escutcheons at each wall, floor, and ceiling penetration in exposed finished
locations and within cabinets and millwork. Use deep pattern escutcheons where
required to conceal protruding pipe fittings.
Adjust water pressure at drinking fountains, electric water coolers, faucets, shower
valves and flushometers having controls to provide proper flow and stream.
Replace washers of leaking or dripping faucets and stops.
Clean fixtures, fittings and spout and drain strainers with manufacturer’s
recommended cleaning methods and materials.
Review the data in Operating and Maintenance Manuals. Refer to Division 1
Section “Project Closeout.”
Fixtures with hangers or supporting arms shall have hangers or arms securely
mounted on a l/4 inch thick x 6 inch wide steel wall plate which shall extend at least
one stud beyond the first and last fixture mounting points.
1. Provide backing for each plumbing fixture requiring same at the time
roughing-in is done.
2. Wall plates shall be recessed flush with studs and shall be securely attached
to each stud crossed.
3. In steel stud construction, a l-112 inch x 18 inch long furring channel shall
be attached to each notched stud with fillet welds which are 1 inch long on
6 inch centers front and back. Plates shall be continuous fillet welded at both
top and bottom to each furring channel.
4. In wood frame construction, the wall plate shall be anchored to each stud
with (2) two 3/8” x 3” L. Lag screws.
5. Concealed arm assemblies shall be attached to plates by four 3/8 inch x l-
l/4 inch steel bolts and nuts.
6. Hangers and exposed arms shall be attached to plates by 5/16 inch
minimum full thread steel studs and jamb nuts.
20 October 1997 Plumbing
Carlsbad City Library 15400 -30 96013
7. Plates shall be drilled and tapped at the time of fixture installation.
T. Where drains are specified with clamping collars, the water proofing membrane and
flashing shall be carefully cut to fit the drain, then anchored between drain and collar
with rustproof bolts.
U. Traps above floor shall be cast brass “P” traps with bronze nuts, unless otherwise
indicated.
V. Install stainless steel mounting ring as required for all flat rim sinks and lavatories
installed in counter tops.
W. Instructions for Installation of Fixtures for the Use of the Handicapped: All fixtures
designated for handicapped use shall be in compliance with current applicable
codes.
1. Water Closets: Installed height shall be a minimum of 17 inches and a
maximum of 19 inches measured to the top of the toilet seat. Flush controls
shall be operable by an oscillating handle with a maximum operating force
of 5 pounds. The handle shall be located so it is operable without requiring
excessive body movement.
2. Urinals: The elongated rim on urinals shall project a minimum of 14 inches
from the wall and the height of the rim shall be at a maximum of 17 inches
above the floor. Hand operated controls shall be mounted no more than 44
inches above the floor. .
3. Lavatories: Lavatories shall be mounted with a clearance of at least 29
inches from the floor to the bottom of the apron with knee clearance under
the front lip extending a minimum of 30 inches in width with 8 inches
minimum depth at the top. Toe clearance shall be the same width and a
minimum of 17 inches deep from the front of the lavatory. Hot water and
drain pipes under lavatories shall be insulated. There shall be no sharp or
abrasive surfaces under lavatories. Lever-operated faucet controls shall be
operable with one hand and shall not require tight grasping, pinching or
twisting of the wrist. The force required to activate controls shall be no
greater than 5 pounds. Self-closing valves are allowed if the faucet remains
open for at least 10 seconds.
4. Drinking Fountains: The drinking fountain shall be a minimum of 18 inches
in depth and shall provide clear and unobstructed space not less than 27
inches in height and 8 inches in depth, the depth measurements being taken
from the front edge of the fountain. The bubbler shall be activated by a
hand-operated lever type control located within 6 inches of the front of the
fountain. The bubbler outlet orifice shall be located within 6 inches of the
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Plumbing
16400 - 31 96013
3.14
A.
B.
3.15
A.
B.
C.
3.16
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
front of the drinking fountain and shall be within 36 inches of the floor. The
water stream from the bubbler shall be substantially parallel to the front
edge of the drinking fountain.
PROTECTION:
Provide protective covering for installed fixtures and fittings.
Do not allow use of foctures for temporary facilities, except when approved in writing
by the Owner.
INSTALLATION OF ROOF DRAINS:
Install roof drains at low points of roof areas in accordance with the roof membrane
manufacturer’s installation instructions.
Install drain flashing collar or flange so that no leakage occurs between roof drain
and adjoining roofing. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes, where
penetrated.
Position roof drains so that they are accessible and easy to maintain.
INSTALLATION OF FLOOR DRAINS:
Install floor drains in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions and in
locations indicated.
Install floor drains-at low points of surface areas to be drained, or as indicated. Set
tops of drains flush with finished floor.
Set drain elevation depressed below finished slab elevation as listed below to
provide proper slope to drain:
DFPRESSION DIUS OF AREA DRAINED
l/2” 5’-0”
314” 1 o’-0”
1 ,I 15’-0”
l-l 14” 20’-0”
l-1/2” 25’-0”
Trap all drains connected to the sanitary sewer.
Install drain flashing collar or flange so that no leakage occurs between drain and
adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes, where penetrated.
20 October 1997 Plumbing
Carlsbad Clty Library 16400-32 96013
.-
.-
F. Position drains so that they are accessible and easy to maintain.
3.17 REQUIREMENTS FOR FINAL INSPECTION:
A. The following items shall be completed prior to final inspections.
B. Thoroughly clean all parts of the piping, valves and equipment. Exposed parts
which are to be painted shall be thoroughly cleaned of cement, plaster, oil and
grease spots. Such surfaces shall be carefully wiped and all cracks and wmers
scraped out.
C. Exposed metal work shall be carefully brushed down with steel brushes to remove
rust and other spots and shall be left smooth and clean. Trap elements shall be
removed during cleaning and flushing period, after which they shall be replaced and
adjusted.
D. Electrical device covers shall not be installed until finish coat of paint is completed.
Device handles and receptacles shall be covered and/or protected during the
painting operation to preserve the original factory bright new finish.
E. All potable water lines shall be sterilized with chlorine. The chlorine residual
concentration shall indicate not less than 50 parts per million and shall be retained
for a period of not less than twenty-four (24) hours. Repeat procedure if residual
concentration has decreased below 25 PPM. After test is in compliance with
specification, flush system until residual is not more than 0.5 PPM. All work and
certification of performance must be done by qualified personnel. Submit
certification to Architect.
NOTE: Install Tee’s and ball valves at locations required to facilitate sterilization.
3.18 TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS:
A. No piping work, fixtures, or equipment shall be concealed or covered until inspected
by the Architect/Owner’s Representative, who shall be notified when the work is
leak-tight and ready for inspection. All work shall be completely installed and tested
as required by local code, this section and the State Ordinances and State Safety
Orders. All tests shall be repeated as required by those making the inspection.
B. All domestic water piping, shall be flushed out, tested at 150 psi and shall be left
under pressure of supply main or a minimum of 50 psi for the balance of the
construction period. No air testing is allowed. Tests are to be applied for a
minimum period of one hour and until tests are complete. Final pressures at the
end of test period shall be not more nor less than that caused by expansion or
contraction of the test medium due to temperature changes.
r 20 October 1997 Plumbing
Carlsbad City Library 15400 - 33 96013
C.
D.
E.
3.19
A.
B.
3.20 OPERATING INSTRUCTION AND SERVICE MANUAL:
A. The Contractor shall carefully prepare an operating instruction and service manual
for the entire system including all equipment, excepting Owner-furnished equipment.
The manual shall be submitted for review to the Architect at least thirty (30) days
prior to completion of the work. Failure to submit manual will delay final inspection
and acceptance of the work. Contents shall be bound in a durable loose-leaf
binder, complete with index.
B.
Soil, waste, vent, condensate and storm drain piping within the building shall be
tested with a minimum of 10 foot head at each joint for a minimum of three hours
with no loss in head.
Above Grade Fuel Gas Steel Piping Tests: Blow all piping with compressed air and
test at 10 psig for one hour. For welded piping and for piping carrying gas at
pressures-in excess of 14 inches water column pressure, the test pressure shall be . . . 60 psig and held for one hour. Soao test all rornts In . . addrt Ion to the aauge test,
Plumbing fixtures shall be filled with water and checked for leaks and retarded
drainage flow. Faucet aerators and shower heads shall be removed and cleaned
thoroughly.
GUARANTEE:
All work under this section shall be guaranteed in writing in accordance with the
“Mechanical General Provisions,” Section 15050.
All material, except as otherwise noted, shall be new, free from defect and of the
quality and rating shown or specified.
The following items shall be included in the manual. This list may not be complete
and is to be used as a guide:
1. Part numbers of all replaceable items.
2. Manufacturer’s cuts and rating tables, including brochures on all fixtures,
equipment and materials installed.
3. Oiling, lubrication and greasing instructions including time schedule.
4. Test data on all equipment.
5. Serial numbers of all principal pieces of equipment,
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Plumbing
15400-34 96013
/c 6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Manufacturers’, suppliers’ and subcontractors’ names, addresses and phone
numbers.
Valve chart indicating location on job.
Written guarantee.
Prints of complete as-built drawings, signed by the Contractor.
Reviewed submittal data and shop drawings in binder.
Test and balance data, copies of building inspections check lists signed off
by the Inspector.
Potable water piping sterilization certificate.
Pipe and equipment identification schedule.
C. After review of the manual by the Engineer, two copies of each manual shall be
furnished for distribution.
*** END OF SECTION ***
20 October 1997 Plumbing
Carlsbad City Library 15400 -35 96013
r SECTION 15800
HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING
1.1 SUMMARY:
A. The responsibilities of the Contractor shall include the following systems and
equipment complete, and any additional work shown on the drawings or hereinafter
specified.
Air Handling Units
Variable Air Volume Terminals
Duct Silencers
Chillers
Reheat Coils
Cooling Tower
Computer Room A.C. Unit
Hot Water Boiler
Air Filters
Circulation Pumps
Piping
Return Air Fan
Exhaust Fans
Ductwork
Duct and Pipe Insulation
Vibration Isolation
Variable Frequency Drives
Motors, Drives, Guards, and Starters
Air Distribution
Automatic Temperature Control
Refrigerant Leak Detection
Self-Contained Breathing Apparatus
Test and Balance
Water Treatment
8. The Contractor shall provide all sheet metal work as shown on the drawings or as
required for the mechanical systems. Sheet metal work shall be as specified in this
section.
1.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:
A. Reference to Other Sections: The applicable requirements from the following
sections shall form a part of the heating, ventilating and air conditioning work and
the Contractor shall consult them in detail for general and specific requirements.
20 October 1997 Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning
Carlsbad City Library 158004 96013
1.3
1.4
A.
8:
c.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
A.
B.
Section 15050 General Requirements Mechanical
15300 Fire Protection
15400 Plumbing
15900 Building Control System
RELATED WORK:
The following work will not be furnished under this section of the specifications but
will be furnished by other trades.
Power voltage wiring and connections thereto and all power voltage conduit.
Openings in walls, floors, roofs.
Louvers in doors and building walls.
Concrete work.
Cutting, patching and furring.
Flashing.
Final painting.
Equipment foundation pads and platforms.
Condensate piping.
SHOP DRAWINGS:
Submit for approval, in accordance with Section 15050, six copies of fully
dimensioned shop drawings for all specified equipment, controls, ductwork and
ductwork construction details. Manufacturer’s equipment drawings are to be
complete with capacity and sound level ratings as indicated in the drawings or
specifications. The Contractor shall also submit all manufacturer’s internal wiring
diagrams for electrical equipment and shall prepare other wiring diagrams showing
the interlocking of the various controls and safety devices of the heating, ventilating
and air conditioning systems. Submit performance curves for all fans and for all
water pumps 1 HP and larger. Equipment capacity tables requiring interpolation or
extrapolation are not acceptable.
Submit for approval, installation drawings which show exact dimensions and
locations of openings required in floors, roofs and walls for ducts, air intakes and
exhaust, roof exhausters, piping etc.
20 October 1997 Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning
Carlsbad City Library 15800-2 96013
1.5 FILTERS:
1.6
A. A complete set of filters shall be supplied for use during the construction, testing
and balancing period. A complete set of new filters shall be installed after testing
and balancing.
EQUIPMENT START-UP:
A. Provide the services of manufacturer’s factory-trained service representative to
start-up chillers, air handling units, cooling tower, boiler, variable frequency drives.
Include in. start-up, testing controls, demonstration of compliance with requirements,
and replacement of damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment.
PART 2 PRODUCTS m
2.1 DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES:
A. Supply duct, return ducts, and exhaust ducts, plenum chambers, housing, panels,
unless otherwise specified herein or on the drawings, shall be fabricated from zinc-
coated (galvanized) steel sheets conforming to the latest ASTM specification A-525.
Zinc-coating shall be of the “Commercial” (G-9O)class. Where gauge numbers of
metals are indicated or specified, they shall represent the manufacturer’s standard
gauge numbers, prior to galvanizing.
B. Volume Dampers:
1. Damper blades shall be manufactured of 16 gauge sheet metal for ducts
greater than 18”. Dampers shall be manufactured of 22 gauge sheet metal
for ducts less than 18”.
2. Rectangular dampers shall be multiple blade type. Frame shall be 16 gauge
galvanized steel. Where dimensions of duct exceeds 18 inches x 12 inches,
blades shall not be over 8 inches wide. Bearings shall be provided; holes
punched in ductwork to serve as bearings will not be accepted. Locking
quadrant sizes shall be as follows: Up to 40 square inches shall be 114 inch
quadrant; up to 18 inches x 12 inches shall be 318 inches quadrant, and over
18 inches x 12 inches shall be l/2 inch quadrant.
3. Round dampers up to 9 inch diameter may be installed in sheetmetal spin
fittings when used for balancing air distribution devices. Frames for
dampers 10 inch diameter and above shall be 16 gauge galvanized steel.
Dampers above 20 inches in diameter shall be reinforced. Quadrant sizes
shall be as follows: Up to 9 inch diameter shall be I/4 inch quadrant, 10
inch thru 20 inch diameter shall be 318 inch quadrant, and over 20 inch
diameter shall be l/2 inch quadrant.
20 October 1997 Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning Carlsbad City Library 15800-3 96013
C. Access Doors:
1. Duct access doors to all fire dampers shall be insulated type as
manufactured by Duro Dyne, Pottorff, Karp or approved equal. Doors shall
be-24 gauge metal, 24 gauge frame, insulation shall be 1 inch glassfiber,
covered with 26 gauge metal, with loose pin hinges and cam-lock latches.
Door frame shall contain foam gasket, and a sponge rubber gasket shall be
attached to the back of each door frame to insure tight seal between duct
and frame. Finish shall be factory applied. Service shall be stenciled on
door, e.g., “Fire Damper” in l/2 inch red letters. Size shall be 16 inch by 12
inch where space and duct size permit. On small ducts and in restricted
space, 12 inch by 10 inch may be used.
2. Access doors installed in round ductwork shall be rolled plate and shall be
at least 2 gauges thicker than the gauge required for the duct. Doors shall
be close-fitting with foam strip gasket and a minimum of 2 quick fastening
latches. Doors for ducts up to 12 inches diameter shall be provided with 2
hinges and for ducts above 12 inches diameter provide one continuous
hinge.
D. Fire/Smoke Damper:
1. Combination fire and smoke dampers will be louver bladed type. Dampers
must be tested and listed under both UL 555 and UL 5558. Units must be
factory supplied assemblies that consist of damper, sleeve, and approved
actuator. Dampers must have a minimum class II leakage and dynamic
closure rating under UL 5558. Provide units as power-open unless
otherwise noted. Actuators to have a minimum operating temperature of
250 degrees F. Seals should be metal to metal without the use of synthetic
gasket. Fusible links shall be rated for 165 degrees F, unless otherwise
noted. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s installation instructions
provided with units. Provide suitable access for inspection and servicing of
each damper. Pottorff model FSD 42 (CSFM No. 3225-0368:008 & 3230-
0368:105), Ruskin Model FSD 36 or approved equal. If detailed, provide
units with dual position indicator switches for remote annunciation, and dual
temperature thermal switches for remote override. Motor actuators shall be
manufactured by a recognized control manufacturer and must be of the
shunt, or oil immersed gear train type. Stall motors will not be accepted.
E. Ceiling Fire/Smoke Dampers: Dampers shall be of similar construction to those
above except, in tunnel corridor construction (where the ceiling construction is
similar to that of the wall) provide dampers that have been specifically tested and
listed for horizontal mounting as corridor dampers under UL 555 and 5558. Pottorff
20 October 1997 Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning
Carlsbad City Library 15800-4 96013
F.
G.
2.2
A.
!EM
Tubing
@wper)
CLASS OR
TYPE PRESS. MATERIAL
JOlNi s!E RATlNG &/OR SPEC’N REMARKS
95-5 Up thru 2” Type L ASTM B-88 Hard drawn
Solder
Fittings 95-5
Unions
model FSD 72,(CSFM No. 3225-0368:lOQ & 3230-0368:108), Ruskin Model FSD
36C or approved equal.
Flexible Connectors: Furnish and install connections at the point where ductwork
casing connects to fans and where shown on the drawings. Connectors shall be
fabricated of neoprene coated flame proofed fabric. Connectors shall be securely
clamped to ductwork, fans and apparatus by means of bolted metal straps.
Flexible Ducts:
1. Insulated low pressure flexible duct shall be a factory fabricated assembly
consisting of a zinc-coated spring steel helix, non-perforated inner liner,
wrapped with a nominal l-l/2” thick fiberglass insulation. The assembly
shall be sheathed in a vapor barrier jacket. The composite assembly,
including insulation and vapor barrier, shall meet the Class 1 requirements
of flame spread of 25 or less, smoke developed of 50 or less as set forth in
NFPA bulletin No. 90-A and be labeled by Underwriters’ Laboratories, Inc.
2. Flexible ducts shall be installed in a fully extended condition free of sags and
kinks, using only the minimum length required to make the connection. The
maximum length shall be seven feet. Where horizontal support is required,
flexible duct shall be suspended on 36” centers with a minimum 26 gauge,
l-1/2” wide flat banding material. All joints and connections shall be made
in accordance with the recommendations of Underwriters’ Laboratories, Inc.
for jointing material. Connections to rigid sheet metal shall be made with
minimum l/2” wide collar positively clamped and secured with screws or
other approved fastening.
3. Insulated low pressure flexible duct shall be manufactured by Casco (Silent-
Flex II), JP Lambom Co., Atco Rubber Products, Inc. or approved equal.
PIPING MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES:
Chilled water, hot water heating and condenser water (Above grade):
Up thru 2” Type L ASTM B-88 Wrought
copper
95-5 Up thru 2” 150 psi ASTM B-62
Piping 2-l/2 inches and larger may be copper Type “L” as specified above or schedule 40 black steel pipe.
or
20 October 1997 Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning
Carlsbad City Library 15800-S 96013
Pipe
(Steel)
Scrd. Up thru 2” Sch. 40
Fittings
Unions
Flanges
Gasket
Weld
Scrd. -
Weld
Scrd.
2-l/2” 8, up Sch. 40
Up thru 2” 150 lb.
2-l/2” &up STD
Up thru 2” 150 lb.
2-IM” & up 150 lb.
2-112” a up l/lW
B. Chilled Water: (Below Grade)
1. Carrier Pipe: Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) SDR 26 class 160 conforming to
ASTM D2241. Piping shall be Perma-Pipe, Inc. (Chillgard), Rovanco or
approved equal.
2. Insulation: Polyurethane foam with the following minimum characteristics:
K factor .13, density 2 pcf, closed cell content QO-95% in conformance with
ASTM C-591 completely filling the annular space between carrier pipe and
jacketing. Minimum insulation thickness shall be 1.68 inches.
3. Jacketing Material: High impact, seamless Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) Class
12454-B compound conforming to ASTM 1784, Type 1, Grade 1 through 16”
diameter. No FRP jacketing will be allowed. Minimum jacket thickness shall
be 100 mils.
4. Joining Method: Bell & Spigot pipe is joined with rubber O’ring gasket seals
conforming to ASTM D-1869 on each 20 foot length to allow for expansion
and contraction. Coupling joints to be un-insulated.
5. Fittings: PVC, made of the same type and grade materials as the piping to
which they are attached and rated at the same pressure and temperature
as the pipe, fitted with rubber ring gaskets. All fittings to be un-insulated to
permit proper thrust blocking.
C. Hot Water: (Below Grade)
ASTM A-53 Blk steel
ASTM A-53 Blk Steel
ASTM A-l 97 Ml
ASTM A-234 FS
M.I. ASTM Bronze to
A-l 97 bronze seat
ASTM A-l 81
Red rubber Ring type or full faced
to suite flange facing.
1. Carrier Pipe: Type K or L hard drawn copper tubing conforming to ASTM
B-88 in 20 foot lengths. Piping shall be Permapipe (Copper Gard),
Rovanco, or approved equal.
20 October 1997 Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning
Carisbad City Library 158006 96013
,-
,f--
2. Insulation: Polyurethane foam with the following minimum characteristics:
K Factor 13, Density 2 pcf, Closed Cell Content QO-95% in conformance with
ASTM C-591 completely filling the annular space between carrier pipe and
jacketing. Minimum insulation thickness shall 1.43 inches.
3. Jacketing Material: High impact, seamless Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) Class
12454-B compound conforming to ASTM 1784, Type 1, Grade 1 through 16”
diameter. No FRP jacketing will be allowed. Minimum jacket thickness shall
be 70 mils.
4. Joining Method: Straight lengths of pipe shall be joined with a bronze O’ring
coupling that compensates for expansion and contraction.
5. Fittings: All ftiings except couplings shall be ASA B16.22 wrought copper.
6. End Seals: All exposed urethane foam shall be sealed water tight before
the system is buried.
7. Insulation of Coupling Joints: A sleeved urethane foam spacer shall slide
over the bronze coupling. Both seams shall be triple wrapped with tapewat
tape.
D. Mechanical Grooved Coupling System:
1. Mechanical grooved pipe couplings and fittings may be used for low
temperature hot water system, chilled water systems and condenser water
systems including mains, risers, branches, supply and return lines, under
operating conditions not to exceed 230 degrees F. System shall be as
manufactured by Victaulic, Grinnell, or approved equal.
2. Pipe: Pipe shall conform to ANSI B-36.20 (API-5L) and/or to manufacturers
published tolerances. Steel pipe shall be black conforming to A-53, Grade
B 3/4”-l-1/2”, Type F and 2”-24” Type E or S.
3. Couplings: Couplings shall be cast in malleable iron as described in ASTM
A-47 or ductile iron as described in ASTM A-536. Coupling shall be cast in
two or more parts secured by electroplated bolts, nuts or toggles.
4. Gasket: Gasket shall be of pressure responsive design molded of synthetic
rubber as designated by ASTM D-2000 and conforming to the coupling
housing and pipe outside diameter.
5. Bolts and Nuts: Shall be heat treated electroplated oval-neck track bolts
and heavy hex nuts conforming to ASTM A-183 with a minimum tensile
strength of 110,000 psi.
6. Fittings: Shall be cast fitting, steel ftiing, or segmentally welded fittings with
grooves or shoulders to accommodate grooved couplings. Fittings shall be
cast of malleable iron conforming to ASTM A-47 (Grade 32510) or ductile
20 October 1997 Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning
Carisbad City Library 15800-7 96013
iron conforming to ASTM A-536 (Grade 65-45-12). Steel fittings shall be
forged steel conforming to ASTM A-234. Segmentally welded fittings shall
be carbon steel conforming to ASTM A-53 or A-120.
E.
F.
Insulating Couplings: Walter Vallett Company, EPCO Sales Inc. or approved equal.
Pipe hangers and Supports:
1. Pipe hangers and supports shall be Grinnell, PHD Manufacturing or
approved equal.
2. Pipe hangers shall be Grinnell Figure 104, PHD 505 or approved equal,
adjustable swivel splii ring type or adjustable steel clevis type Grinnell, Fig.
260, PHD 450 or approved equal with threaded steel rod. Trapeze type
hangers may be used where two or more pipes run parallel to each other.
3. Hanger rods shall be connected to beam clamps, concrete inserts, Grinnell
Fig. Nos. 87, 261, with Locknut and retaining clip PHD 270-l with 259, 950
or approved equal. For expansion anchors see Section 5100.
G. Pipe Covering Shields: Shields shall be Grinnell Fig. 167, PHD Manufacturing, Inc.
170, or approved equal. Type to suit pipe size and insulation thickness.
2.3 SCHEDULE OF VALVES:
A.
B.
$&g
3/4” thru
2”
2-112” & up
3/4” thru
2”
2-l/2” & up
General: Valves shall be Crane Co. manufacture of the figure numbers listed, or
Nibco, Stockham, or approved equal.
Hot water, chilled water, and condenser water piping, unless otherwise shown on
drawings, or specified hereinafter.
IYJE
Gate Valve
Gate Valve
Ball Valve
Butterfly
Valve
Descnotion
Bronze body,
screwed
IBBM, 0.S.Y
Flanged
Bronze, screwed
Bronze Ball &
Stem, TFE Seat,
220” F.FuII Port
Cast Iron,
lug, Bronze
disc, 316 SS
Stem, Buna N
Seat
pressure
Working
Make
150 Ibs. Crane No.
431
125 lb. Crane No.
465-l 12
150 lb. Nibco
T595Y
200 lb.
20 October 1997 Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning
Carisbad City Library 158008
Crane No.
44BSBDG
96013
r l/2” thru Balance Bronze, screwed, 300 lb.
3” Valve Brass Ball,
(Circuit Meter Connections
Setter) Memory Stop
4” thru
8”
Balance
Valve
(Circuit
Setter)
Cast Iron, 175 lb.
Flanged, Bronze seat
& disc EPDM sealer insert
SS Stem. Meter Connections
Memory Stop
.-
316” thru
2”
Check Valve
2” & up Silent Check
Valve
2.4 PIPING SPECIALTIES:
Bronze,
screwed regrind
200 lb.
Cast Iron 125 lb.
Flanged, or Wafer.
Bronze Trim
Bell &
Gossett
Type CB
Bell &
Gossett
Type CB
Crane
No. 36
Nibco
No. F-910
or W-910
A. Pressure Gauges: Pressure gauges shall be Weiss 4 CTS-1 , Ashcroft Duragauge,
Trerice, or approved equal 4-l/2 inch diameter stainless steel case, screw-driver
pointer adjustment, brass construction movement, bronze bourdon tube. Range
shall be twice the operation pressure. Provide pressure gauges for the following
locations and any other locations shown on the drawings.
1. APPLICATION
Pump suction and discharge for hot
water, condenser water and chilled
water systems
NGE
Oto IOOpsi
B. Thermometers: Weiss “Vari-angle” Q-inch adjustable industrial type glass front,
separable socket, mercury tube, Trerice A005 series, Weksler, or approved equal,
1. APPLICATION
Chilled water supply and return
NGE
0” F. thru 100” F.
C.
D.
Hot Water Service 30” F. thru 240” F.
Condenser Water Service (or) Loop Water 0” F. thru 160” F.
Compression tanks shall be ASME rated, of sizes and capacities shown on
drawings. Tanks shall be provided with gauge glass and shut-off cocks.
Manual air vents shall be l/2-inch globe valve.
20 October 1997 Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning
Carisbad City Library 15800-S 96013
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
0. Nipples:
Automatic air vents shall be Hoffman, No. 79 Sarw, Armstrong’, or approved equal
float activated automatic air vent. Each vent shall be equipped with l/2 inch gate
valve on inlet and 5/16-inch copper tube drain line extended to approved drain
receptor.
Strainers shall be “Y” type with drain valve in cleanout. Strainers 2” and smaller
shall be “SARCO” type AT, Hoffman, or approved equal. Strainers 2-l/2” and larger
shall be “SARCO” type AF 125 or approved equal.
Air separators shall be constructed in accordance with ASME and stamped 125 psig
working pressure. Bell & Gossett, Taco or approved equal.
Boiler Feed Valve: Brass body with removable strainer and fast fill lever. Bell &
Gossett Model FB-38, Taco or approved equal.
Pressure and Temperature Test Plugs: Supply and install where indicated “Pete’s
Plug” a l/4 MPT filing to receive either a temperature or pressure probe l/8” OD.
Fitting shall be solid brass with valve core of Neoprene (Max 200 degree F.) or
Norden (Max 275 degree F.), fitted with a color coded and marked cap with gasket,
and shall be rated at 1000 psig. In addition, the installing Contractor shall supply
the owner with 2 pressure gauge adapters with l/8” OD probe and two 5-inch stem
pocket testing thermometers: 0” to 220” F. Peterson Equipment Co., Sisco PT
Plugs or approved equal.
Boiler Relief Valves: ASME rated for service intended. Bell & Gossett No.
790/l 170, Taco or approved equal.
Compression Tank Fittings: 125 psi working pressure with manual air vent. Bell &
Gossett Series ATF, Taco or approved equal.
Chain Operators: Will be furnished for all exposed valves in equipment rooms with
handles more than 6’ -0” from floor. All shut-off valve stems horizontal. If stem
must be vertical, it shall be vertical downward.
All Strainers: To have drains valved and piped to floor sinks.
High tensile grade 5 bolts shall be used for all flanges and bolt connections.
Engage bolts so that there is complete threading through nuts and tighten so that
bolts are equally torqued.
1. Nipples shall conform to requirements of U.S. Department of Commerce
Commercial Standard CS-5, Pipe Nipples; Brass, Copper, Steel and
Wrought-Iron.” Use nipples from packages which bear manufacturer’s label
or tag reading: “Guaranteed pipe nipples conforming to CS-5, made from
new pipe,” or other words to this effect.
20 October 1997 Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning
Carisbad City Library 15800-l 0 96013
2. Make nipples of same material and weight as pipe whereon used, except
when length of unthreaded part of standard weight nipples is less than l-
l/2”, use extra strong pipe nipple.
3. Do not use close nipples. In special cases obtain approval for installation.
P. Suction Diffusers:
1. Provide at each pump a Suction Diffuser of size and type noted on
drawings. Units shall consist of angle type body with inlet vanes and
combination Diffuser-Strainer-Orifice Cylinder with 3/l 8” diameter openings
for pump protection. A permanent magnet shall be located within the flow
stream and shall be removable for cleaning. The orifice cylinder shall be
equipped with a disposable fine mesh strainer which shall be removed after
system start-up. Orifice cylinder shall be designed to withstand pressure
differential equal to pump shutoff head and shall have a free area equal to
five times cross section area of pump suction opening. Vane length shall be
no less than 2-l/2 times the pump connection diameter. Unit shall be
provided with adjustable support foot to carry weight of suction piping.
Suction Diffuser shall be ITT Bell & Gossett, Taco or approved equal.
CL Wall Seals:
1. The pipe to wall penetration closures shall be “Link-Seal” as manufactured
by Thunderline Corporation, “Metra Seals” by Metraflex or approved equal.
Seals shall be modular mechanical type, consisting of interlocking synthetic
rubber links shaped to continuously fill the annular space between the pipe
and wall opening. Links shall be loosely assembled with bolts to form a
continuous rubber belt around the pipe with a pressure plate under each bolt
head and nut. After the seal assembly is positioned in the sleeve, tightening
of the bolts shall cause the rubber sealing elements to expand and provide
an absolutely water-tight seal between the pipe and wall opening.
2.5 INSULATION:
A. Install thermal insulation on clean, dry surfaces after testing, inspection, and
approval in strict accordance with these specifications, applicable drawings and
contract documents and manufacturers’ recommendations. Except for materials
listed below, all insulation and accessory materials are to meet NFPA requirement
of flame spread not to exceed 25 and smoke developed not to exceed 50 as tested
by Procedure ASTM-E-84, NFPA 225, or UL 723. Insulation shall be Manville
Products Corporation, Certain Teed, Owens Corning, or approved equal.
1. Excepted are:
a. Flexible, closed cell, foamed plastic insulation (Rubatex R-l 80-FS
Aerotube 11 or approved equal) on water chilling units, copper
tubing refrigerant piping, copper tubing runouts, condensate drain,
and drain lines only.
20 October 1997 Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning
Carisbad City Library 15800-l 1 96013
b. PVC jacketing material and factory pre-molded PVC ftiing covers
(Manville Zeston or approved equal).
C. 6 oz. canvas jacket on exposed ductwork and equipment only.
B. Chilled water and hot water piping: Insulate all water pipe with glass fiber pipe
insulation-with factory applied white vapor barrier jacket, Manville Micro-Lok 650 AP
or approved equal. Insulate fittings, flanges and valves with preformed insulation
with PVC premolded one piece fitting covers, J-M Zeston wvers or approved equal.
Pibe Diam@er (Inches\
314 1 l-114 2-l/2 5&
To To Above
2 4
Hot Water Heating
201” F-250” F
141” F-200” F
Jnsulation Thickness (Inches)
l-112 I-112 l-112
l-112 l-112 l-112
2 2
l-1/2 l-112
Chilled Wats
40” F - 60” F 1 1 1 l-1/2 l-112
Insulation thickness in the above table is based on materials having a thermal
resistance in the range of R=4.0 to 4.6 per inch. For outdoor piping increase
thickness by l/2 inch.
C. Chilled water and hot water pumps shall be insulated with removable and
replaceable covers consisting of No. 20 gauge galvanized sheet metal jacket
(aluminum at hot water pump) lined with rigid glass fiber board insulation having
minimum density of 3 PCF with factory applied reinforced foil-kraft facing, Manville
Spin-Glass 814 FSK or approved equal, l-1/2 inches thick.
D. Chilled Water Expansion Tank: Insulate cold surfaces of chilled water expansion
tank with l-inch flexible, foamed plastic, closed cell sheet insulation, Rubatex R-
1800-FS or approved equal.
E. Hot Water Tanks and Vessels: Insulate air accumulating tank, heating hot water
compression tanks and other heating system tanks and vessels with 1 -l/2-inch thick
High Temperature spun glass fiber blanket. Manville HTB 23 High Temperature
Blanket or approved equal.
F. Duct Insulation: Insulate all concealed supply air ducts with flexible glass fiber
insulation with factory applied reinforced foil-kraft facing, Manville R-series Microlite
FSK or approved equal. Thickness shall be a minimum of l-112 inches, density 1.0
20 October 1997 Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning
Carisbad City Library 16800-12 96013
pcf. Return air ducts shall be insulated per supply ducts, but vapor barrier may be
omitted.
2.6 EQUIPMENT:
A. Variable Air Volume Terminals:
1. Terminals shall be certified under the ARI Standard 880-94 Certification
Program and carry the ARI Seal. Terminals shall be Titus, Carrier, Trane
or approved equal.
2. The terminal casing shall be minimum 22 gauge galvanized steel, internally
lined with l/2 inch dual density glass fiber insulation which complies with UL
181 and NFPA QOA. All exposed insulation edges shall be coated with
NFPA QOA approved sealant to prevent entrainment of fibers in the
airstream. The discharge connection shall be slip and drive construction for
attachment to metal ductwork.
3. The damper shall be heavy gauge steel with shaft rotating in bronze oilite
self-lubricating bearings. Nylon bearings are not acceptable. Shaft shall be
clearly marked on the end to indicate damper position. Stickers or other
removable markings are not acceptable. The damper shall incorporate a
mechanical stop to prevent over stroking and a synthetic seal to limit close-
off leakage.
4. Actuators shall be capable of supplying at least 35 in.-lb of torque to the
damper shaft and shall be mounted externally for service access. Terminals
with internal actuator mounting or linkage connection must include gasketed
access panel, removable without disturbing ductwork.
5. Heating coil shall be one row with aluminum plate fins and 5/8 inch O.D.
copper tubes expanded into fin collar. Coil shall be leak tested at 300 psig
air pressure, under water.
6. The terminals shall be equipped with pressure independent direct digital
controls supplied by the control contractor and mounted by the terminal unit
manufacturer. Control contractor shall provide data sheets on all
components to be mounted, indicating component dimensions, mounting
hardware, and methods, as well as wiring and piping diagrams for each
application identified by unit tag per the schedule in the drawings, to the
terminal manufacturer.
7. Controls shall be compatible with pneumatic inlet velocity sensors supplied
by terminal manufacturer. The sensor shall be multi-point center averaging
type, with a minimum of four measuring ports parallel to the take-off point
from the sensor. Sensor with measuring ports in series are not acceptable.
The sensor must provide a minimum differential pressure signal of 0.03”
w.g. At an inlet velocity of 500 fpm.
20 October 1997 Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning
Carisbad City Library 16800-13 96013
8. Controls shall be field set by control contractor for the scheduled minimum
and maximum flow rates. Flow measuring traps and flow curves will be
supplied with each terminal for field balancing airflow. All pneumatic tubing
shall be UL listed fire retardant (FR) type. Each terminal shall be equipped
with labeling showing unit location, size, and scheduled cfm.
9. The terminal manufacturer shall provide a Class II 24 Vat transformer and
disconnect switch. Actuator shall be direct connection shaft mount type
without linkage. All controls shall be installed in approved NEMAl sheet
metal enclosure by terminal manufacturer.
B. Hot Water Boiler (Raypak):
1. The boiler shall be Raypak Model H, Teledyne-Laars or approved equal
constructed for outdoor installation. The boiler shall be approved by AGA,
ASME inspected and stamped for 160 PSI working pressure, complete with
manufacturer’s data report. The boiler shall be equipped with 45 PSI ASME
pressure relief valve. The water tube heat exchanger shall be of horizontal
grid design constructed with integral copper fin tubes with fin spaces at
seven fins per inch and extra heavy galvanized steel ‘V baffles secured
tightly to the tubes above the point of tangency of the fins. Each end of the
tubes shall be rolled into an ASME fire box steel tube sheet and sealed to
bronze headers with silicone ‘0’ rings with a temperature rating over 500”
F. The precision machined ffi and seals shall positively prevent boiler water
from reaching the steel tube sheets. The headers shall be of high pressure
bronze with integral bronze baffles to direct water through heat exchanger
in two passes. The heat exchanger shall be capable of withstanding 1200
PSI hydrostatic pressure.
2. The headers shall be secured to the tube sheets by properly spaced stud
bolts and flange nuts. The heat exchanger shall be readily cleanable from
either the right or left sides of the boiler and on the right side cleanable
without removing external piping. Heat exchanger to be explosion proof on
the water side. It shall have 100% copper and bronze waterways to
positively protect the boiler from galvanic action.
3. The boiler shall have solid state electronic flame supervision and electric
ignition.
4. The boiler shall be equipped with 80% gas modulation with a mechanical
primary high limit shut-off feature for hydronic heating systems and on/off
firing for water source heat pump systems. Modulating valves may be
operated simultaneously or set for stage firing to effect a greater modulation
range.
5. The boiler shall be equipped with an automatic reset secondary electric high
limit with a fixed setting of 265°F. as standard equipment. The main electric
gas valve is to be 24 volt with 100124 volt transformer.
20 October 1997 Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning Carisbad City Library 16800-l 4 96013
6. Burners are to be raised port and die formed from titanium stainless steel
alloy mounted in an easily removable burner drawer, capable of quiet
ignition and extinction, and equipped with fixed primary air ports.
7. The boiler is to shut down when thermostat(s) (is) (are) satisfied and not to
fire during stand-by, in order to reduce operating costs caused by stand-by
loads and radiation losses. Circulation is required whenever the boiler is
fired.
8. The boiler shall be capable of operating down to 105” F. without sustaining
condensation.
9. The entire boiler shall be factory assembled, requiring only connection to
services. The boiler manufacturer shall guarantee all components and
workmanship for one year from date of start-up, provided that the units are
started within six months from date of shipment. Complete operating,
adjustment and start-up instructions shall be provided in booklet form. The
boiler shall comply with the California State Safety Code.
C. Cooling Towers:
1. Cooling Tower: Furnish and install a factory assembled cooling tower of
counterflow blow-through design with single side air entry. Cooling tower
shall be of unitary design with all moving parts factory mounted and aligned.
All structural elements and steel panels shall be constructed of G210, hot-
dip galvanized steel with all edges given by protective coating of zinc-rich
compound. After assembly, Zinc-Chromatized Aluminum finish shall be
applied to the exterior of the cooling tower. All metal parts shall be
protected with a corrosion protection system. Cooling tower shall be
Retold, Baltimore Air Coil or approved equal.
2. Capacity: Performance shall be certified by the Cooling Tower Institute in
accordance with CTI Certification Standard STD-201 (86) or, lacking such
certification, a field acceptance test shall be conducted within the warranty
period in accordance with CTI Acceptance Test Code ATC-105, by the
Cooling Tower Institute or other qualified independent third party testing
agency.
3. Pan Section: The pan section shall be constructed of heavy gauge
galvanized steel utilizing double break flanges for maximum strength and
rigidity and reliable sealing at watertight joints. Standard pan accessories
shall include large circular access doors, large area lift-out strainer of anti-
vortexing design, and solid brass make-up valve with large diameter
polystyrene filled plastic float arranged for easy adjustment.
4. Fan System: The fans and motors shall be located in the dry entering air-
stream. The forwardly curved centrifugal fans shall be statically and
dynamically balanced. Fan housing shall have curved inlet rings for efficient
air entry. Fans shall be mounted on a steel fan shaft supported by the
20 October 1997 Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning
Carisbad City Library 16800-16 96013
heavy-duty, self-aligning, relubricatable bearings with cast iron housings.
Fan motors with 1 .15 service factory. Motor(s) shall be suitable for outdoor
service. Motor shall be located on a heavy-duty motor base, adjustable by
means of a single threaded bolt-and-nut arrangement. V-belt fan drive shall
be designed for not less than 150% of motor nameplate horsepower. Drive
and all moving parts shall be protected by removable hot-dip galvanized
screens and panels. Motor shall be 2-speed type.
5. Surface Section: The heat transfer section shall be integral to the pan
section to facilitate rigging and shall include serpentine, PVC wet deck
surface below a spray-type water distribution system, all encased by
galvanized steel panels. The wet deck surface shall consist of serpentine
sheets of polyvinyl chloride (PVC). The PVC sheets shall be impervious to
rot, decay, fungus or biological attack and have a flame spread rating-of 5
per ASTM Standard E84-77a. The surface shall be manufactured and
performance tested by the cooling tower manufacturer to assure single
source responsibility and control of the final product.
6. Water Distribution System: Water shall be distributed evenly over the heat
transfer section. The system shall consist of Schedule 40 PVC header and
spray branches with large diameter, non-clog plastic spray nozzles. The
branches and spray nozzles shall be held in place by snap-in rubber
grommets providing quick removal of individual nozzles or complete
branches for cleaning or flushing.
7. Eliminators; Primary eliminators shall be constructed of PVC and removable
in easily handled sections. They shall have a minimum of three changes in
air direction with an air deceleration zone to direct discharge air away from
the fans and limit drift loss to less than 0.0002% of the total water circulated.
D. Air Handling Units:
1. Units shall be draw-thru type, complete with all factory furnished
components. Units shall be by Carrier, Trane or approved equal.
2. Cabinets shall be double-wall constructed to prevent fiberglass erosion into
the airstream and to allow cleaning of the unit interior. Interior wall shall be
two-inches thick of either 20-gauge solid or 18-gauge perforated plate
galvanized steel. Double-wall units shall be factory insulated with I-112 lb.
density insulation. All connecting channels shall be insulated to prevent
sweating. Full sized hinged removable double-wall access doors with two
step safety handles shall be provided for quick access to the interior of the
unit casing. Doors attached by screws or doors not continuously gasketed
are not acceptable.
3. Blower Section: Blower shall be statically and dynamically balanced, fan
wheel shall be plug type (AH-l), forward curved (FC) or airfoil (AF). Bearing
shall be self-aligning sealed ball bearing type with bearing. Blower shaft
shall not run through first critical speed in coming up to operating speed.
20 October 1997 Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning
Carlsbad City Library 168004 6 96013
E.
Shaft shall be hollow or solid high carbon steel. Belt guard shall have
tachometer hole. Motors shall have variable pitch ‘V” belt drives rated for
150% of motor name plate horse power and adjustable motor mount. Motor
shall be open drip-proof type, 1750 t-pm maximum with 1.5 service factor.
Fan and motor assembly shall be internally isolated from unit casing with
spring isolators, furnished and installed by unit manufacturer. Fan scroll
shall be attached to the unit casing by a flexible canvas duct.
4. Coil Sections: Coils shall be plate fin type with 5/8-inch O.D. copper tubes
and aluminum fins. Tubes shall be mechanically expanded into fins. Header
shall be copper or cast iron. Coils shall be guaranteed for 250 psig working
pressure. Coil section shall include a condensate drain pan. Drain pan shall
be insulated double pan galvanized steel. Cooling and heating coils shall be
factory tested for rating in accordance with ARI 410.
5. Filter section shall hold the type of filters as shown on the drawings.
6. Economizer section where required, shall be provided with dampers to
modulate the volume of outside air, return air, and relief air. Dampers shall
be of airfoil design and shall be either parallel or opposed blade type with
metal compressible jamb seals on all blades. Blades shall rotate on stainless
steel sleeve bearings. Maximum damper blade length shall be 60-inches.
Leakage rate shall not exceed five &n/square foot at one-inch w.g. and nine
cfm/square foot at four-inches w.g.
Water Cooled Screw Chillers:
1. General: Factory assembled, single-piece fluid-cooled liquid chiller.
Contained within the unit cabinet shall be all factory wiring, piping, controls,
refrigerant charge and special features required prior to field start-up.
Chiller shall be Carrier, Trane or approved equal.
2. Compressors:
a. Semi-hermetic twin-screw compressors with internal muffler and
check valve.
b. Each compressor shall be equipped with a discharge shutoff valve.
3. Cooler:
a. Shall be tested and stamped in accordance with ASME code for a
refrigerant working-side pressure of 220 psig and a maximum fluid-
side pressure of 300 psig.
b. Shall be mechanically cleanable shell-and-tube type with removable
heads.
20 October 1997 Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning
Carlsbad City Library 158004 7 98013
C. Tubes shall be internally-enhanced, seamless-copper type, and shall
be rolled into tube sheets.
d. Shall be equipped with weld-on fluid connections.
e. Shell shall be insulated with 3Winch closed-cell, polyvinyl-chloride
foam with a maximum K factor of 0.28.
f. Shall have a cooler drain and vent.
Design shall incorporate 2 independent refrigerant circuits.
4. Condenser
a. Shall be tested and stamped in accordance with ASME Code for a
refrigerant working-side pressure of 220 psig and a maximum water-
side pressure of 300 psig.
b. Shall be mechanically cleanable shell-and-tube type with removable
heads.
C. Tubes shall be internally-enhanced, seamless-copper type, and shall
be rolled into tube sheets.
d. Shall be equipped with weld-on water connections.
e. Design shall incorporate 2 independent refrigerant circuits.
5. Refrigeration Components:
a. Refrigerant circuit components shall include oil separator, high and
low side pressure relief devices, discharge and liquid line shutoff
valves, filter drier, moisture indicating sight glass, expansion valve,
and complete charge of compressor oil. The units shall have a
complete operating charge of refrigerant.
6. Controls:
a. Unit controls shall include as a minimum: Microprocessor,
LOCAL/OFF/REMOTE switch, 2-line, 24-character per line
diagnostic display with keypad.
b. Shall be capable of performing the following functions.
1)
2)
Automatic compressor lead/lag switching.
Capacity control based on leaving chilled fluid temperature
with return fluid temperature sensing.
20 October 1997 Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning Carlsbad City Library 15800-18 98013
3)
4)
Limit the chilled fluid temperature pull-down rate at start-up
to an adjustable range of 0.2 degree F to 2 F per minute to
prevent excessive demand spikes at start-up.
Seven-day time scheduling of pump(s) and chiller(s).
7. Diagnostics:
a. Display module shall be capable of displaying set points, time
system status (including temperatures, pressures, and percent
loading), and any alarm or alert conditions.
b. Control module, in conjunction with the microprocessor, shall be
capable of displaying the output of a run test to verify operating of
every switch, sensor, potentiometer, and compressor before chiller
is started.
8. Safeties: Unit shall be equipped with all necessary components, and in
conjunction with the control system shall provide the unit with protection
against the following:
;:
Z:
;- 9. h.
i.
j.
Loss of refrigerant charge.
Reverse rotation.
Low chilled fluid temperature.
Low oil pressure.
Voltage imbalance.
Ground current.
Thermal overload.
High pressure.
Electrical overload.
Loss of phase.
9. Wye-Delta Starter: Unit shall have a factory-installed, Wye-Delta starter to
minimize electrical inrush current.
10. Sound Reduction Enclosure: Unit shall have field-installed sound reduction
enclosure which covers the entire unit to muffle compressor noise.
11. Manufacturer shall furnish a factory-trained service engineer without
additional charge. Representative shall supervise leak testing, evacuation
and dehydration using a high vacuum pump furnished by the manufacturer,
charging the unit, start-up and instruction of owner’s personnel on operation
and maintenance.
F. Pumps:
1. Pumps shall be Peerless, Bell & Gossett, Weinman or approved equal.
Pumps shall be close-coupled or frame-mounted as indicated on drawings.
20 October 1997 Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning
Carlsbad City Library 15800-19 96013
2. Pumps shall be of type and of size and capacity as indicated. Pump shall
be provided with a drip-proof motor of the speed and horsepower indicated.
Motor pump shafts shall be steel.
3. Pumps shall be bronze fitted with wear ring, renewable shaft sleeve and
mechanical seal.
4. Pump characteristics shall be such as to be non-overioading at any point on
the performance curve.
5. Baseplate shall be structural steel with welded cross members.
6. Coupling shall be flexible, capable of absorbing torsional vibration, equipped
with coupling guard.
G. Fans:
1. Roof Exhausters:
a. Fans shall be Greenheck; Loren Cook, or approved equal of size
and capacity as called for on the drawings.
b. The impeller shall be sturdily constructed of aluminum or steel with
rust resistant coating. It shall be accurately balanced, with
backwardly inclined blades and non-overloading characteristics.
C. V-belt drive as indicated on drawings. Rubber and fabric V-belt
drives with horsepower ratings 165% of connected motor. Cast-iron
V-groove sheaves. Motor sheave adjustable. Full ball bearings
mounted outside air stream, pre-lubricated motor. Drive and wheel
assembly mounted on oil resistant rubber isolators,
d. Normal horse power rating 110K of brake horsepower of fan.
Motors outside air stream. Motor wired to approved horsepower
rated disconnect switch located in motor compartment.
e. Roof curb shall be factory fabricated 18 gauge galvanized steel.
2. In-Line Fans:
a. Fan shall be factory assembled with square housing for in-line
mounting in duct. Fans shall be Greenheck, Loren Cook or
approved equal.
b. Wheel shall be backwardly inclined centrifugal type constructed of
steel or aluminum that has been statically and dynamically balanced.
C. The housing shall be constructed of formed steel, square shaped,
with factory applied finish. One of the sides shall be hinged and
20 October 1997 Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning
Carlsbad City Library 15800-20 96013
shall support the motor and wheel assembly allowing the assembly
to swing out for cleaning and inspection.
d. Drive shall be belt type. Motor shall be open drip-proof type with
inherent thermal protection. Provide belt guard.
e. Ratings shall be in accordance with the appropriate AMCA approved
test codes and procedures and bear the AMCA certified rating seal.
3. Ceiling Exhaust Fans:
a. Ventilator shall have steel housing finished in baked enamel and
insulated with at least l/2” acoustic insulation. Housing shall have
adjustable mounting brackets. Fans shall be Greenheck, Loren
Cook or approved equal.
b. Automatic Backdraft Damper shall be located within duct connector,
and shall have cushioned stops to prevent clatter. Damper/duct
connector and wiring adapter plate shall be adjustable for either
horizontal or vertical installation.
C. Fan shall be removable and shall have a centrifugal type wheel. All
motors to be lifetime lubricated type, mounted with neoprene torsion
mounts to isolate vibration. RPM not to exceed number listed for
each model.
d. Air delivery shall be no less and sound levels no greater than listed
for each model. All air and sound ratings shall be certified be
AMCA. Units shall be UL listed.
4. Tubular Centrifugal Return Air Fan:
a. Fan performance shall be in accordance with the AMCA standard
test code of air moving devices and shall be licensed to bear the
AMCA Certified Air and Sound Rating Seal. Fan shall be Barry
Blower, Greenheck, Trane or approved equal.
b. Wheel diameter shall be in accordance with the standard sizes
adopted by AMCA for centrifugal in-line type fans. Inlets shall be
fully streamlined and housings shall be suitably braced to prevent
vibration or pulsation. Housings shall be arc welded steel
throughout. Fan wheel shall include die formed Airfoil blades
designed for maximum efficiency and quiet operation. Blades shall
be continuously welded to back plate and welded to wheel cone.
C. Wheel shall be statically and dynamically balanced and assembled
fan shall be tested for balance at specified speed at the factory prior
to shipment. Such tests shall be performed with an IRD analyzer to
measure radial and axial displacements.
20 October 1997 Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning
Carlsbad City Library 15800-21 96013
d. Bearings are to be ball or roller anti-friction type, and shall be
equipped with extended lubrication lines to grease fittings outside of
the fan housings. Shafts shall operate at no more than 70% of first
critical speed to assure smooth operation.
e. Submittals for approval of equipment shall include AMCA Certified
Sound Power Ratings, and percentage pressure-volume
performance curves showing point of operation.
H. Computer Room A.C. Unit
1. General:
a. The cabinet and chassis shall be constructed of heavy gauge
galvanized steel and designed for installation and service access
from one side only.
b. Unit shall be by Liebert, Compu-Aire or approved equal with a
ceiling mounted evaporator section and remote condensing unit.
2. Air Distribution: The air distribution system shall be constructed with a direct-
drive fan assembly equipped with double-inlet blower, self-aligning sleeve
bearings, and lifetime lubrication. Fan motor shall permanent-split capacitor,
high efficiency type, equipped with two speeds for air flow modulation.
Dehumidification shall utilize the lower fan speed.
3. Filters: The filters shall be rated not less than 20% efficiency based on
ASHRAE Dust Weight Arrestance Test. They shall be removable without
shutting down the system.
4. Microprocessor Control System:
a. The control system shall be microprocessor based. The wall-
mounted monitor/control panel shall include an LCD custom display
providing a continuous display of operating status and alarm
condition. An 8-key membrane keypad for setpoint/program control,
unit on/off, and fan speed shall be located below the display.
b. The auto restart feature shall automatically restart the unit after a
power failure.
C. The control shall have two temperature control setpoints for cooling
and heating functions with a minimum of 2 degree F (degree C)
differential between them. The control shall automatically switch
from cooling to heating modes based on return air conditions. The
temperature control setpoint range shall be 60 degree F to 85
degree F.
20 October 1997 Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning
Carlsbad City Library 15800-22 96013
r- d. The LCD display shall provide an on/off indication, fan speed
indication, operating mode indication (cooling, heating, and current
day, time, temperature and humidity (if applicable) indication.
5. Refrigeration System:
a. The refrigeration system shall consist of a hermetic compressor,
pressure safety switches, externally equalized expansion valve, and
a refrigerant sigh glass and moisture indicator.
b. The evaporator coil shall have 1.8 sqft. face areas, 3 rows deep. It
shall be constructed of copper tubes and aluminum fins and have a
maximum face velocity of 350 ft. Per minute at 675 cfm. For
enhanced temperature and dehumidification control, the coil shall be
designed to provide two steps of cooling. The coil shall be provided
with a stainless steel drain pan.
6. Finned Tubular Electric Reheat: The electric reheats shall be low-watt
density, finned-tubular elements and shall include U.L. approved safety
switched to protect the system from overheating.
7. Condensate Pump: The condensate pump shall have the capacity of 80
GPH at 10 ft. of head. It shall be complete with integral float switch, pump,
motor assembly, and reservoir.
8. Refrigerant Line Sets:
a. Refrigerant line sets shall be provided by Liebert in proper lengths
for application.
b. Provide a sweat adapter kit to permit field brazing of refrigerant line
connections.
9. Air Cooled Condensing Unit: The condenser coil shall be constructed of
copper tubes and aluminum fins with a direct-drive propeller-type fan. All
components shall be factory assembled, charged with refrigerant, sealed
and be capable of being connected to the evaporator section using pre-
charged refrigerant line sets. No piping, brazing, dehydration or charging
shall be required. Condenser shall be designed for 95 degree F (35 degree
C) ambient and be capable of operation to minus 30 degree F.
I. Reheat Coils
1. Tubes: Round 5/8-inch OD copper tubes expanded into full fin collars for
permanent fin-type bond and expanded into cast iron headers (headers 33-
inches or less) for permanent leak-tight joints.
20 October 1997 Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning
Carlsbad City Library 15800-23 96013
2. Fins: Configurated, plate-type aluminum or copper fins with full fin collars for
maximum fin-tube contact and accurate spacing, mechanically bonded to
tubes for permanent fin-tube bond.
3.
4.
Casing: 16gauge galvanized steel casing with center and end supports.
Ceil capacities, pressure drops and selection procedures c&red in
accordance with ARI Standard 410. Coils shall be Carrier, McQuay, Trane
or approved equal.
2.7 AIR FILTERS
A. Pleated Media Pre-Filter: 2-inch thick completely disposable type with pleated
media, Eco-Air C35 or E35, Fan, American Air Filter, or approved equal . 25 to 30
percent ASHRAE efficiency, UL Class 2 listed.
B. High Efficiency Bag Filters: 12 inch deep Model KVEX as manufactured by ECO-
AIR, by Farr , American Air Filter, or approved equal . UL Class 1 listed. 60-65%
average efficiency using the ASHRAE Standard 52-76 Test Method using
atmospheric dust.
2.8 DUCT SILENCERS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Provide factory-fabricated and tested rectangular silencer with performance
characteristics and physical requirements as indicated. Silencers shall be by
Industrial Acoustics Company, Titus, United McGill Corp,or approved equal .
Outer casings shall be made of 22 gauge galvanized steel in accordance with
ASHRAE GUIDE recommended construction for high pressure rectangular duct
work. Seams shall be lock formed and mastic filled. Interior partitions for
rectangular silencers shall be made of not less than 26 gauge galvanized perforated
steel.
Filler material shall be of inorganic mineral or glass fiber of a density sufficient to
obtain the specified acoustic performance and be packed under not less than 5%
compression to eliminate voids due to vibration and settling. Material shall be inert,
vermin and moisture proof.
Combustion rating for the silencer acoustic fill shall be not greater than the following
when testing in accordance with ASTM E 84, NFPA Standard 255 or UL No. 723:
Flame spread 20., smoke development 230 and fuel contribution 15.
Silencer ratings shall be determined in a duct-to-reverberant room test facility which
provides for airflow in both directions through the test silencer in accordance with
ASTM Specification E 477.
Static pressure loss of silencers shall not exceed those listed in the silencer
schedule as the airflow indicates. Airflow measurements shall be made in
accordance with ASTM Specification E 477 and applicable portions of ASME,
20 October 1997 Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning Carlsbad City Library 15800-24 96013
.-
.---
AMCA, and ADC airflow test codes. Tests shall be reported on the identical units
for which acoustic data is presented.
G. With submittals, the manufacturer shall supply certified test data on Dynamic
Insertion Loss, Self-Noise Power Levels, and aerodynamical Performance for
Reverse and Fonvard Flow test conditions. Test data shall be for a standard
protect. All rating tests shall be conducted in the same facility, shall utilize the same
silencer, and shall be open to inspection upon request form the Architect/Engineer.
OR
2.9 ACTIVE DUCT SILENCER
A. Furnish and install active (or active/passive) duct silencers. The silencers shall be
located in the ductwork as specified and shown in the plans. For hybrid
active/passive type silencers, the “active” part shall be digital sound cancellation
systems for low frequency noise control, the “passive” part shall consist of sound
absorbent internal duct lining, and the supplier shall provide both parts as a fully
integrated system.
B. SUBMITTALS:
1. Shop Drawings: Indicate assembly, materials, thicknesses, dimensional
data, pressure losses, acoustical performance, layout and connection
details.
2. Product Data: Provide catalog information indicating materials, dimensional
data, pressure losses and acoustical performance.
3. Test Reports: Provide in-duct lab measurements of uncancelled and
cancelled noise spectrum data, with design airflow rate, using the error
microphone and independent performance microphone to determine
attenuation.
C. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: Subject to compliance with requirements
provide products by one of the following or approved equal.
1. Digisonix, Inc. - Middleton, WI - “DIGIDUCTr Active Duct Silencer’
2. Carrier Corp. - Syracuse, NY - “Quieteq Active Silencer’
3. ABB Flakt AB - Jonkoping, Sweden - ‘ANC System”
D. ACTIVE DUCT SILENCERS/Component Specifications:
1. Description and Materials: Passive Components - Outer casings shall be
constructed of 18 ga. (1 mm), minimum, galvanized steel, lock formed with
sealant in the seams. Internal acoustic duct liner shall be l-2” (25-50 mm)
thick, 1.5-3 Ib/ft3 (25-50 kg/m3) density glass fiber to obtain the required
20 October 1997 Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning
Carlsbad City Library 15800-25 96013
acoustical performance. The material shall be inert, vermin and moisture
proof. The material shall contain a facing material that resists erosion at
flow velocities up to 5,000 fpm (25mIs)and survives temperatures up to
25OOF. The material shall meet the requirements of U.S. NFPA 9OA
Standards. The material shall be an UL Class 1 product that also complies
with U.S. Government specification HH-l-5458, Type 1 and Type II and
TIMA Standards, Rigid Type.
2. Description and Materials: Active Components - The systems will consist
of a controller with internal amplifier, one or more loudspeaker module(s),
microphones, and interconecting cabling.
3. The controller shall consist of a high speed digital signal processor,
analog/digital and digital/analog convertors, and appropriate interfacing
circuity for the microphones and speakers. It shall be self-calibrating with
an automatic start-up sequence. It shall be fully adaptive to changes in flow,
fan speed, temperature, and microphone/speaker characteristics. The
internal amplifier shall be high gain, high performance commercial grade
with overload protection, selected to be compatible with the power-handling
capability of the loudspeaker.
a. Input Sensitivity:
b. Frequency Range:
C. Amplifier Output Level:
d.
e.
f.
Peak Power:
Protection:
Input Power Requirement:
Power Consumption:
4 mV - 1V peak-to-peak for a single
mic connected (per channel)
5 Hz to 500 Hz (minimum)
50 V peak-to-peak, 2.5 A rating each
channel
50W per amplifier into 8 Ohms
1 fuse per amplifier; thermal protection
100/l 20/220/240 Vat, 50/60 Hz
Fusing: 3Amp @100/l 20Vac
l-112 Amp @ 220/240 Vat
15-30 W typical; 360 W max.
instantaneous
h. Power Input Module Shall Contain:
1) Power entry
2) On/Off switch
3) Voltage selec
4) Fuse carrie
5) RFI line filter.
20 October 1997 Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning
Carlsbad City Library 15800-26 96013
i. Internal power transformer: Must provide controlled power to the
electronics within the controller, with overcurrent protection provided
by a fuse.
j. Operating Temperature Range: 32 to 122°F (0 to 50°C)
k. Humidity: 0 - 95 % RH (non-condensing)
I. The controller shall have safety testing to these specifiations:
1) UUANSI 1950, first edition
2) CSA C22.2 No. 950-MS9
3) IEC 950
E. Radio Frequency Emission and Susceptibility;
1. All active noise control devices must be tested and meet the radio frequency
emission requirements of the “Limits and Methods of Measurement of Radio
Interference Characteristics of information Technology Equipment” as stated
in C.I.S.P.R. 22, EN55022, (First Edition 1985) Clauses 8, 9, & 10 for
measuring RF Emissions from CLASS B Information Technology
Equipment.
2. Conducted emissions shall not exceed the levels allowed for CLASS B
Information Technology Equipment as stated in C.I.S.P.R. 22, EN55022,
Table II, Clause 4. Radiated emissions shall not exceed the levels allowed
for CLASS B Information Technology Equipment as stated in C.I.S.P.R. 22,
EN55022, Table IV, Clause 5.
3. EMI susceptibility shall be tested to these standards:
a.
b.
C.
IEC 801-2
IEC 801-3
IEC 801-4.
F. The loudspeaker module(s) shall be high performance, designed to produce large
amount of low-frequency sound equal in amplitude to the fan noise propagating in
the duct. Speaker wiring leads shall terminate outside of the module. The module
shall be of high-transmission loss design to minimize noise breakout. A minimum
of 20 dB TL is required at all operating frequencies. The module shall contain duct
mounting flanges and gaskets that do not allow air leakage from the duct.
G. The loudspeaker shall be selected such that it is designed to operate at no more
than 25% of the maximum rated excursion nor more than 25% of the maximum
rated power handling capacity.
H. The microphones shall be:
1. Type: Electret
20 October 1997 Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning
Carlsbad City Library 15800-27 96013
2. Frequency Range: 5 Hz to 500 Hz (minimum),
Include with turbulence rejecting mounting design that allows detection of acoustical
fan noise above the turbulent “pseudo-noise” floor of the air flow. The microphone
assemblies shall contain a modular phone plug (RJll) jack for connecting flat
shielded microphone cables.
I. Cables shall contain signal shielding and, where required, consist of a plenum-rated
jacket. Microphone cables shall be flat, &conductor, design with modular phone
plug (RJll) connectors.
J. Aerodynamic Performance: The active noise control components shall be mounted
flush with the duct side walls. The static pressure loss through the silencer is
therefore expected to be negligible. For maximum performance, the duct velocity
shall be designed for no more than 1500 fpm (7.5 m/s).
K. Acoustical Performance: The following table lists the required induct sound levels,
measured at the Mechanical Room Wall. It is the responsibility of the AHU supplier
to meet these levels. For any given sound power spectrum for a particular AHU, the
active duct silencer and passive sound absorption must be sufficient to bring the
resultant sound level to the level specified below:
Required Induct Sound Power Levels (at the MER wall)
Frequency Band, Hz 31 63 125 250 500 1000
Sound Power (dB)
2000
L. Measurement of the in-duct sound power shall be according to SIO 5136 -
“Acoustics - Determination of sound power radiated into a duct by fans - In-duct
Method”, using the instrumentation and techniques described therein.
M. If the allowable duct length and configuration inside the mechanical equipment room
is insufficient design in a complete active duct silencer to achieve the specified
sound power levels at the MER wall, part of the silencer may be outside of the
MER. The contractor shall then provide up to 2 meters of reinforced duct to fully
contain the noise throughout the silencer. The point of measurement will then be
at the end of the silencer. The reinforcement design chosen by the contractor must
be proven in a laboratory test to adequately contain the noise (20 dB TL at all
frequencies).
2.10 REFRIGERANT DETECTION SYSTEM
A. System shall be capable of detecting the presence of any HCFC or HFC refrigerant
regardless of which chiller is selected (i.e. R2-22, ROl34a). System shall be
capable of indicating, alarming and starting chiller room ventilation system specified
below and in governing regulations. System shall be manufactured by General
Analysis, Trane Co. or approved equal.
20 October 1997 Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning
Carlsbad City Library 15800-28 96013
.- B. Control Panel and Control Panel Equipment:
.-
1. Analyzer. Analyzer shall be microprocessor-based and employ infrared (IR)
sensor technology. It will accurately provide sensing down to one part per
million (ppm) and shall be compound specific and/or monitor multiple
compounds as specified, and be calibrated for either refrigerant R-22 or R-
134a. Adjustable three level alarm for each point shall be supplied from
common alarm output contact. Provide local digital indication of ppm level
for four sample points. Alarms shall be identified by an alarm message
indicating the point in alarm and the alarm level. Unit shall have self
diagnostics, and supply a wmmon malfunction output for alarm horn or
beacon. Loss of sample flow at either sample or ZERO line will indicate
system malfunction.
2. Sequential Sampling System: Four point sequential sampling system shall
be integrated into one analyzer enclosure. Microprocessor shall
sequentially control required flow values and communicated output signals
to allow monitoring from multiple remote sampling locations. Unit shall read
and hold output value of infrared sensor and control the corresponding four
point sequential sampling assembly. Each sampling point shall have
adjustable sampling time and adjustable levels of alarm. Sample line
capability up to 500 ft. The system shall have add-on sample point
expansion modules available for present configuration and future expansion.
3. The system shall monitor and display accurately within the range of 0 to 25
ppm for refrigerant system and chiller diagnostics, detecting low level
refrigerant leaks and deterioration of system efficiency.
4. NEMA-4 Wall mount enclosure. Auto zero calibration shall be initiated at
one hour interval (adjustable) or manually at the monitor and shall
automatically zero by drawing air from an uncontaminated air source.
Include built-in sample pump and differential pressure flow switch for low
flow indication. Provide four separate 4-20 mA dc analog outputs and one
RS-485 output of refrigerant level(s) for input into direct digital control (DDC)
or building management system (BMS). Unit shall be insensitive to vibration
and shall provide for a continuous sample. Intermittent dump and purge,
batch type samples with long response times shall not be acceptable.
Response time shall be twenty (20) seconds or less to ninety-nine (99%)
percent of reading. Malfunction relay is energized due to flow loss or
electrical malfunction. Electrochemical sensing technology employing
depletion sensors and short term life sensors, which deplete as a normal
part of their operation or storage shelf life, shall be not be acceptable.
5. The system shall be configured to provide for an optional relay board, with
dry contacts for each channel, to initiate output signal for three level alarms
at local panel, interface with both the DDC or BMS and the building
ventilation system. An early leak warning alarm shall be at 10 ppm,
regardless of refrigerant type, to prevent large refrigerant loss and provide
chiller diagnostics. At the TLV-TWA level the system shall activate the purge
20 October 1997 Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning Carlsbad City Library 15800-29 96013
ventilation system and sound a refrigerant leak alarm’. Malfunction alarm
indication and horn shall be provided (by contractor). Provide dry alarm
contact for each alarm level for interface to the DDC or BCS.
C. Installation: Unit must be factory calibrated. No field calibration is acceptable at time
of installation.
D. Maintenance and Calibration: No calibration shall be required for a period of one (1)
year from date of shipment. Zero filter and end of line filters should be replaced
every three to six months or sooner, based on usage.
2.11 SELF-CONTAINED BREATHING APPARATUS (SCBA):
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
SCBA shall meet ASHRAE standard 15-1992 requirement for safe mechanical
equipment rooms. SCBA shall be by ISI, North, Trane Co or approved equal.
SCBA shall be equipped with a pressure regulator, the SCBA shall have an
independent bypass system with a quick action mainline valve for instant airflow,.
The valve shall be conveniently mounted and easy to maintain and the air cylinder
shall have a 30-minute rating.
A speaking diaphragm shall provide for short-range communications with an
optional microphone for the face piece allowing connection to a portable radio. A
face cup shall prevent fogging of the face piece when the breathing apparatus is
used in a cold area.
The SCBA shall be equipped with a loud ball that sounds when air pressure reaches
540; a feature that allows enough air for a user to leave the danger area. In
addition, SCBA shall be pressure-demand apparatus designed to maintain a slight
positive pressure of air inside the face piece during inhalation and exhalation which
helps prevent contaminants from seeping in around the face piece.
The SCBA shall be provided with a watertight fiberglass wall mounted storage case.
In addition to meeting ASHRAE Standard 15-l 992 requirements the self-contained
breathing apparatus shall comply with all requirement of the National Institute for
Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH) and the American National Standards
Institute/National Fire Protection Association (ANSVNFPA-1981).
2.12 AIR DISTRIBUTION:
A. Performance: Shall provide the required air throw and spread with no apparent
drafts or excessive air movement within the air conditioned area. Any air
distribution accessories required to effect these conditions shall be provided and
installed by the Contractor. Grilles, registers or ceiling diffusers causing excessive
air movement, drafts or objectionable noise, shall be replaced at no cost to the
Owner. Air distribution shall have a factory applied white enamel finish.
20 October 1997 Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning Carlsbad City Library 15800-30 96013
B. Locations: All devices shall be installed in approximately the location indicated on
the drawings but the Contractor shall verify the exact locations at the building, and
with the drawings, making any minor changes as may be required and as approved
by the Architect.
C. Type: Air distribution shall be ‘Titus’ manufacture of the model numbers listed,
Anemostat, Kruegar or approved equal.
Lay-in type ceiling:
Ceiling Diffusers: Model PAS, Perforated 24x24 panel, with damper.
Return Registers: Model PAR, Perforated, 24x24 panel, with damper.
Plaster Ceiling:
Ceiling Diffusers: Model PAS, Perforated 24x24 & 12x12 modules, surface
mount, with damper.
Return Registers: Model PAR, Perforated 24x24 & 12x12 modules, surface
mount, with damper.
Sidewall Linear Diffusers:
Supply: Model CT-541, extruded aluminum with adjustable air pattern
and flow control vanes and concealed self-aligning device.
Return: Same as above, except less air pattern controllers.
Ceiling Linear
Diffuser: Model ML-39 and ML-37 extruded aluminum with adjustable
air pattern and flow control vanes.
Ceiling Linear
Return: Model MRL-39 and MRL-37.
Ceiling Return
Registers: Model 350RL, opposed blade damper.
Sill Mounted
Return: Model 350ZRL, opposed blade damper.
2.13 VIBRATION ISOLATION:
A. General Requirements:
1. Vibration isolation shall be provided for the various pieces of mechanical
equipment and piping, as specified herein or as shown on the drawings.
The vibration isolation system shall be installed in a manner to prevent the
transmission of vibration to the structure. No rigid connections between
rotating or oscillating equipment or piping and the building will be permitted.
20 October 1997 Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning Carlsbad City Library 15800-31 96013
2. The vibration isolation manufacturer shall furnish written instructions
covering the installation and adjustment of all isolators. The manufacturer
shall replace any isolation that has been improperly sized.
3. The Mechanical Contractor shall coordinate his work with the other trades.
Contractors following him, such as plastering or electrical shall be notified
and instructed to avoid any contact with his installation that would reduce
the effectiveness of the system.
4. The vibration isolation manufacturer shall make an inspection of the
vibration installation and inform the mechanical engineer in writing of any
necessary corrections and/or adjustments.
5. Where called for in the specifications or on the drawings, all structural steel
bases, including concrete pouring form bases shall be designed and
fabricated by the vibration isolation manufacturer. The concrete for the
pouring form bases shall be by others.
6. All horizontal pips inside mechanical equipment room shall be isolated from
building structure by means of hangers with vibration isolators. Vibration
isolators for hangers selected for same deflection as that of connecting
equipment, but not more than l-W-inches. Hangers provided with vertical
adjustment of minimum l-inch in either direction.
7. The cooling tower inlet and outlet shall have straight flexible connectors,
flanged, and furnished with steel retaining rings, Type RF for temperatures
up to 180” F., as manufactured by Mercer Rubber, Metraflex SL, or
approved equal.
8. The suction and discharge sides of all pumps shall have straight flexible
connectors. For non-ferrous piping, provide bronze hose covered with
bronze wire braid with copper tube ends or bronze flanged ends, braze-
welded to hose. For ferrous piping, provide stainless steel hose covered
with stainless steel wire braid with NPT steel nipples or 150 psi ANSI
flanges, welded to hose. Flexible connectors shall be as manufactured by
Flexonics, Metraflex or approved equal.
9. For chiller refrigerant relief piping, provide stainless steel hose covered with
stainless steel wire braid with NPT steel nipples or 150 psi ANSI flanges,
welded to hose. Flexible connectors shall be as manufactured by Flexonics,
Metraflex or approved equal.
6. Technical Requirements:
1. All isolators shall be designed or treated for resistance to corrosion.
Structural steel bases shall be cleaned of welding slag and painted with a
coat of red lead primer-finish composed of basic lead silicon chromate. All
nuts, bolts and washers shall be zinc- electroplated.
20 October 1997 Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning Carlsbad City Library 15800-32 98013
2. All mounts shall be selected to perform their function without undue stress
or overloading. All isolators that are to be used with structural steel bases,
as shown, shall be equipped with height-saving brackets. The bottom of the
brackets shall be one-half inch (l/2“) above the floor. These isolators shall
have a method of leveling and, where spring isolators are used, shall have
gussets on both sides of the isolator. Floor mounted units shall have spring
diameters not less than their deflected height. All springs shall be selected
with a 50% overload safety factor. Multiple spring isolators will not be
permitted.
3. All structural steel bases shall have minimum of four (4) points of support
unless otherwise specified. Structural steel bases shall be copied and fitted
or constructed using the overlap-insert method. Structural steel shall be
wide-flange beams selected for a minimum of one-tenth (l/10) the longest
dimension of the base, or designed for a maximum beam deflection of .005”,
unless othenvise specified. If the latter method is used, submittals shall
include calculations showing the necessary moment of inertia. The steel
bases shall have an operating clearance of one inch (1”) above the floor.
Where bases are used to mount pumps, the bases shall be large enough to
support the pipe elbows.
C. Isolator Description: Refer to vibration isolator scheduled on drawings.
r” 2.14 MOTORS, DRIVES, GUARDS AND STARTERS:
A. Motors shall be high efficiency type built to the specifications of the National Electric
Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA) Standard MG-1, 12.6. The motor shall be ball
bearing, drip-proof, squirrel cage induction type for full voltage start, to operate at
speeds not to exceed 1750 rpm except when indicated otherwise. The motors shall
operate on current as shown on the drawings. Where required, motors shall be
suitable for use with variable frequency drives. Motors shall be Baldor, Lincoln,
Electra Dynamic, Sterling, or approved equivalent. Motors mounted outdoors shall
have encapsulated windings and have weatherproof hood. The minimum service
factor shall be 1.15.
B. Drives shall have one belt for units under 5 horsepower, at least 2 belts for units 5
horsepower to 25 horsepower, and 3 belts for units 25 horsepower and over. Belts
shall be V-belt design sized for at least 150 percent of the motor horsepower. Motor
pulleys shall be of the variable pitch up to 7-l/2 horsepower and fixed pitch type, 10
horsepower and larger. Pulleys shall be cast-iron with steel bushings. Provide
additional new pulleys where required to drive fans at speeds necessary to give the
indicated volumes. Belts shall be Bates, B.F. Goodrich, Goodyear or approved
equal.
C. V-belt drives for the fans shall be property protected by metal guards. Guards shall
be made of not less than 16 gauge expanded metal l/2-inch mesh, on an angle iron
frame so as to securely close in the top, bottom and both sides of the drive. Ample
allowance shall be made in guard for motor and belt adjustment. The guard shall
20 October 1997 Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning
Carlsbad City Library 15800-33 96013
D.
E.
F.
G.
be provided with openings so that the rpm of the fans may be obtained. Guards on
equipment outside of building shall be of weatherproof design.
Pump shafts on flexible connected pumps shall be protected by approved shaft
guard.
All guards shall be given a prime coat and one heavy coat of machinery gray
enamel.
All guards shall conform to California General Industrial Safety Order Requirements.
Starters shall be across-the-line type or part winding type as required, with overload
protection on all legs and shall be manual or magnetic where shown on the
drawings. Starters shall be complete with NEMA Type I, enclosures with built-in
“Hand-Off-Automatic” switch. Magnetic starters exposed to weather shall have
NEMA Type 4 enclosure.
2.15 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
electric control systems as manufactured by Toshiba, ABB or approved equal.
B. General Requirements:
1. Furnish complete adjustable frequency controllers as specified herein for
equipment designated on the drawing schedules to be variable speed. All
standard and optional features shall be included within the VFD enclosure
unless otherwise specified.
2. The adjustable frequency controller shall convert three-phase, 60 Hz utility
power to adjustable voltage and frequency, three-phase, AC power for
stepless motor speed control from 10% to 100% of the motors 60 Hz speed.
Input voltage shall be as specified on the drawing schedules.
3. The VFD shall include a converter and an inverter section. The converter
section shall convert fixed frequency and voltage AC utility power to a
variable DC voltage. VFD’s that use silicon controlled rectifiers in the
converter bridge shall also include input line reactors.
4. The drive shall be a pulse width modulated (PWM) design that has a carrier
frequency of 12KHz, or higher so no acoustic noise will be produced onto
the motor.
5. The adjustable speed drive shall maintain a 120% current overload
capability for 60 seconds with automatic stall prevention and voltage boost
to prevent nuisance tripping during load or line side transient conditions, The
adjustable speed drive shall maintain a power factor of not less than 0.95
throughout its speed range.
20 October 1997 Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning
Carlsbad City Library 1580034 96013
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
The VFD and options shall be tested to ANSI/UL Standard 508 and listed by
a nationally recognized testing agency such as UL or ETL.
The VFD and options shall comply with the applicable requirements of the
latest standards of ANSI, IEEE, and the National Electrical Code.
Power line noise shall be limited to voltage distortion factor and line notch
depth as defined in IEEE Standard 519-latest edition, Guide for Harmonic
Total Distortion (THD).
The VFD shall not emit either conducted or radiated RFI in excess of the
limitations set forth in the FCC Rules and Regulations, Part 15, Subpart J.
The VFD and options shall have UL 508 certification.
The VFD shall be programmable to eliminate resonance points.
The VFD shall have 4mA-20 MA current follower circuitry.
C. The VFD shall include the following basic features:
1. The VFD shall be housed in a NEMA 1 enclosure.
2. The following operator controls shall be located on the front of the
enclosure:
a.
b.
C.
d.
e.
f.
Hand/Off/Auto selector switch to start and stop the motor. In the
auto position, the drive will start/stop from a remote contact.
Auto/Manual selector switch. In the auto position, motor speed is
determined by the follower signal. In the manual position, motor
speed is determined by the manual speed potentiometer.
Manual speed potentiometer. (Calibrated for O-l 00% speed)
Power on pilot light to indicate that the VFD is being supplied by the
power line.
Fault pilot light to indicate that the VFD has tripped on a fault
condition.
Digital meter with selector switch to indicate percent speed and
percent load. (Calibrated for O-l 50% load)
3. A set of form C, dry contacts to indicate when the VFD is in the run mode.
4. A set of form C, dry contacts to indicate when the VFD is in the fault mode.
20 October 1997 Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning
Carlsbad City Library 15800-35 96013
5. When input power returns to normal following a fault for under voltage, over
voltage, or phase loss, the VFD shall automatically restart. The VFD shall
not automatically restart following fault trips due to overload or over current.
6. The VFD shall include a door interlocked, padlockable, input power
disconnect switch.
D. The VFD shall include the following protective features:
1. Protection against input transient voltage spikes.
2. Separate overload protection for each motor controlled.
3. Protection against input power under voltage, over voltage, and phase loss.
4. Protection against output current overload and over current.
5. Protection against over temperature within the VFD enclosure.
6. Protection against over voltage on the DC bus.
7. Any disconnect switches between the VFD and the motor shall include an
auxiliary contact interlocked to the VFD fault trip circuit. In the event that a
disconnect switch is opened while the drive is running, the drive shall shut
down, The VFD shall include an adjustable time delay to prevent VFD from
starting into a rotating motor when the disconnect switch is closed.
8. DC bus discharge circuit for protection of service personnel.
9. Insensitive to incoming power phase sequence.
E. The VFD shall include the following adjustments inside the enclosure:
1. Maximum speed, adjustable 50-l 00% base speed.
2. Minimum speed, adjustable O-50% base speed.
3. Linear acceleration time, adjustable 2-60 seconds.
4. Deceleration time, adjustable 2-60 seconds with override circuit to prevent
nuisance trips if decel time is set too short.
5. Current limit, adjustable O-l 05%.
F. The VFD shall be designed to operate within the following service conditions:
1. Ambient temperature, O-104 degrees Fahrenheit.
2. O-95% relative humidity, non-condensing.
20 October 1997 Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning
Carlsbad City Library 15800-36 96013
3. Elevation to 3300 feet without derating.
4. AC line voltage variation, -5% to +lO% of nominal.
G. The following special features shall be included in the VFD enclosure. The unit shall
maintain its UL or ETL listing.
1. Manual bypass shall provide all the circuitry necessary to transfer the motor
from the VFD to the power line, or from the line to the controller while the
motor is at zero speed. The bypass circuitry shall be mounted in a separate
section of the VFD enclosure.
a. Two motor contactors, electrically interlocked, shall be utilized. One
contactor is to be between the controller and the motor. The other
contactor is to be between the bypass power line and the motor
providing across-the-line starting. Motor overload protection is to be
provided in both the controller mode and the bypass mode.
b. The bypass section door shall include a switch to transfer motor
operation from drive to line or line to drive, and a pilot light to
indicate whether motor is operating in drive or line mode.
C. The bypass circuitry shall induce a fused disconnect switch or circuit
breaker to provide a means of disconnecting all power to both the
bypass circuitry and the controller. The disconnect switch or circuit
breaker shall be sized to provide short circuit protection for the motor
when in the bypass mode per the NEC.
2. A second disconnect switch or circuit breaker shall be provided to
disconnect input power to the controller but not the bypass circuitry. This
disconnect will allow troubleshooting and testing of the VFD, both energized
and de-energized while operating in the bypass mode.
3. Plug-in test meter shall provide a quick means for monitoring the different
signals within the VFD for start up and troubleshooting. Where the meter is
capable of operating with different horsepower VFDs, only one meter needs
to be supplied.
4. Where the building walls are not suitable for mounting the VFD, a floor
stand kit shall be provided.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 DUCTWORK
A. Ductwork fabrication and installation shall conform to the recommendation of the
latest edition of the Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible as published
by the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc.,
20 October 1997 Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning
Carisbad City Library 15800-37 96013
(SMACNA). These standards shall govern type of seams and joints, reinforcing and
supports, comer closures, duct hangers, elbows, turning vanes, (use double vane
type), tapers offsets; streamliners, branches from mains, tee connections, register
grille and ceiling diffuser connections, volume dampers, access doors in ducts, fire
damper installation, casings and housing. All unwrapped exposed ducts shall be
cross-broken; beading will not be acceptable. Ducts that are wrapped shall be
cross-broken or beaded.
B. All necessary allowances and provisions shall be made in the installation of the
ducts for the structural condition of the building, and ducts shall be transformed or
divided as may be required, and where necessary to do this, the required area shall
be maintained. All these changes, however, shall be approved and installed as
directed by the Owner’s representative. During the installation, the open ends of
ducts shall be protected to prevent debris and dirt from entering same.
C. Hangers and Supports: Vertical ducts through floor slabs shall be supported on two
sides by steel angles bolted to the duct and resting with ample bearing surface on
the floor, ceiling, or wall to prevent vibration. Supporting angles shall be l-112 inch
by l-1/2 inch by l/8 inch for ducts up to 48 inches wide. In open shafts, additional
structural members shall be provided to span openings for support of ducts and
angels at each floor. Ducts along walls shall have support spaced not more than
eight (8) feet apart.
D. Damper blade position on all dampers shall be indicated by filing a notch in the
exposed operation rod or splitter damper rod. Volume control shall be installed in
all branch ducts, whether shown on drawings or not, to allow balancing of the
system. Where damper frames and blades constitute an obstruction in excess of
15 percent of the duct area, the duct shall be increased in size to receive the
damper.
E. All supply duct joints shall be sealed airtight with an approved duct tape or mastic.
3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION:
A. Pipe lines above ground shall be run parallel with the lines of the building unless
otherwise shown or noted on the drawings. All horizontal runs of piping shall be
kept as high as possible so as to provide maximum head room. Pipe lines shall be
run so as not to interfere with ducts, wires or apparatus and with approved offsets
around columns, beams and other obstructions.
B. Steel pipe 2 inches I.P.S. or smaller shall have its end threaded and the joints shall
be screwed. In sizes 2-l/2 inch and over the joints shall be flanged with gasket or
welded. Welding of galvanized pipe is not permitted.
C.
D.
Ream all pipe ends and take care at all times to prevent foreign material from
entering any pipe.
Copper Tubing: Swagging copper tubing to couple two (2) lengths together instead
of using an approved solder type coupling, will not be permitted. Incompletely filled
solder joints are not acceptable. Surfaces to be soldered shall be cleaned, both the
20 October 1997 Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning
Carisbad City Library 1580038 96013
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
inside of the fitting and the outside of the tubing with steel wool smooth and bright.
In assembling copper tube system, care must be taken to establish proper grade
and alignment in the system before soldering. Installations will not be approved
where tube and fittings are subjected to strain in order to obtain grade or alignment.
No copper drainage or vent tube shall be bent. Copper water tube may be bent
providing both area and roundness are maintained. All cut tube ends shall be filed
or reamed to the full original bore.
Solder Joints: Heating hot water and copper piping joints shall be soldered with 95
5 solder composed of 95 percent tin and 5 percent antimony of the wire type, ASTM
B32. Flux used with 95-5 solder shall be as recommended by the solder
manufacturer.
Screwed joints shall be made with oil and graphite or other approved compound.
Joint compound shall be applied to male thread only, and care should be taken to
prevent compound from reaching interior of pipe.
Unions and flanges shall be installed in the pipe lines at such locations as needed
to permit the removal of fixtures, apparatus or equipment without dismantling.
Unions and flanges shall not be installed in walls, ceilings, partitions or other
inaccessible locations.
All horizontal water and air lines shall pitch to low points to provide for complete
drainage of the system. Pitch, unless otherwise shown on the drawings, shall be
not less than 1 inch in 40 feet 0 inches. Install drain valves at low points. Air vents
shall be installed at all high points and at locations where air may pocket on all
water lines.
Separate cold lines from hot lines by a minimum of 6 inches.
Piping elevations shall be established prior to installation to avoid interferences with
other piping and materials and equipment of other trades.
All pipe welding may be by either oxy-acetylene or arc method, and shall be done
by approved welders, qualified in accordance with the ASA Code for Welders.
Welding procedures and joint quality shall strictly conform to above procedures. The
Owners representative reserves the right to require qualifying demonstrations at the
Mechanical Contractors expense of any welders assigned to the job.
Tee connections in welded piping shall be made with a factory fabricated butt
welding tee or with Weld-O-Lets of butt, socket or threaded type. When Weld-O-
Lets are used, the branch connection shall be one-half the diameter of the main or
less. Scarf welding or direct butt welding of side connections shall not be permitted.
Tees fabricated from pipe shall not be permitted.
Long radius welding ells shall, wherever possible, be used in changing pipe
directions of welded pipe lines. Mitered joints shall not be approved.
20 October 1997 Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning
Carisbad City Library 15800-39 96013
N.
0.
P.
Q.
Insulating Couplings: In all cases where dissimilar metals such as connecting
copper or brass to iron or steel arises, corrosion caused by galvanic action shall be
avoided by insulating the connection by means of an insulating coupling or a
dielectric flanged union.
Reduced Fittings: For proper drainage and air elimination, eccentric type fittings
shall be used when decrease in pipe size is necessary. Bushings will not be
permitted.
Flexible Pipe Connectors: Provide at suction and discharge connections to pumps
and compressors as herein specified.
Grooved Piping:
1. Pipe shall be prepared according to the manufacturers latest published
specifications, UL, FM, ULC, NFPA, ANSIIAWWA C-606 or other applicable
standards.
2. Pipe ends shall be clean and free from indentations, projections, burrs, rust,
or roll marks in the area from pipe end to groove.
3. Pipe shall be roll grooved without removing metal or cut grooved according
to the manufacturers latest published specifications.
4. Pipe ends must be cleaned a minimum of 1” back from the pipe end to
remove all coating, weld beads, rust, projections, etc. which might affect
gasket seating integrity.
5. Gasket shall be of pressure responsive design verified as proper style and
grade as suitable for the intended service.
6. A thin, uniform coat of non-toxic lubricant as recommended by the pipe
manufacturer, shall be applied to the pipe ends around the entire
circumference, the entire exterior of the gasket, the gasket lips, and the
inside of the coupling housing. Complete lubrication is essential to prevent
gasket pinching and to ease, gasket installation and alignment.
R. Underground Preinsulated Piping:
1. PVC pipe should be joined to steel system with flanges or gasketed double
bell couplings. All steel systems should be anchored within five feet of
connection point to eliminate any thrust, stress or torque from the steel pipe
being transferred to the PVC.
2. All underground changes of direction, i.e. 90” ells, tees, etc. will be un-
insulated. They will be poured in concrete thrust blocks to form anchor
points and direct the expansion and contraction to take place at the
gasketed joints.
20 October 1997 Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning Carisbad City Library 15800-40 96013
S. Underground Preinsulated Copper Pipe:
1. All pipes, fittings and O-ring slip couplings shall be installed in accordance
with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
All solder joints shall be hydrostatically tested prior to pouring thrust blocks.
T. Hangers and Supports:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
20 October 1997 Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning
Carisbad City Library 16800-41 96013
Pipe hangers and supports shall be installed to allow for expansion and
contraction, and placed close to fittings, valves and heavy equipment.
Pipe shall be supported separately, not in tiers. Trapeze hangers will be
permitted where piping is grouped together at the discretion of the Owner’s
representative.
Chilled water piping shall have hangers and supports outside the insulation
and the vapor barrier and shall have pipe covering protection shields as
herein specified.
The Contractor shall furnish and install all structural supports, anchors,
platforms and hangers required for the suspension and placement of the
piping required for the installation.
All horizontal piping hangers, rods and supports shall have provision for a
minimum of l-3/4 inches vertical adjustment for pipe alignment and shall be
provided with lock nuts.
Piping shall be installed so as to be free from vibration, sagging or
movement other than caused by heat expansion or contraction.
Any drilling of the structure shall be done only in such locations that will
furnish adequate support as determined by the Owner’s representative.
Trapeze type hangers when required shall consist of a substantial horizontal
angle or channel iron with suspended adjustable steel threaded rods and
nuts, or a combination of l-inch by 2-inch angles back to back with 98 inch
spacers between to accommodate l/2-inch U-clamps to secure individual
pipes or channel strut with channel strut clamps.
Supports for vertical piping shall be split clamps bolted around the pipe and
resting on the floor slab. Anchors shall consist of two such clamps; one
above and one below the slab. Select size of clamps to exactly fit pipe size
of bare pipe. Provide copper-plated clamps for copper piping system.
Each hanger shall include a collar or equivalent device to fit the pipe and an
Underwriters’ approved clamping or bolting device for attachment to
concrete inserts, steel beams or expansion shields. Sizes of hanger rods
for clevis or roller type hangers shall be as listed below:
. . Pi= me. Inch, . . Rod Sue. Inch
l/2 - 2 318
2-l/2 - 3-112 l/2
4-5 518
6 3l4
8- 718
11. Maximum spans between hangers for straight horizontal runs of pipe shall
be in compliance with the following table:
l/2-inch
3/4-inch
1 -inch
l-l /4-inch
l -l/2-inch
2-inch
2-l/2-inch
and larger
6-0” 51-O”
6’4)” s-0”
6’4)” 6’~0”
g-0” 71-O”
g-0” 8’~0”
lo’-0” 8’~0”
1 v-0” 8’-0”
12. Additional hangers shall be provided where concentrated weights such as
valves or heavy fittings occur and where changes in direction of the piping
system occurs between hangers. A hanger shall be provided immediately
adjacent to any change in direction of the piping.
Q. Pipe Protection Shields: Except as otherwise indicated, provided saddles or shields
under piping hangers and supports, factory-fabricated, for all insulated piping. Size
saddles and shields for exact fit to mate with pipe insulation. Length shall be as
recommended by manufacturers to prevent crushing of insulation.
R. Pipe Sleeves and Cover Plates:
1. The Mechanical Contractor shall furnish, locate and set pipe sleeves for all
piping passing through masonry walls and floors.
2. Pipe passing through fire rated construction shall be metal and extend 3-O”
on each side of wall.
3. Pipe sleeves through exterior concrete walls below grade and floor slabs
shall be schedule 40 steel pipe.
4. Pipe sleeves through walls above grade shall be of 10 gauge galvanized
sheet metal.
5. Sleeves through fire walls or floors shall be packed with fireproof material
having the same rating as wall or floor and shall be sealed flush with top of
sleeve.
20 October 1997 Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning
Carisbad City Library 1680042 96013
6. Sleeves shall be property secured in place with an allowance of
approximately l/2 inch clear space all around between the sleeve and the
bare pipe, or insulated pipe, passing through it. Floor sleeves shall have
approved anchoring lugs.
7. In unfinished areas, each floor sleeve shall project one inch above the floor.
In finished areas, sleeves shall be flush with finished floor. The space
between pipe and floor sleeves shall be tightly packed with fiberglass
insulation and sealed with a one part silicone rubber sealant, such as GE
silicone construction sealant, neatly faced. Where floor penetration is
through fire rated construction sealant shall be fire proof material.
8. Each wall or partition sleeve shall finish flush with the wall or partition. The
space between pipe and sleeve shall be packed similar to the floor sleeves.
9. The Mechanical Contractor shall furnish and install chrome plated cover
plates on all piping extending into finished areas of the building, through
ceilings, walls and floors. The cover plates shall be of the proper size to
afford complete coverage of the opening. Where pipe insulation is carried
through a pipe sleeve the cover plate shall be of sufficient size to fit around
the insulation.
S. Expansion Compensation of Piping: All piping shall be anchored and supported in
a manner such that expansion and contraction will take place in the direction
desired, and undue strains on equipment served will be prevented. Hangers used
for the support of piping shall be fabricated to permit adequate adjustment after
erection while still supporting the load. Supports shall be furnished and installed to
carry adequately the weight of the lines and maintain proper alignment. Insulated
piping shall be provided with a pipe covered protection saddle at each support.
Pipe guides and anchors of approved type shall be provided at all points where
necessary to keep pipes in accurate alignment, to direct the expansion movement
and to prevent buckling and swaying and undue strain. Pipe guides shall be
provided for alignment connected to free (unanchored) end of each expansion joint.
Pipe supports shall be spaced to provide adequate support for pipes. Pipes shall
not have pockets formed in the span due to sagging of the pipe insulation valves
and fittings. Pockets shall be eliminated by having the outlet of each span lower
than the maximum sag.
3.3 VALVE INSTALLATION:
A. The Contractor shall provide valves as shown on the drawings or wherever required
to permit complete isolation from the system of equipment or fixture.
B. Gate valves, butterfly valves or ball valves are required where service is fully
opened or closed.
C. Circuit setters or plug valves are required for throttling service.
20 October 1997 Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning Carisbad City Library 1680043 96013
D. Drain valves shall be provided at all low points of each water system for proper
drainage lines. Drain valves shall be provided above all riser shut-off valves. Use
hose end valves where noted on drawings.
E. Shut-off valves shall be installed on all branch lines where same connect to main.
Shut-off valves shall be installed on supply mains where same connect to supply
risers. Balance valves shall be installed on return mains where same connect to
return risers.
F. Valves and unions shall be provided at the individual connections to equipment, etc.
to permit complete servicing or removal of each item of equipment.
3.4 INSULATION INSTALLATION:
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
Insulate no piping or equipment until tested and approved for tightness. All piping
shall be dry when insulated.
Insulate the entire surface for fittings. Insulate valves up to and including bonnets. *
Insulate strainers to permit removal of the basket without disturbing the installation
of the strainer body.
Bevel the ends of pipe insulation adjacent to flanges to permit bolt removal. Provide
a collar of sectional block insulation over the flanges and extend a minimum of 2
inches over the adjacent pipe insulation. Fasten with bands to permit easy removal.
For pipe hanger insulation saddles and shields, see “Piping” section of the
specifications. ’
Chilled water and hot water pumps shall be insulated in such a manner to permit
removal of the insulation for pump inspection and repair without destroying the
insulation.
Chilled Water Piping:
1. Apply vapor barrier mastic coating to form an isolation vapor seal between
pipe insulation at fittings, flanges, valves, hangers and at 21 foot intervals
on continuous runs.
2. Adhere longitudinal laps and butt strips of jacket with factory applied
pressure sensitive tape system.
3. Provide inserts of cellular glass pipe insulation at each pipe shield and vapor
seal and finish to match the adjoining pipe insulation.
20 October 1997 Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning
Carisbad City Library 1680044 96013
r
;-
/--
H. Hot Water Piping:
1. Adhere longitudinal laps and butt strips of jacket with factory applied
pressure sensitive tape system, or stapled on 2 inch center with monel
outward clinch staples.
2. Provide inserts of calcium silicate pipe insulation at each pipe shield and
finish to match adjoining pipe insulation.
I. Chilled Water and Hot Water Pumps: All voids between insulation and pump
housing shall be filled with adhesive applied over the entire surface. Finish with two
coats of insulation coating.
J. Chilled Water Expansion Tank: Apply insulation and seal all joints with waterproof
cement, applied over the entire surface. Finish with two coats of insulation coating.
K. Hot Water Vessels: Secure insulation between outer facings of insulating and
finishing cement, troweled to a smooth surface. After cement has dried, apply 8
oz. canvas and finish with a heavy, smooth coat of insulation coating.
L. Ductwork Insulation:
1. Supply Air Ductwork Above Ceiling: Secure insulation to duct with
mechanical fasteners on 18 inch centers or on underside of rectangular
ducts over 30 inch wide. Seal all joints, fastener penetrations and other
breaks in vapor barrier with 3 inch wide strips of the same facing material
adhered with vapor barrier adhesive, or 3 inch wide strips of white glass
fabric, coated with vapor barrier mastic.
2. Return Air Ductwork Above Ceiling: The insulation shall be wrapped entirely
around the duct with all joints lapped at least 2 inches and secured with 16
gauge galvanized wire on 12 inch centers. The insulation shall cover all
surfaces including standing seams.
M. On all outdoor piping install an aluminum jacket 0.016 inch thick with longitudinal Z-
joint secured with preformed 2 inch wide butt straps and preformed aluminum fitting
covers.
3.5 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION:
A. The installation of the equipment specified or shown on drawing shall be strictly in
accordance with the manufacturer’s instruction and installation book. All
recommendations of manufacturer shall be followed, required clearances
maintained, and factory approval secured for each installation. All equipment shall
be securely fastened to its base. All parts of the installation shall be made
weatherproof. A copy of the manufacturer’s installation and service manual shall
be kept with each piece of equipment at all times to allow an inspector to determine
if the installation meets requirements.
20 October 1997 Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning
Carisbad City Library 16800-46 96013
B. All work shall be performed by skilled mechanics under the supervision of a
competent foreman and in accordance with the best standards of practice of the
trade.
3.6 ROOF AND WALL PENETRATIONS:
A. All penetrations of roof and exterior walls shall be flashed watertight with lead or
galvanized iron.
B. Flashing shall comply with requirements for flashing in Sheet Metal Section.
C. Pipe flashing shall be counter flashing sleeve type with 4 pound seamless lead
flashing with 8-inch skirt. The joint shall be sealed with Permaseal waterproofing
compound or equal.
3.7 IDENTIFICATION OF MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT:
A. Pipe:
1. All above ground piping, including concealed piping in walls and above
ceiling, as well as exposed piping, shall be clearly marked with pipe marking,
wlored bands, and one-way direct of flow arrow. Markings shall be setmark
“Snap-around” marking per ANSI A13.1956. All markers shall have 360
degrees visibility, directional arrow and be sealed beneath a protective
plastic coating. Pipe markers shall have white letters on red piping, black
letters on yellow piping and black letters on green piping.
2. All pipe markings and arrows shall be installed not less than 20 feet apart
and at all valve equipment locations. Markers shall be neatly applied and
in exposed areas shall be installed after final printing has been completed.
Markings shall be installed so as to be visible for easy detection.
B. Equipment: Equipment shall be identified by stenciling the identification plainly
(such as AH-l as shown on equipment schedule) on the service side. Lettering to
be minimum size of 1”. This applies to all equipment.
3.8 ELECTRICAL WORK:
A. Power voltage wiring and connections thereto and all power voltage conduit shall
be furnished and installed under the Electrical Division of the specifications.
B. Low voltage and line voltage control wiring and connections thereto and all low and
line voltage control conduit shall be furnished and installed under the Mechanical
Sections of the Specifications.
C. Relays, push button stations, control equipment, etc., shall be provided under the
Mechanical Section of the specifications, except as noted on the drawings.
20 October 1997 Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning Carisbad City Library 16800-46 96013
A--
Magnetic motor starters, except those furnished with packaged mechanical
equipment will be provided under the Mechanical Division.
D. Disconnect switches and manual motor starters shall be furnished, installed and
connected under the Electrical Division of the specification.
3.9 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES
A. General: Install variable frequency drives in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions.
B. Start-Up: Start-up, test, and adjust in presence of manufacturer’s authorized
representative. Demonstrate compliance with requirements. Replace damaged or
malfunctioning controls and equipment.
C. Cleaning: Clean factory-finished surfaces. Repair any marred or scratched surfaces
with manufacturer’s touch-up paint.
3.10 EARTHQUAKE RESTRAINT:
A. Provide as means to prohibit excessive motion of all mechanical equipment during
an earthquake.
B. All mechanical equipment, both hanging and base mounted shall be provided with
mounting connection points of sufficient strength to resist lateral seismic forces
equal to 0.5 of equipment operating weight.
3.11 SHOP PRIMING PROCEDURES:
A. Ferrous metal items, except items to be encased in concrete and areas adjacent to
field welds, shall be thoroughly cleaned and prime painted.
B. Surfaces shall be cleaned free of loose mill scale, loose rust, accessible weld slag
or flux deposit. Dirt and other foreign matter shall be removed by hand wire
brushing. Oil and grease deposits shall be removed by solvent.
C. After cleaning, surfaces shall be given one shop coat of prime paint applied
thoroughly and evenly to dry surfaces. Surfaces inaccessible after assembly or
erection shall be given an additional shop coat of a slightly different color than first
coat.
D. After erection, touch up with prime paint all members where shop coat has been
damaged, welds and areas adjacent to welds and field bolts.
3.12 PAINTING:
A. Condenser water piping exposed to the weather and within mechanical equipment
room shall be painted in accordance with Section 09900 of the specifications.
20 October 1997 Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning
Carlsbad City Library 15800-47 98013
3.13 PRESSURE TESTING:
A. Furnish all materials, supplies, labor and power required for testing. Make
preliminary tests and prove work satisfactory.
B. Notify the Owner’s representative and all authorities having jurisdiction in ample
time to be-present for final testing of all piping. Test before insulating or concealing
any piping. Repair defects disclosed by tests or, if required by the Owner’s
representative, replace defective work with new work without additional cost to
Owner. Make tests in stages if so ordered by the Owner’s representative to
facilitate work of others.
C. The contractor is responsible for work of other trades disturbed or damaged by tests
and/or repair and replacement of his work, and shall cause work so disturbed or
damaged to be restored to its original condition at his own expense.
D. Unless otherwise specified, all piping shall be hydrostatically tested to 150 psi for
4 hours without perceptible loss on gauge.
3.14 WATER TREATMENT AND CLEANING:
A.’ The Mechanical Contractor shall engage the services of an approved Water
Treatment Contractor who shall provide a complete water treatment service,
relieving the Mechanical Contractor of all responsibility for the handling of
chemicals, the making of any chemical tests, or any adjustments to the water
treating equipment. The service shall include furnishing and application of all
chemicals and at least one visit a month for a period of one year after startup.
Monthly service shall include labor and chemicals to maintain the system in a clean
condition, technical assistance to operating personnel, monitoring of the treatment
program, and a written report at the time of each call. Chemicals, equipment, and
service shall be by Water Chemists Division of Betz Entec, Walsh Enterprises, Inc.
or approved equal
B. Cooling Towers:
1. General:
a. Water treatment shall be effective for control of scale, corrosion, and
organic growths. The Water Treatment Supplier is to furnish labor,
chemicals, and equipment to clean condenser and heat exchangers
if fouling occurs.
2. Water Treatment Equipment:
a. Install an automatic control system to monitor and control
conductivity, chemical feed and bleed-off through the use of an on-
stream sensor. The system shall include conductivity controller,
chemical feed pump, bleedoff solenoid valve and 50 gallon chemical
feed tank per the following description:
20 October 1997 Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning Carlsbad City Library 1580048 96013
b. Conductivity Controller:
.I---
1. Lakewood Instruments model #151 or equal by Morr Control.
2. Control system shall be factory prewired with all output wires
in weatherproof junction box and shall be housed in a NEMA
12 enclosure rated for outdoor installation.
3. Control system shall be pre-plumbed with 314” Schedule 80
PVC. Pre-plumbing is to be attached to control enclosure
and contain sensor ftiings, flow switch, flow sight tube, and
back check valve. Flow switch is to deactivate outputs at
sample stream flows below 1.5 GPM.
4. Control electronics shall be solid state and have an
adjustable conductivity control setting from 0 -5000
microhms with a linear scale display meter.
5. Unit shall be equipped with an alarm timer, O-20 minutes,
front panel, adjustable. In the event of blowdown exceeding
the set time, the timer shall disconnect inhibitor pump,
activate alarm light, and reset after conductivity is satisfied.
8. System shall be equipped with Auto-Off-Manual switch and
shall be electrically interlocked with the cooling water pump
circuit.
C. Chemical pump shall be LMI Model A151-191,0.5 - 24 GPD, 115 V,
PVC Liquid Head.
d. Bleed-off solenoid valve shall be 2-way, normally closed, 115 V, (50
- 200 tons l/2”, 200 - 1,000 tons 3/4”, over 1,000 tons 1 I’).
e. Chemical tank shall be 50 gallon polyethylene with fiberglass lid.
Chemical pump shall be mounted on tank lid.
C. Water Treatment for Closed Systems: (Chilled and Hot Water).
1. General:
2.
a. Water treatment equipment, chemicals and service shall be effective
in the prevention and control of corrosion.
Equipment:
a. Install a five gallon pot feeder in a by-pass around the circulating
pump.
20 October 1997 Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning
Carlsbad Clty Library 15800-49 96013
3. Cleaning:
a. Flush system until clear. Add Water Chemists Division Cleaning
Compound 60L at a rate of one gallon per 100 gallons in system.
Circulate for not less than 8 hours. Drain and flush until water is
clear and all traces of cleaner have been removed. Clean all
strainers.
4. Chemicals:
a. Add Water Chemists Division CSC 311 corrosion inhibitor to the
recommended level of concentration and furnish an equal amount.
Furnish an inhibitor test set.
b. Water treatment supplier shall supervise cleaning and charging and
shall submit a written report to the architect certifying that these
operations have been satisfactorily completed.
3.15 TEST AND BALANCE OF AIR AND WATER SYSTEM:
A. The Contractor shall, at his own expense, procure the service of an independent air
balance and testing agency approved by the Owner, which specializes in the
balancing and testing of heating, air conditioning and ventilating systems, to balance
adjust and test all air moving equipment, air distribution systems and exhausting
systems as herein specified. All instruments used by this agency shall be
accurately calibrated and maintained in good working order. If requested, the test
shall be conducted in the presence of the Owner and/or his representative.
B. Air balance and testing shall not begin until system has been completed and is in
full working order. The Contractor shall put all heating, ventilating and air
conditioning systems and equipment in full operation and shall continue the
operation of same during each working day of testing and balancing. The Contractor
shall submit, within fifteen (15) days after receipt of contract, one copy of submittal
data for the testing and balancing of the air conditioning, heating and ventilating
systems. The air balance agency shall provide proof of having successfully
completed at least five projects of similar size and scope, and shall be a certified
member of the Associated Air Balance Council, @ABC) and/or National
Environmental Balance Bureau (NEBB), and shall comply with all Council
Standards.
C. Test and balance agency shall include an extended warranty of ninety (90) days
after completion of test and balancing work, during which time the Owner, at his
discretion, may request a recheck or resetting of any outlet, supply air fan, or
exhaust fan as listed in test report. The agency shall provide technicians to assist
the Engineer in making any test he may require during this period of time.
20 October 1997 Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning Carlsbad City Library 15800-50 96013
D. The Air Conditioning Contractor shall award the test and
balance contract to the approved agency upon receipt of his contract to proceed
with air conditioning installation, to allow the air balance agency to schedule this
work in cooperation with other trades involved and comply with the completion date.
E. Upon completion @f the air conditioning system, the air balance agency shall
perform the following tests, compile the test data, and submit six copies of the
complete test data to the Contractor for forwarding to the Owners for evaluation and
approval.
F. Air Testing Procedure: The Contractor shall perform the testing and balancing of
air systems in accordance with AABC National Standards for testing and balancing
heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems, or NEBB procedural standards
for testing, balancing, and adjusting of environmental systems. All tests described
in same shall be performed the same as if written herein.
G. Water Testing Procedure: Include data listed below:
1. Pumps:
a. Installation Data:
Manufacturer and Model
Size
Type Drive
Motor HP, Voltage, Phase, and Full Load Amps.
b. Design Data:
G.P.M.
Head
R.P.M.
BHP and Amps.
C. Recorded Data:
Discharge Pressures (Full-Flow and No-Flow)
Suction Pressures (Full-Flow and No-Flow)
Operating Head
Operating G.P.M. (From pump curves if metering is not provided)
No-Load Amps (Where possible)
Full-Flow Amps
No-Flow Amps
20 October 1997 Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning
Carlsbad City Library 15800-51 96013
2. Cooling Tower:
a. Installation Data:
Manufacturer, Model and Type
G.P.M.
l.nlet (entering) and Outlet (leaving) Temperatures
b. Recorded Data:
G.P.M. (If metered)
Entering and Leaving Water Temperature
3. Air Heating and Cooling Equipment:
a. Design Data:
Load in B.t.u.h. or MBH
G.P.M.
Entering and Leaving Water Temperature
Entering and Leaving Air Conditions (D.B. and W.B.)
C.F.M.
Water Pressure Drop
b. Recorded Data:
Type of Equipment and Identification (Location or number
designation)
Entering and Leaving Air Conditions (D.B. and W.B.)
Entering and Leaving Water Temperatures
G.P.M. (If metered)
Temperature Rise or Drop
4. Water Chilling Units:
a. Installation Data:
Manufacturer and Model
Motor H.P., Voltage, Cycles, Phase, and Full Load Amps.
Part Load Amperes
G.P.M. - Chiller and Condenser
Water Pressure Drop - Chiller and Condenser
Entering and Leaving Water Temperature - Chiller and Condenser
b. Recorded Data (Chiller and Condenser):
G.P.M. Water Pressure Drop Entering and Leaving Water Temperature Amperes
20 October 1997 Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning
Carlsbad City Library 15800-52 96013
.- 3.16 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. The Contractor shall furnish three Operating and
Maintenance Manuals. The information in these manuals shall be bound in a
hardback, loose-leaf binder or approved equivalent. The following shall be inscribed
on the cover: The words “OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL,” the name
and location of the building or project, and the name of the Contractor. The
following shall be included in the manual:
1. Identification: The Manual shall include the names, addresses and
telephone numbers of each Sub-Contractor installing equipment and
systems and of the local representative for each major item of equipment.
2. Index: The Manual shall have a Table of Contents and information shall be
assembled with tab sheets to conform to the Table of Contents.
3.17 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS SHALL BE AS FOLLOWS:
.-
-
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
Manufacturer’s Literature: Manufacturer’s
instructions for operation and maintenance of all mechanical equipment, including
replacement parts list.
Written Instructions: Typewritten instructions for
operation and maintenance of the system, composed of Operation Instructions,
Maintenance Instructions and Maintenance Schedule.
Operation and Maintenance Instructions: A brief
description of the system indicating proper setting of switches and other equipment
shall be furnished for the purpose of providing control of the system and its
components by the operator.
Maintenance Schedule: A list of each item of equipment
requiring maintenance, showing the exact type of bearing on every component of
each item of equipment, and the month of the year when each item of equipment
should be inspected or serviced.
Verbal Instructions: Upon completion of the work, and at a time designated by the
Owner, a competent Engineer from each supplier of major items or equipment shall
be furnished to instruct the Owner’s representative in the operation and
maintenance of the equipment supplied by his company.
Mounting Frames: Wood frame and glass cover of adequate size to mount
directories and typewritten instructions, securely mounted where indicated by
Owner.
Binders: A complete set of the above data along with control diagrams as installed,
typewritten sequence of operationss, complete catalog data, calibrated information,
spare parts lists, etc., for all control equipment shall be placed in a loose leaf binder
20 October 1997 Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning Carlsbad City Library 15800-53 96013
with permanent cover, permanent identification section dividers and index. Provide
three complete sets and deliver to the Owner.
1. Manufacturel’s Literature:. Include manufacturer’s literature for all
mechanical equipment. All equipment shall be identified by make, model
and serial number. Electrical characteristics shall be noted. A Complete
parts list shall be included.
2. Operating Instructions: Provide a brief description of the system including
proper setting of switches and other equipment. This may be provided as
a part of the manufacturer’s literature. If included in literature, provide an
Index indicating on what page each item is located. Adjustments requiring
the technical knowledge of the service agency personnel need not be
included.
3. Maintenance Instructions: Provide a list of each item of mechanical
equipment requiring inspection, lubrication or service with a description of
the schedule and performance of such maintenance, including types of
lubricant for each item of equipment. This may be provided as a part of the
Manufacturer’s Literature. If included in literature, provide an Index
indicating on what page each item is located.
3.18 POSTED OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
A. Control diagram as installed. The diagram shall indicate all installed components.
A typewritten sequence shall be included with or on the diagram, referring to
component numbers or designations thereon. A copy of this diagram shall be
posted in a mounting frame on or near the equipment of the system described and
shall be plainly marked. In addition, a copy shall be included in the binder.
Complete catalog data, calibration information, spare parts lists, etc. on all control
equipment shall be included in the binder.
* * * END OF SECTION l * *
20 October 1997 Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning
Carlsbad City Library 1580044 96013
SECTION 15900
BUILDING CONTROL SYSTEM
PART 1 GENEMl m
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This section pertains to the provision of the computerized Building Control System
as herein specified in its entirety. This contractor shall base his bid on the system
as specified.
1.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. The Building Control System (BCS) and HVAC equipment with integral controls
(PICs) herein specified shall be fully integrated and installed as a complete package
by the contractor. The BCS shall include all computer software and hardware,
operator input/output devices, Product integrated Controls (PIC), Field Installed
Devices (FID), software option modules, automation sensors and controls, and
associated wiring and piping.
B. All automation equipment and HVAC equipment with integrated controls shall be
supplied by one manufacturer.
C. The engineering, installation supervision and labor, calibration, software
programming, and checkout necessary for a complete and fully operational BCS as
specified hereafter shall be provided by this contractor.
D. The direct digital temperature control sub-system shall consist of all sensing
devices, controllers, microprocessor- based Product Integrated Controls (PIC) and
Field Installed Devices (FID), input/output devices, controlled devices and other
accessory equipment along with a complete system of electrical wiring to meet the
intent of the specification and provide for a complete and operable system.
1.3 PRODUCTS FURNISHED BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION
A. Automatic valves and separable wells for water sensors provided under this
contract.
B. Flow devices and other piping accessories.
Items A and B are installed by others
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library Building Control System
15900-l 96013
1.4 RELATED SECTIONS
A. General provisions and mechanical systems as specified in other sections of
Division 15.
B. All wiring shall comply with local and national electrical codes and the requirements
of Division 16 of this specification.
C. Dedicated Electrical power source (120VAC) for FlDs and other field installed
system elements supplied under this contract shall be provided under Division 16
of this specification.
1.5 REFERENCES
A. UL 916
B. EIA RS-485, RS-232C
C. ASCII
D. FCC
E. NFPA-9OA
1.6 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. The Building Control System shall be made up of HVAC equipment with
factory-installed microprocessor-based Product Integrated Controls (PIC), distributed
microprocessor-based Field Installed Devices (FID), input/output modules, sensors,
software option modules, and necessary software.
B. The Product Integrated Controls (PIC) shall be factory-installed controls capable of
stand alone operation. The controller shall be specifically designed to operate and
monitor the functions of the HVAC equipment on which it is installed. The PIC shall
be capable of easily interfacing onto the network without the addition of hardware.
C. The Field Installed Devices (FID) shall be capable of stand-alone operation, as well
as interfacing with the networked Building Control System.
D. This Contractor shall provide all necessary documentation and training as required
to provide the owner with a complete, operable control system.
E. Manufacturers: Carrier Corporation, The Trane Company or an approved equal.
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Building Control System
15900-2 96013
1.7 SUBMITTALS
,r
A. Diagrams: Separate wiring diagrams for each system including power sources
through starters, motors and HOA’s, locations of instruments,and the normal position
of valves, dampers and relays. A detailed description of the operation of the control
system, including control device designation, product numbers and descriptions shall
accompany the drawings.
B. Submit Building Control Systems, shop drawings and data listed below, for approval
prior to installation.
1. Controls including control diagrams, control panel layouts, descriptions of
operations and hardware materials listings.
2.
3.
Communications bus schematics showing PIC and FID panel layouts.
List of connected data points, including FID and PIC panels to which they are
connected, and input/output device.
4. Central work station(s) PC configuration, complete with all peripheral devices,
modems, etc., with interconnecting diagrams.
5. Technical specification data sheets of each system component.
6. Descriptive data and sequence of operation of all software, including complete
operator’s manual and custom programming.
C. Complete Building Control System documentation shall be provided prior to project
completion. Provide shop drawings showing the as installed interconnection between
control system devices and related connections to items provided by others. Provide
sequences of operation and a complete input/output summary indicating input and
output devices and their connection points.
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The Building Controls Contractor shall have factory-trained engineers and technical
representatives fully capable of providing instructions, routine maintenance and
emergency service on all system components.
B. The Building Control System shall be listed under UL916 (Energy Management
System) for components that are not part of the HVAC equipment. The controllers
that are part of the HVAC equipment and are factory wired and installed shall be UL
or ETL listed under their applicable equipment listing.
C. The Building Control System shall comply with the requirements of part 15 of the FCC
rules for a class A computing device.
.- 20 October 1997 Building Control System
Carlsbad City Library 159003 96013
1.9 MATERIALS, STORAGE 8, HANDLING
A. All components shipped to the job site and stored on site shall be the responsibility
of the Mechanical Contractor. Component materials stored at the job site shall be in
a clean, dry storage location.
1.10 COORDINATION -
A. This Contractor shall coordinate with other trades to assure a complete and
operational Building Control System.
1 .l 1 WARRANTY
A. The installation,temperature control system equipment, (except PIC and HVAC
equipment furnished and installed under another section) shall be warranted to be
free from defects in workmanship and materials for a period of 12 months. The
warranty period shall commence after 60 days of beneficial use, measured from the
date of the Mechanical Contractor start-up of the HVAC Equipment, or from date of
acceptance, whichever comes first.
1 .I2 TRAINING
A. Prior to completion of the work and acceptance by the owner, the contractor shall
provide 16 hours of instruction on the Building Control System to the owners
operating personnel.
B. The Building Control System manufacturer shall make available to the owner
regularly scheduled training courses for the ongoing training of owners operating
personnel at additional expense.
1 .I3 CALIBRATION AND TESTING
A. This contractor shall calibrate all building-controlled system equipment and verify
operation before this system is placed on-line. All testing, calibrating, and adjusting
shall be completed by the contractor prior to the start of the acceptance test. All DDC
control loops, interlocks, sequences, energy management programs, and alarms shall
be tested and proper operation verified.
B. The Product Integrated Control (PIG) shall be factory-installed, configured and tested.
Specific job site configuration, such as setpoints and time schedules, shall be
completed before the HVAC equipment on which it is installed is placed in operation.
C. All testing, calibrating, and adjusting of individual HVAC equipment PIC controls shall
be done as a part of that individual unit’s start-up and acceptance. Only the PIC
Network communications shall be included with the controls acceptance test.
20 October 1997 Building Control System
Carlsbad City Library 159004 96013
,/+- 1.14 ACCEPTANCE TEST
A. This contractor shall request that the owners representative witness an acceptance
test. The acceptance test will consist of not less than 5 consecutive, normal working
days in which the operational Building Control System is demonstrated to be
functioning properly in accordance with all requirements of this specification. Items
that are considered to be operating improperly will be listed on a punch list which this
contractor will correct. When all of the items on the punch list have been corrected
this contractor will request a re-test of these punch list items. When the system is
shown to be performing satisfactorily, it will be considered accepted and the warranty
will begin.
I .I5 BENEFICIAL USE
A. The following shall be construed to define beneficial use of system:
1. Receipt of temporary certificate of occupancy.
2. Or, in lieu of above, when the owner receives use of the building control system
to occupy the facility, or the date of Mechanical Contractor start-up of the
HVAC equipment, whichever occurs first.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
A. The Building Control System (BCS) shall provide both monitoring and control of the
building’s mechanical and electrical systems for direct digital control of heating,
ventilating and air conditioning equipment, lighting, and facility management.
B. The system shall use fully distributed processing and be capable of performing all
application routines and data storage as described herein without requiring an on-line
central computer.
C. The Product Integrated Control (PIC) shall be capable of operating as a stand-alone
device controlling all required functions of the equipment on which it is installed. The
PIC shall have software designed to control each equipment function. The PIC shall
support network communications without the need for any additional hardware or
software.
D. The local Field Installed Device (FID) shall be capable of operating independently to
perform building temperature control and facility management. The FID shall have the
capability to automatically switch the equipment that it is controlling to a fail-safe
position in the event of a malfunction or power failure.
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Building Control System
15900-5 96013
E. The system shall be fully automatic. All control functions shall be able to be
performed without operator intervention.
F. The construction of the equipment, both physically and electronically, shall be
modular in nature.
G. The system shall offer flexibility with regards to:
1. System Layout.
2. Placement of field sensors & control devices.
3. Field equipment (FIDs, etc.) locations.
4. Product Integrated Controls (PIC) network interface.
2.2 HARDWARE
A. Computer
1. The computer shall be supplied with the following features as a minimum:
a.
b.
ii:
F*
9. h.
i.
j. k.
I.
m.
n.
200 MHz Pentium processor with MMX technology
3.8 Gegabyte hard drive
32 Megabytes of ED0 RAM
3 l/2” 1.44 Megabyte diskette drive
12x speed cd-rom drive
1 serial and 1 parallel port
Mouse with bus port or seperate serial port
6 MB ED0 Video Memory
3D Graphic Accelerator
36.6 kbps modem
Enhanced keyboard
17” Monitor (.28 dpi maximum)
Graphic accelleator card
Wrndows NT 4.0 Operating System
2. BACnet. The Building Controller shall read and write BACnet objects (Analog input,
analog output, analog value, binary input, binary output, binary value, device) and allow
their use in system applications as
2.3 -FIELD INSTALLED DEVICE (FID)
A. The FID shall be a solid state microprocessor-based controller that regulates building
equipment using closed-loop direct digital control and facility management routines.
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Building Control System
15900-6 96013
B. The FID shall provide local interface for all operating values via a hand-held local
interface device. The FID shall be capable of displaying values as either SI metric or
in customary U.S. units. The FID shall be capable of interfacing to a portable PC for
the purpose of setting the address and baud rate; verifying network communications;
displaying data; configuring operating parameters; uploads/downloads; overrides and
entering or editing custom programs.
C. The FID shall be provided with a crystal-controlled clock plus latches, decoders, and
buffers and a real time clock, which semes as a time base for all software operations.
A 365-day calendar function shall also be provided.
D. The FID shall have the capability to control and monitor building points. These points
shall be input or output, analog or discrete. A modular design concept shall be used
and the modules available shall consist of the following:
E. 1600 Comfort Controller:
1. 8 Inputs The inputs shall be capable of monitoring analog and digital sensors.
Analog inputs shall be field selectable to be thermistor, RTD, and 4-20ma
(internally or externally powered).
2. 8 Outputs the outputs shall be used to provide control to analog and discrete
outputs. Analog outputs shall be field selectable to be either 4-20ma or
2-IOVDC. Digital outputs shall be field selectable as either latched or pulsed.
F. High voltage input/output module - This module shall control up to eight internal
relays for high voltage applications (up to 230VAC). This module shall be remotely
mounted in a separate enclosure when used with voltages of 120VAC and higher.
G. Modules shall be installed in a NEMA type enclosure. The FID enclosures shall be
complete with commonly-keyed locking doors. Field terminal strips shall utilize screw
connections and shall be of the plug-in type. I/O modules or panels that require the
disconnecting of field wiring from screw terminals for module replacement shall not
be acceptable.
H. The processor module shall include a microprocessor, sufficient RAM to support a
minimum of 64 field points without memory expansion. RS232 and RS485 ports shall
be provided for communications. LED’s shall provide for power and communication
status.
I. Power indication and watchdog timer diagnostic indication shall be provided by a LED
to indicate that the panel is powered up and functioning properly. The watchdog timer
shall reset upon power on and be resettable by software thereafter. Should the
watchdog timer not be resettable during the timing period, it shall time out and set all
outputs to their non-powered state. The LED shall illuminate solidly to indicate this
failure.
/- 20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Building Control System
15900-7 96013
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
0.
Communication status shall be indicated by a LED. This LED shall flash whenever
the unit is sending a data transmission.
All RAM and the real-time 365day calendar clock shall have battery-backup for a
minimum of one year.
The processor shall communicate to all of the connected points of the I/O modules
at least once a second at 9600 baud.
Modules shall be capable of being remotely mounted from the processor. These I/O
modules shall be capable of operating within a temperature range of 40 to +158OF.
and up to 900/6 relative humidity.
The input/output (l/O) modules shall be microprocessor-based and shall indicate
power, watchdog timer diagnostic indication, and processor communications status
via LEDs. The function of the LEDs shall be consistent with that of the processor
module.
The FID shall be capable of operating in either a stand-alone mode or as part of a
network with Comfort Works(s) and other FlDs and PICs. The FID shall be capable
of local configuration via a Local Interface Device and portable PC, as well as remote
configuration via a Comfort Works. The operator shall be capable of making changes
to FID software configuration as required from either types of devices.
2.4 FIELD INSTALLED DEVICE (FID) SOFTWARE
A. The Field Installed Device (FID) shall provide stand-alone operation. The FID shall
accept analog and discrete signals from sensors, switches, relays, etc. and shall
multiplex the various signals into digital format. All closed loop direct digital control
shall utilize FID-based software algorithms that shall be resident in FID memory. All
standard and/or custom control FID-based algorithms shall operate independently,
and systems that require an on-line host computer or intermediary processor to
control mechanical and/or electrical equipment are not acceptable.
B. FID resident software shall include the following:
1. Time Schedules - A minimum of sixteen (16) time schedules per FID are
required. Each time schedule shall include provisions for eight individual-day
types (Monday through Sunday and holidays), and each individual-day type
shall contain at least seven individual on-off time periods.
2. The FID shall support one minute granularity. Systems that use a granularity
of greater then one minute shall not be accepted.
20 October 1997 Building Control System
Carlsbad City Library 15900-8 96013
3. Setpoint Schedules - A minimum of twelve (12) separately assignable setpoint
schedules are required per FID. Each setpoint schedule shall be individually
definable in terms of:
C.
a. Engineering Units
b. Occupied High Setpoint
i.
Occupied Low Setpoint
Unoccupied High Setpoint
e. Unoccupied Low Setpoint
FID software shall offer capability to link specific time schedules with corresponding
setpoint schedules for any particular DDC loop.
D. The operator shall be able to modify, add or delete time and setpoint schedules with
a Comfort Works, portable PC and a Local Interface Device.
E. The FID shall provide a powerfail restart routine that shall provide an adjustable
staggered time delay for each DO point selected to avoid sudden power peaks.
2.5 INPUT/ OUTPUT SIGNAL PROCESSING
A. FID resident software shall perform the following:
1.
2
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
r- 20 October 1997
Input Processing
Each connected and/or calculated input point shall be independently processed
to provide accurate data values. All point processing shall be performed by the
FID. All connected and calculated points, both analog and discrete, shall be
individually configurable and be capable of remote alarm annunciation at a
connected Comfort Works.
Input points may be added, deleted or modified via the Local Interface Device,
portable PC and if tied into a network by the Comfort Works.
Discrete input points shall be monitored for status, alarm or consumable data.
Analog inputs shall be monitored in order to provide feedback to a control loop,
to annunciate that an analog alarm limit has been exceeded, to offer
centralized analog monitoring and/or to monitor consumable data.
Discrete and analog inputs shall be able to interact with FID resident algorithms
for local processing, or to provide a value for updating or alarm annunciation
at a Comfort Works.
The ability to monitor multiple inputs as a group shall be provided if tied into a
network with a Comfort Works.
Building Control System
Carlsbad City Library 15900-g 96013
8. FID software shall include a trim or offset function to allow for field recalibration
of analog input sensors.
B. Alarm Processing
1. The FID shall contain a routine to process alarms. Alarm processing shall be
initiated once per second and shall consist of a scan of all input points. The
status of a digital input shall be able to be compared to a discrete output or to
be independently monitored for alarm logic purposes. An analog input shall be
capable of comparison to a setpoint schedule, a related system output or a
preset alarm limit. Alarm processing logic shall also monitor return to normal
conditions as part of the alarm scan.
C. Output Processing
1. Discrete Outputs
a. Discrete outputs shall be used to command two state devices (on/off,
open/close, etc.). Each discrete output point must be capable of being
individually configured by the operator.
b. Provide the following four types of discrete output signals as a minimum:
Normal control :24vdc coil relay energized whenever “on”
is the commanded state.
2) Inverted control :24vdc coil relay de-energized whenever
“on” is the commanded state.
3) Pulse on: A one-second duration energizing pulse shall
be delivered to a 24vdc relay whenever the commanded
state changes from “off’ to “on”.
4) Pulse off: A one-second duration energizing pulse shall
be delivered to a 24vdc relay whenever the commanded
state changes from “on” to “off”.
C. Pulses shall be retransmitted hourly to all selected pulse “off’ discrete
outputs.
d. The following types of direct digital control routines shall be provided for
discrete outputs:
1) EnthalpyIAnalog Comparison
2) Analog
3) Interlock
4) Time Clock/Cycling
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Building Control System
15900-10 96013
e. EnthalpylAnalog Comparison - Provide a program which shall compare
the enthalpy of two streams of air and issues discrete outputs based on
a simple comparison of any two analog input points of the same type.
f. Analog - Provide a program to command discrete outputs based on the
comparison of the present value of up to sixteen analog input points with
a high/low setpoint value. Two setpoints shall be assignable as a
minimum: one for occupied hours and a second for unoccupied hours.
Interlock - Provide the capability to create software interlocks between
discrete input and output points.
h. Time Clock/Cycling - Provide the capability to control a discrete output
based upon time of day (occupied, unoccupied or both). Individual loads
which shall be controlled by this program shall be selectable via the Local
Interface Device, portable PC or the Comfort Works. The program shall
contain operator assignable time values to help prevent short cycling.
2. Analog Outputs
a. Analog outputs shall be used to command modulating/variable position
devices. Each analog output shall be capable of individual configuration
via either the Local Interface Device, portable PC or the Comfort Works.
b. As a minimum, the following preprogrammed analog out algorithms shall
be resident at the FID:
1) Cooling Coil Control with Dehumidification
2) Heating Coil Control
3) Mixed Air Damper Control
4) Air Reset
5) Water Reset
6) Variable Frequency Drives
7) Sequenced Cooling and Heating Coil Control
C. Systems which require a host computer to perform any of the above
algorithms shall not be acceptable.
d. Cooling Coil Control - Provide the capability to control the chilled water
valve serving an air handler cooling coil or any other cooling source with
a modulating valve. The valve shall be controlled to prevent the space
temperature and humidity from exceeding the desired temperature and
humidity setpoints. The valve shall be closed if space temperature and
humidity are below these setpoints. Two setpoints shall be available: one
for occupied hours and a second for unoccupied hours.
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Building Control System
15900-I 1 96013
e. Heating Coil Control - Provide the capability to control the hot water valve
serving an air handler heating, reheat coils, or any other heating source
with a modulating valve. The valve shall be controlled to prevent the
space temperature from failing below the desired heating setpoint and
shall be held closed subject to a low limit if space temperature is above
this setpoint. Two setpoints shall be available: one for occupied hours
-and a second for unoccupied hours.
f. Mixed Air Damper Control - Provide the capability to control the mixed air
dampers of an air handling unit. Whenever outside air conditions are
unsuitable for atmospheric cooling, the dampers shall be held at an
adjustable minimum outside air position. Whenever outside air conditions
are suitable for atmospheric cooling, the mixed air dampers shall be
modulated as required to maintain an optimal space temperature which
is between the heating setpoint occupied and the cooling setpoint
occupied.
The cooling coil, heating coil and mixed air damper control algorithm,
shall be inherently interlocked as part of the standard software to provide
the most efficient use of return and outside air conditions.
h. Air Reset - Provide the capability to control an air handling unit coil to
maintain a setpoint which shall vary in linear proportion with another
analog temperature sensor. Two separate reset schedules shall be
provided: one for occupied hours and a second for unoccupied hours.
i. Water Reset - Provide the capability to control a modulating valve to
maintain a supply water temperature setpoint which shall vary in linear
proportion with another analog temperature sensor. Two reset schedules
shall be available: one for occupied hours and a second for unoccupied
hours.
2.6 OVERRIDES AND INTERLOCKS
A. Provide the capability to manually override a FID input or output value and input a
different value in its place. Manual overrides shall be capable of being initiated via the
Local interface Device, portable PC or the Comfort Works. Ail manually initiated
overrides shall be manually removed.
B. Provide the capability for event initiated overrides of normal control algorithms.
Specific preprogrammed interlock sequence programming shall be configured via
either the Local Interface Device, portable PC or the Comfort Works.
20 October 1997 Building Control System
Carlsbad City Library 15900-l 2 96013
- 2.7 FID DATA TRANSFER
A. Provide the capabilii for FID’s to receive and utiiize I/O point data from other FID’s.
The FID shall be able to utiiize this data as an input for particular control algorithms
or for specific control interlocks and/or overrides. FID data transfer shall occur
independent of the Comfort Works. Systems which require a host or central computer
to be either in the system architecture or “on-line” are not acceptable.
B. FID data transfer capabilities shall apply to all DDC and facility management
application software included or referenced in this specification. It shall provide the
capability to add various i/O devices to any FID in the system and allow the operator
to link any input to any output or algorithm in use in the system. Systems which
require a direct electrical connection in order to receive point data shall not be
acceptable.
C. The FID shall also be capable of broadcasting data to other system elements. This
data shall include items such as: outside air temperature, time of day, etc.
2.8 FID FACILITY MANAGEMENT APPLICATION SOFTWARE
A. The FID shall contain the following preprogrammed application software:
1. Night Time Free Cooling (NTFC)
a. Provide the software capabilities to start fans during unoccupied hours
in order to purge residual internal heat load and lower the temperature
of the facility structure. Outside ambient air shall be used exclusively for
night time free cooling purposes.
2. Adaptive Optimal Start
a. Provide the software capabilities necessary to delay the morning start-up
of applicable HVAC systems until the last possible moment and still allow
the building space to reach occupant comfort levels according to the
selected occupied time and setpoint schedules for that particular space.
b. Space temperature, occupied and unoccupied setpoints, outside air
temperature, U-factors, and other thermodynamic characteristics shall be
incorporated into the program in order to provide the adaptive corrective
action that is required. These factors shall be configurable on a per
system basis, and ail factors shall be user-definable. Program shall
continuously adapt these factors using a “learning” process to calculate
most optimum start time. Programs which require manual fine-tuning of
each fan system’s algorithms shall not be acceptable.
.-
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Building Control System
15900-I 3 96013
3. Adaptive Optimal Stop
a. Provide the software capabilities necessary to allow the temperature of
a controlled space to drift to a wider temperature range prior to the end
of the occupancy period. Adaptive optimal stop programs which turn off
equipment prior to the end of the occupancy period shall not be
-acceptable.
2.9 CUSTOM PROGRAMMING
A. Provide a FID-based, user-friendly interactive, “on-line” programming language for
the purpose of creating custom programs for specific, unique applications. Complex
control strategies shall be able to be developed by the end user. All custom
programming must be performed in English language commands, and all inputs,
outputs, variables and flags shall be addressable by user specific English names
without requiring alphanumeric addresses or point numbers. Programming languages
such as BASIC or FORTRAN shall not be acceptable for these applications, and the
custom programs shall be retained in FID memory and shall not require a host CPU
in order to operate correctly. Custom programs shall be capable of supporting either
Si metric or customary US units. Ail custom control programs shall be on-line
modifiable and all custom programming point data shall be capable of being
transferred from one FID to another directly without an on-line CPU or host computer.
2.10 COMMUNICATING INPUT/OUTPUT MODULE
A. The communications input/output module shall be a general purpose software
storage module that is connected to the Communications Bus. The module shall be
capable of performing the following functions:
1. Interface between remotely located Comfort Works and Communications Bus.
2. Interface with Product Integrated Controls, Field Installed Devices and
Electronic Space Control.
3. Interface between primary and secondary Communications Buses.
4. The Communicating Input/Output module shall come with two, three-wire
termination blocks (one for power,one for communication). it shall be capable
of being wired into the Communications Bus in any location.
5. The Communicating input/Output module shall be rail mountable and capable
of being installed in an enclosure with other input/output modules.
20 October 1997
Carisbad City Library
Building Control System
15900-14 96013
/“- 2.11 COMMUNICATIONS BUS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
The Communications Bus shall be a three-conductor cable with shield. EIA Standard
RS-485 Communications protocol shall be employed. The communications bus shall
comply with FCC part 15, Subpart J, class A for bus radiated and conductive noise.
Communications Bus shall be capable of having multiple system elements connected.
Each Communications Bus shall allow for the use of modules as an interface to
secondary Buses.
The data transmission rate on the Bus shall be based on the slowest device on the
Bus. The Communications shall be selectable to be 1200,2400,4800 or 9600 baud.
Whenever the Communications Bus enters or leaves a building, the Bus shall be
provided with adequate lightning suppression devices.
The Communications Bus shall be capable of communicating through a telephone
modem to a remote building. This interface shall allow any Comfort Works to
communicate with any other remotely located, compatible, Communications Bus.
The Communications Bus shall permit a minimum of 5 Comfort Workss and/or
telephone modem interfaces to be connected.
/L-- 2.12 FIELD INSTALLED SENSORS i
A. Space Temperature Sensors
1. Space Temperature Sensors shall be 5,000 or 10,000 ohm thermistor with wall
plate adapter and blank cover assembly. The sensor shall include an integral
occupancy override button and shall also include a RJI 1 communications port.
The Space Temperature Sensors shall be mounted approximately 60” above
the floor.
2.13 DUCT TEMPERATURE SENSORS
A. Duct Temperature Sensors shall be 1000 ohm averaging RTD’s, 5,000 or 10,000 ohm
thermistors.
2.14 WATER TEMPERATURE SENSORS
A. Water Temperature Sensors shall be well mounted 5,000 or 10,000 ohm thermistors
or 1000 ohm RTD’s.
20 October 1997 Building Control System
Carisbad City Library 1590045 96013
2.15 CURRENT TO PRESSURE TRANSDUCERS
A. The Current to Pressure Transducers shall convert the 4 to 20 ma analog output
signal from the controller into a 3-15 psi pneumatic output. it shall contain a O-30 PSI
manifold gauge that indicates the actual output air pressure. LED’s shall be provided
to indicate power, fill or bleed status. It shall provide for a minimal air consumption
and feedback to the FID module as to the actual output air pressure.
2.16 FLOW SENSORS
A. Flow Measuring Sensors shall be complete with safety shut-off valves and all
necessary connections. Flow sensors shall generate a 4-20 ma proportional signal.
2.17 MOMENTARY PUSH-BUTTON - TENANT OVERRIDE
A. A field installed momentary push-button shall be installed where shown on the plans
to initiate the timed override period.
2.18 STATUS INDICATION
A. Status indication for fans and pumps shall be provided by a current sensing sensor.
The sensor shall be installed at the motor starter or motor to provide load indication.
The unit shall consist of a current transformer, a solid state current sensing circuit
(with adjustable set point) and a solid state switch. A red light emitting diode (LED)
shall indicate the on off status of the unit. The switch shall provide a N.O. contact for
wiring back to the FID. Sensors provided for water applications shall include safety
shut-off valves and all necessary connections.
2.19 HIGH TEMPERATURE DETECTION THERMOSTATS
A. High Temperature Detection Thermostats shall be provided to stop each air handling
system as indicated and shall be of the manual reset type with sensing element
arranged to insert into duct or casing and shall be set for 165OF. The device shall
have a double pole, double throw contact for fan shutdown and remote alarming.
2.20 LOW TEMPERATURE DETECTION THERMOSTAT
A. Low Temperature Detection Thermostat shall be provided to stop each air handling
system as indicated and shall be of the manual reset type unless otherwise specified
with sensing element not less than 20 feet long. Any one foot of sensing element,
when subjected to temperatures below setpoint of controller, shall actuate thermostat
switch mechanism regardless of temperature being sensed by the remainder of the
element. The device shall have double pole, double throw contacts for fan shut down
and remote alarming.
20 October 1997 Building Control System
Carisbad City Library 15900-16 96013
2.21 DUCT RELATIVE HUMIDITY
-
A. Duct Relative Humidity Sensors shall have a range of O-l 00% RH. The sensors shall
be electronic type. The measuring accuracy shall be 5% over the range.
2.22 SPACE RELATIVE HUMIDITY
A. Space Relative Humidity Sensors shall have a O-100% RH range and be provided
with wall plate adapter and blank cover. The sensors shall be electronic type. The
measuring accuracy shall be 5% over the range. Space RH sensors shall be mounted
with top 5’ 6” above floor. Space RH sensors located in areas subject to physical
damage shall be protected with heavy wire and guard assembly.
2.23 CONTROLLED DEVICES
A. Automatic Control Valves
1. All valves shall be equipped with modulating plugs and bronze discs. Valves 2
l/2” or larger shall have screwed-in seat rings.
2. Valves shall be sized by this contractor and guaranteed to be of sufficient size
to meet the capacities shown.
3. Valves 2” and smaller shall have screwed connections. Valves 2 l/2” or larger
shall have iron bodies and flanged ends. All valves shall be of the spring return
type to be either normally open or normally closed as indicated on the plans.
4. The requirements for valves supplied and shipped with the PIC units shall be
specified with-in the applicable portion of the PIG’s (equipment) specification.
B. Automatic Control Dampers
1. The motorized damper actuator shall be a direct current linear stepper type
motor with end switches to eliminate motor stall conditions. It shall have the
ability to operate in a master/slave arrangement. The master shall be
controlled from the thermostat, the slave shall be controlled from the master
damper actuator.
2. Each actuator shall have a 24 volt AC, 20 VA, power supply provided by either
an independent transformer for each actuator or a single transformer sized to
power multiple actuators. This shall be provided in accordance with the
manufacturer’s recommendations.
3. A duct temperature sensor shall be an integral part of the damper actuator
assembly.
.- I 20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Building Control System
15900-17 96013
2.24 Product Integrated Controls - Air Terminals (Digital Air Volume)
A. The Product integrated Control (PIC) shall be a solid state microprocessor based
controller installed and wired at the factory as an integral part of the equipment. The
Terminal Control Unit (TCU) shall control each function of the terminal(s) on which
it is installed and/or controlling, using direct digital control and specifically designed
software. -
B. Ail application software actually performing the required control functions shall be
factory supplied with the PIG pretested and prewnfigured.
C. A Terminal System Manager (TSM) shall be provided to coordinate the operation of
one or more primary air sources with the appropriate parameters for the air terminals
they serve. The TSM shall be supplied and manufactured by the HVAC system
supplier.
D. The networked TSMs shall interface with a microprocessor controller installed on the
primary air source. Each sequence shall use direct digital control with software
specifically designed to perform the control functions specified.
E. The primary air system interface shall be a factory supplied microprocessor based
controller that allows total closed loop system control. The Building Control System
communications network and factory provided software shall allow dynamic
interaction (linkage) of the air terminals with the primary air source to create a
complete Digital Air Volume System (DAV). An Air Source Interface (ASI) device shall
be provided for Air Source microprocessors that do not include resident linkage.
F. The DAV system shall include a 365 day time clock with backup capability. Time
clock shall support hour, minute, day of week, day, month and year.
G. The DAV system shall contain a routine to process alarms. Alarm processing shall
consist of a scan of all input points.
H. The status of a digital input shall be able to be compared to a discrete output. The
PIG shall be shipped with factory entered default alarm thresholds. Alarm processing
logic shall also monitor return to normal conditions as part of the alarm scan.
2.25 TERMINAL PIG CONTROL TYPES
A. PIG controls shall be factory mounted and wired for the following types of Pressure
independent terminals:
1. VAV Single Duct Terminals
2. VAV cooling only
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Building Control System
1590048 96013
3. VAV cooling with on - off hot water reheat
4. Cooling with proportional hot water reheat
-
2.26 TERMINAL CONTROL COMPONENTS
A. As a minimum, the following components shall be supplied by the box manufacturer
at the factory:
1. Air Flow Sensor And Transducer Each air terminal control unit shall include a
multi-point airflow pick-up. The pick-up shall provide a factory piped differential
pressure signal to an air flow transducer assembly. The air flow transducer
shall not require any field calibration and shall be designed to read a flow signal
of 0.0 to 2.0 inches of water.
2. Leaving air temperature sensor The leaving air temperature sensor shall be
factory provided and wired on all air terminal units. The leaving air terminal
sensor shall consist of a thermistor with a nominal resistance of 10000 ohms
at 77 Degrees Fahrenheit.
3. Space Temperature Sensor: The space temperature sensor shall be factory
supplied for field installation as shown on the plans. The sensor shall consist
of a thermistor with a nominal resistance of 10000 ohms at 77 Degrees
Fahrenheit, termination block with screw terminals mounted on a printed circuit
board, push button for remote occupant override, and a remote communication
port (RJll). Sensors shall be capable of including a slide switch that may be
used by the occupant to adjust the heating and cooling setpoints as detailed in
the I/O list, shown on the plans, or mentioned elsewhere within this
specification. The space temperature sensor shall be capable of mounting
directly to a wall or to a standard American electrical junction box.
4. Terminal Damper Actuator The Terminal Control Unit (TCU) shall. contain a
direct coupled actuator used to control the primary air damper of the air
terminal. The actuator shall be constant current and torque limiting to permit the
motor to stall at the full position if intermediate maximum and minimum damper
actuator travel limits are not set. The actuator shall be factory mounted, wired
and installed by the terminal manufacturer.
5. The actuator shall be fully compatible with the electronic control signal for the
TCU microprocessor. The actuator shall be capable of providing a minimum of
35 inch pounds of torque. To insure suitable pressure independent operation,
the actuator shall be capable of going from full open to full closed (or vice
versa) in a minimum of 90 seconds.
20 October 1997
Carisbad City Library
Building Control System
15900-19 96013
6. Terminal Control Unit Enclosure: The terminal unit controller shall be housed
within an enclosure that is rated for air plenum mounting and shall allow for
field wiring connections through the use of screw terminals.
7. Terminal Control Unit Power Requirements: All air terminal units shall be
designed for single point power connections. The power requirements for each
terminal control unit shall be factory wired and supplied for ail units except VAV
single duct terminals that provide cooling only, cooling with hot water reheat,
and all Moduline units. These units shall include an optional factory wired
transformer or a transformer shall be field mounted and wired by this contractor
unless otherwise specified in section 16000.
8. Valve Assemblies: Valve assemblies shall be made up of a valve body,
linkage, and actuator. The actuator must be fully compatible with the terminal
unit control signal. The valve assemblies shall be sized to provide the required
GPMs at the pressure drops specified within this specification. All valve
assemblies shall be field installed per the valve suppliers instructions by the
mechanical contractor. The energy management contractor shall provide ail
necessary wiring and terminations for proper operation unless otherwise
mentioned in section 16000.
9. Ail wire required for the above shall meet all applicable codes and shall be
plenum rated.
2.27 DAV SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
TSM - A Terminal System Manager (TSM) shall be supplied to coordinate the
operation of each terminal with the primary air source such that they operate in
unison as a system.
The TSM shall be configured at the factory to operate at 9600 bits per second as a
minimum on both the primary and secondary network.
Up to 64 TCUs shall be capable of being connected to each TSM. Each TSM shall
provide 12 occupancy schedules as a minimum and shall also provide at least 18
user defined holiday periods. The TSM shall provide a grouping function to simplify
the process of configuration and display.
The DAV system shall have the capability to control up to four like VAV terminals with
one space sensor. Thermostat locations and box assignments are shown on the
project plans. Moduline terminals shall include the ability to control up to four like
terminals with one output piped to ail four terminals, as shown on the plans.
The DAV system shall monitor CFM, discharge temperature, space temperature, air
handler status and mode of operation. it shall also position the terminal damper
based on its PID control algorithms to maintain the desired zone conditions.
20 October 1997 Building Control System
Carisbad City Library 15900-20 96013
/c‘ Depending upon the type of box, the DAV system shall also sequence the terminal’s
unit fan, hot water valve or auxiliary electric heat(ers), or a separately ducted fan coil
unit, as shown on the plans.
F. The TSM shall contain factory installed PID algorithms in battery backed up PAM to
execute its routines. Ail standard control PIC based algorithms shall operate
independently of an on-line host computer. Upon loss of communications between
a TSM and a TCU the TSM shall generate an alarm and the TCU shall position its
damper to maintain its last commanded CFM setpoint. if after ten minutes
communications has not been restored, the TCU shall use its last cooling setpoint in
its PID loop.
G. Each space temperature sensor shall include a push-button as an integral part of the
sensor. Whenever the push-button is pushed during the unoccupied mode the zone
shall be indexed to control to its occupied setpoints, the air source shall start and the
zone shall stay in its occupied mode for the duration of the override period. The timed
override duration shall be operator configurable from O-4 hours.
H. The TSM shall include the following inherent preprogrammed algorithms when
applied to multiple air terminals that are also serviced by a single source of auxiliary
heat:
1. The ability to compensate for critical or high prestige areas with operator
adjustable priority weighting factors when determining the mode of operation.
2. The TSM shall include the ability to insure (operator selectable) that
simultaneous heating and cooling does not occur.
I. if the TSM determines, based on individual zone requirements (including weighting
factors) that heat is required, the VAV boxes associated with the auxiliary heat shall
position their dampers to their minimum cooling CFM setpoint (adjustable) and the
auxiliary heat shall be enabled to satisfy the heating requirements until the TSM has
determined that auxiliary heat is no longer required.
J. The TSM shall be capable of receiving the following information from air sources that
do not include resident linkage software through an air source interface device:
1. Air handler fan status
2. Air handler discharge temperature
3. Smoke pressurization and evacuation status
K. The TSM shall contain a software routine to index air sources that do not include
linkage software to an occupied/unoccupied mode through the air source interface.
/“‘
20 October 1997 Building Control System
Carlsbad City Library 15900-21 96013
2.28 TEMPERATURE ZONE
A. The system shall include the ability to configure and display up to 84 temperature
zones or 84 TCUs per TSM. A temperature zone shall be defined as a space
temperature sensor wired to a TCU.
1. Eachindividual zone shall have the ability to configure and display the
following:
E:
Minimum/maximum CFM limits or the heating and cooling mode
CFM Multiplier (for field calibration if required)
::
Maximum duct temperature
Flow loop multipliers
2’
Alarm setpoints and priority
Override value
E:
Heat/cool temperature setpoints
Time schedule
2. Zones shall have the capability to display the following as a minimum:
2
Zone space temperature
Occupancy schedule
ii:
Commanded position of the damper (O-l 00% of nominal CFM capacity)
Primary CFM and MBTUs/Hr
;*
Fan enabled
Fan Status
9. Filter status
h. Heat stages activevalve position (if applicable)
i. Leaving temperature
3. Group point displays shall have the capability to display the following as a
minimum:
a. Group number and name
b. Occupancy schedule
i.
Minimum space temperature
Zone number of minimum/maximum space temperature
r-
Maximum space temperature
Average zone temperature
9. Total primary air KCFM
h. Operating mode
4. It shall also be possible from this screen to simultaneously force the dampers
to a percentage open and to command all the fans to start/stop for all the air
terminals associated with the respective group.
20 October 1997 Building Control System
Carisbad City Library 15900-22 96013
5. Maintenance Display Screens shall be provided to ease the task of
troubleshooting. The screens shall have the capability to display the following
as a minimum:
a.
b.
C.
d.
t -
9. h.
i.
i.
I.
m.
n.
2.29 LINKAGE
The current CFM setpoint and the actual CFM being delivered.
CFM out of configured limits (CFM measured outside the range of the
configured heat/cool minimum and maximum CFM limits).
CFM clamp in effect (CFM setpoint calculated outside the range of the
limits already defined).
Heat source available
Heat stages active
Supply air temperature.
Valve position
Zone temperature.
Air source mode, supply temperature and fan status.
Average occupied and unoccupied heat/cool setpoints for zones serviced
by their respective air handler.
Average zone temperature, occupied zone temperature, and the next
occupied/unoccupied day and time as well as the previous noccupied day
and time for all terminals serviced by their respective air handler.
Occupancy maintenance screens shall also display such information as
timed override status and duration, current occupied time and current
unoccupied time.
The number of times the damper actuator has opened and closed within
the last hour.
/-
A. The TSM shall have the capability to be directly linked to a factory supplied air source
microprocessor to provide a totally linked and coordinated DAV system. The linkage
shall include the following air source modes as a minimum:
1. Air source on/off status
2. Cooling
3. Heating
4. Morning warm-up
5. Night Time Free Cooling
6. Pressurization
7. Evacuation
20 October 1997 Building Control System
Carlsbad City Library 15900-23 96013
B. The linkage shall also provide system data to the air source for use in its algorithms.
The system data shall include average zone temperature, average occupied zone
temperature, average heat/cool setpoints, occupancy status, and the next occupied
zones terminal time and day. The system shall have the capability of using the above
data in the air source algorithms for adaptive optimal start, night time free cooling,
morning warm-up, supply temperature reset, and mixed air damper routines.
C. The air handler PIC shall through the DAV system, bias its occupancy time schedules
to provide optimization routines and occupant override.
D. The DAV system shall have the capability to provide the following information as a
minimum to air sources that do not include resident linkage software for use within
the microprocessors algorithms through the data transfer option:
1. Average occupied zone temperature
2. Average zone temperature
E. An Air Source Interface (ASI) device shall be provided to interface to air sources that
do not include resident linkage software. The air source interface device shall consist
of a fan status sensor and discharge temperature sensor wired to a microprocessor
that will communicate the air source modes to the air terminals for proper operation.
The ASI shall contain an output relay that will energize whenever the DAV system is
indexed to the occupied mode. This relay output shall be used to properly coordinate
the air handlers. The ASI shall also be capable of accepting contact closures for
smoke pressurization and evacuation. When the ASI is commanded through the
contact closure to provide pressurization, all boxes downstream of the air handier
shall control to the nominal CFM of the box. During the evacuation mode all boxes
downstream of the air handler shall control to 0% CFM.
2.30 ADDITIONAL OPTIONS
A. The following additional options shall also be available with the DAV system:
1. Data collection and transfer
2. History/Energy consumable
2.31 SOFTWARE
A. The Comfort Works shall be provided with Windows NT 4.0 operating system
software which allows the operator to utilize the system with no programming
experience. Screen menu header formats shall be similar to those used by typical
spreadsheet software programs. The system shall support both a keyboard and
mouse.
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Building Control System
15900-24 96013
2.32 PASSWORDS
-
2.33
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
The supervisor shall be capable of configuring the engineering units either as SI
metric or in customary U.S. units.
The system shall be capable of grouping together variables from one or more
controllers (FIDs or PICs) for the purpose of displaying and modifying their status on
one screen. Graphic displays shall also be provided in the same manner. All displays
shall be dynamically updated.
The Supervisor shall be capable of backing up an entire data base or single controller
through the Comfort Works main sub-menu. This process shall not echo any DOS
type error messages. For example, if a diskette becomes full during a back-up the
operator shall be instructed to remove the diskette and insert a new one so that the
back-up can continue. The user shall not be prompted with a, “Disk full, file cannot
be copied” message.
The Supervisor shall be capable of supporting multi-buildings with multi-tenants.
The Comfort Works shall be capable of broadcasting the day of the week and current
time to all controllers or any one controller on the bus.
A. This software module shall provide protection from unauthorized individuals. It shall
also provide the ability for a top level operator to add, delete or modify other
operators access to the system.
B. The Comfort Works shall have a minimum of five password levels. Each higher level
shall permit greater access to the system. The highest level shall have access to
password entry.
D. Each operator shall be prompted for a user name and password. Passwords shall
not be displayed. Software shall determine if password is valid before allowing
operator access. Up to five (5) attempts will be allowed before system returns to log
on screen.
E. A minimum of ten (10) user name/passwords shall be supported.
OPERATOR INTERFACE
A. The operator interface software module shall provide a menu with mouse cursor and
first letter select to access the control system. It shall provide the ability to monitor,
configure and modify Product Integrated Controls (PIC), Field Installed Devices (FID)
and other network modules.
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Building Control System
15900-25 96013
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
All displays on the Comfort Works shall follow a standard format. The standard
screen format shall consist of a current data line, a status line, a two-line command
window, and an eighteen-line display window.
The current data line shall include a 24-character English language descriptor
followed by a mode indicator (i.e., network, controller, system, group, point).
The status line shall display alarm status, the customer/ building, current time and
date.
The command window shall display the available functions in the first line with an
expansion for each function on the second line. As the highlight pointer moves from
one function to the other the appropriate 64 character description for the function
shall be displayed on the second line.
The display window shall allow systems, groups, and each controller connected to the
communication bus to be displayed. The display shall be composed of the controller
name, description (24 character), location, bus address. Software options shall be
listed and displayed.
The display window shall display the 24-character alphanumeric description, status,
engineering unit, point, and associated controller. The dynamic data displayed shall
be continuously updated.
The Operator shall be able to configure variables and tables for the controllers,
systems, groups, and points. The configuration screens shall contain a fill-in the
blanks page display for all variables which may be set by the operator for each
device.
The Operator shall be able to store configuration data at the Comfort Works on disk,
download/upload to PIC, FID and option software modules.
The Comfort Works shall have the capability of utilizing either predefined engineering
units and discrete states or customer defined engineering units and discrete states
for displaying points in FlDs at the Comfort Works. The Comfort Works shall support
as a minimum the following:
1. Discrete - 26 predefined states
16 operator defined states
2. Analog - 12 predefined units
16 operator defined units
K. Plc’s shall include predefined states and units.
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library Building Control System
15900-26 96013
.rC L.
M.
N.
0.
P.
The operator shall be able to access a full page help program that describe
operational characteristics, requirements and procedures for all required entries or
operation.
The Comfort Works shall include an on:line tutorial program to introduce new users
to the Supervisor functions, instructions on using the keyboard and mouse, a
summary of the Supervisors screen formats, directions for getting help and graphic
features commonly used by users.
The Comfort Works shall include help screens for all commands and all required
inputs as well as a single line help display for all command menu items. The operator
shall be able to return to the previously displayed screen with a single keystroke.
The operator, using the mouse, cursor, or search function, shall select controllers,
systems, or groups from the display of the controllers list. To create systems and
groups, the operator shall use the mouse or arrow keys to select data from any
controller. Active selection area shall be highlighted in a contrasting color.
The Supervisor shall provide an activity indicator to be displayed during controller
uploads and downloads to provide positive feedback to the operator. The indicator
shall be dynamic and shall indicate successful/unsuccessful upload or download.
2.34 SYSTEM GRAPHICS
rcC I A. Functions - The operator shall be able to create graphic backgrounds using a easy
to use, fully documented graphic software package. The graphic functions shall
include the following as a minimum:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Generation and real time displays of controllers, systems and groups.
Overrides of variable values.
Configure and display graphic representation of setpoint and time schedules.
Linking of graphics and tracking of operators path through a linked series of
graphics.
5. Permit the operator to move from one graphic to any other graphic in the
database.
B. Configuration - A mouse shall be used to construct graphics. A list selection shall be
made from a window which shall open in a portion of the graphic screen. The
operator shall be able to “page up” and “page down” through the list. A click of the
mouse button while the mouse is with-in the boundaries of the window shall select the
highlighted item. All lists displayed in this window shall be sorted alphabetically. The
graphic configuration main menu shall be depicted by icons. All icons shall contain
20 October 1997 Building Control System
Carlsbad City Library 15900-27 96013
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
both text and graphics. The graphic configuration menu shall be displayed on the
same screen as the graphic. It shall be possible to remove the menu from the display
at any time and subsequently return the menu to the display. Sub-menus to the main
menus shall be pop-up menus produced for selection when a specific main menu
item is selected and removed from the screen when selected.
Predefined Backgrounds/Symbols Library - Predefined slide backgrounds and device
symbols shall be provided to construct graphic representations of controllers,
systems, and groups. Predefined slides shall have the ability of being modified by the
operator.
Creation of Backgrounds/Symbols library - A library of symbols shall be available to
assist the operator in the creation of new slides.
Data Box - A data box shall be used to display variable names, status of the variable,
units, and alarm and override indication. Points in alarm or points that have been
overridden shall change color. The data box shall also be used to access a point for
overrides, removing overrides, and for modifying controller setpoint and time
schedules. Data boxes shall be capable of being placed anywhere on the graphic.
The status of the’variable shall be dynamic.
Screen Format - The operator shall have the ability to define a title header for each
graphic slide with the keyboard.
Linked Graphics - The system shall have the capability to link graphics using a mouse
to select operator defined areas on one graphic to quickly move to another. The
operator shall also have the ability to assign a bookmark to one graphic to permit the
operator to quickly and easily return to the assigned graphic.
Moving - The operator shall be able to directly move from a graphic to other areas of
the Comfort Works such as reports or alarms using icons and then return to the same
graphic with no loss of graphic session operability.
2.35 ALARM PROCESSING AND REPORTING
A. The Comfort Works shall allow the alarm monitoring and processing function to
operate any time the PC is powered up and connected to the network. This
background task shall communicate with the controllers, receive, and annunciate the
alarm messages, and through commands sent by the Comfort Works foreground
alarm processing task, maintain the data base which stores these messages.
B. All alarms shall be prioritiied. At least 8 levels of alarms shall be provided. All alarm
messages shall include the date and time the alarm occurred.
C. When an alarm is received the Comfort Works shall annunciate the alarm with an
audible noise and generate a hard copy of the alarm on the printer if selected to do
20 October 1997 Building Control System
Carlsbad City Library 15900-28 96013
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
-
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
so. There shall also be a general indication which shall display for the operator that
an alarm has been received. This general indication shall appear on every screen
interface of the Comfort Works in the lower comer of the screen and shall take the
form of “alarm or alert” followed by a hyphen and the alarm level.
The highest priority unacknowledged alarm shall be annunciated in this way. Upon
boot-up of the Comfort Works, the alarm file shall be scanned to determine the
highest priority unacknowledged alarm and that one shall be visually indicated as
previously described.
The Comfort Works shall be capable of sorting the alarm file by customer/building
name, alarm level, and or time/date of occurrence.
The alarm file shall be capable of storing at least 500 alarms. Once the alarm file is
full the Comfort Works shall have the capability of printing the alarm file before
clearing all but the 50 most recently received alarm messages.
The system shall provide a reannunication feature that shall provide an audible
annunication of the current alarm every five minutes until acknowledged by the
operator. This feature shall be operator selectable and if it is disabled the audible
annunication shall occur only once upon alarm receipt.
The operator shall have the capability of acknowledging, printing or deleting alarms
one at a time or as a group. Only acknowledged alarms shall be allowed to be
deleted. Each alarm that is acknowledged shall include the operator’s initials, date
and time of acknowledgment.
The system shall be capable of at least 100 unique custom alarm messages. The
custom alarm messages shall have the ability of being linked to multiple point names,
system names, alarm types, and building/customer names through the use of
wildcards.
The operator shall have the option of recording operator log-ons and log-offs
including time, date and users initials or disabling this function.
When viewing point status screens all points in alarm shall be highlighted by a
blinking character. Points or controllers not communicating shall also be highlighted
by a different blinking character. If communications fails a communications failed
message shall appear on the screen.
In addition to the 8 levels of alarms, the system shall include an additional function
of 8 lower levels of alerts.
The system shall be capable of supporting a separate dedicated alarm printer.
20 October 1997 Building Control System
Carlsbad City Library 15900-29 96013
2.36 REPORT GENERATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
- E.
F.
G.
H.
The Comfort Works shall have the ability to store energy consumption data, runtime
data, and trend analog or digital variables. The operator shall be able to modify the
data collection parameters. This task shall run in “background” to permit Comfort
Works data collection when the PC is being used for running other Comfort Works
programs. -
The operator shall be able to print, retrieve data, view data and add sources for data
collection.
The Comfort Works shall provide standard management reports as well as custom
reports. These reports shall include a Summary of: Consumption, Runtime, and
Trend.
The report shall be tabular with variable names in the header and time in left column.
The Daily, Monthly, and Yearly Consumption Report shall collect from either a digital
or analog input point. The operator shall be able to set the variables in formula that
calculate energy consumption values from inputs.
The Daily, Monthly, and Yearly Runtime Report shall allow digital inputs to be
totalized to indicate the total runtime of a piece of equipment. The operator shall be
able to reset the runtime total for each input.
The Trend Report shall allow the operator to collect and display events for each
digital or analog point. The event data collection interval shall be adjustable. An
operator selected header with time and date shall appear on the printed report.
Comfort Works Report Generation software module shall allow the operator to
generate custom daily, monthly, and yearly reports through the use of off the shelf
spread sheet programs. The system shall allow any type of collected data to be
inputs for such reports.
2.37 COMMUNICATIONS TO CONTROL SYSTEM
A. The software in the Comfort Works shall be divided into resident software and
application software. The dual operating system shall allow both tasks to run
concurrently. The resident software shall run in the “background” and shall not affect
the “foreground” application software.
B.
C.
The resident software functions shall consist of communications with the control
system, alarm buffer and management, buffer retrieval and disk filing.
Communications control shall allow the system to communicate with control systems
that are hard-wired to the PC or connected remotely via standard telephone line.
20 October 1997 Building Control System
Carlsbad City Library 15900-30 96013
2.38 GLOBAL NETWORK PROGRAMS
-
A. Global network programs shall be modular. Modules shall be added to meet the
requirements of the system. The network shall be capable of accepting additional
modules at any time. The operator shall be able to configure program parameters.
The program module shall reside in an addressable element on the network. Each
module shall enhance the network operations. The following global network programs
shall be available:
1. Network Directory Services
2. Data Collection
3. Autodial
2.39 NETWORK DIRECTORY SERVICES
A. The Network Directory Services option shall maintain a data base of all addressable
controllers, software options, FID system names, and custom programs in the
network and shall also be used for diagnostics. It shall check all network devices for
verification of the correct time of each system elements processor clock and generate
a clock error alarm if a difference of more than 10 minutes exists. An alarm shall also
be initiated when an addressable controller fails to communicate. This software
module shall permit the Comfort Works to access a remote, compatible, building
network for which it has no data base and easily access the data base for all the
features and functions of the PICs, FIDs, and controllers on that remote network.
2.40 DATA COLLECTION
A. The Data Collection option shall enable the operator to acquire three categories of
historical data and store that data for access by the Comfort Works. The three
categories of historical data shall be as follows:
1. Consumable data - information such as kilowatt hours, BTU’s, gallons per
minute, and so on that are acquired in either analog or digital pulse form.
2. Runtime data - information on time and operation of equipment based on
equipment status.
3. History data - Trend log data on status of equipment or values such as an
analog sensor.
B. Each option module shall contain tables, where a single table shall be capable of
assignment of one Consumable point, eight Runtime points, or one History point.
J- 20 October 1997 Building Control System
Carlsbad City Library 15900-31 96013
C. Each History table shall be assignable individually or in master/slave groups. History
data collection shall be initiated from either a specified time function or an event.
D. Provide enough software capacity to accomplish the required data collection function
for the total system as specified. The data collection process shall not require the
Comfort Works to be on line .
E. Additional option modules may be added at any time to meet increased system
requirements. The operator shall be capable of configuring each additional module.
2.41 AUTODIAL
A. The Autodial Gateway option module shall permit communications from a remote
Building Control System to a Comfort Works to create a window into the remote
network. These networks shall be accessed locally with-in the same building using
modems in the Private Branch Exchange (PBX) or shall be accessed remotely using
modems in the Public Switched Network (PSTN). There shall be two types of
communications between the BCS network and remote Comfort Works:
1. Telephone calls placed manually by an operator working at the Comfort Works.
Telephone calls shall be placed manually by the operator by selecting the
appropriate building from the Comfort Works’s main menu. These shall be
made for the purpose of controlling and/or monitoring BCS networks at a
remote site or calls placed automatically for the purpose of generating reports.
2. Telephone calls placed automatically by a BCS Autodial Gateway option
module. These shall be made for the purpose of reporting alarms and alerts.
3. The Autodial Gateway option module shall provide the following system
parameters as a minimum:
B. Occupied and unoccupied time schedules. Each time schedule shall support eight
periods as a minimum.
1. 8 occupied and unoccupied alarm phone numbers/passwords.
2. A buffer to store at least 20 alarms.
3. A buffer to store at least 20 alerts.
4. Occupied and unoccupied beeper phone numbers.
5. Building names/numbers.
20 October 1997
.Carlsbad City Library
Building Control System
15900-32 96013
.-
C. Alarm priority threshold - Determines the lowest alarm priority level that will be
transmitted off-network as soon as it occurs. Alarms of lower priority shall be treated
as alerts and shall not be transmitted until twenty of them accumulate or a chance
presents itself to transmit them on a connection established for another purpose.
D. Alarm connect time - Determines the number of minutes the connection shall be kept
open for reporting alarms.
E. Inactivity connect time - After an operator defined connect time has elapsed where
there has been no communications between the modems the connection shall be
broken. An alarm message shall be generated when this occurs.
F. Modem baud rates - The modems shall automatically negotiate the highest common
baud rate when establishing communications.
G. Beeper alarm priority - Determines the alarm threshold priority level associated with
dialing to a beeper. Alarms below this level are handled as an alert.
H. The occupied and unoccupied password access routine shall also include a secured
mode. If an Autodial Gateway is configured for the secured mode and it receives an
incoming call it shall not allow access when it receives the secured password. Instead
it shall command its modem to go off line and dial the telephone number of the
autodial gateway that transmitted the secured password. It shall supply the initiating
Autodial Gateway with a call back password and if the password is accepted, access
shall be allowed.
I. The Autodial Gateway option module shall generate an access alert anytime a
connection is complete. The access alert shall appear in the alarm file and include the
telephone number of the Autodial Gateway Option module that initiated the
connection.
J. All alarms with priority levels below the configured alarm threshold shall be treated
as alerts. As alerts occur, the Autodial Gateway Option module shall store them in a
buffer that shall hold 20 alerts as a minimum. The occurrence of the twentieth alert
shall cause the Autodial Gateway Option module to place a call to a remote Comfort
Works. If a call is initiated by an alarm the alerts shall be transmitted at the same
time.
K. The system shall also provide an access alarm to be generated to indicate when
invalid access attempts have occurred.
/- 20 October 1997 Building Control System
Carlsbad City Library 15900-33 96013
PART 3 EXECUTlON m
3.1 GENERAL
A. All system components and appurtenances shall be installed in accordance with the
manufacturer’s instructions and requirements. All .necessary interconnections,
services and adjustments required for a complete and operable system shall be
provided by this contractor.
3.2 EXAMINATION
A. This contractor shall review all contract drawings and specifications, including
addenda and referenced material, in order to become informed prior to bidding as to
conditions and limitations of the project.
B. The contractor shall bring exceptions and inconsistencies in drawings, specifications,
addenda, referenced material, other contract documents and site conditions to the
attention of the engineer.
C. The location of material, equipment and devices shown on the drawings are
approximate and are subject to such revisions as may be necessary or desirable at
the time that the work is being installed. This contractor shall install the work in
relation to existing conditions. Should project conditions require rearrangement, or if
equipment or accessories can be installed to better advantage in a different manner,
this contractor may, before proceeding with the work, prepare and submit five copies
of shop drawings indicating the proposed rearrangement for the Engineer’s review.
3.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Upon receipt of contract and prior to the delivery of parts, this contractor shall submit
eight copies of the following drawings:
I. Submit eight copies of schematic drawings showing the respective locations of
all PICs, FlDs and Comfort Works(s) as applicable and interconnecting wiring
between PIG’s and FID’s. Also all field terminal and sensing devices shall be
listed by function and point number and shall display interconnecting wiring and
terminals of controlled systems and devices.
2. Submit eight copies of schematic drawings showing electric connection details
for actuators, transducers, and other electric components. All connections shall
be labeled to coordinate with the description of operation, including descriptions
to indicate action of components, normal positions, spring ranges, etc.
20 October 1997 Building Control System
Carlsbad City Library 15900-34 96013
3.4 OPERATION MANUALS
/-
A. Prior to system installation, submit eight copies of operation manuals covering the
following subjects:
1. Descriptive System Information - including system schematics, I/O functions
and Sequences of Operation.
2. Operating instructions - including schedules and procedures for starting,
stopping, cleaning, protection, testing, adjustments, calibration and
replacement of components.
3.5 AS-BUILT DOCUMENTATION
A. Upon completion of the installation, and prior to acceptance by the Owner’s
representative, this contractor shall furnish eight copies of as-built documentation. All
changes to the above submitted drawings, equipment descriptions and operation
manuals shall be clearly identified on the as-built documentation.
3.6 INSTALLATION ELECTRIC WlRlNG
A. This contractor is responsible for all electrical installation and wiring for a fully
operational Building Control System and shall include all items not shown on the
electrical plans or required as per the electrical specifications. Perform all electrical
installation in accordance with local and national electrical codes.
1. Install all control wiring, all exposed wiring, and all wiring in equipment rooms
in conduit and in accordance with Division 16.
2. Install all electronic wiring, 24VDC or less, in No. 20 AWG as a minimum.
Provide shields as required by equipment manufacturer.
B. All line voltage wiring shown on the electrical plans including power circuits for the
FIDs, PICs, and Comfort Works work station(s) with the exception of the final
terminations in this equipment shall be supplied by Division 16000.
C. This contractor shall provide all required documentation, coordination, and
supervision for the complete wiring by section 16000. This contractor shall provide
installation drawings in a timely manner detailing locations of equipment, and
numbers and types of wires required for installation. These shop drawings shall be
submitted to the architect for approval before work begins by the electrical contractor.
3.7 PERMITS AND FEES
A. This contractor shall secure and pay for all necessary permits, licenses and
inspections as required by federal, state or local law. This includes providing required
20 October 1997 Building Control System Carlsbad City Library 15900-35 96013
notices, plans, licenses, and fees, obtaining any necessary approvals from authorities
having jurisdiction, and delivering any certificates of inspection as may be required.
No work is to proceed until all proper certificates and licenses are obtained and
posted.
3.8 CLEAN UP
A. This contractor shall clean up regularly in order to maintain clean site conditions. In
general, clean-up programs shall be scheduled by contractor at least once per week;
however, the contractor shall clean up more often if required to meet OSHA
standards.
3.9 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. This contractor is responsible for coordinating the work with other trades so as to
eliminate unnecessary cutting and patching.
3.16 SPACE THERMOSTAT AND SENSOR LOCATIONS
A. In general, locate thermostats and sensors for room control immediately inside door,
above light switch at approximately 60 inches from floor. Coordinate thermostat
locations with General Contractor and approval by Engineer.
3.11 LOCAL CONTROL PANELS
A. Mount all local control panels at convenient location adjacent to equipment served.
3.12 CONTROL DAMPERS
A. All control dampers shall be furnished by this contractor to the mechanical contractor
for installation.
3.13 CONTROL VALVES
A. All control valves shall be furnished by this contractor to the mechanical contractor
for installation.
3.14 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
A. The DAV system shall through the Air Source Interface (ASI) start the air source
based on the DAV system’s occupancy time schedules. The DAV system, through
the ASI, shall also start the air source to provide occupant override.
1. Occupied - When the air source is providing cooling the TCU shall modulate its
terminal damper between its minimum and maximum cooling CFM setpoints to
maintain its cooling setpoint and the terminal’s fan shall induce ceiling plenum
20 October 1997
Carlsbad City Library
Building Control System
1590036 96013
.-
air to maintain a constant air volume to the space. If the zone temperature
drops below the cooling setpoint the TCU shall modulate its terminal damper
to its minimum cooling CFM setpoint. If the zone temperature continues to drop
below the heating setpoint the TCU shall maintain its minimum cooling CFM
setpoint and stage its reheat, as applicable, to maintain its occupied heating
setpoint. If the air source is providing heat the damper shall be positioned to its
minimum heating CFM setpoint. If the zone temperature drops below the
heating setpoint the TCU shall stage its reheat, as applicable, to maintain its
heating setpoint. The system shall have the inherent capability of utilizing
central heat only with the terminal’s reheat de-energized whenever the air
source is providing heat.
2. Unoccupied - The DAV system shall through the ASI disable the air source
based on the DAV system’s occupancy time schedules. The system shall have
the capability of restarting the air source to maintain a space setback
temperature. The system shall have the capability to use average weighted
zone temperatures through the data transfer option module or shall hardwire
all space sensors back to the air source to provide an air handler unoccupied
cycle.
3. Unoccupied heating - A user configurable unoccupied heating setpoint shall be
automatically referenced whenever the time schedule indexes the zone to an
unoccupied mode of operation. If the air source is providing heat the TCU shall
position its terminal damper to its minimum heating CFM setpoint. If the zone
temperature drops below its unoccupied heating setpoint the TCU shall stage
its reheat, as applicable. If the air source is not operating and the zone
temperature drops below the unoccupied heating setpoint, the fan shall be
energized and the reheat shall be staged, as applicable, to satisfy the zone
requirements.
4. Unoccupied cooling - A user configurable unoccupied cooling setpoint shall be
automatically referenced whenever the time schedule indexes the zone to an
unoccupied mode of operation. When the air source is providing cooling the
TCU shall modulate its terminal damper between its minimum and maximum
cooling CFM setpoints to maintain its cooling setpoint and the terminal’s fan
shall induce ceiling plenum air to maintain a constant air volume to the space.
If the zone temperature drops below the cooling setpoint the TCU shall position
its terminal damper to its minimum cooling CFM setpoint. If the zone
temperature continues to drop below the heating setpoint the TCU shall stage
its reheat, as applicable, to maintain its unoccupied heating setpoint.
5. Night Time Free Cooling (NTFC) - If the air source provides a NTFC routine
(see the air handler sequence of operation/points list) the DAV system shall
calculate a temperature setpoint halfway between the occupied heating and
cooling setpoints. During NTFC, if the zone temperature is one degree
Fahrenheit above the NTFC setpoint, the damper shall be driven to its
20 October 1997 Building Control System
Carlsbad City Library 15900-37 96013
maximum cooling CFM setpoint until the zone temperature is one degree
Fahrenheit below the NTFC setpoint at which time the damper shall be driven
to its minimum cooling CFM setpoint. During NTFC, the air terminals fan shall
be energized.
6. Damper Override (smoke control) - The system shall be capable of providing
a damper override sequence when interfacing to an air source that includes a
smoke sequence. The damper override function shall negate any preselected
maximum or minimum CFM setting in the TCU. It shall drive the damper to
100% of the box rated CFM when the air source is in the pressurization mode
and to a fully closed position when the air source is in the evacuation mode.
During pressurization the air terminal’s fan shall be energized and during
evacuation the terminal’s fan shall be de-energized.
7. Primary air source off - Whenever the primary air source is off the terminal’s
damper shall be held at its last commanded position.
l + * END OF SECTION l * *
20 October 1997 Building Control System
Carlsbad City Library 15900-38 96013
f-
.,-
SECTION 16011
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, ELECTRICAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .Ol APPLICATION:
A. The General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Division 1 are part of this
work and apply to all work specified under Division 16, as fully as if repeated herein.
1.02 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS:
A. Electrical drawings are diagrammatic but shall be followed as closely as actual
construction and work of the other sections shall permit. Size and location of
equipment is drawn to scale wherever possible.
8. Drawings and specifications are for the assistance and guidance of the Contractor.
Exact locations, distances, and levels will be governed by the building. The
Contractor shall make use of data in all the contract documents to verify information
at the building site.
C. In any case where there appears to be a conflict or ambiguity between that which
is shown on the electrical drawings or in the electrical specifications and any other
part of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall notify and secure directions
from the Architect.
D. Drawings and specifications are intended to complement each other. Where a
conflict or ambiguity exists between the requirements of the drawings and the specifi-
cations, request clarification. Do not proceed with work without direction.
E. The Architect shall interpret the drawings and the specifications. The interpretation
by the Architect as to the true intent and meaning thereof and the quality, quantity,
and sufficiency of the materials and workmanship furnished thereunder shall be
accepted as final and conclusive.
F. In the case of conflicts or ambiguities not clarified prior to the bidding deadline, use
the most costly alternative (better quality, greater quantity, and larger size) in
preparing the bid. A clarification will be issued to the successful bidder as soon as
feasible after the award and, if appropriate, a deductive change order will be issued.
G. Where items are specified in the singular, this division shall provide the quantity as
shown on drawings plus any spares or extras indicated on the drawings or in the
specifications.
/-
20 OCTOBER 1997 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, ELECTRICAL
Carlsbad City Library 16011-I 96013
1.03 DEFINITIONS:
A. Definitions of Electrical terms will be found in the National Electric Code (NEC) 1993,
California Electric Code (CEC) 1995 and California Code of Regulations, Title 8,
Electrical Safety Orders.
B. Whenever an Electrical term is used in this specification which is defined in the
Code, thedefinition given will govern its meaning in this specification.
C. Whenever an Electrical term is used which does not appear in the Code, the
definition to govern its meaning in these specifications will be found in the American
Standard Definitions of Electrical Terms, published by the American Institute of
Electrical Engineers, 33 West 39th Street, New York City.
D. “Provide“ means furnish, install, connect and test unless otherwise noted.
E. The words “conduit” and “duct” are used interchangeably, and have the same
meaning.
F. “UFER” Ground: See Section 16450, “Grounding”.
1.04 EXAMINATION OF SITE:
A. Examination of the building site shall be made by the Contractor. The Contractor
shall compare it with the drawings and specification and satisfy himself as to the
conditions under which work is to be performed. The Contractor shall, at such time,
ascertain and check the locations of existing structures or equipment which may
affect his work.
1.05 PERMITS, FEES AND INSPECTIONS:
A. Permits, fees, and inspections shall be arranged for and paid by the Contractor.
B. The Contractor shall present to the Architect property signed certificates of final
inspection before work will be accepted.
1.06 ELECTRO-MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS:
A. The power wiring, safety switches, combination controllers (indicated on electrical
plans), circuit breakers, and motor control equipment forming a part of motor-control
centers or switchgear assemblies, and the electrical connection of the mechanical
equipment to the electrical power source shall be included under Division 16.
B. The electrical components of mechanical equipment including, but not limited to,
motors, motor-starters, control or pushbutton stations, float-pressure switches,
solenoid valves, thermostats, junction boxes, and other devices functioning to
control mechanical equipment shall be provided under Division 15. Interconnecting
wiring for packaged equipment shall be provided as an integral part of the equipment.
C. Control Wiring: Installation of line and low voltage conduit, wiring and junction/outlet
boxes not shown on the electrical drawings but required for controlling or monitoring
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, ELECTRICAL
1601 l-2 96013
,-
mechanical equipment and systems shall be furnished and installed under Division
15. Installation of these shall comply with the requirements of Division 16.
D. If substitution of controls or mechanical equipment other than that specified requires
any changes in the electrical work from that shown on the plans or specified in
Division 16, any additional cost of the equipment or electrical work shall be the
responsibility of Division 15.
1.07 RULES AND REGULATIONS:
A. Rules and regulations shall be complied with as set forth in all applicable National,
State, and local regulations, ordinances, and statutes including, but not limited to,
the latest editions of the following publications, and all supplements thereto that may
be in effect.
1. Uniform Building Code (UBC), 1994.
2. NFPA-70, National Electrical Code (NEC), 1993, hereinafter referred to as the
“Code”.
3. Uniform Fire Code (UFC), 1994.
4. List of electrical fittings, published by the Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc.
w.
5. NFPA-101, Life Safety Code, 1994.
6. National Electrical Safety Code (NESC).
7. All applicable regulations of the local utility company.
B. Whenever the drawings or specifications require material, workmanship, arrange-
ment or construction of a higher standard or larger size than is required by the above
rules and regulations, the drawings and specifications shall take precedence.
1.08 STANDARDS OF COMPLIANCE:
A. When materials or equipment must conform to the standards of an organization
such as the American National Standards Institute (ANSI), American Society for
Testing and Materials (ASTM), National Electrical Manufacturers Association
(NEMA), and Underwriters Laboratories (UL), proof of such conformance shall be
submitted to the Architect for approval. If an organization uses a label or listing to
indicate compliance with a particular standard, the label or listing will be acceptable
evidence, unless otherwise specified in the individual sections of Division 16.
B. In lieu of the label or listing, the Contractor shall submit a certificate from a Nationally
Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) certified by the U.S. Department of Labor,
Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA), which is competent to
perform an acceptable test and is approved by Architect. The certificate shall state
that the item has been tested in accordance with the specified organization’s test
methods and that the item conforms to the specified organization’s standard.
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, ELECTRICAL
16011-3 96013
1.09 SUBMITTALS:
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
Submittal requirements for Division 16 shall be in accordance with Division 1 except
as modified herein. All time requirements shall be based on the notice to proceed
date of the General Contract. All materials and equipment furnished under Division
16 shall be submitted to the Architect for approval. Such approval shall be in writing
from the Architect including that which is exactly as specified. Any materials or
equipment-installed without written approval shall be subject to immediate removal.
Approval of material or equipment shall in no way obviate compliance with the
contract documents.
Submittals shall be packaged separately for each system or major piece of
equipment and reviewed by the Contractor for verification of compliance with the
contract documents prior to submitting to the Architect. Separate, bound submittals
shall be provided for each specification section to the Architect. Authorization to
combine equipment or systems must be in writing from the Architect. All interface
between specification sections shall be indicated in each submittal.
All materials and equipment shall be new and shall bear the inspection label of the
Underwriter’s Laboratories (UL) where applicable. Materials and equipment shall be
the latest standard product and shall be of the grade indicated by the trade names
given.
The work shown on the contract drawings is engineered and designed to accommo-
date the equipment described hereinafter in these specifications.
Equipment submittal shall include manufacturer’s name, model, type, number, finish,
size and capacity of the equipment at the given conditions. This information shall
be provided in bound submittals, each containing an index and all submittals. The
number of copies shall be as indicated in Division 1. The title shall provide the
project name, system identity, the specification number, and the Contractots name
and address. This submittal shall be in addition to the shop drawings hereinafter
specified. Partial submittals of material submitted from time to time are not
acceptable and may be returned without review.
Submittals shall be reviewed by the Architect for compliance with the contract docu-
ments. Submittals found to be incomplete or not in compliance with the contract
documents shall be returned for resubmittal. The Architect shall review the original
submittal and one (1) resubmittal per section (if required). The Contractor shall
reimburse the Architect for all subsequent submittal review.
Shop drawings for service entrance equipment shall be submitted to and approved
by the San Diego Gas and Electric Company metering shop prior to submittal to the
Architect. Provide device coordination data to the First upstream device. Documen-
tation of SDG&E approval shall be provided as part of the equipment submittal.
Equipment Layout Drawings: “Equipment Layout Drawings” shall be provided for
each equipment room, yard or area containing equipment items furnished under
Division 16. Layout drawings shall consist of a plan view of the room or area (to a
l/4” = l’-0” minimum scale) showing projected outlines of all equipment, complete
with dotted lines indicating all required clearances, including all clearances needed
‘20 OCTOBER 1997 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, ELECTRICAL
Carlsbad City Library 1601 l-4 96013
i-
for removal or service. Location of all conduit and pull boxes shall be indicated.
Drawings shall indicate any and all conflicts with other trades.
1.10 SUBSTITUTIONS:
A. Equipment submitted for substitution must fit the space conditions shown on the
drawings, leaving adequate room for maintenance around all equipment. A minimum
of 36 inches (or more if required by Code) must be maintained clear in front of all
electrical panels, starters, gutters, or other electrical apparatus. Submit drawings
showing the layout, size, and exact method of interconnection of conduit, wiring and
controls, which shall conform to the manufacturer’s recommendations and these
specifications. The scale of these drawings shall be the scale of the contract
drawings. The Contractor shall bear the excess costs, by any and all crafts, for fitting
the equipment into the space and the system designated. Where additional labor or
material is required to permit equipment submitted for substitution to function in an
approved manner, this shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor without
additional cost to the Owner.
B. No substitutions will be allowed for materials or equipment if three (3) or more
manufacturers are indicated.
C. An item submitted for substitution does not constitute an “equal” unless approval by
the Architect has been given in writing.
D. Equipment submitted for substitution shall be approved in writing by the Architect and
shall be accompanied by the following:
1. A sample of each item submitted for substitution shall accompany the
submittal if requested by the Architect.
2. A unit price quotation shall be provided with each item intended for substitu-
tion. This quote shall include a unit price for the specified item and a unit
price for the intended substitute item. The Contractor shall also provide a
total (per item) of the differential payback to the Owner should the intended
substitute item be approved as equivalent to that which is specified.
3. The Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for the additional services required
by the Architect to review and process substitutions.
E. Substitutions shall be approved in writing by the Architect. The determination of the
Architect shall be final.
1.11 WARRANTY:
A. Warranty requirements for Division 16 shall be in accordance with Division 1 except
as modified herein.
B. All materials and equipment provided shall be warranted for a minimum period of one
(I)-year from the official date of completion. In addition, provide a two (2)-year
extended warranty, for a total of three (3)-years, for the following items:
*- i
20 OCTOBER 1997 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, ELECTRICAL
Carlsbad City Library 1601 l-5 96013
1. Service Entrance and Metering Equipment
2. Distribution Switchboards and Distribution Panelboards
3. Transformers
4. Low Voltage Switching System (all components)
5. Automatic Transfer Switches (all components)
6. Uninterruptable Power Supply (UPS) (all components)
7. Engine Generators (all components)
C. The Contractor shall provide all labor and materials required to correct problems
which develop during the warranty period due to defective materials or faulty
workmanship. The labor and materials to do this work shall be provided at no
additional cost to the Owner.
D. Within one (1)-month prior to the expiration of the warranty period, the Contractor
shall correct any and all defects covered by the warranty. This shall include
tightening to original specifications of all bolted connections.
E: Warranty certificates shall be made out to The City of Carlsbad, California, and shall
be delivered to the Architect at the completion of the installation.
F. All equipment shall be guaranteed to be supported in such a way as to be free from
objectionable vibration and noise.
G. Additional warranty requirements shall be as indicated in the individual sections of
Division 16.
1.12 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS:
A. The Contractor shall furnish operation and maintenance manuals for each electrical
system and for each piece of equipment. The complete manual, bound in hardback
binders, or an approved equivalent, shall be provided to the Architect. The number
of copies shall be as indicated in Division 1. One (1) manual shall be furnished prior
to the time that system or equipment tests are performed, and the remaining manuals
shall be furnished before the contract is completed. The following identification shall
be inscribed on the cover; the words “OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL,”
the name and location of the building, the name of the Contractor, and the contract
number.
B. The manual shall include the names, address, and the telephone numbers of each
Subcontractor installing equipment and systems, and of the local representatives for
each item of equipment and each system. The manual shall have a table of contents
and be assembled to conform to the table of contents with tab sheets placed before
instructions covering each subject. The instruction sheets shall be legible with large
sheets of drawings folded in. The manual shall include, but not limited to, the
following:
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, ELECTRICAL
1601 l-6 96013
1.
2.
3.
System layout showing components.
Devices and controls.
Wiring and control diagrams showing operation and control of each
component.
4.
5.
6.
7.
6.
Sequence of operation describing start-up, operation, and shutdown.
Functional description of the principal system components.
Installation instructions.
Maintenance and overhaul instructions.
Lubrication schedule including type, grade, temperature range, and
frequency.
9. Safety precautions, diagrams and illustrations.
10. Test procedures.
11. Performance data.
12. Parts list.
C. The parts list for equipment shall indicate the sources of supply, recommended spare
parts, and the service organization which is reasonably convenient to the building
site. The manual shall be complete in all respects for all equipment, controls, and
accessories provided.
1.13 TEMPORARY ELECTRICAL SERVICE:
A. The Contractor shall provide labor and materials required for the installation and
maintenance of temporary lighting and required power sources for the Contractor%
equipment inside the building or construction site and for pedestrian walkways during
the period of construction.
B.
C.
The building or construction site shall be sufficiently illuminated so that construction
work can be safely performed. Special attention shall be given to adequately lighting
stairs, ladders, pedestrian walkways, floor openings, etc. Walkway lights shall be
controlled by a switch within the building or construction site.
Power shall be on and all lighting shall be in operation before painting work
commences.
1.14 RECORD DRAWINGS:
A. On one (1) set of contract drawings, kept at the site during construction, mark all
work that is installed differently from that shown on plans, including revised circuitry,
material or equipment. Sufficient dimensions shall be provided to locate all materials
20 OCTOBER 1997 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, ELECTRICAL
Carlsbad City Library 1601 l-7 96013
installed beneath and outside the building including, but not limited to, underground
conduits, cabling, ground rods, and stubouts.
B. All changes or revisions to the contract drawings including, but not limited to, those
indicated by amendment, change order, field order, written response to RFI/RFC or
other contractual means shall be kept current as the work progresses and shall be
incorporated onto the final record drawings.
C. Accurately locate and dimension all underground and embedded conduit runs on the
record drawings.
D. The marked drawings shall be kept current as the work progresses and shall be
available for inspection upon request. At the close of construction these or a copy
of these drawings shall be turned over to the Architect for use in preparing record
drawings. The correct and completed record drawings are a prerequisite to tinal
contract payment.
1. As part of the reproducible record drawings, the Contractor shall produce full
size reproducible drawings with the:
(4 Final motor control schedules as modified during construction.
@I Final panelboard schedules as modified during construction.
03 Final light fixture schedule as modified during construction.
(4 Final distribution panelboard schedules as modified during construc-
tion.
2. These drawings shall be on Architectural base sheets and numerically
sequenced to follow the last “E” sheet.
E. As part of the reproducible record drawings, the Contractor shall produce full size
reproducible drawings for all signal systems (16700 series) which shall include exact
“As-Built” device locations, “As-Built” interconnection drawings, and “As-Built” riser
diagrams.
1.15 JOB VISITS BY THE ARCHITECT:
A. Periodic visits to the job by the Architect’are for the express purpose of verifying
compliance with the contract documents.
B. Such visits shall not be construed as construction supervision. Neither shall such
visits be construed as making the Architect responsible for providing a safe place for
the performance of the work by the Contractor or the Contractor’s employees or the
safety of the supplies of the Contractor or his Subcontractors.
1.16 ELECTRICAL SERVICE OUTAGES:
A. There shall be no interruption of existing electrical service without prior approval by
the Architect. Written notice of proposed utility outages shall be delivered to the
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, ELECTRICAL
16011-8 96013
Architect at least fourteen (14)-days prior to the start of the proposed outage. The
interruption of electrical service shall be scheduled outside the normal working hours.
The maximum outage time allowed shall be four (4)-hours, otherwise, the Contractor
shall be responsible for all the related work that may be required to provide continued
electrical service. The Contractor shall be responsible for the sequencing of all work
including, but not limited to, installation of new electrical lines, abandonment of
existing electrical lines, and interfacing between new and existing lines to ensure
uninterrupted service. Additional requirements are listed in Division 1 of this
specification.
B. The installation shall be closely coordinated with the utility provider and all other site
utilities.
1.17 NEW UTILITY SERVICES:
A. The Contractor shall provide all required labor and material for the installation and
connection of new utility services including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Electrical
2. Telephone
3. Cable Television
1.18 POSTED OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS:
A. Operating instructions shall be provided by the Contractor at the conclusion of the
project for each system and each principal piece of equipment for the use of
operating and maintenance personnel. The operating instructions shall include
wiring and control diagrams showing the entire system, including, but not limited to,
equipment, devices, and control sequences. All operating instructions shall be
approved by the Architect.
B. Operating instructions shall be typewritten or engraved and shall be framed under
glass or in approved laminated plastic and posted adjacent to each principal piece
of equipment and shall include such instructions as start up, proper adjustment,
operation, lubrication, shutdown, safety-precautions, procedure in the event of
equipment failure, and any other necessary items of instructions as recommended
by the manufacturer of unit.
C. Operating instructions exposed to the weather shall be made of weather-resisting
materials or shall be suitably enclosed to be weather protected. Operating instruc-
tions shall not fade when exposed to sunlight and shall be secured to prevent easy
removal or peeling.
1.19 TRAINING:
A. User staff and maintenance personnel shall be thoroughly trained (minimum four (4)-
hours) in the use of each system or major piece of equipment installed. This training
shall be provided a part of the Contractors bid to supply the system or equipment.
/-
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, ELECTRICAL
16011-g 96013
Additional training requirements, shall be as specified in the subsequent sections of
Division 16.
1.20 DELIVERY AND STORAGE:
A. Equipment and materials shall be properly stored, adequately protected, and carefully
handled to prevent damage before and during installation. Equipment and materials
shall be handled, stored and protected in accordance with the manufacturek
recommendations and as approved by the Architect. Electrical conduit shall be
stored to provide protection from the weather and accidental damage. Plastic
conduit shall be stored on even supports and in locations not subject to direct
sunrays or excessive heat. Cables shall be sealed, stored, and handled carefully to
avoid damage to the outer covering or insulation and damage from moisture and
weather. Damaged or defective items shall be replaced with new items at no cost
to the Owner. The Architect shall determine if a damaged or defective item is to be
replaced with a new item. The decisions by the Architect in these matters shall be
final.
1.23 FIELD TESTS:
A. As an exception to requirements that may be stated elsewhere in the contract, the
Architect shall be given five (5) working days notice prior to each test. The Contrac-
tor shall provide all test equipment, personnel and incidentals including, but not
limited to, water, fuel, and lubricants necessary to perform the required testing. The
Owner shall provide electrical power required for all tests. The Contractor shall
submit five (5) typewritten copies of all test results to the Architect within five (5)
working days after each test.
1. The information submitted shall include, but not limited to, the following:
a. Scope of the test.
b. Name and type of instrument used.
C. Calibration date of instrument and name of calibration firm.
d. Name and signature of testing personnel.
e. Name and signature of Architect.
f. Analysis of test results.
2. The Contractor shall demonstrate to the Architect the operation of all
equipment and systems. All tests shall be completed to the satisfaction of
the Architect. Each test shall be performed the number of times indicated in
the individual specification section. In the event the number of times the
tests are to be completed is omitted, the Architect shall determine the
number.
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, ELECTRICAL
1601 l-10 96013
r PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
l * * END OF SECTION l l +
c-
20 OCTOBER 1997 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, ELECTRICAL
Carisbad City Library 16011-11 96013
SECTION 16050
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART I- GENERAL
1 .Ol GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:
A. The provisions of Section 16011, “General Requirements, Electrical” apply to this
Section as if fully repeated herein.
B. The provisions of this section apply to all work specified in all sections of Division 16.
1.02 SCOPE:
A. This section of the specification includes, but is not limited to:
1. All labor, tools, appliances, materials, and equipment required to furnish and
install the complete installation shown on the drawings for all work specified
under Division 16.
2. All carpentry or metal work involved in making supports for conduit and other
equipment.
3. Cooperation with other crafts in putting the installation in place at a time
when space required by this installation is accessible.
4.
5.
Cutting and patching of holes required by this installation, including provision
for all holes in existing concrete floor slab.
Repair of all damage done to premises as a result of this installation, and
removal of all debris left by those engaged in this installation.
6. Cleanliness of all exposed electrical equipment at the time the work is turned
over to the Owner.
7.
8.
9.
Cutting of structural members, floor, concrete cutting, and all patching and
finishing shall be done by trades skilled in the work for this section, and under
the direction and supervision of the Contractor.
All anchors, chases, sleeves, and supports for electrical equipment.
Excavation and backfill necessary for the execution and completion of the
electrical work.
10.
11.
12.
All required backing, supports, and blocking for all lighting fixtures.
Tests of all electrical systems.
All insurance fees and taxes required and applicable shall be included.
20 OCTOBER 1997 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
Carlsbad City Library 16050-l 96013
13. New electrical, telephone and cable television service per utility provider
requirements and as indicated on plans.
14. All building electrical wiring, conduit, boxes, outlets, switches, plates, and all
miscellaneous items of electrical apparatus and material specified and/or
shown on the drawings.
15. Unit price quotations.
1.03 SUBMIT-I-ALS:
A. The following information shall be submitted for review and approval in accordance
with Section 1601 I, “General Requirements, Electrical”.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Provide shop drawings for each nameplate, tag and label indicating
fabrication details and text.
2. Provide shop drawing details, furnished by the manufacturer of the fire stop
material, which show complete conformance to the U.L. system listing.
These drawings shall be available to the Fire Marshal on site. The shop
drawing shall be specific for each penetration with all variables defined.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS:
A. Products and material shall be as specified in the pertinent sections of Division 16.
B. All products and material shall be new and bear UL label whenever subject to such
approval. Comply with ANSI, IEEE and NEMA standards where applicable.
C. Wherever possible, all materials and equipment used in this installation shall be of
the same manufacturer throughout for each class of material or equipment.
2.02 NAMEPLATES, TAGS, AND LABELS:
A. Furnish and install l-inch (high) minimum by 3-inch (wide) minimum by 3/32” (thick)
matte black (for normal power) and red (for emergency power), laminated phenolic
nameplates with l/4” white characters engraved in the plastic for all items of
electrical equipment including, but not limited to, switchboards, panelboards,
automatic transfer switches, motor control centers, feeder circuit breakers, relays,
time switches, disconnect switches, exposed pull or junction boxes, and all control
equipment. Nameplates shall be attached with two (2) cadmium-plated screws.
Adhesive attachment will not be acceptable. Punch strip tape type nameplates with
card holders in any form are prohibited.
B. Branch circuits shall be tagged in the outlet boxes, panelboards, and in all junction
boxes where circuits terminate. Feeders shall be tagged at each end. Tags shall be
applied immediately after wire is installed.
‘20 OCTOBER 1997 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
Carlsbad City Library 16050-2 96013
C. Each branch circuit device wverplate shall be labeled (engraved or silk screen) to
indicate the branch circuit. Devices shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
1. Toggle/Rocker Switches
2. Dimmer Switches
3. Receptacles
2.03 FIRE RESISTIVE PENETRATIONS:
A. All penetrations of fire resistive floors, walls or ceilings shall be protected by materials
and installation details that conform to U.L. (Underwriters’ Laboratory) listings for
through penetration fire stop systems. This includes, but is not limited to, all raceway
penetrations and electrical outlet boxes recessed in opposite sides of rated walls with
less than a 24” horizontal offset. The material used shall be 3M brand #CP-25 N/S
caulk, #303 putty or equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT:
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
Equipment furnished by others shall be completely connected to the electrical
system as required for correct operation. All conduit, wire, junction boxes, etc., shall
be provided for proper connection and all required grounding shall be installed.
Verify actual requirements with equipment supplier or Architect prior to rough-in.
All outlets, devices, and equipment furnished under Division 16 shall be fully installed
and connected.
Provide all required flexible conduit, boxes, fittings, receptacles, caps, cords, and
other material that may be required for the proper installation of all equipment.
Refer to manufacturer’s directions where applicable.
Coordinate the work carefully to ensure that all electrical requirements of equipment
are met and all systems are made complete and operational.
All equipment shall be installed recessed (flush) unless otherwise noted or shown on
plans.
Devices installed recessed in opposite sides of fire walls shall comply with C.B.C.
requirements (minimum horizontal offset shall be 24” between openings) or shall be
protected in accordance with paragraph 2.03 above. If this requirement creates a
conflict with the layout of devices on the drawings, request clarification from the
Architect.
After “rough-in” and prior to installation of conduit, wiring, or wall material, the
Contractor shall accommodate changes in device locations of up to ten (10) linear
feet at no additional charge. Do not proceed beyond “rough-in” without approval of
the Architect.
20 OCTOBER 1997 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
Carlsbad City Library 16050-3 96013
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
Arrange for necessary openings to allow entry of equipment.
1. Where equipment cannot be installed as structure is being erected, provide
for and arrange for building-in of boxes, sleeves or other devices to allow
later installation.
Make all penetrations through roofs prior to installation of roofing. For penetrations
required after Installation of roofing:
1. In built-up roofing (BUR), provide all curbs, cants and base flashings in
accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
2. In elastic sheet roofing (ESR), arrange and pay for flashing work by a skilled
roofer in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
Install rain hoods and metal counter flashings as indicated and make all penetrations
of electrical work through walls and roofs water and weathertight.
1.
2.
Furnish all clamps, waterproofing material and labor necessary.
Where metal flashings are applied over concrete, paint concrete with l/8 in.
(3mm) of mastic cement first.
3. Set flashing in mastic cement, watertight.
Have repair and replacement of roof construction, damaged by this project, done in
a manner which will not nullify roof warranty.
Provide equipment guards at all belts, couplings, moving machinery and equipment
provided under this Division in accord with OSHA.
1. Use suitable structural frames with 12 GA (Z.lmm), 3/4 in (18mm) maximum
opening galvanized mesh, or expanded metal mesh.
2. Attach to equipment by removable slips and bolts with wing nuts, or other
approved connectors.
Install equipment to permit easy access for all maintenance.
1. Maintain easy access to switches, motors, drives, pull boxes, receptacles,
etc.
2. Relocate items which interfere with access.
Provide concrete foundations or pads for all floor mounted electrical equipment.
1. Provide as indicated or as follows:
a. Where drawings do not show special foundations, install 4 in. high
concrete pads.
20 OCTOBER 1997 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
Carlsbad City Library 16050-4 96013
b. Use 3,000 PSI (14 Kg/s/mm) concrete.
C. Reinforce with 6 x 6 in. W2.9 x W2.9, 10GA (3.4mm) mesh, with
short dowels into floor at 12 in. OC around perimeter.
d. Chamfer top edges 3/4-in. (18mm)
8. Make all faces smooth.
f. Set anchor bolts for equipment. Confirm locations with equipment
manufacturer.
3.02 SEISMIC RESTRAINTS:
A. All electrical equipment shall be braced or anchored in accordance with the
requirements of Seismic Zone IV.
1. Horizontal seismic forces shall be determined from the applicable equations
of the governing code.
2. Provide all required seismic bracing, supports, bolts, washers, nuts, etc. for
conduits and conduit supports.
3. Provide an independent system to secure all recessed lighting fixtures.
Fixtures shall be supported directly and laterally from the building structure
above, using No. g-gauge wire minimum. The ceiling suspension system
shall not be used for direct support.
3.03 MISCELLANEOUS WORK:
A. Do all miscellaneous metal and concrete work required; all cutting and patching; and
provide all hangers, anchors, chases, supports, etc., required for the installation of
the electrical systems.
B. Touch-up or refinish damaged surfaces including, but not limited to, panelboards,
transformers, etc., to the satisfaction of the Architedt.
C. Provide “As-Built” panel schedules and labels on all existing equipment affected by
this project including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Main Switchboards
2. Disconnect Switches
3. Panelboards
4. Distribution Panelboards
5. Distribution Switchboards
D. All work shall be in accordance with applicable sections of the specifications.
/-
20 OCTOBER 1997 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
Carlsbad City Library 16050-5 96013
3.64 CLEANING AND PROTECTION OF PRODUCTS AND PREMISES:
A. At frequent intervals during the time on the site, the Contractor shall clean up after
his work and remove his debris from the premises. The building and grounds shall
be cleaned to the satisfaction of the Architect. All equipment and material resulting
from demolition for this project shall be removed.
B. The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to protect all materials,
equipment and property, whether electrical or not, from damage as a result of his
work.
C. The Contractor shall provide adequate protection for all material and equipment
provided under Division 16: Material and equipment shall be stored in a clean dry
place and shall be covered or protected from damage or contamination during
storage and after installation.
D. Before final inspection, all material and equipment furnished under Division 16 shall
be thoroughly cleaned of cement, plaster, paint spatters and other foreign materials.
All surfaces shall be carefully wiped clean. Boxes, cabinets and enclosures shall be
cleaned, inside and out.
3.05 DEVICE LOCATIONS:
A. The following dimensions for locating wall mounted (recessed or surface) devices
represent the distance from the finished floor to the center of the device unless
otherwise shown on plans or drawings. Coordinate device locations with all
architectural millwork and/or casework elevations. Coordinate device mounting
height with wainscoting where provided. Where top of wainscot and device mounting
height overlaps, shift device down to provide Z-in. gap between top of device and top
of wainscot. Outlet boxes shall be within l/4-inch of the finished wall surface except
that boxes for flush plates shall not protrude beyond the wall surface.
1.
2.
Telecom Outlets
E:
General for Desk Phone
Wall Phone
::
Data Outlet
Multi-drop Outlet
Convenience Outlet
a. General Wall
b. Mechanical or Electrical
Equipment Rooms
C. Electric Water Cooler
outlet or junction box.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
d. Above Counter or Backsplash
Light Switch or Dimmer
Clock Outlet
Fire Alarm Pull Station
Fire Alarm Audio Devices
Fire Alarm Visual Devices or
Combination Audio/Visual
+18”
+46”
+18”
+18”
+18”
+46”
Center on unit where
accessible after unit is instal-
led +4”
+46” +84”
+46”
+90”
+80” or 6”
below finished
20 OCTOBER 1997 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
Carlsbad City Library 16050-6 96013
8.
Devices.
Television Outlet
E:
General for Console N
Wall Mounted Television
ceiling,
whichever is
lower
+18”
+84”
B. All devices shall be square and level with no gaps around the trim.
C. Adjacent devices, mounted at the same elevation, shall be provided with a single,
common trimplate.
3.66 CHECKING AND TESTING OF EQUIPMENT:
A. Switchboards, panelboards, disconnects, and all other operable equipment worked
on under this contract shall be inspected for defects, and tested for proper operation.
B. Systems shall be tested for short circuits, open circuits, wrong connections, and
grounds. All systems shall be free from mechanical and electrical defects.
C. Circuits shall be tested for proper neutral and ground connections.
D. Where required or directed, systems shall be tested in the presence of the Architect
to demonstrate that equipment furnished, installed, or connected functions in the
manner intended.
E. The Contractor shall furnish all necessary instruments and equipment required for
testing and shall immediately correct any defective work at no additional charge.
Should the Contractor refuse or neglect to make tests necessary to satisfy the Archi-
tect that he has carried out the true intent and meaning of the specifications, the
Architect may have such tests made and charge the expense thereof to the Contrac-
tor to be retained out of full final payment.
F. Bolted connections shall be torque-tightened to manufacturer’s specifications. The
Contractor shall torque all connections with a wrench that has been calibrated within
the last three (3) months. Submit proof of calibration to the Owner’s Representative.
G. Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupter Tests: Test each branch circuit having ground fault
circuit protection to ensure that the ground fault circuit interrupter will not operate
when subjected to a ground fault current of less than 4 milliamperes and will operate
when subjected to ground fault current exceeding 6 milliamperes. Perform tests
using an instrument specifically designed and manufactured for testing ground fault
circuit interrupters. Apply the test to the receptacle which is the greatest distance
from the ground fault interrupter. If ground-fault interrupter type receptacles are
installed, test each receptacle for proper operation. “TEST” button operation will not
be acceptable as a substitute for this test.
H. Transformer Tests: Test transformer secondary voltage and adjust the voltage taps
at the transformer to provide the required secondary voltage.
20 OCTOBER 1997 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
Carlsbad City Library 16050-7 96013
I. For additional checking and testing of special systems, see the section where those
systems are specified.
l l l END OF SECTION l l l
20 OCTOBER 1997 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
Carlsbad City Library 16050-8 96013
,- SECTION 16110
RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
1.02
z- 1.03
1.04 WARRANTY:
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:
A. The provisions of Section 16011, “General Requirements, Electrical” and Section
16050, “Basic Electrical Materials and .Methods” apply to this Section as if fully
repeated herein.
APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS:
A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent
referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only.
1. National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA) Publications.
2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Publications.
3. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials
(AASHTO).
4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Publications.
5. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., (UL) Publications.
SUBMITTALS:
A. The following information shall be submitted for review and approval in accordance
with Section 16011, “General Requirements, Electrical”.
B.
1. Rigid steel conduit
2. PVC coated rigid steel conduit
3. Rigid Plastic
4. Electrical metallic tubing
5. Flexible metallic conduit
6. Liquid-tight flexible metallic conduit
7. Conduit fittings and devices (each type)
8. Conduit seal-off fittings
9. Pullrope
Conduit shall be delivered to the site in standard lengths with each length bearing
the manufacturer’s trademark or stamp and U.L. labeled.
A. Warranty shall comply with the provisions of Section 16011, “General Requirements,
Electrical”.
20 OCTOBER 1997 RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS
Carlsbad City Library 16110-l 96013
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 CONDUIT AND FITTINGS:
A. Standard weight rigid galvanired steel (RGS) conduit shall be hot dipped galvanized
or sheradized. All fittings shall be of the screw thread type. Couplings, locknuts,
bushings, etc., shall be hot dipped galvanized or sherardized. Where indicated, rigid
steel conduit shall be PVC coated (minimum 40 mils).
B. Electrical metallic tubing (EMT) shall be galvanized or sherardized. Couplings and
connectors shall be galvanized or sheradized. Fittings shall be steel compression
type with gland sealing rings. Indent or drive-on fittings shall not be permitted.
C. Flexible conduit shall be galvanized steel. Where used in damp or wet locations or
where indicated herein, it shall be of the liquid-tight type with outer neoprene jacket
and suitable liquid-tight fittings.
D. Rigid nonmetallic conduit shall be (PVC) Schedule 40, U.L. approved. All couplings,
fittings, solvent cement, etc., shall be manufactured specifically for the type of
material with which they are used. Plastic conduit shall be stored on a flat surface
and protected from direct sunlight.
2.05 PULLROPE:
A. The pullrope shall be polyethylene with a minimum tensile strength of ZOO-pounds.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 LOCATIONS:
A. Rigid Galvanized Steel Conduit (RGS):
1. Where exposed to weather (including rooftop and under canopy locations).
2. For roof penetrations.
3. Underground in contact with earth.
4. Underground below concrete slab.
5. In concrete or masonry construction.
6. For all or any portion of exposed conduits less than five (5)-feet above
finished floor.
7. To concealed locations from below grade PVC coated RGS risers up to the
first device or to five (5)-feet above finished floor.
8. At seismic separations or expansion joints.
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS
16110-Z 96013
9. Where shown on drawings or indicated herein.
B. RGS With PVC Coating:
1. Conduit stub-ups from underground including the final 90” sweep and the
riser.
2. Underground bends or sweeps in PVC conduit.
3. Service entrance conduits within five (5)-feet outside the building perimeter
to the service point within the building.
4. Where shown on drawings.
C. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT):
1. Interior dry locations.
2. At interior dry seismic separations or expansion joints.
3. Above five (5)-feet in interior exposed locations.
4. Above five (5)-feet or above the first device in interior concealed locations for
conduit risers from below the bottom floor slab.
5. EMT shall m be installed on rooftop or under canopy locations or in poured
concrete or masonry construction. EMT shall not be used for roof
penetrations.
D. Flexible Metal Conduit:
1. Final device connections to direct wired equipment not to exceed four (4)-feet
long in interior dry locations.
2. Light fixture connections in accessible locations.
3. Where shown on drawings or indicated herein.
4. Flexible metal conduit shall m be used to penetrate fire resistive walls, floors
or ceilings.
5. Flexible metal conduit shall @ be installed in place of EMT for interior wiring.
E. Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal Conduit:
1. Final connections of conduit systems to all motors, generators and direct
wired vibrating equipment (including transformers) for interior and exterior
locations not to exceed four (4)-feet long.
2. At seismic separations or expansion joints.
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS
16110-3 96013
3. Where shown on drawings or indicated herein.
F. Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit (PVC):
1. Rigid nonmetallic conduit (PVC-40) may be installed in place of RGS
underground, outside of the building foundation or where used for emergency
power system feeders encased in 3” of concrete.
2. Rigid nonmetallic conduit (PVC-40) may be installed in place of RGS
underground, under the building bottom floor slab, except for emergency
feeders, encased in 3” of sand. Emergency feeders shall be encased in 3”
of concrete.
3. Concrete walls or slabs except bottom floor.
4. Where shown on drawings.
G. Plastic Duct:
1. Plastic duct (where indicated) may be installed underground, outside of the
building foundation, encased in 3” of concrete minimum.
CONDUIT SIZES:
A. The minimum conduit size shall be l/Z-inch for lighting and power branch circuit
wiring. The minimum “Homerun” conduit size to any panelboard, load center,
switchboard, or motor control center shall be 3/4-inch. For concrete encased duct
structures the minimum size shall be 4” unless otherwise noted.
B. The maximum EMT size shall be 4”.
C. Condulets for conduits larger than l-l/Z” I.D. shall be of the mogul design secured
to the building structure within 6” of each conduit connection.
INSTALLATION:
A. All conduits shall contain an insulated ground wire whether indicated or not. The
ground wire shall be sized in accordance with Table 250-95 of the Code, unless
otherwise noted.
B. All conduit systems shall be mechanically and electrically continuous.
C. Conduits shall not be encased in concrete floor slabs on grade (bottom floor slab).
D. No conduit for any purpose shall be installed in or under any portion of the concrete
floor slab of vault spaces.
.20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS
16110-4 96013
.-
;-
r-
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
0.
P.
Conduit shall not run through footings or grade beams or other structural members
except where specifically directed by the Architect.
All conduit to be installed in concrete or masonry work shall be carefully laid and
rigidly supported in the forms in such a manner as to provide proper clearance and
so that all boxes and rings will be flush after concrete has set and forms have been
removed. Conduit installation shall not, in any case, weaken the structural integrity
of the concrete wall or slab. Additional rebar required to maintain the structural
strength of the concrete shall be the responsibility of the Electrical Contractor.
Paint underground rigid steel conduit with “Phelans” asphaltum, or approved equal.
Seal service entrance conduits and all underground conduit runs with “Duct Seal” or
equal. Make gas-tight. This includes PVC conduit runs which terminate in steel
risers. Seal in junction boxes, panelboards, and/or switchboards.
Conduits shall be run concealed, except in certain approved and indicated locations.
Conduits shall be grouped in neat parallel lines following the lines of the building
structure.
Rooftop conduits (rigid steel) shall be neatly grouped and installed parallel to the
building lines. Support conduits on minimum 2” x 4” redwood sleepers at minimum
5’ spacing.
Conduit only (C.O.) routed for device connections into accessible corridor ceiling
locations shall be securely fastened to the structure to prevent movement during wire
or cable pulling.
A polyethylene pullrope shall be installed in every run of “conduit only” (C.O.). A
minimum of 36-inches of slack shall be left at both ends of each pullrope. Both ends
of all pullropes shall be identified by means of labels or tags which shall identify the
location or room designation of the other end.
The ends of all conduits shall be square, carefully reamed out to full size, shouldered
in the fittings, and bushed or capped wherever stubbed clear of the building.
Upon completion of any run of conduit, test the run and see that it is free of
obstruction. Plug each end with conduit pennies and bushings and leave plugged
until ready to pull wire or cable.
Not more than four (4) go-degree ells or bends or the equivalent shall be used in any
single run of conduit. Conduits for telephone, television or data cable shall not have
more than two (2) go-degree bends or the equivalent. Where more bends are
necessary, provide suitable code size pullboxes or fittings. All conduits for telephone,
television or data systems cable shall have large radius bends. Pullboxes shall be
installed in accessible locations.
Conduit installed on equipment shall not obstruct any removable panel, access door,
or control. Control apparatus, outlet, junction, and pullboxes, shall be installed so as
not to interfere with any piping, fixtures, or equipment.
20 OCTOBER 1997 RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS
Carlsbad City Library 16110-5 96013
Q.
R.
S.
T.
U.
V.
W.
Provide one (1) 3Mnch conduit (minimum of six (6) total) for each three (3) spares
or spaces in all flush mounted power or lighting panelboards. Route conduits to
accessible space above ceiling; cap and tag conduit.
Conduits installed across seismic separations (expansion joints) shall include, but not
be limited to, the following:
1. The conduit (rigid steel or EMT) shall be securely anchored on each side of
the seismic separation with a pipe hanger per SMACNA details.
2.
3.
The spacing between conduit ends shall be 36” minimum.
A liquid-tight flexible metal conduit of the same size shall be installed
between the conduit ends spanning the seismic separation.
4. The liquid-tight flexible metal conduit shall be of sufficient length to provide
for a longitudinal and axial deflection of two (2)-inches minimum in all
directions.
Fire alarm conduit shall be painted red 6” wide for each eight (8)-feet of length or part
thereof.
Openings for conduits passing through fire rated floors, walls or ceilings shall be
sealed in accordance with Section 16050, “Basic Electrical Materials and Methods”.
All exposed conduits shall be primed and painted to match the surrounding finishes.
Final color choice shall be selected by the Architect.
Separate conduits shall be provided for the installation of normal and emergency
power system wiring and for separating the branches of the emergency power
system wiring.
Underground Duct with Concrete Encasement: Construct underground duct lines of
individual conduits encased in concrete. Except where rigid galvanized steel is
indicated or specified, the conduit shall be of PVC Schedule 40 unless otherwise
noted. Do not mix the kind of conduits used in any one (1) duct bank. The concrete
encasement surrounding the ducts shall be rectangular in cross-section and shall
provide at least (3)-inches of concrete cover for ducts. Separate conduits by a
minimum concrete thickness of (2)-inches. Separate light and power conduits from
control, signal, and telephone conduits by a minimum concrete thickness of (3)-
inches.
1. The top of the concrete envelope shall not be less than 36-inches below
grade unless othewise shown on plans.
2. Duct lines shall have a continuous slope downward away from buildings with
a pitch of not less than (3)-inches in loo-feet. Except at conduit risers,
changes in direction of runs exceeding a total of 10 degrees, either vertical
or horizontal, shall be accomplished by long sweep bends having a minimum
radius of curvature of 25-feet, sweep bends may be made up of one (1) or
more curved or straight sections or combinations thereof. Manufactured
20 OCTOBER 1997 RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS
Carlsbad City Library 16110-6 96013
bends shall have a minimum radius of 18inches for use with conduits of less
than three (3)-inches in diameter and a minimum radius of 36inches for
ducts of three (3)-inches in diameter and larger. PVC conduits shall convert
to rigid galvanized steel conduit with PVC jacket at the last 90 degree elbow
for conduit stub-up.
3. Conduits shall terminate in end-bells where duct lines enter manholes, vaults
or trenches. Separators shall be of precast concrete, high impact
polystyrene, steel, or any combination of these. The joints of the conduits
shall be staggered by rows and layers so as to provide a duct line having the
maximum strength. During construction, partially completed duct lines shall
be protected from the entrance of debris such as mud, sand, and dirt by
means of suitable conduit plugs. As each section of a duct line is completed
from structure to structure, a testing mandrel not less than twelve (12)-inches
long with a diameter l/4-inch less than the size of the conduit, shall be drawn
through each conduit. After which, a brush having the diameter of the duct,
and having stiff bristles shall be drawn through until the conduit is clear of all
particles of earth, sand, or gravel. Conduit plugs shall then be immediately
installed. Manholes, vaults and trenches shall be repaired with waterproofing
materials after conduit termination.
4. Conduit connections to existing manholes, vaults and trenches shall be core
drilled.
T- 3.04 EARTHWORK:
A. Excavate trenches to depths indicated except that if hard material is encountered,
the provisions of the contract respecting an adjustment for changed conditions shall
apply, subject to the requirements of notification thereunder being given. Hard
material shall be defined as solid rock, firmly cemented unstratified masses or
conglomerate deposits possessing the characteristics of solid rock not ordinarily
removed without systematic drilling and blasting, and any boulder, masonry, or
concrete (except pavement), exceeding l/Z-cubic yard in volume.
B. Excavated materials not required or suitable for backfill shall be removed from the
project site. Provide sheeting and shoring as necessary for protection of work and
safety of personnel. Remove water from excavation by pumping or other approved
method.
C. Backfilling: Provide a plastic warning tape approximately twelve (12)-inches below
the top of the trench in the backfill. Backfill shall be placed in layers not more than
six (6)~inches thick and each layer shall be compacted. Backfilling shall be free from
roots, wood scrap material, and other vegetable matter and refuse. Compaction of
backfill shall be to 95 percent of maximum density.
/-
1. Backfilling around structures shall consist of earth, loam, sand-clay, or sand
and gravel, free from large clods of earth or stones over one inch in size.
Backfill materials shall be placed symmetrically on all sides in loose layers not
more than nine (9)-inches deep. Each layer shall be moistened, if necessary,
and compacted with mechanical or hand tampers to 95 percent compaction.
20 OCTOBER 1997 RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS
Carlsbad City Library 16110-7 96013
3.05 CONCRETE:
A. Concrete for electrical ductbank requirements shall be at least 3000 psi concrete
after seven (7)-days with one (l)-inch maximum aggregate. Concrete shall be
composed of fine aggregate warse aggregate, type II, Portland cement, and water
so proportioned and mixed as to produce a plastic, workable mixture. Fine aggregate
shall be of hard, dense, durable, clean, and uncoated sand. The coarse aggregate
shall be misonably well graded from 3/16-inch to one (1)~inch. The fine and warse
aggregates shall be free from injurious amounts of dirt, vegetable matter, soft
fragments or other deleterious substances. Water shall be fresh, clean, and free
from salts, alkali, organic matter, and other impurities. Concrete shall have a
compressive strength of 4000 psi at the age of twenty eight (28-days). Slump shall
not exceed 3-inches. Retempering of concrete will not be permitted. Exposed,
unformed concrete surfaces shall be given a smooth, wood float finish. Concrete
shall be cured for a period of not less than seven (7)-days, and concrete made with
high early strength Portland cement shall be repaired by patching honeycomb or
otherwise defective areas with cement mortar as directed by the Architect.
3.06 GROUNDING:
A. Grounding shall be accordance with Section 16450, “Grounding”.
3.07 CONDUIT SUPPORTS:
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
Conduit, which is not buried or embedded in concrete, shall be supported by straps,
clamps or hangers to provide a rigid installation.
Conduit shall not be installed on hangers and/or supports installed by other trades
for their use.
Conduit shall not be supported from or attached to wiling wire and/or wiling suspen-
sion systems or other systems installed for purposes of accommodating other
systems within the building.
Conduit shall not be supported from other conduit.
Conduits shall be supported within three (3) feet of any kind of fitting and at every
outlet or junction box, panel, etc. This shall .apply to both horizontal and vertical runs,
Powder-driven pins or studs shall not be used.
Where conduits are run individually, they shall be supported by approved straps,
clamps and hangers.
1. No perforated straps or wire hangers of any kind shall be used.
Conduits installed exposed in damp locations shall be provided with clamp backs
under each conduit clamp to prevent accumulation of moisture around the conduits.
1. Open bottom, spring tension, snap-in clamps shall not be used.
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS
16110-8 96013
-
-
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
0.
Where a number of conduits are to be run parallel, they shall be grouped and
supported by trapeze hangers. Each conduit shall be clamped to the trapeze hanger
with conduit clamps.
1. Multiple conduits shall be coordinated as to their location on the rack so that
they enter and exit the rack in an orderly fashion with as little crossing of
conduits as possible.
2. Trapeze hangers shall be constructed to allow for future growth. Provide a
minimum 20% empty space on each rack for future conduit runs.
All wncrete inserts and pipe straps shall be galvanized.
All steel bolts, nuts, washers, rods, trapeze hangers and screws shall be galvanized
or cadmium-plated.
Support horizontal runs of RGS or EMT at a maximum of eight (8) feet between
supports.
Support vertical runs of RGS or EMT at a maximum of ten (10) feet between sup-
ports.
Flexible conduit shall be supported at a maximum of four and one half (4-l/2) feet
between supports.
Support RGS or EMT within three (3) feet of outlet boxes, junction boxes, cabinets
or fittings. Support flexible conduit within one (1) foot of boxes.
3.08 SEISMIC BRACING:
A. Use the following criteria for seismic bracing of electrical conduits:
1. Wherever combined weights of multiple conduits plus contents on a trapeze
equals or exceeds the weight of a single Z-l/Z-inch conduit plus contents,
brace trapeze system in accord with SMACNA Guideline Details 26 and 37.
B. The following conduit plus contents weight data may be used for EMT in lieu of page
9 of SMACNA guidelines:
CONDUIT PLUS CONTENTS WEIGHT DATA
EMT SIZE (IN) LBSlFT
l/2 0.53
314 0.88
1 1.30
l-114 1.90
l-112 2.70
2 4.40
Z-112 5.70
3 9.40
20 OCTOBER 1997 RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS
Carlsbad City Library 16110-g 96013
C.
D.
3-l/2 10.00
4 12.50
SMACNA guidelines for bracing Schedule 34 is set up in maximum weight per
trapeze support assembly. Weight per trapeze support assembly must be calculated
from above table and spacing between support assemblies.
For assemblies carrying less than 320-LB., down to equivalent of a single Z-l/Z-inch
conduit plus contents, use 320-LB criteria.
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
+ l l END OF SECTION l l l
RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS
16110-10 96013
SECTION 16112
MANHOLES, UTILITY BOXES, PADS, AND VAULTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .Ol GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:
A. The provisions of Section 1601 I, “General Requirements, Electrical” and Section
16050, “Basic Electrical Materials and Methods” apply to this Section as if fully
repeated herein.
1.02 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS:
A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent
referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only.
1.
2.
3.
National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA) Publications.
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Publications.
American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials
(AASHTO).
4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Publications.
5. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., (UL) Publications.
,- 1.03 SUBMITTALS: ,
A. The following information shall be submitted for review and approval in accordance
with Section 16011, “General Requirements, Electrical”.
1. Utility Padmount Transformer Pad
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Provide shop drawings of all special device configurations including, but not
limited to:
a. Utility Padmount Transformer Pad
1.04 WARRANTY:
A. Warranty shall comply with the provisions of Section 1601 I, “General Requirements,
Electrical”.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 UTILITY PADMOUNT TRANSFORMER PAD:
.f-
20 OCTOBER 1997 MANHOLES, UTILITY BOXES, PADS, AND VAULTS
Carlsbad City Library 16112-l 96013
A. The utility padmount transformer pad shall be in accordance with the requirements
of San Diego Gas and Electric Company and shall be as manufactured by Brooks or
Quickset.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 CONCRETE: -
A. Concrete for electrical equipment pad requirements shall be at least 3000 psi
concrete after seven (7)-days with one (I)-inch maximum aggregate. Concrete shall
be composed of fine aggregate coarse aggregate, type II, Portland cement, and
water so proportioned and mixed as to produce a plastic, workable mixture. Fine
aggregate shall be of hard, dense, durable, clean, and uncoated sand. The coarse
aggregate shall be reasonably well graded from 3/l&inch to one (I)-inch. The fine
and coarse aggregates shall be free from injurious amounts of dirt, vegetable matter,
soft fragments or other deleterious substances. Water shall be fresh, clean, and free
from salts, alkali, organic matter, and other impurities. Concrete shall have a
compressive strength of 4000 psi at the age of twenty eight (26-days). Slump shall
not exceed 3-inches. Retempering of concrete will not be permitted. Exposed,
unformed concrete surfaces shall be given a smooth, wood float finish. Concrete
shall be cured for a period of not less than seven (7)-days, and concrete made with
high early strength Portland cement shall be repaired by patching honeycomb or
otherwise defective areas with cement mortar as directed by the Architect.
3.02 GROUNDING:
A. Grounding shall be accordance with Section 16450, “Grounding”.
l * l END OF SECTION * l l
20 OCTOBER 1997 MANHOLES, UTILITY BOXES, PADS, AND VAULTS
Carlsbad City Library 16112-2 96013
SECTION 16114
CABLE TRAYS
PART I- GENERAL
1 .Ol GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:
A. The provisions of Section 16011, “General Requirements, Electrical*’ and Section
16050, “Basic Electrical Materials and Methods” apply to this Section as if fully
repeated herein.
1.02 SUBMITTALS:
A. The following information shall be submitted for approval:
1. Catalog Cuts:
F:
C.
Cable tray and fittings (each type)
Cable tray expansion/deflection fittings
Conduit clamps
1.03 WARRANTY:
- A. Warranty shall comply with the provisions of Section 1601 I, “General Requirements,
Electrical”.
1.04 COMMERCIAL PRODUCT:
A. The manufacturer of the cable tray and all fittings shall be B-Line, Cope, P & W,
Chalfant or equal.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 CABLE TRAY:
A. Cable tray shall be aluminum, “ladder type”, 4” deep, width as indicated. Cable tray
shall be continuous where indicated and shall include all required fittings and
accessories for cable support and protection.
B. Ladder type cable tray shall have a maximum 9” rung spacing. Rungs shall have a
minimum cable bearing surface of 3/4” with radiused edges.
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
CABLE TRAYS
16114-I 96013
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION:
A. Cable tray sections shall be supported with trapeze type hangers or anchored to the
floor on minimum IO intervals (or as indicated on drawings) and shall be capable of
supporting the rated loading of the tray.
B. Cable tray runs above suspended ceilings shall be ladder type independently
supported from the building structure and shall be installed with sufficient clearance
from the ceiling system to permit ceiling tiles to be removed and to allow full access
to the space above.
C. Cable tray runs in open ceiling areas shall be solid bottom type supported from the
building structure independently and installed with sufficient clearance from the
ceiling and other equipment to allow full access to the space above the tray.
D. Provide expansion deflection fittings and accessories for cable trays where crossing
building expansion joints.
E. Openings for cable trays passing through fire rated floors, walls or ceilings shall be
sealed in accordance with Section 16050, “Basic Electrical Materials and Methods”.
F. Provide conduit to cable tray clamps for all conduits carrying cables (or future cables)
to the cable tray.
* l l END OF SECTION l l l
20 OCTOBER 1997 CABLE TRAYS
Carlsbad City Library 16114-2 96013
-
20 OCTOBER 1997 WIRE AND CABLE (600 VOLTS AND BELOW)
Carlsbad City Library 16120-I
SECTION 16120
WIRE AND CABLE (600 VOLT AND BELOW)
PART I- GENERAL
1 .Ol GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:
A. The provisions of Section 1601 I, “General Requirements, Electrical” and Section
16050, “Basic Electrical Materials and Methods” apply to this Section as if fully
repeated herein.
1.02 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS:
A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent
referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only.
1. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers, Inc. (IEEE) Publications.
2. National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA) Publications.
3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Publications.
4. Undemriters Laboratories, Inc., (UL) Publications.
1.03 SUBMITTALS:
A. The following information shall be submitted for review and approval in accordance
with Section 1601 I, “General Requirements, Electrical”.
1. Wire and Cable (each type)
2. wire Splices
3. Cable Lubricants
4. Insulating Tape
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Cable Tag Schedule
C. Manufacturer’s Instructions:
1. Provide manufacturer’s instructions for the following items:
a. Manufacturer’s directions for use of ground megger with proposed
method indicated.
1.04 WARRANTY:
A. Warranty shall comply with the provisions of Section 1601 I, “General Requirements,
Electrical”.
96013
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 WIRE AND CABLES:
A. Wire and cable conductor sizes are designated by American Wire Gauge (AWG) or
Million Circular Mils (MCM). Deliver all wire and cable to the site in original unbroken
packages, plainly marked or tagged with Underwriters’ Label, size and type of
conductortype of insulation, rated voltage, name of manufacturing company, trade
name of wire, and month and year of manufacture. The date of manufacture shall
not exceed six (6) months prior to delivery to the site. Wire installed without all of
the above identification shall be removed and approved wire installed.
B. 600 volt wire and cable: All low voltage conductors shall be copper, not less than
98% conductivity and 600 volt class. Wire smaller than No. 8 AWG may be solid
conductor; No. 8 AWG and larger wire shall be stranded conductor. Minimum wire
size shall be No. 12 AWG unless otherwise indicated. Wire for branch circuitry inside
building shall be type THWN (75%) except that type THHN (9OOC) wire shall be used
for connection of light fixtures. Wire used as feeders to switchboards, panelboards,
motor control centers, or other major electrical components shall be Type XHHW
(75OC).
1. All wiring shall be color coded as follows:
208/l 20 volt 480/277 volt
A Phase Black
B Phase Red
C Phase Blue
Neutral White
Brown
Orange
Yellow
GUY Ground Green Green
2. Switch legs for local wall switches shall be the same color as the phase
wires.
3. Isolated ground wires shall be green with yellow striping.
2.02 WIRE SPLICES:
A. 600V and Below:
1. #8 and smaller wire shall be Scotchlock or equal, no known equal, pressure
type solderless connectors with insulator.
2. #6 and larger wire shall be Bumdy, Type OPX, or equal, no known equal,
solderless lugs and clamp-type connector.
a. Uninsulated solderless connectors shall be insulated as follows:
Wrap with two (2) complete thicknesses of varnish cambric followed
by 6 complete wraps of Scotch 33 or equal, no known equal, followed
by one (1) complete wrap of Scotch 2200 followed by one (1) heat-
shrinkable, thick-wall cable sleeve, Scotch type ITCSN with factory
20 OCTOBER 1997 WIRE AND CABLE (600 VOLTS AND BELOW) Carlsbad City Library 16120-2 96013
-
,C
applied adhesive/sealant, extending a minimum of four (4) inches at
each end beyond the cable splice point.
3. #l/O wire and larger, for ground conductors, shall be cast by Cadweld or
equal, no known equal, fusible metal process.
4. Epoxy splice kits shall be used for all splices made below grade, in wet
locations or in concrete pull boxes and hand holes. These kits shall consist
of epoxy resin, hardener and mold. The kits shall be manufactured by 3M or
equal, no known equal.
2.03 CABLE LUBRICANTS:
A. Lubricants for assisting in the pulling of the specified cables shall be those specifi-
cally recommended by the cable manufacturer.
2.04 INSULATING TAPE: UL 510
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 WIRE AND CABLE INSTALLATION:
A. All wiring shall be installed in accordance with the National Electrical Code. All wiring
shall be installed in conduit except where other raceway systems or methods are
specifically shown on the drawings or required by the specifications.
3.02 600 VOLT WIRE AND CABLE:
A. Thoroughly clean out all conduit and wireways and see that all parts are perfectly dry
before pulling any wires. Use no lubricant except powdered soapstone or Minerallac
No. 100 or equal, no known equal, pull-in compound. A mechanical wire puller may
be used where directed, in which case a lubricant shall be used. Any wire damaged
as a result of installation under this section shall be pulled out and replaced with new
at no additional cost to Owner.
B. Make all connections and splices necessary to property complete the electrical
wiring. Connections and splices shall be made only in pull, junction, or outlet boxes,
or in switchboards, wireways, or panels having sufficient code-sized gutter space.
C. Connections to equipment or bus bars shall be made with approved solderless
compression type copper lugs for all wires No. 8 AWG and larger. Special lugs or
connections shall be as shown on the plans. Binding screws may be used for size
No. 10 and smaller. Where stranded wire is connected to binding screws, nylon, self-
insulated, ring tongue, pressure type terminals (type T&B Sta-Kon) or equal, no
known equal, shall be used on the wire. Soldering will not be an acceptable method
of connecting any power conductors. Clipping of wires from standard cable to fit
connectors and terminal lugs shall not be permitted.
D. All conductors shall be continuous from outlet to outlet and no splices shall be made
except within outlet or junction boxes. Junction boxes may be utilized where
20 OCTOBER 1997 WIRE AND CABLE (600 VOLTS AND BELOW)
Carlsbad City Library 16120-3 96013
required. At least 8” of wire shall be left at outlet boxes for connecting fixtures and
devices.
E. No wire smaller than No. 12-gauge shall be used, except for signal or control
systems, or where otherwise indicated. No. 1 O-gage wire shall be used for 15 or 20
ampere 120 volt branch circuits in excess of 100 feet in length. This is intended to
reduce branch circuit voltage drop and takes precedence over #12 branch circuitry
indicatedin drawings. Record drawings shall indicate installed wire size.
F. Parallel Feeders:
1. Each phase wire and neutral wire of each parallel run shall be the same
length.
G. Wires entering switchboards, panelboards, transformers, and disconnects shall be
of sufficient length for proper termination without splicing within the equipment
enclosure. Any wires installed that require splicing for terminating shall be removed
and replaced with ones of the proper length. Wires shall be trained and supported
in a neat bundles.
H. Wiring Bundles or Harnesses:
1. Multiple wires in bundles or harnesses terminating in control panels,
switchboards, panelboards, etc., shall be bundled, trained and laced to
achieve a neat and workmanlike appearance.
2. Surplus wire protruding from the harness for termination shall be trimmed to
the proper length. Do not fold and stuff surplus wires into wiring gutters.
3. Wires exiting the bundle or harness shall be carefully trained at a 90” angle
to the termination point.
I. Permanent tags shall be connected to all feeders in intermediate pullboxes (where
used) to provide identification for future use.
J. The maximum number of “hot” (phase conductors) wires for feeder or branch circuit
wiring in one (1) conduit shall not exceed three (3) unless otherwise noted.
K. Cable Terminating: Terminations of insulated power and lighting cables shall be
protected from accidental contact, deterioration of coverings, and moisture by the use
of terminating devices and materials. Terminations shall be made using materials
and methods as indicated or specified herein or as designated by the written instruc-
tion of the cable manufacturer and termination kit manufacturer.
3.03 UNDERGROUND WIRE AND CABLE INSTALLATION:
A. Cable Pulling: Cables shall be pulled down grade with the feed-in point at the
manhole or buildings of the highest elevation. Flexible cable feeds shall be used to
convey cables through the manhole opening and into the duct runs.
20 OCTOBER 1997 WIRE AND CABLE (600 VOLTS AND BELOW)
Carlsbad City Library 16120-4 96013
C.
1. Maximum tension when pulling cables using a pulling eye, shall be 0.006-
pounds per circular mil of conductor cross-section. The maximum pull on a
single conductor shall be 5,000-pounds and on three conductors pulled as a
group shall be 6,000-pounds. Under no circumstances shall the pulling
tension exceed the manufacturer’s limits. A tension synometer shall be used
for pulling in all runs above 600 volts of l/O and larger cable, and runs longer
than 200-feet. Basket weave type pulling devices shall not be used on
medium voltage cables having tape shields. Use cable eyes provided with
precut lengths of cable.
2. Shields shall be provided where cables enter and leave manholes, vaults,
pullboxes, and trenches and other duct entrances, and shall be of a suitable
type manufactured for the purpose.
B. Provide porcelain insulators under cable at all racks in electrical manhole, vaults,
pullboxes, and trenches. Tie-wrap cable and insulator to racking (two (2) tie-wrap at
each insulator minimum).
3.04 FIELD TESTS:
A. As an exception to requirements that may be stated elsewhere in the contract, the
Architect shall be given five (5) working days notice prior to each test.
B. Testing Equipment: The testing equipment and devices used in performing the
required tests shall have a calibration sticker affixed to the device stating the date
when calibrated, date due for recalibration, and the signature of the individual who
did the calibration, In addition to the sticker, a certificate shall also contain the brand
name and the serial number of the device.
Insulation Resistance Test for Systems 600 Volts and Less: After all wiring is
completed and connected ready for operation, but prior to placing systems in service
and before any branch circuit breakers are closed, insulation resistance tests shall
be made in all feeder and subfeeder circuits. The insulation resistance between
conductors and between each conductor and ground shall be measured.
Measurements shall be made with an instrument capable of marking measurements
at an applied potential of 500 volts. Readings shall be taken after the voltage has
been applied for a minimum of one minute. The minimum insulation resistance for
circuits of No. 12 AWG conductors shall be l,OOO,OOO ohms. For circuits of No. 10
AWG or larger conductors, a resistance based on the allowable ampacity of the
conductor as fixed by NFPA 70 shall be as follows:
25 through 40 amperes 250,000 ohms
51 through 100 amperes 100,000 ohms
101 through 200 amperes 50,000 ohms
201 through 400 amperes 25,000 ohms
401 through 800 amperes 12,000 ohms
Over 800 amperes 5,000 ohms
20 OCTOBER 1997 WIRE AND CABLE (600 VOLTS AND BELOW)
Carlsbad City Library 16120-5 96013
D. Test Report (Submit four (4) copies in writing):
1. 600 volt cables (identify each cable 8 test results)
E. For additional testing requirements, see Section 16950, “Acceptance Testing of
Electrical Power and Distribution Equipment”.
l l l END OF SECTION l l l
20 OCTOBER 1997 WIRE AND CABLE (600 VOLTS AND BELOW)
Carlsbad City Library 16120-6 96013
SECTION 16130
OUTLET, PULL, AND JUNCTION BOXES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .Ol GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:
A. The provisions of Section 16011, “General Requirements, Electrical” and Section
16050, “Basic Electrical Materials and Methods” apply to this Section as if fully
repeated herein.
1.02 SUBMITTALS:
A. The following information shall be submitted for review and approval in accordance
with Section 16011, “General Requirement, Electrical”.
1. Catalog Cuts:
Outlet Boxes
Pull Boxes
Junction Boxes
Floor boxes
/c 1.03 WARRANTY:
A. Warranty shall comply with the provisions of Section 16011, “General Requirements,
Electrical”.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 OUTLET AND JUNCTION BOXES:
A. The size of each outlet or junction box shall be determined by the number and sizes
of wires and conduits entering the box, but shall be not less than 4-inch square and
2-l/8-inches deep unless otherwise indicated.
B. Outlet and junction boxes for interior use shall be galvanized or sherardized, one-
piece pressed or welded steel, knockout type, except where other types of boxes are
indicated or specified.
C. Outlet and junction boxes for exterior use shall be lug type “Bell,” boxes “25OL”
through “254L”, “Crouse-Hinds FS” type, as applicable or equal.
D. Outlet boxes shall be equipped with plaster rings, inserts and fixture studs as may
be required. Knockout seals shall be provided where knockouts are not intact.
E. Plastic, fiber or composition boxes shall not be permitted.
20 OCTOBER 1997 OUTLET, PULL, AND JUNCTION BOXES
Carlsbad City Library 16130-I 96013
F. Telecommunication Outlets: Voice and data wall outlet boxes shall be 4-l l/16-inch
square by 2-l/&inch deep metal boxes, with plaster ring.
G. All exterior pullboxes, plates, fittings, etc., mounted below 10’0 in height shall be
fitted with rustproof, tamperpmof screws. Provide Owner with two (2) screw drivers
(or wrenches) to fit special screws. Screws shall be Spanner, Key Slot, Rosette, or
equal.
H. Boxes in concrete shall be of the type to allow placing of conduit without displacing
reinforcing bars, and shall be type approved for concrete use. Boxes installed in
poured wncrete shall be packed with approved material to prevent concrete entering
box. Do not use paper for such packing.
I.
J.
K.
Floor boxes shall be Hubbell, Walker, or equal with carpet flanges for carpeted areas.
Floor boxes shall be as indicated on the drawings.
Outlet boxes which contain both 277 volt and 120 volt lighting circuitry or which
contain two (2)-phases or more of 277 volt lighting circuitry shall be barriered.
Outlet boxes which contain both normal and emergency system circuitry shall be
barriered.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION:
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Outlet boxes shall be securely and independently fastened to the structure and in
concealed work shall be supported flush with finished surface of walls or ceilings.
Bar hangers fitted with fixture studs shall be used to support outlet boxes in stud
partitions and in furred or plastered ceilings.
Fasteners shall be machine screws, nut and lock washers in metal, wood screws in
wood, or expansion shields or inserts in masonry or concrete. Wooden inserts will
not be acceptable.
Label outside of box to identify panel and circuit numbers. Use indelible markers,
nonerasing type, for boxes above ceilings or in concealed locations.
Fire alarm boxes shall be painted red.
l l l END OF SECTION l ’ l
20 OCTOBER 1997 OUTLET, PULL, AND JUNCTION BOXES
Carlsbad City Library 16130-2 96013
SECTION 16140
WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .Ol GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:
A. The provisions of Section 16011, “General Requirements, Electrical” and Section
16050, “Basic Electrical Materials and Methods” apply to this Section as if fully
repeated herein.
1.02 SUBMITTALS:
A. The following information shall be submitted for review and approval in accordance
with Section 16011, “General Requirements, Electrical”.
1. Snap Switches (each type and style)
2. Dimmer Controls (each type and style)
3. Receptacle Outlets (each type and style)
4. Trim and Coverplates (each type and style)
5. Timer Switch
6. Momentary Switch
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Provide shop drawings of all special device configurations.
C. Samples:
1. Provide one (1) sample of each device specified if requested by the Architect.
1.03 WARRANTY:
A. Warranty shall comply with the provisions of Section 16011, “General Requirements,
Electrical”.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 SNAP SWITCHES:
A. AC general use snap switches shall be toggle handle, quiet operating, premium or
heavy duty, specification grade, and U.L. listed.
B. All switches shall be rated 120/277 volts 20 ampere. HP ratings shall be 1 for 120
volt and 2 for 240 volt.
C. Single pole switches shall be Hubbell #CSB120, Arrow Hart #1991, Pass and
Seymour #2OACI, Bryant #4901-G, or equal.
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
WIRING DEVICES
16140-l 96013
D. Three (3) way switches shall be Hubbell #CSB320, Arrow Hart #1993, Pass and
Seymour #2OAC3, Bryant #4903-G, or equal.
E. Toggle wlor shall be white for normal power lighting circuits and red for emergency
power lighting circuits.
F. Low voltage switches shall be specified in Section 16920, “Low Voltage Switching
Systems.*
G. Special purpose switches shall be of the type indicated or required for the application
shown. All special purpose switches shall be NEMA configuration. Submit on all
switches including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Explosion proof
2. Key switches (each type)
2.02 DIMMER CONTROLS:
A. Incandescent or fluorescent dimmer as manufactured by Lutron-Nova-T-Star or
equal, no known equal, with thin profile design, a white faceplate shall project l/4”
from the wall. The plate shall have no exposed fins or screws. Lighting level control
shall be a linear slide captive in the faceplate. Dimmer shall be provided with RFI
filtering. Provide multi-gang faceplates with engravings, as indicated on drawings.
B. Incandescent dimmer, single pole, with 1500 watt capacity Lutron-Nova-T-Star NT
1500 or equal, no known equal.
C. Fluorescent dimmer, single pole, with capacity for up to forty (40)-F40, T8 or T12
lamps, Lutron-Nova-T-Star NTHF-40 or equal, no known equal.
2.03 RECEPTACLE OUTLETS:
A. Grounding receptacles shall be specification grade, 125 volt, 2 pole, 3 wire, NEMA
configuration 5-20R.
1. Receptacles shall be Hubbell #5352 or #5362 as manufactured by Arrow
Hart, Pass & Seymour, Bryant, or Leviton.
2. Safety grounding receptacles shall be Hubbell #SG-62HW or equal by Arrow
Hart, Pass & Seymour, Bryant or Leviton.
3. Ground fault interrupter (GFI) receptacles shall be Hubbell #GF5362W or
equal by Arrow Hart, Pass & Seymour, Bryant or Leviton.
4. Isolated ground receptacles shall be specification grade, 125 volt, 2-pole, 3
wire, NEMA configuration 5-20R.
a. Receptacles shall be Hubbell #5362 or equal by Arrow Hart, Pass 6
Seymour or Bryant.
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
WIRING DEVICES
16140-2 96013
B. Receptacle color shall be:
1. Grounding receptacles - white for normal power circuits, red for emergency
power circuits.
2. Isolated ground receptacles shall be orange.
2.04 TRIM AND COVERPLATES:
A. Provide a trim or wverplate for each outlet, switch device and box. Ganged devices
shall have gang plates exactly matching the arrangement and quantity of devices.
Plates on unfinished walls shall be cast metal having round or beveled edges. Plates
on finished walls shall be break resistant fiberglass, O.lO-inch thick. Screws shall be
machine type with countersunk heads in a wlor to match the finish of the plate. Trim
and coverplates shall be white.
B. Trim and coverplates for low voltage switching system shall be as specified in
Section 16920, “Low Voltage Switching Systems.”
C. All plates shall fit the box perfectly with no field modification necessary. Surface
plates shall not overhang the box.
D. Covers for weatherproof receptacles shall be such that the weatherproof integrity of
the receptacles is maintained while in use. Covers shall be manufactured by Taymac
#20310 or equal, no known equal.
/-
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION:
A. Install all switch and receptacle outlets in the vertical position unless otherwise
shown on the drawings. All devices and trim shall be square and level.
B. Adjacent devices, mounted at the same elevation, shall be provided with a single,
common trimplate.
C. Grounding Receptacle:
1. The green insulated ground (bond) wire shall be spliced together within the
outlet box. A green insulated bonding jumper shall be provided from the
splice to the box body. Attachment to the box body shall be provided using
a tapped #I O-32 x 3/8” screw minimum.
2. A green insulated bonding jumper shall be provided from the splice to the
receptacle ground screw.
D. Isolated Ground Receptacle:
1. the green insulated ground (bond) wire shall be spliced together within the
outlet box. A green insulated bonding jumper shall be provided from the
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
WIRING DEVICES
16140-3 96013
splice to the box body. Attachment to the box body shall be provided using
a tapped #lO-32 x 3/8” screw minimum.
2. The green (with yellow striping) insulated, isolated ground wire shall connect
directly to the receptacle isolated ground screw.
3.02 TESTING:
A. Test all devices in accordance with Section 16011, “General Requirements,
Electrical”, and Section 16050, “Basic Electrical Materials and Methods”.
l l l END OF SECTION l l l
20 OCTOBER 1997 WIRING DEVICES
Carlsbad City Library 16140-4 96013
SECTION 16420
SERVICE ENTRANCE AND METERING EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .Ol GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:
A. The provisions of Section 16011, “General Requirements, Electrical” and Section
16050, “Basic Electrical Materials and Methods” apply to this section as if fully
repeated herein.
1.02 SUBMITTALS:
A. The following information shall be submitted for approval:
1. Main switchboard (including all devices)
2. Utility pull section
3. Metering equipment
4. Feeder fused switches
B. Shop Drawings for service entrance equipment shall be submitted to and approved
by the utility metering shop prior to submittal to the Architect. Documentation of utility
approval shall be provided as part of the equipment submittal.
C. The approval of equipment specified in this section shall be contingent upon the
submittal and approval of the equipment layout drawings required by Section 16011,
“General Requirements, Electrical”.
1.03 SCOPE:
A. All labor, materials, appliances, tools, equipment, facilities, transportation and
services necessary for an incidental to performing all operations in connection with
furnishing, delivery and installation of the work of this section, complete, as shown
on the drawings and/or specified herein. Work includes but is not necessarily limited
to the following:
1. Examine all other sections for work related to the other sections and required
to be included as work under this section.
2. Coordinate all work in this section with related trades.
3. Main service equipment.
B. Metering provisions as required, with written approval of San Diego Gas and Electric
Company.
C. Perform all incidental work not indicated on the drawings nor mentioned in the
specifications that belong to the work described or is required for a completed
system.
20 OCTOBER 1997 SERVICE ENTRANCE AND METERING EQUIPMENT
Carlsbad City Library 16420-l 96013
1.04 WARRANTY:
A. Warranty shall comply with the provisions of Section 16011, “General Requirements,
Electrical”.
1.05 COMMERCIAL PRODUCT:
A. The main service equipment and all components shall be the latest standard product
as manufactured by General Electric, Cutler Hammer-Westinghouse, ITE, or Square
D.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 UTILITY PULL STATION:
A. Utility pull section and landing compartment per requirements of San Diego Gas and
Electric Company.
2.02 UTILITY METERING:
A. Provisions for utility metering as required San Diego Gas and Electric Company.
2.03 MAIN SWITCHBOARD:
A. Each switchboard section shall be a completely self-supporting structure of the
required number of vertical sections bolted together to form one (1) metal enclosed
rigid switchboard 90” high, with sides, top and rear covered with removable code
gauge steel plates mounted with slotted head screws. Provide adequate lifting
means and the means to be rolled or moved into installation position and bolted
directly to the floor without use of floor sills.
B. Bus bars shall be copper, sized on the basis of not more than 1000A amperes per
square inch current density. Copper bus bars shall be welded (cross bus between
sections), shall have all bolted connections tin or silver plated and bolted with
Belleville cup washers. The bus bars shall be mounted on supports of high impact
nontracking insulating material and shall be braced to short circuit conditions when
connected directly to a power source having available short circuit current as
indicated on the drawings. A 100% copper ground bus shall be firmly secured to
length of each switchboard. A 100% copper neutral and isolated ground bus shall
be provided where indicated. All hardware used on conductors shall have a tensile
strength of 120,000 psi and have a suitable protective finish. A-B-C- type bus
arrangements left-to-right, top-to-bottom, and front-to-rear shall be used throughout
to assure convenient and safe testing and maintenance.
C. All steel surfaces shall be chemically cleansed and treated to prevent the entrance
of moisture and formation of rush under the paint film. The switchboard exterior shall
be finished in ANSI-61, light gray or suppliers’ standard finish with written approval
from the Architect.
20 OCTOBER 1997 SERVICE ENTRANCE AND METERING EQUIPMENT
Carlsbad City Library 16420-2 96013
-
/-
D. Clamp type terminals for all incoming and outgoing cables shall be included with a
UL stamp showing approval for CU/AL application. Drawings for approval shall show
complete rating, short circuit withstandability of bus and ratings of devices, overall
outline dimensions including space available for conduits, circuit schedule showing
circuit number, device description, device from ampere rating, trip or fuse ampere
rating, feeder circuit identification, conductor sizes and one-line diagram with each
circuit device numbered.
E. Switchboard sections shall be totally front accessible. The main protective device
shall be individually mounted and fully compartmentalized. The distribution branch
protective devices shall be group mounted with gutter clearances in accordance with
UL and with hinged full height wiring gutter doors for clear access to wiring terminals.
Vertical sections shall have full height bus installed readily without drilling or field
modifications. Provide with continuous ground bus.
F. The entire assembly shall be suitable for 600 volts AC service and shall satisfy all
applicable provisions of UL 891 and NEMA PUB-2. The entire assembly shall be UL
listed for service entrance equipment.
G. Each switchboard section shall be completely assembled, wired, adjusted and tested
at the factory. After assembly, the complete switchboard will be tested for operation
under simulated service conditions to ensure the accuracy of the wiring and the
functioning of all equipment.
H. The main circuits will be given a dielectric test of 2200 volts for one minute between
live parts and ground and between opposite polarities. The wiring and control circuits
will be given dielectric tests of 1500 volts for one (1) minute between live parts and
ground.
2.04 MAIN PROTECTIVE DEVICE:
A. The main circuit breaker shall be manually operated, fixed mounted and UL listed for
100% application. The circuit breaker shall be equipped with a protective system
having adjustable long-time, short-time delay tripping characteristics and built-in
indicators for short circuit trip, overload trip and ground fault trip. The circuit breaker
shall comply with UL 489 and be UL listed. The circuit breaker shall have, but not be
limited to, the following features:
1. Ground Fault Protection: UL 1053.
a. The main circuit breaker shall have a built-in ground fault protection
feature with adjustable current pickup settings. The breakers shall
also have adjustable time delay trip settings of 0.1, 0.3 and 0.5
seconds (maximum breaker clearing time) and a memory circuit to
compensate for arcing ground faults.
2. Trip Unit:
a. The trip unit and sensor package shall be a solid state, totally
enclosed device that plugs into the front of the circuit breaker. The
trip unit shall be keyed to ensure proper trip unit/circuit breaker
20 OCTOBER 1997 SERVICE ENTRANCE AND METERING EQUIPMENT
Carlsbad City Library 16420-3 96013
coordination. The trip unit shall detect overload and short circuit
currents and act to trip the circuit breaker at the desired time and cur-
rent point. The trip unit shall contain the circuit breaker rating plug
and two (2) resettable indicators to indicate the reason the breaker
tripped: overload, or short circuit. The trip unit shall be equipped with
a sealable transparent cover to prevent tampering.
b.- The trip unit shall be equipped with the following adjustment:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
Adjustment No. 1 shall set the long time pickup current. This
setting shall be adjustable from .5 to 1.0 of the circuit break-
er’s rating plug.
Adjustment No. 2 shall set the long time delay which will vary
the time period it will take the circuit breaker to trip. This
adjustment shall be made with a minimum of three (3) non-
overlapping bands.
Adjustment No. 3 shall set the short time pickup current. This
setting shall be adjustable from 1.5 to 9 times the circuit
breaker’s rating plug.
Adjustment No. 4 shall set the short time delay which will vary
the time period it will take the circuit breaker to trip. This
adjustment shall be made with a minimum of three (3) mon-
overlapping bands. Provide selectable 12t.
Adjustment No. 5 shall vary the instantaneous pickup current
of the circuit breaker from 1.5 to 9 times the breaker’s rating
plug.
Adjustment No. 6 shall set the ground fault pickup current.
This adjustment shall be made in six (6) steps of frame rating.
Adjustment No. 7 shall set the ground fault delay. This
adjustment shall be made in steps of 0.1, 0.3 and 0.5 sec-
onds. Provide selectable 12t.
3. Circuit Breaker Trip Methods: Automatic breaker tripping operations shall be
accomplished through the use of a special low-energy, flux-transfer internal
shunt trip that requires no external power source.
2.05 FEEDER FUSED SWITCHES:
A. Feeder fused switches in the main switchboard shall comply with the requirements
of Section 16475, “Overcurrent Protective Devices”, and Section 16440, “Disconnect
Switches”.
B. The Amperes Interrupting Capacity (A.I.C.) and the short time rating of all feeder
fused switches shall be adequate for the available fault current.
20 OCTOBER 1997 SERVICE ENTRANCE AND METERING EQUIPMENT
Carlsbad City Library 16420-4 96013
P 2.06
2.07
.- 2.08 METERING:
2.09
2.10
f-
CURRENT TRANSFORMERS:
A. Current Transformers for Metering Applications: Current transformers shall be fixed-
ratio “single ring” type rated for interior use. Insulation class rating shall be 600V.
Current ratios shall be as indicated. Transformers shall conform to the requirements
of ANSI C57.13; shall be rated for 5KV BIL and shall have accuracy Class 0.3 at
burdens BO.1, 80.2 and B0.5.
B. All ratios of each current transformer shall be extended by wires to terminal blocks,
located in the instrument compartment. All wires shall be tagged with their phase
and ratio.
C. Terminal blocks shall be compatible with current transformer system and shall have
shorting bars. Each block shall be secured to the compartment by mechanical
means.
POTENTIAL TRANSFORMERS:
A. Potential transformers shall be rated for interior use. Voltage rating shall be 277 to
120 volts, 60 Hz. Insulation class shall be 600V. Primary and secondary fuse
holders shall be a drawout assembly. Transformers shall conform to the
requirements of ANSI C57.13, 2.4KV BIL and accuracy Class 0.3 at burdens W, X
and Y. Potential transformers shall be wye fixed mounted.
shall by wye connected.
Potential transformers
A. The Digital Instrument Package (DIP) shall be Power Measurement LTD, model
#3710 ACM, or equal (no known equal).
TEST BLOCK:
A. Provide front accessible test blocks with plugs for access to test points for voltage
and current for external monitor connection. Test blocks and plugs shall be Type PK-
2 as manufactured by G.E.
WIRING:
A. Cell and panel wiring shall be run in plastic wiring troughs having slots at each side
for branching of the wires and secured to cubical walls with screws. Wiring to the
hinged panels shall be carried across the hinges in laced bundles arranged so that
the wires twist rather than bend.
B. All wiring shall be correctly and clearly identified with letters and/or numbers that
match the drawings at each end of each wire.
C. Terminal blocks shall be provided where required and shall be located in an easily
accessible space with each block identified by proper letter and number.
D. Control wiring shall be SIS #14 AWG minimum. Power wiring shall be XHHW 600
volt type #12 AWG minimum.
20 OCTOBER 1997 SERVICE ENTRANCE AND METERING EQUIPMENT
Carlsbad City Library 18420-5 96013
E. Wiring between the DIP’s and internal components of the switchboard shall be
shielded twisted pairs.
2.11 DRAWING DISPLAY BOARDS:
A. Provide one (1) drawing display board with a 30” W x 24” H CAD generated As-Built
single line-diagram. The drawing display board shall include, but not limited to, the
following features:
1. 32” Wx26”H
2. 3/4” plywood backing
3. l/4” corkboard facing on plywood
4. Wood frame
5. l/4” thick, hinged, transparent cover door
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION:
A. Provide a 4” concrete housekeeping pad extended a minimum of 3” to the front and
sides of the main switchboard.
B. Secure switchboard firmly to the pad with anchor bolts and shims as required for a
level installation with no strain on bus bars or supports.
C. Tag all conductors at terminals for phase indication.
D. Include nameplates and warning signs per Section 16050.
E. Provide cable ties for cables from point of entrance to respective device terminals.
F. Termination of conduits entering the top of switchboards shall constitute a tight and
continuous metal to metal contact by penetrating the finish paint on enclosures for
continuity of ground.
3.02 SEISMIC RESTRAINTS:
A. Refer to Section 16050, “Basic Electrical Materials and Methods”, provide seismic
restraints as required.
3.03 TESTING:
A. Each switchboard assembly shall be fully tested in accordance with Section 16011.
20 OCTOBER 1997 SERVICE ENTRANCE AND METERING EQUIPMENT
Carlsbad City Library 16420-6 96013
B. For additional testing requirements, see Section 16950, “Acceptance Testing of
Electrical Power and Distribution Equipment”.
* l l END OF SECTION l l l
20 OCTOBER 1997 SERVICE ENTRANCE AND METERING EQUIPMENT
Carlsbad City Library 16420-7 96013
- SECTION 16440
DISCONNECT SWITCHES
/--
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .Ol GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:
A. The provisions of Section 16011, “General Requirements, Electrical” and Section
16050, “Basic Electrical Materials and Methods” apply to this Section as if fully
repeated herein.
1.02 SUBMITTALS:
A. The following information shall be submitted for review and approval in accordance
with Section 16011, “General Requirements, Electrical”.
1. Catalog Cuts:
a. Disconnect Switch (each type and size)
b. Enclosures (each type and style)
B. The approval of equipment specified in this section shall be contingent upon the
submittal and approval of the equipment layout drawings required by Section 16011,
“General Requirements, Electrical”.
1.03 WARRANTY:
A. Warranty shall comply with the provisions of Section 16011, “General Requirements,
Electrical”.
1.04 COMMERCIAL PRODUCT:
A. Disconnect switches shall be factory assembled, wired and tested and shall be the
latest standard product of General Electric, Cutler Hammer-Westinghouse, Siemens,
Square D or equal.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 DISCONNECT SWITCHES:
A. The disconnect switches shall be heavy duty 600 volt type, externally operated,
quick-make, quick-break knife switches, fused or non-fused as required. The number
of poles and ampere rating shall be as shown on plans. Fused switches shall have
Class “R” rejection features. All switches shall have a U.L. listed short circuit
withstand rating at 200,000 amperes RMS symmetrical. Switches in interior dry
location shall have NEMA 1 enclosures. Switches in damp or exterior locations shall
have NEMA 3R raintight enclosures. Switches shall be horsepower rated.
B. If double lugging or oversized wires are required, provide a wireway or splice box.
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
DISCONNECT SWITCHES
16440-l 96013
C. Provide fuses as specified in Section 16475, “Overcurrent Protective Devices”.
Fuses shall be installed so that the rating is clearly visible without removing fuse.
D. Provide a nameplate on each switch as specified in Section 16050, “Basic Electrical
Materials and Methods”. Nameplate shall indicate load served, source and circuit
number.
E. Submit data on switches with drawings of the main switchboard, distribution
switchboards or distribution panelboards, where switches are an assembled part.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION:
A. Install disconnect switches in locations shown on plans. Test switches a minimum
of three (3) times to ensure correct operation.
B. For additional testing requirements, see Section 16950, “Acceptance Testing of
Electrical Power and Distribution Equipment”.
l l l END OF SECTION l l l
20 OCTOBER 1997 DISCONNECT SWITCHES
Carlsbad City Library 16440-2 96013
SECTION 16450
GROUNDING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:
A. The provisions of Section 16011, “General Requirements, Electrical” and Section
16050, “Basic Electrical Materials and Methods” apply to this Section as if fully
repeated herein.
1.02 SUBMITTALS:
A. The following information shall be submitted for review and approval in accordance
with Section 16011, “General Requirements, Electrical”.
1. Catalog Cuts:
Z:
Ground Rod
Ground Connectors
2. Ground resistance from each major piece of equipment to the ground
electrode. Equipment shall include, but not be limited to the following:
a.
b.
::
e.
Main SwitchboardKwitchgear
Transformers (each)
Distribution Panelboards
Generators
Automatic Transfer Switches
3. Thermal (or Exothermic) Weld Process
1.03 WARRANTY:
A. Warranty shall comply with the provisions of Section 16011, “General Requirements,
Electrical”.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GROUND RODS:
A. Provide copper clad steel with adequate diameter to permit driving it full length of
the rod in the earth but not less than 3/4-inch. Length shall be lo- feet unless
otherwise indicated.
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
GROUNDING
16450-l 96013
2.02 COLD WATER PIPE OR BUILDING STEEL CONNECTOR:
A. Connector shall be silicon bronze as manufactured by Bumdy or equal, no known
equal.
2.03 EXOTHERMIC WELDS:
A. Provide eKothermic welds which require no outside source of heat or power. Weld
shall be accomplished by reduction of copper oxide and aluminum powdered metals
in a mold. Weld shall provide connection of conductor to device, device to device or
conductor to conductor as required. Weld shall be of proper size to provide
continuous rating of devices or conductors which are connected.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION:
- A. Make mechanical and electrical contact at all panelboards, outlet boxes, junction
boxes, and wherever the conduit run is connected. Permanently and effectively
ground all conduit and other equipment as required by all applicable codes,
regulations and standards.
B. Install a code sized insulated ground wire in all conduits unless a larger size is
indicated on plans.
C. System neutrals shall only be grounded at the main service and separately derived
systems. The service neutral shall be connected to the nearest effectively grounded
building structural steel and metal water pipe, (close to where it enters the building).
Neutral conductors of separately derived systems shall be connected to effectively
grounded building structural steel or a metal water pipe. Ground rods may be used
to ground the system neutral conductor only if building steel and metal water pipes
are not available.
D. Drive ground rods full length in a depression at least six (6)-inches below finished
grade. When more than one (1) rod is driven, space them at least the full length of
the rod.
1. Make all grounding connections which are to be buried or otherwise
normally unaccessible using thermal welds or by using a mechanical
connector and brazing over completely. Thermal welds which have puffed
up or shown convex surfaces (indicating improper cleaning at the surfaces)
are not acceptable. No mechanical connector is required at the thermal
weldments.
E. Provide a “UFER” ground for electrical service, consisting of a minimum of 25 ft. of
bare stranded copper wire embedded in concrete (feeder encasement, footing, floor
slab, etc.,) so that all portions of the cable are between 2” and 4” from the earth and
with the center of the cable bonded to the ground rod or pipe. If a “UFER” ground
is not required, provide that system required by local code.
20 OCTOBER 1997 GROUNDING
Carlsbad City Library 16450-2 96013
F. Provide a separate green insulated ground wire in all conduit runs.
/-
G. The green insulated ground wire shall connect directly to the receptacle ground
screw.
H. Transformer grounding shall be in accordance with Section “16460”.
3.02 TESTS:
A. As an exception to requirements that may be stated elsewhere in the contract, the
Architect shall be given five (5) working days notice prior to each test.
B. The testing equipment and devices used in performing the required tests shall have
a calibration sticker affixed to the device stating the date when calibrated, date due
for recalibration, and the signature of the individual who did the calibration. In
addition to the sticker, a certificate shall also contain the brand name and the serial
number of the device.
C. Ground Rod Test: Test ground rods for ground resistance value before any wire is
connected. A portable ground testing megger shall be used to test each ground or
group of grounds. The auxiliary or reference ground rods shall be 3/4-inch copper
clad steel, not less than 4-feet in length and driven 3-l/2-feet deep, and shall be
installed in a straight line from the ground being tested. Number 14 AWG stranded
wire leads with at least 600 volt rubber insulation shall be connected to binding post
on the instrument.
1. Where there is more than one (1) ground within a circle of lo-feet at a
particular location, the reference rods as driven for the “first” test shall be
used for tests on the other rods without changing their location. The
instrument shall be equipped with a meter reading directly in ohms or
fractions thereof to indicate the ground value of the ground electrode under
test. Provide one (1) copy of the megger manufacturer’s directions for use
of the ground megger indicating the method to be used.
D. Test Report (Submit four (4) copies in writing):
1. Grounding electrodes and systems (identify electrodes and systems, each
test)
* l * END OF SECTION l l *
/-
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
GROUNDING
16450-3 96013
SECTION 16460
TRANSFORMERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .Ol GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:
A. The provisions of Section 16011, “General Requirements, Electrical” and Section
16050, “Basic Electrical Materials and Methods” apply to this Section as if fully
repeated herein.
1.02 SUBMITTALS:
A. The following information shall be submitted for review and approval in accordance
with Section 16011, “General Requirements, Electrical”.
1. Shop Drawings:
a. Each transformer
2. Certificates:
a. Certification of transformer manufacturer’s tests.
3. Transformer Secondary Voltages:
a. Each transformer
B. The approval of equipment specified in this section shall be contingent upon the
submittal and approval of the equipment layout drawings required by Section 16011,
“General Requirements, Electrical”.
1.03 WARRANTY:
A. Warranty shall comply with the provisions of Section 16011, “General Requirements,
Electrical”.
1.04 COMMERCIAL PRODUCT:
A. Transformers shall be factory assembled, wired, and tested, and be the latest
standard product of General Electric, Cutler Hammer-Westinghouse, Siemens,
Square D or equal.
20 OCTOBER 1997
Cartsbad City Library
TRANSFORMERS
16460-l 96013
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 TRANSFORMERS:
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Dry Type Transformers: Transformer for step-down from building distribution system
to lighting and power panelboards shall be indoor dry-type as indicated.
Transformers provided under this specification shall conform to NEMA TRl unless
more strifgent requirements are indicated.
1. Non-linear dry type transformers shall be UL 1561 listed with electrostatic
shield. The transformer windings shall be vacuum impregnated. The K
factor shall be as indicated on plans.
The transformers shall be single (1) or three (3) phase, general purpose and
distribution type, self-cooled, suitable for operation on a 60Hz alternating current
system and shall be rated as indicated.
Taps (Deenergized Operation): Provide taps which allow transformers to deliver
rated KVA at any tap setting in accordance with NEMA standards. Taps for 30 KVA
and below shall be two (2) 2-l/2 percent full capacity above and two (2) 2-l/2 percent
full capacity below rated primary voltage. Taps for above 30 KVA shall be two (2) 2-
1/2 percent full capacity above and four (4) 2-l/2 percent full capacity below rated
primary voltage.
Sound Level: Sound level shall be a minimum of three (3) decibels lower than NEMA
standard sound levels for the transformer size indicated. Provide transformers with
integral or external vibration and noise isolation damping supports.
Construction:
1. Dry-Type Units for Indoor Use: Provide 220% insulation system designed for
an average winding temperature rise not to exceed 150°C in a maximum
ambient of 40°C as measured by the resistance method with 100 percent
nameplate load.
2. Impedance: Dry type transformer impedance shall be 4.5% nominal +/- 10%
of rating.
3.
4.
Enclosure: Ventilated NEMA 1 or NEMA 3R as indicated.
Bushings for Insulation Class Above 1.2KV: The insulation of line bushings
shall be the same as the insulation class of the windings to which they are
connected. The insulation class of the low-voltage neutral bushing on three-
phase transformers having a Y connected low-voltage winding shall be the
same as that of the low voltage line bushings.
5.
6.
Windings: Primary and secondary windings shall be copper.
Terminations: The transformer shall have copper bus bars to accommodate
the required primary and secondary feeder connections. Feeder connections
shall be made to the bus bars using compression type copper lugs. Suitable
20 OCTOBER 1997 TRANSFORMERS
Carlsbad City Library 16460-2 96013
terminal compartments shall be provided for the primary and secondary
connections. When non-linear (K-rated) transformers are specified, a double
neutral connection shall be provided. Coordinate neutral connection (s) with
feeder. Supply and load connections shall be suitable for 75OC copper.
Cable termination compartments shall be located at the lower end of the
cabinet in the path of incoming cooling air stream.
F. The transformer base construction shall be of the fabricated type and suitable for
using rollers or skidding in any direction.
G. Provide a nameplate on each transformer as specified in Section 16050, “Basic
Electrical Materials and Methods”. Nameplates shall indicate transformer
designation, feeder source and load fed.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION:
A. Electrical installation shall conform to ANSI C2 or NFPA 70 and to the requirements
specified otherwise. In case of conflict, ANSI C2 shall rule. Install the transformer
furnished under this section and connect as indicated on the project drawings.
B. Each transformer shall be installed on a minimum 4” housekeeping pad extended 3”
to the front and sides of the equipment.
3.02 SEISMIC RESTRAINTS:
A. Refer to Section 16050, “Basic Materials and Methods”.
3.03 TRANSFORMER GROUNDING:
A. Bond the transformer enclosure in accordance with NEC article 250.
B. A grounding electrode conductor sized in accordance with table 250-94 (or larger if
indicated) shall be provided to connect the grounded conductor to the grounding
electrode. This connection shall be made at the source of the separately derived
system and ahead of any disconnecting means or overcurrent device.
C. The grounding electrode shall be:
1. The nearest available effectively grounded structured metal member of the
structure.
2. The nearest available effectively grounded metal cold water pipe.
3.04 TESTS:
A. Transformer Tests: Transformer secondary voltages shall be adjusted (under load)
to provide the required secondary voltage.
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
TRANSFORMERS
16460-3 96013
B. For additional testing requirements, see Section 16950, “Acceptance Testing of
Electrical Power and Distribution Equipment”.
l l l END OF SECTION l l l
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
TRANSFORMERS
16460-4 96013
SECTION 16470
PANELBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
-
1 .Ol GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:
A. The provisions of Section 1601 I, “General Requirements, Electrical” and Section
16050, “Basic Electrical Materials and Methods” apply to this Section as if fully
repeated herein.
1.02 SUBMITTALS:
A. Shop drawings for all equipment specified in this section shall be submitted for
review and approval in accordance with Section 1601 I, “General Requirements,
Electrical”.
B. The approval of equipment specified in this section shall be contingent upon the
submittal and approval of the equipment layout drawings required by Section 16011,
“General Requirements, Electrical”.
1.03 WARRANTY:
A. Warranty shall comply with the provisions of Section 1601 I, “General Requirements,
Electrical”.
1.04 COMMERCIAL PRODUCTS:
A. Panelboards shall be factory assembled circuit breaker type wired and tested and
shall be the latest standard product of General Electric, Cutler Hammer-
Westinghouse, Siemens, Square D or equal.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 PANELBOARDS:
A. The number of poles, type, voltage, and ampere ratings shall be as indicated on the
plans. Bus bars shall be copper and shall be 100% tin plated. Provide full size
ground bus. Provide a full-size isolated ground bus where indicated. Provide full
size neutral bus except where a non-linear panelboard is required. Non-linear
panelboards, where indicated on plans, shall be provided with a 200% neutral bus.
B. Neutral wires shall be connected to a common neutral bus with binding screws or
lugs. Neutral wire connections shall be evenly distributed over the entire neutral bus.
The neutral bus shall be insulated from the cabinet.
C. All bolted connections shall be torque-tightened in conformance with the
manufacturer’s recommendation.
20 OCTOBER 1997 PANELBOARDS
Carlsbad City Library 16470-l 96013
D. Cabinets for panelboards shall be of the same manufacturer as the panelboard.
Cabinets shall be flush or surface mounted as shown on the plans. Cabinets shall
be constructed of not less than 14-gauge steel and shall be shop painted with two
(2) coats of primer and a finish coat of gray enamel. Cabinet shall be 20” minimum
width, 5-3/4” deep.
E. Cabinet covers shall be not less than 12-gauge steel, hinged so that they swing away
to providelull access to the interior of the panel without removing the entire cover
from the wall. Covers designed for more than one (1) panel shall not be provided.
Locks shall be provided for all hinged cabinet covers. These locks shall be keyed
alike the same as the door locks.
F. Cabinet doors shall be not less than 1Zguage steel, hinged and lockable.
Construction shall be door in a door with flush-type cylinder locks and latches. All
locks shall be keyed alike and alike with the cabinet cover lock. Cabinet doors shall
be provided with circuit schedule holders with clear plastic windows.
G. Special panelboard construction or features shall be as shown on plans. For circuit
breakers, time clocks, and other equipment to be included as an assembled part of
the panelboard, refer to the subsection or paragraph where those items are specified.
H. Where indicated, circuit breakers in panelboards shall be provided with a handle
padlock attachment. This attachment shall allow the circuit breaker handle to be
padlocked in either the “ON” or “OFF” position.
I. Submit detailed shop drawings of panelboards, including breakers and all
components as required under “Shop Drawings”.
J. Provide a panel identification nameplate as specified in Section 16050, “Basic
Electrical Materials and Methods”. Nameplates shall indicate panel designation,
voltage, # of phases, feeder number, and distribution board fed from.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION:
A. Provide circuit schedules for all circuits identifying the type, size, and location of the
load. Final room numbers and designations shall be in accordance with Owner
requirements. Coordinate numbers and designations prior to finalizing schedules.
Schedule shall be typewritten. Mark spares with pencil only.
B. Panelboards installed recessed in fire rated walls shall be adequately boxed or
backed with fire rated material. The final construction shall equal or exceed the fire
rating of the wall.
C. Provide one (1) 3/4-inch conduit (minimum of six (6) total) for each three (3) spares,
or spaces in all flush mounted power or lighting panelboards. Route conduit to
accessible space above ceiling; cap and tag conduits.
20 OCTOBER 1997 PANELBOARDS
Carlsbad City Library 16470-2 96013
/- 3.02 SEISMIC RESTRAINTS:
A. Refer to Section 16050, “Basic Materials and Methods”.
3.03 TESTING:
A. Test each circuit breaker in accordance with Section 16475, “Overcurrent Protective
Devices”.
B. For additional testing requirements, see Section 16950, “Acceptance Testing of
Electrical Power and Distribution Equipment”.
l l l END OF SECTION l ’ l
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
PANELBOARDS
16470-3 96013
SECTION 16471
DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS
PART I- GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:
A. The provisions of Section 16011, “General Requirements, Electrical” and Section
16050, “Basic Electrical Materials and Methods” apply to this Section as if fully
repeated herein.
1.02 SUBMITTALS:
A. Shop drawings for all equipment specified in this section shall be submitted for
review and approval in accordance with Section 1601 I, “General Requirements,
Electrical”.
B. The approval of equipment specified in this section shall be contingent upon the
submittal and approval of the equipment layout drawings required by Section 16011,
“General Requirements, Electrical”.
1.03 SCOPE:
A. All labor, materials, appliances, tools, equipment, facilities, transportation, and
services necessary for and incidental to performing all operations in connection with
furnishing, delivery, and installation of the work of this section, complete, as shown
on the drawings and/or specified herein. Work includes but is not necessarily limited
to the following:
1. Examine all other sections for work related to the other sections and required
to be included as work under this section.
2. Coordinate all work in this section with related trades.
3. Verify all dimensions in field.
4. Distribution panelboards.
B. Perform all incidental work not indicated on the drawings nor mentioned in the
specifications that belong to the work described or is required for a complete system.
1.04 COMMERCIAL PRODUCT:
A. The distribution panelboards and all components shall be the latest standard product
as manufactured by General Electric, Cutler Hammer-Westinghouse, Siemens,
Square D or equal.
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS
16471-1 96013
1.05 WARRANTY:
A. Warranty shall comply with the provisions of Section 16011, “General Requirements,
Electrical”.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS:
A. Each distribution panelboard shall be a completely free standing, self-supporting
structure, 90” high, with sides, top, and rear covered with removable code gauge
steel.
B. Bus bars shall be full height copper sized on the basis of not more than 1000
amperes per square-inch current density. Bus bars shall be welded or shall have all
bolted connections tin or silver plated and bolted with Belleville cup washers. The
bus bars shall be mounted on supports of high impact nontracking insulating material
and shall be braced for the short circuit interrupting rating capacity as indicated on
the drawings. A copper ground bus shall be firmly secured to each structure. A
copper neutral, 200% neutral or isolated ground bus shall be provided where
indicated. All hardware used on conductors shall have a tensile strength of 120,000
psi and have a suitable protective finish. A, B, or C type bus arrangements left to
right, top to bottom, and front to rear shall be used throughout to assure convenient
and safe testing and maintenance.
C. All steel surfaces shall be chemically cleaned and treated to prevent the entrance of
moisture and formation of rust under the paint film. The panelboard exterior shall be
finished in ANSI - 61, light gray.
D. Clamp type terminals for all incoming and outgoing cables shall be included with a
U.L., stamp showing approval for CU/AL application. Drawings for approval shall
show complete rating, short circuit withstandability of bus and rating of devices,
overall, outline dimension including space available for conduits, circuit schedule
showing circuit number, device description, device frame ampere rating, conductor
sizes, and single line diagram with each circuit device numbered.
E. Molded case circuit breakers shall be in accordance with Section 16475,
“Overcurrent Protective Devices”.
F. Provide a panel identification nameplate as specified in Section 16050, “Basic
Electrical Materials and Methods”. Nameplates shall indicate panel designation,
voltage, # of phases, feeder number, and distribution board fed from.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION:
A. Provide cable ties for cables from point of entrance to respective device terminals.
B. Conduits entering distribution panelboards shall be terminated with a metal grounding
bushing with neoprene throat insert.
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS
16471-2 96013
C. The Contractor is responsible for ensuring that termination of conduits entering the
distribution panelboard constitutes a tight and continuous metal-to-metal contact by
penetrating the finish paint on enclosures.
D. Each distribution panelboard shall be installed on a minimum 4” housekeeping pad
extended 3” to the front and sides of the equipment.
E. Secure each distribution panelboard to housekeeping pad and rear wall. Each
distribution panelboard shall be installed on a minimum 4” housekeeping pad
extended 3” to the front and sides of the equipment.
F. Provide a panel identification nameplate as specified in Section 16050, “Basic
Electrical Materials and Methods.” Nameplates shall indicate panel designation,
voltage, # of phases, feeder number, and source.
3.02 SEISMIC RESTRAINTS:
A. Refer to Section 16050, “Basic Materials and Methods”.
3.03 FIELD TESTS:
A. After the installation has been completed and the Architect has been given five (5)-
days notice of the proposed test, the Contractor shall conduct an operating test
demonstrating that all equipment and devices operate in accordance with the require-
ments of the plans and specifications.
B. Upon completion of installation and check-out, an infrared scan shall be provided for
all bolted connections. The Contractor shall provide a technician who is proficient
in the use of infrared scan equipment. Any deficiencies (hot spots) noted shall be
corrected and the scan repeated. Provide a report upon completion of tests.
C. For additional testing requirements, see Section 16950, “Acceptance Testing of
Electrical Power and Distribution Equipment”.
l l * END OF SECTION l l l
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS
16471-3 96013
.-
SECTION 16475
OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
PART I- GENERAL
1 .Ol GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:
A. The provisions of Section 16011, “General Requirements, Electrical” and Section
16050, “Basic Electrical Materials and Methods’* apply to this Section as if fully
repeated herein.
1.02 SUBMITTALS:
A. The following information shall be submitted for review and approval in accordance
with Section 16011, “General Requirements, Electrical”.
1. Catalog Cuts:
E:
C.
Circuit breakers (each type and style)
Circuit breaker enclosures
Circuit breaker handle padlock assembly
2. Coordination Curves:
a. Provide 11” x 17” semi-log coordination curves for each circuit
breaker provided.
b. Provide 11” x 17” semi-log coordination curves for each fuse size and
type provided.
1.03 WARRANTY:
A. Warranty shall comply with the provisions of Section 16011, “General Requirements,
Electrical”.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 CIRCUIT BREAKERS:
A. Circuit breakers for panelboards, distribution panelboards, distribution switchboards,
and main service equipment shall be the manufactured product of the same
manufacturer as the equipment in which the circuit breaker is installed.
B. Circuit breakers for panelboards and distribution panelboards shall be bolt-on type.
Handle ties and dual, quad or tandem breakers are not acceptable. Mounting
hardware, accessories, faceplates, enclosures, etc., shall be provided as required.
Where indicated, circuit breakers shall be provided with a handle padlock attach-
ment. This attachment shall allow the circuit breaker to be padlocked in either the
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
16475-l 96013
C.
D.
E.
F
G.
“ON” or “OFF” position. Circuit breakers for distribution switchboards and main
service equipment shall be as specified in Section 16420, “Main Service Equipment”
and Section 16425, “Distribution Switchboards”.
Circuit breakers shall be quick-make and quick-break on manual and automatic
operation, and the handle mechanism shall be trip-free to prevent holding contacts
closed against a short circuit or sustained overload. Contacts shall be of high
pressure butt-type and shall be made of a silver alloy material. Arc chutes shall be
provided. Automatic thermal and magnetic tripping devices shall be located in each
pole for the breaker. The thermal device shall provide time delay tripping on
overloads and the magnetic device shall provide instantaneous tripping on short
circuits. Circuit breakers with frame sizes above 100 amperes shall have an
instantaneous-magnetic trip adjustment of ten times the circuit breaker’s continuous
amp rating (unless otherwise indicated). These adjustments shall be accessible from
the front of the breaker.
Circuit breakers used for switching lighting loads directly shall be approved Type
“SW.
Circuit breakers used to control motor loads directly shall be approved Type “HACR”.
Short circuit interrupting capacity shall be as indicated on the plans and shall in no
case be less than 14,000 amps symmetrical at 4801277 volt and 10,000 amps
symmetrical at 208/120 volt.
Circuit breakers provided for installation in existing switchboards or panelboards shall
be of the same manufacturer as the existing switchboards or panelboards. The
minimum A.I.C. shall not be less than that of the lowest rated device in the existing
switchboard or panelboard.
2.02 FUSES:
A. Fuse identification labels, showing size and type installed, shall be placed inside the
cover of each switch or fused circuit breaker.
B. All fuses shall be of one (1) manufacturer unless otherwise noted to ensure selective
operation of protective devices.
C. Fuses shall be as manufactured by Bussmann, Gould-Shawmut, or equal, unless
otherwise indicated.
D. Fuses shall be of the following type:
1. Fuses 601 A through 6000 A serving all type of loads shall be U.L. Class L,
type KRP-C.
2. Fuses installed in safety switches at motor locations shall be 6OOV, FRS or
25OV, FRN.
3. Fuses I/IO A through 600 A shall be U.L. Class RKl; 6OOV, LPS-RK; 25OV,
LPN-RK, unless otherwise indicated.
20 OCTOBER 1997 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
Carlsbad City Library 16475-2 96013
- E. Spare fuses, limiters and medium voltage refill cartridges shall be provided in the
amount of 20% of each size and type installed, but in no case shall be less than three
(3) of each specified size and type supplied. These spares shall be neatly enclosed
in a suitable cabinet or cabinets.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION:
A. Bolted connections shall be torque-tightened to manufacturel’s specifications.
B. Clipping of wires from standard cable to fit connectors shall not be permitted.
Appropriate connecting device shall be provided for multiple cable connections.
3.02 TESTS:
A. Each and every circuit breaker shall be tested under load a minimum of three (3)
times.
B. For additional testing requirements, see Section 16950, “Acceptance Testing of
Electrical Power and Distribution Equipment”.
* * * END OF SECTION * * *
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
16475-3 96013
SECTION 16480
MOTOR STARTERS, MOTOR CONTROLLERS, AND MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS
PART I- GENERAL
1 .Ol GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:
A. The provisions of Section 16011, “General Requirements, Electrical” and Section
16050, “Basic Electrical Materials and Methods” apply to this section as if fully
repeated herein.
1.02 SUBMITTALS:
A. The following information shall be submitted for review and approval in accordance
with Section 16011, “General Requirements, Electrical”.
1. Catalog Cuts:
a. Fractional horsepower manual starter
b. Enclosures
B. The approval of equipment specified in this section shall be contingent upon the
submittal and approval of the equipment layout drawings required by Section 1601 I,
“General Requirements, Electrical”.
1.03 WARRANTY:
A. Warranty shall comply with the provisions of Section 16011, “General Requirements,
Electrical”.
1.04 COMMERCIAL PRODUCT:
A. Motor control equipment shall be factory assembled, wired, and tested, and shall be
the latest standard product of General Electric, Cutler Hammer-Westinghouse,
Siemens, Square D or equal.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 FRACTIONAL HORSEPOWER MANUAL STARTER:
A. Provide fractional horsepower manual starter with the following features:
1. Melting alloy, trip-free, ratchet wheel thermal protection.
2. Red neon pilot light.
3. Handleguard with padlock provision in either the “ON” or “OFF” position.
4. Thermal element sized for motor load.
20 OCTOBER 1997 MOTOR STARTERS, MOTOR CONTROLLERS,
Carlsbad City Library AND MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS
16480-I 96013
2.02 Provide a nameplate on each starter, controller, combination controller and motor control
center as specified in Section 16050, “Basic Electrical Materials and Methods”. Nameplates
shall identify load served.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION: -
A. Motor controllers shown on the Electrical Drawings shall be installed and connected
by the Electrical Contractor unless otherwise indicated on drawings. See Section
16011 for “Electra-Mechanical Requirements”.
3.02 TESTS:
A. Each operable device shall be tested under load to ensure proper rotation and
connection. Corrections shall be made by the Electrical Contractor at no additional
expense to the Owner.
B. For additional testing requirements, see Section 16950, “Acceptance Testing of
Electrical Power and Distribution Equipment.”
l l l END OF SECTION l l l
20 OCTOBER 1997 MOTOR STARTERS, MOTOR CONTROLLERS,
Carlsbad City Library AND MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS
16480-2 96013
SECTION 16490
AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .Ol GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:
A. The provisions of Section 16011, “General Requirements, Electrical” and Section
16050, “Basic Electrical Materials and Methods” apply to this Section as if fully
repeated herein.
1.02 RELATED SPECIFICATIONS:
A. This section of the specification shall be closely coordinated with Section 16620,
“Diesel Engine-Generator Set” and Section 14200, “Elevators”.
1.03 COMMERCIAL PRODUCT:
A. The Automatic Transfer Switch shall be the standard manufactured product of
Russelectric, Zenith, or Kohler with the features or options as indicated herein.
1.04 SUBMITTALS:
A. Submittals shall be in accordance with the General Requirements (Section 16011)
and as modified herein.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit for review and approval the Automatic Transfer Switch
(ATS). Include a one-line diagram of the ATS assembly, an elementary or schematic
diagram, a wiring diagram of the unit, and an interface equipment connection
diagram that shall show all conduit and wiring between the ATS and other related
equipment. Device and nameplate numbers and item numbers shown on the list of
equipment and materials shall appear on drawings wherever the item of equipment
or material appears. The one-line diagram shall show interlocking provisions and
cautionary notes, if any. Unless otherwise approved, the one-line and elementary or
schematic diagram shall appear on the same drawing.
C. Manufacturets Data: Submit a list of equipment and materials proposed, containing
a description of each separate item of equipment or materials recommended for
review and approval. The quantity of each item shall be indicated.
D. Certificates of Conformance: Submit for the ATS as proof of compliance with U.L.
and NEMA standards as specified. Certificates are not required if manufacturer’s
published data submitted and approved reflect a U.L. listing and confomrance with
applicable publications of NEMA.
E. Certified Test Reports: Submit, for the ATS, the reports of tests required by U.L.
1008 and by the requirements listed below. The proof of listing by U.L. shall be
submitted and will be acceptable evidence that the ATS conforms to U.L. require-
ments.
20 OCTOBER 1997 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES
Carlsbad City Library 16490-I 96013
1. U.L. or other certified test reports to demonstrate that the temperature rise
test was conducted, following the conclusion of the endurance and overload
tests.
2. Test reports to demonstrate compliance with the withstand and closing rating
provisions of these specifications, if those provisions exceed withstand and closing rating requirements in U.L. 1008.
3. Test reports for withstand and closing rating tests shall be accompanied by
oscillographic traces of each phase of voltage and current, to demonstrate
that the main switch contacts did not separate and were not damaged during
the performance of the withstand and closing rating tests.
4. Test reports shall verify that the tested unit passed all tests without
modification, or repair during a test period of not more than 90-days. The 90-
day period does not include the time required to perform additional testing
necessary to demonstrate compliance with the withstand and closing rating
provisions of these specifications, when the withstand and closing rating
exceeds the requirements in U.L. 1008.
F. Factory Tests and Reports: Tests shall be performed on a prototype unit for each
rating of ATS switches to be furnished. Factory test reports shall be certified and
dated, shall demonstrate that the following tests were conducted as specified, and
that tests were successfully completed prior to the shipment of the equipment.
1. Withstand and Closing Tests.
2. Dielectric Tests
3. Operational Tests
G. Operations and Maintenance Manual: Submit for the ATS in accordance with
Section 16011.
H. The approval of equipment specified in this section shall be contingent upon the
submittal and approval of the equipment layout drawings required by Section 16011,
“General Requirements, Electrical”.
1.05 SERVICE CONDITIONS:
A. The ATS shall be suitable for performance under the following service conditions:
1. Altitude: 500 feet above mean sea level.
2. Relative Humidity: 100 percent maximum, continuous.
3. Temperature: Minus 20 degrees F to 120 degrees F.
4. Seismic Zone: 4
1.06 WARRANTY:
A. Warranty shall comply with the provisions of Section 16011, “General Requirements,
Electrical”.
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES
16490-2 96013
/I PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH (ATS):
A. Switch shall be U.L. listed for use in emergency systems described in NFPA 70 and
shall confomr to applicable requirements of U.L. 1008, NEMA ICS I and 2, and IEEE
472. ATS shall be the doublethrow type, and be incapable of stops in intermediate
positions during normal functioning of the ATS. The ATS shall be electrically
operated but mechanically held in both positions, with the operator momentarily
receiving power from the source to which the load is to be transferred. ATS
constructed with either automatic or nonautomatic circuit breakers are unacceptable.
ATS equipped with protective devices to interrupt fault currents are also unaccept-
able. ATS shall be rated for continuous duty at the continuous current rating speci-
fied. Switches shall be adequately rated for the application indicated, and shall have
the following characteristics:
1. Voltage: 480 volts a.c.
2. Number of Phases: Three
3. Number of Wires: Four
4. Frequency: 60 Hz
5. Number of Switched Poles: Four (including overlapping neutral)
6. Type of Load: Total system load shown.
7. Continuous Current Rating: As shown.
8. ATS Withstand and Closing Rating: The ATS shall be rated for use on a
circuit having an available short circuit current of 30,000 (TSl) and 10,000
(TS2) amperes RMS symmetrical at 20 percent power factor for a duration
of 3 cycles when coordinated with molded case circuit breakers, and 0.5
cycles when coordinated with current limiting fuses. The withstand and
closing tests shall be conducted at full rated system voltage in accordance
with U.L. 1008. The 3 and 10 cycle tests shall be conducted without contact
damage.
9. Dielectric Rating: Tests shall be performed in accordance with NEMA ICS 1.
Wiring of each control panel shall be subjected to voltage surge tests as
stipulated in IEEE No. 472. Impulse withstand rating tests shall be performed
in accordance with the requirements of NEMA ICS 1.
10. Nonwelding of Contacts: Rated for nonwelding of contacts when used with
the feeder overcurrent devices indicated and with the available fault current
specified herein.
11. Main Contacts: Constructed of silver composition and protected by approved
arcing contacts.
,-
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES
16490-3 96013
8. Accessories:
1. Override Time Delay: Time delay to override monitored source deviation
shall be adjustable from 0.5 to 6-seconds and factory set at l-second. The
device shall detect and respond to a sustained voltage drop of 30 percent of
nominal voltage between any two (2) of the normal supply conductors and
initiate transfer action to the emergency source and start the engine-driving
generator set after the set time period. The pickup voltage shall be
adjustable between 85 and 100 percent of nominal and factory set at 90
percent. The dropout voltage shall be adjustable from 75 to 98 percent of the
pickup value, and factory set at 85 percent of nominal voltage.
2. Transfer Time Delay: Time delay before transfer to the emergency power
source shall be adjustable from 0 to 5-minutes and factory set at O-minutes.
The device shall monitor the frequency and voltage of the emergency power
source and transfer when frequency and voltage is stabilized at or above 90
percent of rated values. The pickup voltage shall be adjustable from 85 to
100 percent of nominal, and factory set at 90 percent. The pickup frequency
shall be adjustable from 90 percent of nominal and factory set at 90 percent.
3. Return Time Delay: Time delay before return transfer to the normal power
source shall be adjustable from 0 to 30-minutes and factory set at 30-
minutes. The time delay shall be automatically defeated upon loss or
sustained undervoltage of the emergency power source, provided that the
normal supply has been restored.
4. Engine Shutdown Time Delay: Time delay shall be adjustable from 0 to 5
minutes and shall be factory set at 5-minutes.
5. Cranking Limit Time Delay: Time delay to limit cranking shall be adjustable
from 0 to 5-minutes and set at l-minute in the factory. The Contractor shall
provide this time limited feature as an integral part of the engine control
system if it is not provided as an accessory to the ATS assembly.
6. Exerciser: A system exerciser shall consist of a programmable time switch
to start the engine-driven generator and to transfer the load from the normal
to the emergency power source for a preset period of time at preset intervals.
Intervals shall be adjustable from 1 to 30-days, and factory set at ICdays.
Running periods shall be adjustable from 5 to go-minutes, and factory set at
30-minutes. The design of the system exerciser shall include the following
provisions:
a. Manual reset of the ongoing exercise period. Reset provisions shall
cause the ATS to return to the normal position if power is available to
initiate transfer.
b. Automatic return of the ATS to the normal position if the generator set
fails during the exercise period and power is available to initiate
transfer.
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES
16490-4 96013
C. The automatic transfer switch shall include a separately mounted control panel. The
module’s sensing and logic shall be controlled by a built-in microprocessor. The
control module shall be connected to the transfer switch by an interconnecting wiring
harness. The wiring harness shall include a keyed disconnect plug to enable the
control module to be disconnected from the transfer switch for routine maintenance.
D. The control module shall be completely enclosed with a protective cover and be
mounted in the transfer switch unit. Sensing and control logic shall be provided on
plug-in printed circuit boards. Interfacing relays shall be industrial control grade plug-
in type with dust covers. All relays shall be identical to minimize the number of
unique parts.
E. The control module shall meet or exceed the voltage surge withstand capability in
accordance with IEEE Standard 472-1974 (ANSI C37.90a-1974) and the impulse
voltage test in accordance with the proposed NEMA Standard ICS I-109.
F. An inphase monitor shall be built-in to all automatic transfer switches. The monitor
shall control transfer/retransfer operation between live sources so that closure on the
alternate source will occur only when the two (2) sources are approaching
synchronism and the two (2) sources are within 15 electrical degrees maximum so
that inrush currents do not exceed normal starting currents. The monitor shall
function over a frequency difference range of up to +2.0 Hz with maximum operating
transfer time of one-sixth of a second. If the voltage of the load-carrying source
drops below 70%, the inphase function shall be automatically bypassed. The monitor
shall not require interwiring with the generator controls, or active control of the
governor.
G. Provide transfer inhibit circuit that opens to inhibit transfer to normal source.
H. Provide transfer inhibit circuit that opens to inhibit transfer to emergency source.
I. Auxiliary Contacts: Two (2) normally open and two (2) normally closed auxiliary
contacts shall operate when the transfer switch is connected to the normal power
source, and two (2) normally open and two (2) normally closed contacts shall operate
when the transfer switch is connected to the emergency power source.
J. Supplemental Features: The ATS shall also be furnished with the following:
1. Engine start contact.
2. Emergency power source monitor.
3. Test switch.
4. Close differential protection.
5. Time delay bypass switch.
K. Operator: A manual operator, conforming to the applicable provisions of U.L. 1008,
shall be provided to permit manual operation of the ATS under no-load conditions.
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES
16490-5 96013
L. Override Switch: The override switch shall bypass automatic transfer controls so the
transfer switch will remain connected to the emergency power source, regardless of
the conditions of the normal power source.
M. Indicating Lights:
1. A green indicating light shall supervise the normal power source and shall
have a nameplate engraved “NORMAL”.
2. A red indicating light shall supervise the emergency power source and shall
have a nameplate engraved “EMERGENCY”.
N. Enclosure:
1. The switch and accessories shall be in a wallmounted and ventilated NEMA
ICS 6, Type I, smooth sheet metal enclosure constructed in accordance with
U.L. 1008. Metal shall be not less than U.S. Standard Gauge No. 14. Doors
shall have hinges, locking handle latch, and gaskets at jamb, sill, and head.
The enclosure shall be equipped with two (2) grounding lugs grounding the
enclosure using No. 4/O AWG copper conductors. The Contractor’s field
wiring terminating within the enclosure shall comply with NFPA 70. If wiring
is not color-coded, wires shall be permanently tagged near the terminal at
each end with the wire number shown on approved shop drawings. Terminal
blocks shall conform to NEMA ICS 4. Terminal facilities shall be arranged for
entrance of external conductors from the bottom of the enclosure. Main
switch terminals, including the neutral terminal, shall be of the pressure type
and suitable for the termination of copper conductors shown.
2. Construction: The enclosure shall be constructed for convenient removal and
replacement of contacts, coils, springs, and control devices from the front
without the removal of main power conductors or removal of major
components.
3. Cleaning and Painting: Ferrous surfaces shall be cleaned and painted.
Surfaces to be painted shall be free of all oil, grease, welding slag and spat-
ter, mill scale, deleterious corrosion, dirt, and other foreign substances.
Painting shall include at least one coat of rust-inhibiting primer and one coat
of finish enamel. The rust-inhibiting primer shall be applied to a clean dry
surface as soon as practicable after cleaning. Painting shall be manufactur-
er’s standard material and process, except the total dry film thickness shall
be not less than 2.5 mils. Color of the finish coat may be the manufacturer’s
standard color. The finish shall be free from runs, sags, peeling, or other
defects.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION:
A. Installation shall conform to the requirements of NFPA 70 and manufacturer’s
recommendations.
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES
16490-6 96013
P- 3.02 FIELD TESTS AND INSPECTIONS:
A. The Contractor shall furnish labor, equipment, and incidentals for, and shall perform
all field tests. The Contractor shall give the Architect five (5) working days notice of
the times scheduled for tests so that the Architect may be present. Work affected
by deficiencies shall be completely retested at the Contractor’s expense. The manu-
facturer’s factory representative shall assist the Contractor with the field test and
inspection. Field tests shall include the following:
1. Simulate power failure and demonstrate complete ATS operation. Contractor
shall show by demonstration in service that the ATS are in good operating
condition, and function not less than five (5) times.
2. Conduct 3-hour load run test utilizing Contractor-furnished portable load
banks with each power source as follows:
;:
One-half load: One( I)-hour
Full load: Two (2)-hours
B. For additional testing requirements, see Section 16950, “Acceptance Testing of
Electrical Power and Distribution Equipment”.
* * l END OF SECTION l * l
20 OCTOBER 1997 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES
Carlsbad City Library 16490-7 96013
-
,r-
SECTION 16510
LIGHTING, BALLASTS AND ACCESSORIES
PART I- GENERAL
1 .Ol GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:
A. The provisions of Section 18011, “General Requirements, Electrical” and Section
16050, “Basic Electrical Materials and Methods” apply to this Section as if fully
repeated herein.
1.02 SUBMITTALS:
A. The following information shall be submitted for review and approval in accordance
with Section 1601 I, “General Requirements, Electrical”.
1. Catalog Cuts:
a. Light fixtures (each type)
b. Lamps (each type)
C. Ballasts (each type)
2. Shop Drawings:
a. Submit shop drawings for lighting fixture supports.
b. Submit shop drawings for track lighting layout (fixture Type “S”) Room
155. Include track lighting power drop detail.
C. Submit shop drawings for gallery track lighting control diagram.
1.03 WARRANTY:
A. Warranty shall comply with the provisions of Section 1601 I, “General Requirements,
Electrical”.
1.04 GENERAL:
A. Recessed fixtures shall be provided with proper frame and supports as required for
the ceiling type in which they are installed.
B. The Contractor shall verify the ceiling or wall construction and the mounting
requirements of each fixture and provide plaster frames, special flanges, concrete
pour housing, boxes, brackets, adapters, hangers, stems, canopies, and other
materials necessary to properly mount the fixture. Seismic clips shall be provided on
all recessed troffers.
C. Lenses shall be 100 percent virgin acrylic, minimum .125-inch thickness unless
otherwise noted on plans.
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
LIGHTING, BALLASTS AND ACCESSORIES
16510-I 96013
D. Fixtures and trims shall be assembled and installed with care to avoid and eliminate
light leaks. Where necessary, gasketing, patching, or other effective means shall
be used. There shall be no entry for insects or dirt into any fixture.
E. Fixtures and luminaires of one (1) type shall be of one (1) manufacturer and of
identical finish and appearance.
F. Fixtures shall be complete with all required accessories and equipment including
lamps, necessary for complete installation.
G. Submit shop drawings for all fixtures as required under “Shop Drawings”. “Shop
Drawings” may be catalog data sheets if complete information, including mounting
hardware, is shown and identified.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 FLUORESCENT FIXTURES:
A. Fluorescent fixtures shall be as indicated in the fixture schedule.
2.02 FLUORESCENT BALLASTS:
A. Electronic type fluorescent ballasts shall be used in all fluorescent light fixtures
unless otherwise noted. Electronic ballasts shall be true rapid start, or instant.
Electronic ballasts shall be American made by manufacturer producing product for
at least 10 years. Electronic ballasts shall operate the lamps at a frequency of 20 to
35 KHz with no detectable flicker. Electronic ballasts operating as a parallel circuit
shall allow other lamps to continue functioning after one lamp has failed. Ballasts
shall be HPF type (0.9 minimum) with a ballast factor of .88 percent or higher, sound
rated “A” or better, contain no PCB’s and shall be U.L. listed. Electronic ballasts
shall have independent testing lab reports and shall meet any ANSI standards.
Electronic ballasts shall comply with FCC and NEMA limits for EMI and RFI and shall
not interfere with the operation of other normal electronic equipment. Ballast shall
carry the CBM label, and shall be fully potted, with a 5 year warranty and full labor -
wherever installed. Electronic ballasts shall be Reduced Harmonic type with
maximum total harmonic distortion of 20 percent. Electronic ballasts shall be
MagneTek-Triad, or Motorola or equa.1.
B. Fluorescent dimming ballasts shall be Lutron Hilume.
C. Where multiple level switching of fluorescent fixtures is indicated on the drawings,
wire ballasts for symmetrical grouping of lamps. For example, in four lamp fixtures,
two (2) inner and two (2) outer lamps shall be switch controlled.
2.03 FLUORESCENT LAMPS:
A. Fluorescent lamp types shall be as indicated on plans. Lamps shall be General
Electric, Osram-Sylvania, Philips or equal. All of the same type shall be of the same
manufacturer.
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
LIGHTING, BALLASTS AND ACCESSORIES
16510-2 96013
F-- 2.04 INCANDESCENT FIXTURES:
A. Incandescent fixtures shall be as indicated on the fixture schedules.
B. Recessed incandescent fixtures shall have a U.L. listed thermal protective device.
2.05 INCANDESCENT LAMPS:
A. Incandescent lamps shall be extended life, energy saving type rated for 130 volts,
inside frosted.
2.66 H.I.D. FIXTURES:
A. H.I.D. fixtures shall be as indicated on the fixture schedules.
B. H.I.D. fixtures shall be complete with lamp and ballast, designed for use with that
lamp. Ballasts shall be high power factor type UL 1029.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION:
A. Lighting Fixtures: Set fixtures plumb, square, level and in alignment. Secure in
accordance with the manufacturer’s directions and shop drawings unless otherwise
indicated.
B. Provide a system to secure all recessed lighting fixtures. Fixtures shall be supported
directly and laterally from the building structure above, using No. 9 gauge wire
minimum. The ceiling suspension system shall not be used for direct support.
C. Stems for pendant fixtures shall have approved swivel hanger and canopy at ceiling.
l ’ l END OF SECTION * * *
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
LIGHTING, BALLASTS AND ACCESSORIES
16510-3 96013
SECTION 16530
EXTERIOR LIGHTING
/-
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .Ol GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:
A. The provisions of Section 16011, “General Requirements, Electrical” apply to this
section as if fully repeated herein.
1.02 SUBMITTALS:
A. The following information shall be submitted for review and approval in accordance
with Section 16011, “General Requirements, Electrical”.
1. Catalog Information:
a.
b.
::
F’
9. h.
Light Fixtures (each type) with photometric pattern
Photocontroller
Ballast (each type)
Poles
Lighting Control Panel “LCP”
Electronic Timeclocks
Lighting Contactors
Lamps (each type)
2. Shop Drawings:
a.
b.
C.
Luminaire (each type)
Poles and Pole Bases (each type)
Lighting Control Panel “LCP”
3. Manufacturers Recommendations: Provide two (2) copies before material is used.
a.
b.
PVC conduit joints and junctions
Solvent welding directions
4. Photometric Data:
a. Provide a computer generated photometric point-to-point print-out of the site
area to scale (same scale as contract drawings) indicating all applicable
photometric data.
b. Provide a computer generated photometric point-to-point print out of the pool
and deck area to scale (same scale as the contract drawings) indicating
footcandle levels.
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
EXTERIOR LIGHTING
16530-l 96013
5. Test Report:
a. Provide a salt spray test report for poles and luminaires (Fixtures ‘IVY’, “J”,
and “P”).
1.03 WARRANTY:
A. Warranty shall comply with the provisions of Section 16011, “General Requirements,
Electrical”.
1.04 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT:
A. Provide new materials and equipment. Materials shall be listed by Underwriters’
Laboratories, Inc. (UL) and bear evidence of such approval where applicable..
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 LUMINAIRES:
A. Luminaire shall be in accordance with the light fixture schedule.
B. Each fixture shall consist of only two (2) modules, namely, unitized ballast module
and lamp/reflector module, housed in a rectilinear, sharp cut-off, totally enclosed,
rain-tight, dust-tight, and corrosion resistant enclosure with mounting arm or yoke as
indicated on the fixture schedule. All visible hardware shall be of same wlor as the
fixture housing. Fixture shall be U.L. listed and labeled “Suitable for Wet Locations”.
Fixture with U.L. listed components only shall not be acceptable.
C.
D.
Luminaire housing shall be made of aluminum. Housing sides shall be of .090”
minimum thickness. Overall dimensions shall be kept aid minimum to reduce
effective projected area of wind loading. Door/lens assembly shall be hinged to the
housing with concealed stainless steel hinge pin and secured with captive screws.
The door/lens frame shall be mitered anodized extruded aluminum. The lens shall
be clear polycarbonate of l/8” minimum thickness and be silicone sealed in the
extruded frame. The frame shall be held against the housing using high quality,
rubberized silicone gasket. Silicone impregnated Dacron gasket shall not be
acceptable. The door/lens shall open to a full 90”.
Lamp/reflector module shall be an assembly consisting of a porcelain lamp socket,
spring held lamp support, LPS of wattage indicated on the plans, and aluminum
reflector. The module shall be hinged to the same housing side as the door/lens with
stainless steel hinge pin and secured with quarter turn captive screws. Reflector
shall be of .032” homogeneous sheet aluminum, electro-chemically brightened,
anodized and sealed highly specular aluminum with minimum reflectance of 90%.
Reflector shall produce photometrics as indicated on the plans and specified herein.
Area type distribution luminaire shall have segmented reflector designed to produce
a nearly square pattern of light on the ground with minimum hot spot directly
underneath the luminaire. Forward throw type luminaire shall have more than 70%
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
EXTERIOR LIGHTING
16530-2 96013
of the lumen output directed forward. No light shall be emitted above horizontal
plane.
E. Unitized ballast module shall have ballast and all associated electrical components
mounted on an aluminum tray. Ballast shall be high power factor (above 90%) multi-
tap type capable of providing lamp starting down to -20°F. Voltage shall be as
indicated on the plans. Wiring connection between ballast module shall be secured
to the inside of housing by method that facilitate easy removal without using tool.
F. Yoke mounted luminaire shall have 1-1/2Wxl”D extruded aluminum mitered yoke
attached to housing sides. Yoke assembly shall be mounted directly to square pole
or be provided with round pole top fitter for mounting on matching pole top tenon.
Arm mounted luminaire shall be secured to square pole with a 4” long 2” x 5”
extruded aluminum arm. There shall be no exposed nuts and bolts.
G. Luminaire finish shall be black, or bronze (as indicated in the Fixture Schedule)
anodized or electro-statically applied powder coat with a 3-mil coating. Prior to
painting, the exterior surface shall be cleaned to meet the “near white” specification
as published by the Steel Structure Painting Council Standards :SSPC-SPlO”. The
exterior paint shall be a combination of thermosetting polyester resins, pigments, and
modifiers bonded by heat fusion. The interior surface shall be coated with a thermo-
plastic hydrocarbon resin. The internal coating shall contain chromate corrosion
inhibitors.
.- 2.02 PHOTOELECTRICAL CONTROLS:
A. Photoelectric switches shall be Tork, Paragon, Precision Multiple or equal. Type of
mounting, poles, voltage, wattage rating and arrangement shall be as shown on the
plans.
B. Photoelectric switches shall have fail-safe, load to remain on, in case of cell failure,
and shall have minimum time delay of fifteen (15) seconds. It shall have a light
sensitivity of three (3) foot candles to turn on and ten (10) foot candles to turn off with
movable shield for adjustability.
C. Controls shall be weatherproof with sealed light sensitive element, and 360”
directional adjustment.
2.03 METAL HALIDE BALLASTS:
A. Ballasts: High intensity discharge ballasts shall be High Power Factor Auto-
transformer (HPFA) ballasts for metal halide lamps.
2.04 POLES AND POLE BASES:
./-
A. Poles, brackets, and attachments shall be designed for service with wind velocities
of 85 mph, and a 1.3 wind gust factor considering the force exerted by the wind on
the maximum exposure of the fixture selected. Height, shape, and finish shall be as
indicated on drawings.
20 OCTOBER 1997 EXTERIOR LIGHTING
Carlsbad City Library 16530-3 96013
B. Each pole shall be straight square steel with height as indicated on the plans. The
pole shaft shall be one piece construction fabricated from a weldable grade carbon
steel structural tubing. The pole shaft shall conform to ASTM A-500 Grade B with
minimum yield strength of 46,000 psi. The pole shaft shall have a full length
longitudinal resistance weld and is uniformly square in cross-section with flat sides,
small wmer radii. There shall be a reinforced handhole of 3” x 5” inside opening
located l’@ above the base and grounding lug on the opposite side of the handhole.
The handhole cover shall have rubberized silicone gasketing and tamperproof
screws.
C. The anchor base shall be fabricated from a structural quality hot rolled carbon steel
plate that meets a minimum yield strength of 36,000 psi. The anchor basic shall
telescope the pole shaft and be circumferentially welded top and bottom. A set of
four properly sized anchor bolts, each furnished with two washers and two hex nuts,
shall be furnished by the pole manufacturer with each pole. Anchor bolts shall be
fabricated from a commercial quality hot rolled carbon steel bar that meets a
minimum yield strength of 50,000 psi. and’shall be galvanized in accordance with
ASTM A-153.
D. Pole finish shall be 5-mil black, or bronze (as indicated in the Fixture Schedule)
powder coat matching fixture. Prior to printing the exterior surface shall be cleaned
to meet the “near white” specification as published by the Steel Structure Painting
Council Standards “SSPC-SPlO”. The exterior finish shall be a combination of the
thermosetting polyester resins, pigments, and modifiers electro-statically applied and
bonded by heat fusion. The bottom 12” of internal pole surface shall be blast cleaned
and powder coated in accordance with external coating requirements. The interior
surface shall be coated with the thermoplastic hydrocarbon resin. The internal
coating shall contain chromate corrosion inhibitors. The internal coating shall overlap
the powder coated internal portion of the pole by a minimum of 6 inches. The pole
shall be capable of passing minimum 1000 hours of sale spray exposure (ASTM B-
117). Contractor shall submit a test report from an independent testing lab showing
that the test sample has passed the above test with ratings of “10” in inscribed area
per ASTM Method D-1654.
1. Concrete pole bases shall be cast-in-place reinforced concrete as indicated
with anchor bolts and conduit entries as indicated. Concrete shall be rated
3,000 psi at 28 day test and shall conform with the requirements of Division
3 of these specification.
E. Ground Rod: Shall be as specified under Section 16450, “Grounding”.
F. Conduit: Polyvinyl-chloride (PVC) tubing, conduit and fittings shall conform to NEMA
TC-2 and TC-3 respectively
G. Conductors: Shall be as specified under Section 16120, “Wiring and Cable”.
H. Splices for 600 Volt Conductors: Splices in electrical cables of 600 volt insulation
class in underground system shall be made only in accessible locations such as
handholes. Splices shall conform to Section 16120, “Wiring and Cable.”
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library EXTERIOR LIGHTING
16530-4 96013
2.05 LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL “LCP”:
A. Lighting Control Panel “LCP” shall be as indicated on the drawings, and as specified
herein.
2.06 ELECTRONIC TIMECLOCK:
A. Timeclock shall be a single channel control with 24-hour, 7-day programming
capability, and 16 set points. Controls shall have keyboard override. Control shall
have Cday power outage carry-over without a battery. The unit shall have a digital
time display and an “on-off” status display, timeclock shall be Nema 1, 12OV, 20A
with (1) normally open contact. The timeclock shall be a Paragon #EC7000/120V (or
approved equal).
2.07 LIGHTING CONTACTORS:
A. Shall comply with NEMA ICS 2 and shall be electrical operated, electrically held. Unit
shall have silver alloy contacts and shall require no arcing contacts. Contactors shall
be U.L. listed and be rated as indicated.
B. Lighting contactors shall be open type with rating shown on the plans and as
required. Manufacturers: Cutler Hammer-Westinghouse, Square D, or equal.
C. Provide nameplates for each lighting contactor identifying the item controlled as
specified in section “NAMEPLATES”.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION:
A. Underground cable installation shall conform to California Electrical Code and G.O.
128 (CAL. P.U.C.).
B. Underground Conduit/Duct without Concrete Encasement: Work shall comply with
Section 16110, “Raceways and Fittings”.
C. Ground Rod: Shall be driven near the end of the conduit stubs coming out of each
pole base in access handhole as indicated. Top of the ground rod shall be the same
approximate elevation as the conduit stub. Ground rod connection shall be made
using a thermit welded connection. Rod shall be 3/4” by 10 ft. long copper electrode.
D. Backfill: Shall comply with Section 16110, “Raceways and Fittings”.
E. Reconditioning of Surfaces: Paving repairs shall conform to the requirements of
Division 2 of the project specification.
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
EXTERIOR LIGHTING
16530-5 96013
F. Grounding: Provide a copper equipment grounding conductor ‘in each direct burial
conduit run and a ground rod at each pole. Ground rod shall be driven into
undisturbed earth as indicated on drawings. The ground wire shall be attached to the
rod by a ground rod clamp. This connection shall also be brazed or silver soldered
and shall be accessible via handhole. The. equipment grounding conductor shall not
be as indicated, and shall be both connected to the pole grounding connector.
Ground wire between poles shall be sized in accordance with Table 250-95 of the
CEC.
3.02 TESTS:
A. The Architect shall be notified at least five (5) working days in advance of the
Contractors proposed date of the tests to permit witnessing of the tests. The
Contractor shall furnish the Architect with seven (7) copies of the results of the tests.
B. Circuits: The Contractor shall test each circuit, all controllers, and components of the
system. The Contractor shall furnish the Architect with seven (7) copies of the test
results.
C. Grounds: Ground rods shall be tested for ground resistance value before any wire
is connected. A portable ground testing megger developing an AC voltage shall be
used to test each ground. The auxiliary or reference ground rods shall be 3/4 inch
copper clad steel, not less than 4 feet in length and driven 3-l/2 feet deep, and shall
be installed in a straight line from the ground being tested. Number 14 AWG
standard wire leads with at least 6000 volt rubber insulation shall be connected to the
ground being tested and the two (2) reference grounds and to the proper binding post
on the instrument. Where there is more than one (1) ground within a circle of 10 feet
at a particular location, the reference rods as driven for the “first” test shall be used
for tests on the other rods without changing their location. The instrument shall be
equipped with a meter reading directly in ohms, the resistance of the ground under
test.
D. Compaction Test: Backfill shall be tested for compaction in accordance with ASTM
D1556.
E. Operating Test: Contractor shall operate the system in the presence of the Architect.
l l * END OF SECTION l * l
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
EXTERIOR LIGHTING
16530-6 96013
f -
SECTION 16610
UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
1 .Ol GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:
A. The provisions of Section 16011, “General Requirements, Electrical” and Section
16050, “Basic Electrical Materials and Methods” apply to this section as if fully
repeated herein.
1.02 SCOPE:
A. All labor materials, appliances, tools, equipment, facilities, transportation, and
services necessary for and incidental to performing all operations in connection with
furnishing, delivery and installation of the work of this section, complete, as shown
on the drawings and/or specified herein. Work includes but is not necessarily limited
to the following:
1. Examine all other sections for work related to the other sections and required
to be included as work under this section.
2. Coordinate all work in this section with related trades.
3. Complete and operational UPS including, but not limited to, the following
major components:
a. Charger/rectifier unit.
b. lnvertor unit.
C. Batteries.
1.03 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS:
A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent
referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only.
1. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers, Inc. (IEEE) Publications
2. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Publications
3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)
4. Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and Regulations
5. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (U.L.)
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carisbad City Library
UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SYSTEM
16610-I 96013
1.04 SUBMITTALS:
A. The following information shall be submitted for review and approval in accordance
with Section 16011, “General Requirements, Electrical”.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Indicate electrical characteristics and connection requirements. Provide
battery rack dimensions; battery type, size, dimensions, and weight; detailed
equipment outlines, weight, and dimensions; location of conduit entry and
exit; single-line diagram indicating metering, control, and external wiring
requirements; heat rejection and air flow requirements, and seismic
anchorage details.
C. Manufacturer’s Installation Instructions:
1. Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product
testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection,
examination, preparation, installation, and starting of Product. Include
equipment installation outline, connection diagram for external cabling,
internal wiring diagram, and written instruction for installation.
D. Manufacturer’s Certificate:
1. Certify that the UPS meets or exceeds specified requirements.
E. Manufacturer’s Calculations Instruction:
1. Seismic support calculations signed by a Registered Structural Engineer
California for all equipment.
F. The approval of equipment specified in this section shall be contingent upon the
submittal and approval of the equipment layout drawings required by Section 16011
“General Requirements, Electrical”.
1.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS:
A. Provide manuals for equipment per Section 16011, “General Requirements,
Electrical”. Items covered shall include, but not be limited to, the following
equipment:
1. Uninterruptible Power Supply
1.06 POSTED OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS:
A. Provide operating instruction per General Requirements, Electrical; Specification
Section 16011. Items covered shall include, but not be limited to, the following
equipment:
1. Uninterruptible Power Supply
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SYSTEM
16610-2 96013
,- 1.07 SEISMIC RESTRAINT:
A. All equipment shall be seismically braced or anchored in accordance with the
applicable seismic zone as indicated in Section 16050, “Basic Electrical Materials
and Methods”.
1.08 QUALIFICATIONS:
A. Manufacturer:
1. Company specialiing in manufacturing the UPS specified in this section with
a minimum of fifteen years documented experience, and with a nation wide
service organization. Manufacturer shall have an authorized service facility
within San Diego County and offer 24-hour emergency service.
1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:
A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600.
B. Accept products on site in factory packing. Inspect for damage.
C. Protect equipment from extreme temperature and humidity by storing in a conditioned
space.
D. Protect equipment from dust and debris by wrapping unit in dust tight cover and
storing away from construction activity.
E. Deliver batteries no sooner than seven (7) days before charging.
1.10 MAINTENANCE SERVICE:
A. Furnish service and maintenance of uninterruptible power system for one (1) year
from date of substantial completion.
B. Include coverage of travel, labor, parts, and service.
1.11 WARRANTY:
A. Warranty shall comply with the provisions of Section 1601 I, “General Requirements,
Electrical”.
1.12 MANUFACTURERS:
A. The specified equipment shall be manufactured by International Power Machines,
Liebert, or equal.
;-
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SYSTEM
16610-3 96013
PART 2 PRODUCT
2.01 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SYSTEM: ’
A. System configuration: Single Module with reverse transfer.
B. Components:
1. Battery
2. Rectifier/charger to maintain battery charge and to provide input to Invertor
when utility power is available.
3. lnvertor to provide power to load during normal operation.
4. Static switch to transfer load automatically and without disturbance between
lnvertor and utility power.
5. Manual switch to bypass static switch for maintenance.
6. Input and output isolation transformers and filters to provide appropriate
isolation and disturbance attenuation,
7. Monitors, sensors, and control circuits.
8. Distribution panel assembly.
C. Design Standards: IEEE 519 and NEMA PE 1.
2.02 SYSTEM RATINGS AND OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS:
A. System Continuous Rating: As indicated on the Drawings, over the entire battery
voltage range at specified output power factor. Maintain output voltage within
specified limits at any load from full load to no-load.
B. Battery Capacity: Capable of operating at full load for 10 minutes.
C. Input Requirements:
1. Voltage: 480 VAC + 15%, 3 phase, 3 wire, plus ground.
2. Input Frequency: 60 Hz + 10%.
3. Input Current: 223 Amps (max).
4. Input Power Factor: Up to .95 lagging.
5. Input Current Total Harmonic Distortion at nominal input voltage shall be 7%
typical.
6. Power walk-in: 0 to 100% over a 10 second period.
20 OCTOBER 1997
Cansbad City Library
UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SYSTEM
16610-4 96013
7. Magnetizing Inrush Current: 600% of nominal input current for less than one
(1) cycle, highest expandable KVA size.
D. Output Characteristics:
1. Voltage: 120/208, 3 phase, 4 wire plus ground. Output voltage shall be
adjustable from + 3% to 25% by inputting from the keypad.
2. Voltage Regulation:
+ 1.0% for balanced load and up to 30% unbalanced load.
+ 2% for 50% unbalanced load
+ 5% for 100% unbalanced load
3. Voltage Transient Response:
2 3% for 50% step load change
+ 5% for 100% step load change
+ 1% for loss or return of AC input power
+ 1% for manual transfer at full load
4. Voltage Recovery Time: Return to within 1% of nominal value within 16.67
milliseconds (one cycle).
5. Phase Angle Displacement:
120” + lo for balanced load
120” + I0 for 50% unbalanced load
120” + 3” for 100% unbalanced load
6. Voltage Distortion: Maximum 2% total (THD) and 1% any single harmonic
when the UPS is connected to 100% linear loads.
7. Non-Linear Load Capability: Output voltage total harmonic distortion shall be
less than 5% when connected to a 100% non-linear load with a crest factor
not to exceed 3.0.
8. Frequency: 60 Hz + (.25, 0.5, 0.75, or 1.0 Hz, Selectable). 60 Hz + 0.1%
free running.
9. Slew Rate: 1 Hz/second maximum.
10. Power Factor: 0.8 at the rated volt-amperes (VA)
F- ,
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SYSTEM
16610-5 96013
11. Overload Capability:
125% of rated load for 10 minutes
150% of rated load for 1 minute
12. Efficiency: The UPS efficiency (AC to AC) with nominal input voltage and
battery fully charged shall be:
89.0 % @ 50% Load
91.5 % @ 75% Load
91 .O % @ 100% Load
E. DC Bus:
1. Voltage: 420 VDC minimum, 480 VDC nominal
2. Current: ADC maximum at cutoff voltage shall be 279.
3. DC Ripple: 1% of DC voltage
2% of battery current
4. Low Battery Protection: At 420 VDC battery voltage or eight (8) hours after
the UPS has shutdown on DC under voltage condition (battery cut off
voltage), the battery circuit breaker shall open in order to prevent excessive
battery discharge.
F. Environmental Conditions:
1. Acoustical Noise: 60 dB “A” weighing at three (3) feet
2.03 DESIGN:
A. The UPS shall be designed to operate as an on-line reverse transfer system in the
following modes:
1. Normal: The lnvertor shall continuously supply power to the critical load.
The rectifier/battery charger shall derive power from the utility AC source and
supply DC power to the lnvertor while simultaneously float charging the
battery.
2. Emergency: Upon failure of the utility AC power source, the critical load shall
be supplied by the Invertor, which, without any switching, shall obtain its
power from the battery.
3. Recharge: Upon restoration of the utility AC power source (prior to complete
battery discharge), the rectifier/battery charger shall power the lnvertor and
simultaneously recharge the battery.
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SYSTEM
16610-6 96013
4. Bypass Mode: The static bypass transfer switch shall be used to transfer the
load to the bypass without interruption to the critical power load. This shall
be accomplished by turning the lnvertor off. Automatic re-transfer or forward
transfer of the load shall be accomplished by turning the lnvertor on.
5. Maintenance BypasslTest Mode: A manual make before break maintenance
bypass switch shall be provided to isolate the UPS lnvertor output and static
bypass transfer switch for maintenance. This shall allow the UPS to be
tested or repaired without affecting load operation.
2.04 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
A. Rectifier/Battery Charger: A six (6) pole, solid-state full-wave bridge rectifier shall
convert the incoming AC power to regulated DC voltage, which shall be subsequently
filtered to provide power for the lnvertor and battery charging functions. The
rectifier/battery charger shall have sufficient capacity to support a fully loaded lnvertor
and recharge the battery to 95% of its full capacity within 10 times the discharge
time. The rectifier/battery charger assembly shall be constructed of modular plug-ins
to facilitate maintenance.
1. Input Protection: The rectifier/battery charger shall be protected by an AC
input circuit breaker and input fuses.
2. Current Limiting:
a. Input Current Limit: 125% of nominal input current. A second step
input current limit activated by a dry contact shall be provided. The
second step input current limit is programmable.
b. Battery Charge Current Limit: Maximum recharge current shall be
limited to 10% of maximum DC discharge current. 5% or 15% current
limit settings are Owner programmable.
3. Operating Modes:
a. Automatic Charge Sequence: The rectifier battery charger shall
automatically charge the batteries at an elevated voltage after an
outage of 15-180 seconds for 8-68 hours (Owner programmable).
b. Float: Nominal DC bus voltage (programmable) provided under
nominal operating conditions.
C. Equalize/Commissioning Service: A high charge rate of DC voltage
capable of being set at 2.4-2.6 volts per cell at a user selected time
period.
d. Time Charge Sequence: A manual charge timer (adjustable from 8
to 68 hours) shall be provided.
/-
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SYSTEM
16610-7 96013
B. Invertor: The UPS output shall be derived from a Pulse Width Modulated (PWM)
variable frequency and variable pulse width, transistorized-type lnvertor design. The
lnvertor shall be capable of providing the specified precise output power
characteristics (specified in paragraph 2.02D) while operating over the battery
voltage range. The Invertor assembly shall be constructed of modular rack out
assemblies to facilitate maintenance.
C. Static Bypass: The static bypass transfer switch shall be solid-state, rated for
continuous duty and shall operate under the following conditions:
1. Uninterrupted Transfer: The static bypass transfer switch shall automatically
cause the bypass source to assume the critical load without interruption after
the logic senses one (1) of the following conditions:
a. invertor overload exceeds unit’s rating.
b. Battery protection period expired and bypass is available.
C. lnvertor failure.
2. Interrupted Transfer: If the bypass source is beyond the conditions stated
below, and interrupted transfer (not less than 0.2 seconds in duration) shall
be made upon detection of a fault condition.
a. Bypass voltage greater than 2 10% from the UPS rated output
voltage.
b. Bypass frequency greater than + (0.25,0.5, 0.75 or 1 .O Hz selectable)
from the UPS rated output frequency.
3. Automatic Unintenupted Forward Transfer. The static bypass transfer switch
shall automatically forward transfer, without interruption, after (1) the UPS
lnvertor is turned “ON”, or (2) after an instantaneous overload-induced
reverse transfer has occurred and the load current returns to less than the
unit’s 100% rating.
4. Manual Transfer: A manual static transfer shall be initiated from the System
Status and Control Panel by turning the UPS lnvertor off.
5. Overload Ratings: The static bypass transfer switch shall have the following
overload characteristics:
a. 1000% of UPS output rating for 0.016 seconds (one cycle)
b. 150% of UPS output rating for 1 minute
C. 125% of UPS output rating for 10 minutes
D. Microprocessor Controlled Logic: The full UPS operation shall be provided through
the use of microprocessor controlled logic. All operation and parameters are
firmware controlled, thus eliminating the need for manual adjustments or
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SYSTEM
16610-8 96013
,-
,-
potentiometers. The logic shall include a self-test and diagnostic circuitry such that
a fault can be isolated down to the printed circuit assembly or plug-in power
assembly level. Every printed circuit assembly or plug-in power assembly shall be
monitored. The failure of any of the assemblies shall be displayed on the visual LCD
display as being the assembly that needs to be replaced.
2.05 FABRICATION:
A. Enclosure: The UPS shall be housed in a free standing enclosure with casters and
leveling feet. The enclosure shall be designed to blend into a computer room
environment. The overall size of the UPS (excluding auxiliary cabinets) shall be
56.68” high, 32.18” deep.
The width of the installed UPS shall not exceed 45” Wide.
The weight of the installed UPS shall not exceed 2224 Ibs.
Equipment stands shall be fabricated from steel angle and shall be anchored to the
concrete pad in accordance with the applicable seismic zone as indicated in Section
16050, “Basic Electrical Materials and Methods”. Provide calculations from a
Registered Structural Engineer (California) for approval. Equipment stands shall
support the entire UPS a minimum of four (4) inches off the pad.
B. Ventilation: The UPS shall be designed for forced air cooling. Air inlets shall be
provided from the front bottom of the UPS enclosure. Air exhaust shall be from the
top rear portion of the unit. Air filters shall be provided as standard.
Full load heat rejection shall be 16,200 BTU/HR minimum, with air flow of 1600 CFM.
2.06 BATTERY:
A. Battery Pat Assembly: The Battery Pat Assembly (BPA) shall be furnished in a
matching cabinet to the UPS. The BPA shall include a battery disconnect that shall
provide a positive means of isolating the battery from the rest of the system for
maintenance. The BPA shall be designed with a roll out sub-assembly to allow for
checking the torque on all battery connections in the battery system as well as
providing sufficient access for preventative maintenance. The BPA shall be
furnished with casters and levelers to facilitate installation.
B. Battery Type: Sealed maintenance free high rate discharge, lead acid cells.
C. Design Life: Ten (IO) years.
D. Nominal Battery String: [.:<;d cells.
E. Minimum End Volts per Cell: f:f&J
2.07 SYSTEM CONTROLS AND INDICATORS:
A. The UPS shall be provided with a system status and control panel which controls,
monitors and displays system operation and parameters. The display shall be
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SYSTEM
16610-g 96013
available in English, French, Spanish, Dutch and Italian. The system status and
control panel shall include:
1. System mimic diagram shall depict a complete single line diagram of the
UPS:
a. Charger ON (functional)
b. UPS on line
C. Load on Bypass
d. System alarm flashing
2. System Parameters Monitored: The visual display shall display the following
system parameters based on true RMS metering:
a.
b.
Input voltage (L-L). Three phase simultaneously.
Input current/phase. Three phase simultaneously.
C. Bypass input voltage (L-L). Three phase simultaneously.
d. Bypass input frequency.
e. UPS output voltage (L-L). Three phase simultaneously.
f. UPS output currentiphase. Three phase simultaneously.
9.
h.
UPS output % load of the most loaded phase.
DC voltage.
3.
i. Battery current (charge/discharge).
j. Time on Battery.
System Alarms: The following system alarm conditions shall be displayed on
the UPS LCD visual display
a. Bypass AC input over voltage or under voltage
b. Bypass AC input and lnvertor out of synchronization
C.
d.
Bypass AC input has wrong phase rotation
Bypass AC input RC filter fuse blown
e.
f.
Environmental problem
UPS on overload
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SYSTEM
16610-10 96013
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
9.
h.
i.
j.
k.
I.
m.
n.
0.
P.
q.
r.
S.
t.
U.
V.
W.
X.
Y.
Z.
aa.
bb.
cc.
dd.
ee.
ff.
Charger module alarm
Input over voltage or under voltage
Input circuit breaker tripped
Approaching end of battery operation
Maximum battery voltage
UPS on battery
lnvertor fuse blown
lnvertor leg 1 over temperature
lnvertor leg 3 over temperature
lnvertor leg 1 power supply fault
lnvertor leg 3 power supply fault
lnvertor leg 2 transistors out of saturation
Electronic power supply fault
UPS overload shutdown
lnvertor output contactor open
Bypass AC input over frequency or under-frequency
Bypass AC input has single phase condition
Operating on internal oscillator (Invertor free-running)
Fan failure
Charger current sensor fault
Charger OFF
Input transformer over temperature
Input has wrong phase rotation
Battery under voltage shutdown
Input has single phase condition
lnvertor OFF
UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SYSTEM
16610-11 96013
99. lnvertor transformer over temperature
hh. lnvertor leg 2 over temperature
ii. Static switch over temperature
jj. Invertor leg 2 power supply fault
kk. lnvertor leg 1 transistors out of saturation
II. lnvertor leg 3 transistors out of saturation
mm. lnvertor output over voltage or under-voltage
nn. lnvertor current sensor fault
00. lnvertor current limit
4. Audible Alarm Reset Touch Pad: Shall be used to silence the audible alarm.
If a new alarm is sensed after the original alarm has been silenced, it shall
reactivate the audible alarm.
5. Emergency Power Off (EPO) Touch Pads: When simultaneously pressed,
it shall cause the AC input, bypass input contactor and battery circuit
breakers to open, thereby shutting down the UPS and the load. The EPO
function shall be capable of being initiated by an externally provided isolated
dry contact (REPO).
6. Operating Instructions: The visual display shall provide all necessary
instructions for bringing the UPS on-line and for shutting the equipment down
under normal or emergency conditions. A step-by-step procedure shall be
provided for each sequence of operation. The following menus shall be
displayed:
a.
b.
C.
d.
e.
f.
9.
h.
lnvertor ON/OFF Commands
Display Contrast
Start-UP
Battery Test
Bypass Procedures
Diagnostics
Personalization
Communication
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SYSTEM
16610-12 96013
B. Communication Features:
1. Dry Contacts: Five (5) isolated dry contacts shall be available for external
connection. These contacts shall indicate:
a. UPS on Line
b. Load on Bypass
C. UPS on battery
d. Low battery shutdown
e. Summary alarm
The contacts shall be normally open and shall change state to indicate the
operating status. The contacts shall be rated 1 amp @ 120 VAC or 24 VDC.
2. Power Warning (AS/400) Interface: Four (4) normally open, dry isolated
contacts connected to a 9pin D&9 connector, located on the rear of the UPS
cabinet shall be provided. These four (4) contacts shall indicate:
a. UPS on Line
b. Load on Bypass
C. UPS on battery
d. Low battery shutdown
This interface shall be provided with a 15 foot, g-pin cable that connects the
UPS to the computer.
3. Remote communication Link: The Remote Communication Link shall include
the hardware and software that provide monitoring and controlling capabilities
of the UPS from a remote personal computer.
The hardware shall be located inside the UPS cabinet and it shall allow the
transmission of control and monitoring signals between the UPS and an IBM
PC AT or compatible. User interface software shall be provided on a 5 l/4
inch diskette, and it shall be complete and require no programming by the
user. The software shall be menu driven and operated under MS-DOS Ver.
3.01 or higher.
Maximum distance between the UPS and the PC shall be 50ft. For greater
distances, line drivers shall be provided.
/-
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SYSTEM
16610-13 96013
2.08 PROVIDE THE FOLLOWING OPTIONS:
A. Input Filter. An optional input filter shall be available to limit input current harmonic
distortion to less than 7% THD and improve input power factor to .95. The input filter
shall be mounted inside the UPS cabinet.
B. Remote Alarm Status Panel: One (1) wall mounted panel with four (4) indicating
LED’s, located as indicated on the drawings:
1. UPS on line
2. Load on bypass
3. UPS on battery
4. Summary alarm
The alarms shall be a latching type, such that if an alarm is triggered, the LED will
stay ON (latched) even if the alarm is corrected. This feature will provide the
operator the chance to verify the occurrence of the alarm. The Remote Alarm Status
Panel shall also be equipped with:
1. ALARM RESET push-button, to reset the latching alarm
2. HORN for alarm annunciation
3. HORN RESET push-button, to silence the audible alarm
C. Input Isolation Transformer An input isolation transformer can be provided to isolate
the rectifier input and DC bus. The input isolation transformer shall be housed in an
auxiliary cabinet 31.54” wide, which shall bolt to the left side of the UPS.
D. Maintenance Bypass Switch: The maintenance bypass switch shall provide the
capability of continuously support the critical load from the bypass source while the
UPS is isolated for maintenance. The maintenance bypass switch shall be housed
in an isolated compartment within the UPS enclosure in such a way that service
personnel will not be exposed to any electrically live parts while maintaining the unit.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION:
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
B. The Contractor shall remove casters and leveling feet and bolt the entire UPS (each
cabinet) directly to the equipment stand with a minimum of four (4) anchor bolts
(each cabinet). The equipment stand and entire assembly shall be anchored per
Seismic Zone IV requirements.
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SYSTEM
16610-14 96013
- 3.02 TESTING:
A. The Contractor shall provide all tools, devices, and equipment required to complete
tests.
B. Factory testing on the assembled UPS and battery backup unit shall be performed
to ensure that all features and options of the equipment are fully functional. Provide
three (3) copies of factory tests to the Architect prior to shipment.
C. Start-up and site tests shall be performed by the Contractor under the supervision of
a factory representative. The Contractor shall provide a load bank and all required
cables to perform an on-site load test as follows:
1. l/2 load for 1 hour
2. 314 load for 1 hour
3. full load for 1 hour
D. At the conclusion of all tests, the Contractor shall correct any and all discrepancies
and retest the equipment in areas where test results were unsatisfactory. The
system shall be connected for proper operation upon acceptable conclusion of
testing. Provide seven (7) copies of test results to the Architect within five (5) days
of the final tests.
/- 3.03 MANUFACTURER’S FIELD SERVICES:
A. Prepare and start systems under provisions of Section 01400.
B. Include services of technician to supervise adjustments, final connections, and
system testing.
3.04 DEMONSTRATION:
A. Demonstrate operation uninterruptible power system by simulating an outage.
B. Provide four (4) hours of instruction each for up to six (6) persons, to be conducted
at project site with manufacturer’s representative, in accordance with Section 16011,
“General Requirements, Electrical”.
* l * END OF SECTION l * *
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SYSTEM
16610-15 96013
SECTION 16620
DIESEL ENGINE-GENERATOR SET
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .Ol GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:
A. The provisions of Section 16011, “General Requirements, Electrical” and Section
16050, “Basic Electrical Materials and Methods” apply to this Section as if fully
repeated herein.
1.02 RELATED SPECIFICATIONS:
A. This section of the specifications shall be closely coordinated with:
1. Section 16490, “Automatic Transfer Switches”.
1.03 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS:
A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent
referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
20 OCTOBER 1997 DIESEL ENGINE-GENERATOR SET
Carlsbad City Library 16620- 1 96013
California Administrative Code (CAC) Title 19, Public Safety
California Administrative Code (CAC) Title 24, Building Standards
NFPA 20, Centrifugal Fire Pumps, 1990
NFPA 37, Stationary Conbustion Engines, 1990
NFPA 99, Health Care Facility, 1993
NFPA 101, Life Safety Code, 1994
NFPA 110, Standby Power Systems, 1993
County of San Diego Ordinance 6212, Noise Ordinance
Air Pollution Control District Rules and Regulations
IEEE Standard 126-1959/83, Speed Governing of Internal Combustion
Engine Generator Units.
NEMA MGl, Motors and Generators
UL-1008, Standard for Safety
UL-142, Steel Above Ground Tanks
NEMA lCS2-447, Standard for Automatic Transfer Switches.
NFPA 70E Electrical Safety Requirements for Employee Workplaces, 1988
EGSA 1008, Performance Standard for Engine Cranking Batteries for Use
With Engine Generator Sets, 1992
EGSA lOOC, Performance Standard: Battery Chargers for Engine Starting
and Control Batteries, 1992
EGSA 1 OOD, Performance Standard for Generator Overcurrent Protection
600 Volts and Below, 1992
EGSA lOOE, Performance Standards for Governors on Engine Generator
Sets, 1984
EGSA lOOF, Performance Standard for Engine Protection Systems, 1992
EGSA lOOG, Performance Standard for Generator Set Instrumentation,
Control and Auxiliary Equipment, 1980
22. EGSA 1 OOR, Performance Standard for Voltage Regulators Used on Electric
Generators, 1992
1.04 DESCRIPTION:
A. Provide a diesel electric generating unit with accessories, auxiliary equipment, and
associated work as specified and indicated on drawings. The engine-generator set
and accessories shall comply with the requirements of NFPA-110 and NFPA-37.
1.05 SITE CONDITIONS:
A. Location: Carlsbad, California.
B. Elevation: 500 feet above sea level.
C. Ambient temperature range: 20 degrees F to 120 degrees F.
D.
E.
Air quality: Moist and corrosive.
Security: subject to vandalism.
F. Seismic zone: 4, as defined by ICBO UBC.
1.06 SUBMITTALS:
A. Submittal shall be in accordance with Section 16011, “General Requirements,
Electrical” and as specified herein. Submittal shall be provided in sufficient detail to
demonstrate compliance with these specifications. As a minimum, the submittal
shall be bound, provided with an index to cross-reference the submittal item and
page location, marked to indicate the specific item to be provided, and include the
items listed below.
1. Bill of Material, covering all equipment and services to be provided.
2. Qualifications of the engine-generator manufacturer and of the authorired
distributor. Provide proof of ISO- certification of the manufacturer.
Certify 24-Hour emergency service capability of the authorized distributor.
3. Manufacturers published rating sheet. NFPA-110 prototype test verification.
Altitude and temperature derating procedures. Frequency and voltage
regulation. Cooling system capability. Full rated load pickup capability.
4. Installation requirements: radiator airflow and back-pressure capacity;
combustion air requirement; fuel flow circulation rate and fuel consumption;
heat rejection; exhaust flow and temperature; battery size requirements.
Floor layout dimensional data with provision for cable entry and termination.
5. Engine performance data. Configuration, cubic inch displacement, rated
RPM, type of aspiration, voltage of electrical system, oil and coolant
capacities.
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
DIESEL ENGINE-GENERATOR SET
16620-Z 96013
6. Exhaust emission data provided on the current application form for Permit to
Construct/Permit to Operate. Exhaust and crankcase emission control
equipment devices.
7.
8.
Battery set and battery charger.
Generator performance data. Motor and load starting capability verification.
Temperature rise and insulation classification. Short circuit sustaining
capability. Over-voltage safety shutdown. Decrement curve for specific
voltage specified.
9. Output circuit breaker size, manufacturer, model, and trip cuwe for IO-
second short-circuit fault clearing capability.
10. Control panel features and performance. Meters and gauges. Safety alarm
and shutdown devices. Cranking control. Indicator lamps and horn. Control
switches. Rodent protection.
11.
12.
13.
Exhaust silencer attenuation rating.
Jacket water heater system.
Fuel storage system. Compliance with UL. Secondary containment. Alarm
and indicator devices. Dimensional data. Fuel capacity and hours of
operation possible. Seismic restraint devices for separate fuel tank
configurations.
14.
15.
16.
17.
Remote annunciator panel. Dimensional data. Wiring requirements.
Seismic restraint devices. Agency pre-qualification. Dimensional data.
Weather enclosure details when specified. Exhaust system mounting when
applicable. Overall dimensions. Sound attenuation data when specified.
Testing procedure to be followed.
18. Warranty certificate and administration authorization.
B. Furnish operating experience certificates, and supporting data, certifying that not less
than two (2) generator sets of the identical model, number of cylinders and cylinder
size, identical rotative speed, and identical or higher BMEP, and of the same basic
configuration as the generator set to be furnished, shall have been in successful
operation without a failure to start and assume load during an emergency for not less
than a Z-year period. Certificate(s) shall include:
1. A list of at least two (2) engine installations in Southern California that are
installed in an environment similar to that listed in paragraph 1.05 SITE
CONDITIONS, and that have operated successfully for at least two (2) years.
2. Owner and location of each such installation. Provide a contact name and
telephone number for reference purposes.
20 OCTOBER 1997 DIESEL ENGINE-GENERATOR SET
Carlsbad City Library 16620-3 96013
3. Date of initial operation of each installation.
4. Number of hours of operation since installed.
5. Horsepower rating of engine, KW rating of generator set, and rotative speed
of each unit.
6. Brake mean effective pressure rating of each engine.
7. Design characteristics of each engine, such as bore and stroke, number of
cylinders, and configuration (in-line or Vee).
C. Shop Drawings and Calculations:
1. Certified outline, general arrangement (setting plan), and anchor bolt details.
Drawings shall show the total weight and center of gravity of the assembled
equipment on the mounting skid.
2. General arrangement drawings showing location of all auxiliary equipment in
relation to the diesel engine generating unit.
3. Piping schematics for fuel oil, lubrication oil, jacket water and cooling water
integral with diesel engine.
4. Exhaust back-pressure calculations, for non-factory installed piping, to
demonstrate compliance with engine manufacturers limitations.
5. Battery sizes and cranking time calculations
6. Seismic restraint calculations, signed by a structural engineer registered in
the State of California, based upon the equipment and restraint devices
submitted for use. Provide calculations for separately mounted above-ground
fuel tanks when specified.
7. Drawings for the interconnection with a transfer switch.
8. Electrical elements, schematics and wiring diagrams, including details of the
safety shutdown systems and main generator circuit breaker trip system, for
all major components.
D. Certified Test Reports (Submit for Review & Approval):
1. Certification of NFPA-110 Prototype testing.
2. Manufacturer’s Factory Testing
3. On-Site Testing
E. San Diego Air Pollution Control District (APCD) Approval
1. The Contractor shall provide and process all permits required for APCD
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
DIESEL ENGINE-GENERATOR SET
16620-4 96013
approval including, but not limited to, the following:
a. Permit to Construct (new installation)
b. Permit to Operate (new installation)
2. All costs for permit processing and the costs for permits shall be included as
part of the base bid.
3. All equipment and accessories required to obtain APCD approval shall be
provided as part of the base bid.
4. A condition of APCD approval is the witness of load testing. The Contractor
shall coordinate with the APCD for an inspector to be present for the load
test.
F. Manuals: Provide operation and maintenance manuals for equipment per General
Requirements, Electrical specification, section. Identification symbols for all replace-
able parts and assemblies shall be included. Information in manuals shall be
comprehensive and specific.
G. The approval of equipment specified in this section shall be contingent upon the
submittal and approval of the equipment layout drawings required by Section 1601 I,
“General Requirements, Electrical”.
1.07 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS: Comply with ANSI 815.1 and with NFPA 70E.
1.08 COMMERCIAL PRODUCT:
A. The generator set shall, as a minimum be in accordance with the requirements of this
specification and shall be the manufacturer’s commercial product with any added
features needed to comply with the requirements. Additional or better features which
are not specifically prohibited by this specification, but which are a part of the
manufacturer’s commercial product shall be included in the generator set being
furnished. Commercial product is a product which has been or will be sold on the
commercial market through advertisements or manufacturer’s catalogs, or brochures,
and represents the latest production model.
B. The manufacturer of the “Basic Diesel” engine generator set shall also be the
manufacturer of all major components. Engine generator set shall be the product of
a manufacturer whose quality control program complies with IS0 standards and that
is certified to ISO-9001.
C. The basic diesel engine-generator set shall be the standard manufactured product
of Caterpillar, Kohler, Detroit Diesel, or equal with the features or options as indicated
herein.
1.09 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT:
A. All equipment shall be new, of current domestic production of a national firm which
manufacturers the engine-generator set as a matched unit, and the manufacturer
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
DIESEL ENGINE-GENERATOR SET
16620-5 96013
together with its authorized representative shall have full responsibility for the
performance of the generator set and its accessories.
B. Supplier shall maintain a parts and service facility within San Diego County and offer
24-hour emergency service.
1.10 WARRANTY:
A. Warranty shall comply with the provisions of Section 1601 I, *‘General Requirements,
Electrical”.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 DIESEL ENGINE-GENERATOR SET: The generator set shall consist of a diesel engine
connected to an alternating current generator with brushless excitation system mounted on
a steel subbase and provided with all necessary accessories, auxiliaries, and control
equipment resulting in a complete self-contained unit capable of operation. Set shall be ar-
ranged for automatic unattended starting. The generator set must be capable of providing
full rated power within 10 seconds after failure of normal power and accepting rated power
in a single step block load in accordance with NFPA-110 paragraph 3-5.3.1.
A. Equipment Rating and Capability: The diesel engine-generating set shall have a net
standby rating of 230KW (min) at 0.8 power factor. Gross KW rating of the diesel
generating set shall not be more than the figure obtained by multiplying the delivered
shaft horsepower rating of the engine by 0.746 and by the overall efficiency of the
generator at the corresponding load. Overall efficiency of the generator shall allow
for power required to operate the exciter, including power consumed in losses and
in windage and friction for generator and rotating exciter. Ratings shall be verified
by published specification sheets of the nationally recognized manufacturer.
B. Critical Speeds: The complete Diesel engine-generating set shall be free of critical
speeds of either a major or minor order that will endanger satisfactory operation of
the set. Satisfactory operation will be considered endangered if torsional vibration
stresses exceed 5,000 psi within 10 percent above or below rated engine speed.
C. Rotating or reciprocating parts, or other parts that may present a hazard to operating
personnel shall be isolated or shielded to minimize danger. Design characteristics
shall limit operating temperature at critical points of maximum wear at full-load
operating conditions.
D. Engine: The engine shall be 2 or 4-cycle, direct connected to the generator by a
semi-flexible coupling, and both shall be mounted on a common sub-base. The
engine shall have sufficient power at the site conditions listed in paragraph 1.05 SITE
CONDITIONS to produce the specified rating when operating at generator synchro-
nous speed with all accessories required for normal operation including exhaust, fuel,
cooling, and battery charging systems. Engine shall be capable of burning diesel
fuel oil conforming to Fed. Spec. W-800 (Grade DF-2) and with a sulfur content not
higher than 0.05 percent.
1. Maximum engine speed, rpm: 1,800
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
DIESEL ENGINE-GENERATOR SET
16620-6 96013
2. Maximum piston speed, rpm: 1,500
,-
3. Offer engine-generator system which provides the specified rating within the
conditions specified in paragraph entitled “SITE CONDITIONS”.
4. General Construction: The engine shall be constructed adequately to
withstand sudden changes from no load to rated load, and to preserve align-
ment of integral components under all conditions of operation. The engine
shall be neat in appearance and shall permit easy access various parts for
maintenance purposes. The crankshaft shall incorporate drilled passages for
pressure lubrication of bearings, and the journals shall be hardened or
chromium plated to provide a hard shock-resistant surface with ductile core.
Crankshaft and connecting rod bearings shall be replaceable sleeve type.
Cylinders shall be provided with replaceable liners. The piston rings shall be
constructed of a heat-resisting alloy steel or chromium plated cast iron.
Camshafts shall be gear or chain driven, and shall have wear resistant cams
and journals. Timing marks shall be clearly indicated on the crankshaft and
gears. Valves shall operate in removable stem guides and seat inserts. The
fly-wheel shall be balanced, and shall be capable of being rotated 50 percent
above the maximum rated engine rotative speed without danger of breaking
or exploding. Flywheel housing shall be provided with a drain hole at the
lowest point. Means for manually turning the crankshaft shall ,be provided.
5. Assembly: Completely factory assemble each engine. Mount turbocharger,
intercooler, (if provided), and all piping integral with the engine, on the
engine.
6. Frequency Regulation: The engine governor shall maintain frequency within
a +/-0.5 percent band under steady state conditions and isochronous from
no-load to full-load. Regulation shall be as defined by IEEE Std 126-1959/83.
Governor performance shall comply with EGSA IOOE.
7. Safety Shutdown Controls and Alarms: Engine protective devices shall meet
the performance requirements of EGSA IOOF and shall include the following:
a.
b.
i:
;*
::
i.
Overcrank - lockout
Low oil pressure - preliminary alarm
Low oil pressure - shutdown
High water temperature - preliminary alarm
High water temperature - shutdown
Low water temperature - alarm
Low water level - shutdown
Overspeed - shutdown
Low fuel level - alarm
8. Engine Fuel System: The engine shall be provided with all necessary
equipment including piping, fittings, valves, fuel pumps, filters (throw-away-
type), strainers, day tank, and appurtenances. A mechanical fuel injection
system shall be employed. Injection pumps and injection valves shall be of
a type not requiring adjustment in service and shall be capable of quick
replacement in a few minutes by ordinary mechanics without special diesel
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
DIESEL ENGINE-GENERATOR SET
16620-7 96013
experience, A pump for priming the fuel system shall be provided to facilitate
easy starting. Internal parts forming the high-pressure portion of the fuel
system shall have wear-resistant surfaces, suitable for low sulfur fuel, where
relative movement between surfaces exists. An integral fuel pump shall be
provided to pump fuel from the day tank. Flexible lines shall be rated for duty
at 300 degrees F. and 100 psi. Fuel system shall comply with the require-
ments of NFPA-37 and NFPA-1 10 paragraph 5-9.
9. Fuel Storage System:
a. Provide a sub-base mounted fuel storage tank capable of supporting
the generator set at rated load for 10 hours. Overall dimensions of
the tank shall not exceed those of the generator set. Tank shall not
extend within 12 inches of the generator end to provide access for
electrical conduit from below, Mounting feet shall provide 1 inch
clearance between bottom of tank and base foundation. Tank shall
be built and labeled in accordance with UL-142. Tank features shall
include:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
2 inch filler with 6 inch stub and locking cap.
Engine supply and return openings and draw tubes.
Vent per UL-142 for both primary and secondary containment.
Tank leak port.
Fuel level indicator gauge.
Low fuel level alarm switch, set at 4 remaining hours.
Secondary containment, totally closed type, by double wall
construction. Provide alarm contact for “liquid in containment
basin.” Wire contact to alarm light in the generator control
panel.
10. Engine Lubricating Oil System: Provide with a full pressure lubricating
system arranged to distribute oil to all moving parts of the engine and to cool
the pistons. System shall include an engine-driven pressure indicator, crank-
case ventilator, and the necessary piping and fittings. The pump shall have
ample capacity to circulate the lubricating oil required for engine lubrication
and to cool the pistons.
All necessary stop, check, pressure relief, and pressure control valves shall
be provided.
a. Lubricating Oil Filters: Shall be the full-flow type (throw-away-type)
and shall be capable of filtering the full rate of oil flow of the oil pump
at maximum engine speed. Means shall be provided to ensure
delivery of lubricating oil to vital wearing surfaces regardless of the
condition of the filter. Additionally, the filter must provide a means of
automatically bypassing filter if it should become flow-restricting.
b. Lubricating Oil Coolers: Provide to maintain the lubricating oil within
the temperature limits recommended by the manufacturer. Oil cooler
shall utilize the engine jacket cooling water from the radiator as the
cooling medium. Temperature rise of the jacket water across the
20 OCTOBER 1997 DIESEL ENGINE-GENERATOR SET
Carlsbad City Library 16620-8 96013
lubricating oil cooler shall be limited so that the temperature of the
water leaving the lubricating oil cooler will be not higher than the
optimum temperature as recommended by the engine manufacturer
for jacket water to the engine. Cooler shall be either the shell and
tube single or multipass design, or shall be built in as an integral part
of the engine cooling radiator. The core shall be constructed of
copper based alloys. The cooler shall be designed for jacket water
to pass through the tubes. The temperature of the oil to the engine
shall be maintained at a reasonably constant value. Thermostats
used in the oil cooler shall be of the non-adjustable type and factory
set at the temperature as recommended by the manufacturer. Where
temperature of the oil in the cooler is regulated by controlling the
jacket water temperature, the system design shall assure proper oil
temperature under operating conditions.
11. Engine Cooling System: The radiator fan shall direct the air flow from the
engine outward through the radiator, with horizontal air discharge. The fan
shall be driven directly from the engine crankshaft or through V-belt drive.
The radiator shall have sufficient capacity to dissipate not less than the total
British Thermal Units per hour rejected by the engine to the cooling system
at 100 percent rated load in 1209 ambient, and against a static restriction of
0.5-inches of water as may be imposed by louvers, ductwork, etc. Cooling
section shall have a tube and fin type core which shall consist of copper or
copper base alloy tubes with nonferrous fins. The radiator shall be protected
by a strong grille or metal bar guard on the exterior, and the fan shielded with
a metal canopy. Filler caps shall be designed for pressure relief prior to
removal. A thermostatic control valve shall be installed in the jacket water
system of the engine to maintain the water system temperature of the engine.
The thermostatic valve shall be the standard modulating type utilizing self-
contained thermostats. The valve shall be capable of passing the water flow
as determined by the manufacturer without excessive pressure drop across
the valve. The valve shall be provided with one or more interchangeable
thermostatic elements. The elements shall be non-adjustable type and the
operating temperature shall be set at the temperature recommended by the
engine manufacturer. The valve shall be designed so that in event of the
thermostatic element failure, water will be able to flow through the engine.
Engine shall be delivered with adequate anti-freeze for protection. Provide
a low water level shutdown device. Cooling system shall meet the
performance requirements of NFPA-110 paragraph 5-8.1.
12. A jacket water heating system shall be provided to ensure starting. The
heater shall be thermostatically controlled at the temperature recommended
by the engine manufacturer. Power leads shall be brought to a junction box
which shall provide fusing and a disconnect safety switch for the heater. The
junction box shall be mounted on the engine base. Heater shall be rated at
1875 watts and operate from 120 volt single phase input. Heater shall be
mounted on the generator base rails and provided with flexible hoses to the
engine. Flexible hoses shall be rated at 300 degrees F. and 100 psi.
Provision shall be made for isolation of the jacket water heater with 3/4 inch
NPT ball-valves installed at the engine side of the flexible hoses.
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
DIESEL ENGINE-GENERATOR SET
16620-g 96013
13. Turbocharger: The turbocharger shall be a combination centrifugal blower
driven by an exhaust gas turbine, with the air blower directly connected to the
intake air manifold. Systems that require cooling of the intake air below
ambient air temperature ahead of the turbocharger or scavenger air blower
will not be acceptable. They may be lubricated from the engine pressure
lubrication system or as recommended by the manufacturer. All necessary
supports and connections shall be provided.
14. Intercooler: Tubular heat exchangers will be accepted only if available jacket
water can be used as the cooling medium. Supplementary water cooling
equipment is not acceptable. When intercooling is included, provide and
install on the engine all necessary intercooling equipment, including valves,
controls, and integral piping.
15. Engine Exhaust System: A critical degree silencer shall be provided and
installed above the generator set as shown on the drawings. Supplier shall
furnish back pressure calculations for the installation verifying that engine
limitation is not exceeded. Silencer shall be arranged for horizontal mounting
with bottom inlet and end outlet. Provide a stainless steel bellows type
flexible exhaust connector at the engine exhaust outlet. A “critical degree”
silencer is considered to be one capable of attenuating engine exhaust noise
component to 85 dBA at 10 feet in a free-field environment. Silencer and
exhaust piping shall be coated with a high temperature heat resistant
aluminum paint (1000 degrees F.). Provide the following exhaust system
accessories:
a. Galvanized rain cap with stainless steel hinge.
b. Roof penetration thimble rated for the construction shown on the
drawings.
16. Engine Air Induction System: The air induction system shall be equipped with
heavy duty dry type air cleaners of adequate capacity to effectively remove
the dirt and abrasives from the combustion air to the engine. When the
engine air intake noise level is above the audible mechanical noise level the
engine, a combination filter-silencer or a separate silencer shall be provided.
17. Cranking System: Starting shall be by means of a solenoid operated positive
engagement gear driven electric starter for operation on 12 or 24 volt D.C.
Note the cycle-crank requirement specified with the generator control panel.
Provide a primary and a secondary means of cranking termination in
accordance with NFPA-110 paragraph 3-5.4.2. Starting system components
shall comply with NEMA ICS 1 and NEMA ICS 2.
a. The electric cranking system shall utilize a cranking motor of the
heavy duty type with adequate capacity to crank the engine wntinu-
ously to start the engine in the ambient site temperatures shown in
paragraph entitled SITE CONDITIONS. The drive mechanism for
engaging the starting motor with the engine flywheel shall be de-
signed to inherently engage and release without binding. When the
engine starts, a “stop cranking” switch which is engine speed actuat-
.20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
DIESEL ENGINE-GENERATOR SET
16620-10 96013
20 OCTOBER 1997 DIESEL ENGINE-GENERATOR SET
Carlsbad City Library 16620-l 1 96013
ed shall cause disengagement of the starting gearing and the shut-
down of the starting motor. Starting shall be automatic.
b. A lead acid battery set shall be provided and installed on the
generator base with seismic restraints. System voltage shall match
that of the starter. Cold-cranking amperage capacity shall conform
with the requirements of SAE Standard J-537 for 0 degrees F.
Performance of the battery system shall comply with EGSA 1008.
Provide calculations to demonstrate that capacity of battery system
is adequate to provide five (5) cranking cycles in the minimum
ambient site temperature listed in paragraph entitled SITE
CONDITIONS.
C. The engine shall be provided with an engine driven charging
alternator rated at 65 amperes minimum at the rated battery system
voltage.
d. An automatic floaffequalize type battery charger shall be provided and
installed with vibration isolators on the generator set. Connections to
the battery shall be solid wired (clip-on type clamps not acceptable).
Input voltage shall be 120 volt single phase. Charger shall be UL list-
ed. Output capacity shall be a minimum of 10 amps. Battery charger
shall meet the performance requirements of EGSA lOOC, and shall
include the characteristics required by NFPA-110 paragraph 3-5.4.6.
DC voltage regulation shall be within +/-1 percent from no-load to full-
load and over an AC input line voltage variation of +/-lo percent.
Features shall include:
1. Automatic “float-to-equalize” operation, with individual
potentiometer adjustments.
2. “Power On” lamp to indicate when charger is operating.
3. DC voltmeter and DC ammeter, 5 percent full scale accuracy.
4. Reverse polarity protection.
5. AC input and DC output fuse protection.
6. Automatic current limiting protection.
7. Battery charger failure alarm contacts, set to close if AC
power is lost to charger.
8. Low and high battery voltage alarm contacts, set to close if
battery voltage drops below 90 percent or rises above 110
percent of rated.
9. NEMA 1 enclosure arranged for convection cooling.
18. Engine crankcase fumes shall be filtered to comply with AQMD requirements.
Two (2)~cycle engines shall also filter the air box drain lines. Filter device
shall consist of a replaceable filter element and a removable reservoir for
collected fluids. Filter shall be sized for the allowable crankcase
backpressure established by the engine manufacturer.
E. Generator(s) and Excitation Systems:
1. Generators: The generator for the unit shall be 4801277 volt, three-phase,
four wire, 60-hertz, 0.80 power-factor alternating-current type with revolving
field. The speed of the generator shall be that of the engine. The generator
shall conform to ANSI C50.10, ANSI C50.12, and to NEMA MG-1. The
generator shall have random coils and Class H insulation. The stator winding
shall be arranged for “wye” connection with both line and neutral leads of
each of the three-phase windings brought out of the bottom of the generator
frame, and the neutral grounded. The generator and flywheel shall have
sufficient flweel effect to meet the requirements of regulation and operation
as specified. The rotor shall have continuous or interconnected amortisseur
windings. The generator for rotor shall be mounted on an extended shaft
which shall be coupled rigidly to the engine crankshaft. Impellers shall be
mounted on the rotor for cooling the generator. The rotor shall be capable
of safe operation at a speed 25 percent in excess of its rated synchronous
speed. The generator armature, field, and ground leads shall have clamp or
crimp-type lugs or connectors for electrical connections. Terminal markings
shall conform to NEMA MG-1.
a. On application of any load up to 100 percent of the rated load, the
instantaneous voltage dip shall not exceed 20 percent and shall
recover to f 2 percent rated voltage within one-second. The
generator shall be capable of sustaining at least 300% of rated
current for at least W-seconds under a 3-phase symmetrical short by
inherent design or by the addition of an optional current boost system.
b. Two (2) resettable, adjustable trip line current sensing circuit breakers
with inverse time versus current response shall be furnished and shall
not automatically reset preventing restoration of voltage if
maintenance is being performed. This breaker shall protect the
generator from damage due to its own high current capability and
shall not trip within the lO-seconds specified above to allow selective
tripping of down-stream fuses or circuit breakers under a fault wndi-
tion. Circuit breaker shall be installed in the generator terminal box
and be easily operable when the operator is at the control panel. Size
circuit breakers as shown on drawings.
C. Provide generator over-voltage protection for sensitive loads that will
shut the unit down when voltage exceeds 115 percent of rated for
longer than l-second.
2. Excitation and Voltage Regulation System: The excitation system shall be
the integral brushless-type consisting of a rotating a.c. exciter and rectifier
diode assembly together with a static type voltage regulating system and
20 OCTOBER 1997 DIESEL ENGINE-GENERATOR SET
Carlsbad City Library 16620-12 96013
/--
including surge protection and the required accessories. The system shall
serve as an individual excitation and regulation system for the generator
specified herein and there is no requirement for parallel operation with other
exciters. The excitation system shall have a continuous current rating of not
less than the generator excitation current required when the generator
operates at 105 percent rated voltage under the condition of continuous
rating requiring maximum field current. The voltage rating of the system shall
be as required to match the generator field requirements. The excitation
system response ratio shall be not less than 0.5 and the ceiling voltage shall
be not less than 120 percent of rated voltage.
a. Exciter: The exciter shall be a rotating a.c. generator having a
rotating armature on the rotor spider and a stationary field on the
stator frame. The exciter insulation shall be Class H and the
temperature rise shall be limited to NEMA Standard MG-1-22.40 and
22.85.
b. Rectifiers shall be full-wave silicon diode type. The rectifiers shall be
mounted on the rotating part of the exciter to convert a.c. exciter
output to d.c. for the main generator excitation. Connections shall be
provided between the exciter, rectifiers, and generator field without
use of brushes or slip rings.
C. Voltage Regulator: The voltage regulator shall be a completely solid
state type for control of generator voltage by control of the exciter
field. The regulator shall be suitable for mounting on the generation
adjacent to the exciter. The regulator shall control the generator
exciter field as required to maintain a constant and stable generator
output voltage within +/-l/Z of one percent of nominal for all steady
state loads from no load to full load including a five percent variation
in frequency and the effects of field heating. The regulator shall be
designed for single-phase voltage sensing. Electromagnetic
interference suppression shall be an integral part of the regulator.
Thermal protection for power semi-conductors, inherent over-voltage
protection and fuse protection shall be provided internally in a regula-
tor. No electrolytic capacitors, vacuum tubes, or electromechanical
relays shall be used in the voltage regulator. A voltage adjusting
rheostat shall be mounted on the front of the generator switchgear.
Voltage regulator shall meet the performance standards of EGSA
100R.
3. Engine-Generator Instruments and Controls: NEMA ICS 1, 2, 3, 4, and 6 as
applicable.
a. Engine Instruments: Include the following as minimum components:
1) Lubricating Oil Pressure Gauge: Electronic indicating dial
type. Gauge shall be accurate to within 2 percent of full scale
reading. Gauge subject to rapid pressure surges shall be
properly suppressed.
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
DIESEL ENGINE-GENERATOR SET
16620-13 96013
20 OCTOBER 1997 DIESEL ENGINE-GENERATOR SET
Carlsbad City Library 16620-14
2) Coolant Temperature Indicators: Electronic indicating dial
type. Gauge shall be accurate to within 2 percent of full scale
reading.
3) Running Time Meter: Totalize engine running time to 9999.9
hours total.
br Generator controls and instruments, NEMA ICS 1, 2, 3, and 4 shall
include the following as minimum components. Instruments shall
comply with ANSI C39.1 and shall be installed in a NEMA 3R and
rodent-proof enclosure.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
‘3)
7)
8)
Voltmeter and Ammeter: Semi-flush mounted direct
indicating type, not less than 3-l/Z-inch nominal round or
square, 120’ arc, with accuracy of two (2) percent of full
scale.
Frequency Meter: Dial type, 3-l/Z-inch, 0.5 percent accuracy.
Control Switches: Voltage and ampere ratings suitable for the
intended use. Contacts shall be rated in accordance with
NEMA Standards ICS 2-125 A600.
Generator Output Circuit Breaker: Shall comply with Fed.
Spec. W-C-375. Molded case type, trip-free, and shall be
mounted to allow operation from outside the control panel.
Minimum circuit breaker frame size shall be 125 percent of
generator full load current and an adjustable trip shall be
provided. Lugs shall be provided for electrical connections.
Voltage adjustment rheostat.
Panel lights and control switch.
General Alarm Panel.
The following alarms shall be wired and included as part of
the generator system at the generator alarm panel. The
generator alarm panel shall have an alarm contact for remote
readout of a common alam for any one of the alarms indicat-
ed. The remote alarm readout shall be suitable for interface
with a remote generator annunciator panel.
a)
b)
c>
d)
e)
9
Generator run (red)
High water temperature (red)
Low oil pressure (red)
Overspeed (red)
Low fuel (red)
Overcrank of engine (red)
Low battery voltage (red)
High battery voltage (red)
96013
.-
0 j) k) 1) ml n) 0)
P)
Battery charger fail (red)
Low water level (red)
Anticipatory low oil pressure (yellow)
Anticipatory high water temperature (yellow)
Low water temperature (yellow)
Emergency stop (red)
“Not in Auto” (flashing red)
System ready (green)
9) Controls
a) Lamp test switch
W Voltage adjusting rheostat, + or - 5 percent range
cl Panel lamps (2)
10) Alarm horn, with silence switch, to meet the requirements of NFPA
110. Note: Silencing this horn after one (1) fault, i.e.. low fuel, shall
not prevent it from sounding again should a different fault condition
occur.
11) A remote annunciator panel shall be provided to alarm the above
functions. The panel shall be installed in a location as shown on
drawings and shall be flush mounted.
F. Base Assembly and Enclosure: NEMA ICS 6 , Type 3R.
1. A weather protective metal enclosure with filtered louvers shall be furnished
for the engine generator set. Enclosures shall be finished inside and outside
with rust preventive coatings to withstand a salt-air atmosphere.
2. Engine-Generator: Shall be mounted on a fabricated steel skid base suitable
for supporting, transporting, and skidding the engine generator set without
damage to equipment or alignment.
3. The generator set shall be provided with spring isolators for installation
between the base and the concrete floor. Isolators shall be pre-approved by
California Offices of State Architect (OSA) and Statewide Health Planning
and Development (OSHPD) to satisfy Title 24 of the California Administrative
Code. The spring isolators shall be anchored directly to the concrete
foundation by means of approved anchor bolts. A minimum of four (4)
anchors for each isolator shall be provided by the generator set supplier.
G. Treatment and Painting:
A. All parts (including the engine) subject to high temperature shall be treated
and painted in accordance with manufacturer’s standard. The generator and
all associated electrical equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned and treated
prior to painting. Color shall be manufacturer’s standard.
H. Provide calculations signed by a Structural Engineer registered in the State of
California verifying compliance with California Administrative Code Title 24 for Zone
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
DIESEL ENGINE-GENERATOR SET
16620-15 96013
4. These calculations shall be a part of the submittal data provided.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION:
A. Installatiolrshall.conform to the requirements of the NFPA 70. Muffler and exhaust
pipe installation and connection shall be made under the Electrical sections of this
contract. All electrical connections shall be made using oil tight flexible conduits.
Install diesel generating unit as indicated. Provide vibration isolators to isolate
vibrations from the diesel generating unit to the foundation.
3.02 TESTING:
A. Design prototype test: Components of the emergency system to be supplied, such
as the engine and generator, shall not be subjected to prototype test since the tests
are potentially damaging. Rather, similar design prototypes and reliability pre-produc-
tion models, which will not be sold, shall be used for these tests. Upon request, the
following certified test records shall be made available:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
il.
Maximum power (kW)
Maximum starting kVA at 30 percent instantaneous voltage dip.
Generator temperature rise by embedded thermocouple and by
resistance method per NEMA MG-1-22.40 and 16.40.
Governor speed regulation under steady-state and transient
conditions.
Voltage regulation under steady-state and transient conditions.
Fuel consumption at not-load, l/4, l/2, 314, and full-load.
Harmonic analysis, voltage waveform deviation, and telephone
influence factor.
Three-phase line-to-line short circuit test.
Generator cooling air flow.
Torsional analysis testing to verify that the generator set is free of
harmful torsional stresses.
Endurance testing.
Tests #1,6,9,10, and 11, at a minimum, shall be performed with the complete
engine generator system with all accessories in place. Tests performed on
separate components will not be acceptable.
B. Factory Production Testing: Generator set shall be factory tested under
varying loads with guards and exhaust system in place. Upon request,
arrangements to witness this test will be made or a certified test record will
be sent prior to shipment. Provide seven (7) copies of the factory certified
test report for review and approval. Tests shall include:
1. Single-step full-load pickup.
2. Transient and steady-state governing.
3. Safety shutdown verification.
4. Transient and steady-state voltage regulation.
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
DIESEL ENGINE-GENERATOR SET
16620-16 96013
5. Rated power test.
6. Maximum power.
C. On-Site Testing: An installation check, start-up, and rated load test shall be
performed by the manufacturer’s local representative. The engineer, APCD,
regular operators, and the maintenance staff shall be notified of the time and
date of the site test. Coordinate test date with APCD inspection to allow
APCD observation of initial start-up and full-load test. The test shall include:
1. The initial startup of the engine-generator set shall be performed by
a factory trained representative of the engine generator set
manufacturer. He shall furnish and install the recommended engine
lubricants and fill the cooling system with a 50% solution of ethylene
glycol antifreeze in accordance with the engine manufacturer’s
recommendations. He shall be present during the load test specified,
and at the conclusion of the test, shall supply the Owner’s
Representative with the operation, maintenance, and parts manuals,
in compliance with NFPA-110, and as specified in GENERAL
CONDITIONS, ELECTRICAL SECTION, for all equipment. Under this
section of the specification, he shall instruct the Owner’s personnel
in the proper operating and maintenance procedures for all
components of the standby power system.
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
2. Accessories that normally function while the set is standing-by shall
be checked prior to cranking the engine. This shall include engine
heaters, battery charger, etc.
3. Start-up under test mode to check for exhaust leaks, path of exhaust
gases, cooling air flow, movement during starting and stopping,
vibration during running, normal and emergency line-to-line voltage
and phase rotation.
4. Automatic start-up by means of simulated power outage to test
remote automatic starting, transfer of load, and automatic shutdown,
Engine temperature, oil pressure, and frequency shall be monitored
throughout the test.
5. Load test the system, utilizing contractor furnished resistive load
bank, as follows:
it:
C.
l/2 hours at l/2 rated load
112 hours at 3/4 rated load
2 hours at full rated load
6. Measure and record the transient frequency and voltage dip, and
recovery time to steady state conditions, for the single step
application of rated load. Verify compliance with the governor and
voltage regulator performance specified in paragraph 2.01.0.6 and
2.01.E.2.C. Recording instrument to be of the light beam or direct
thermal array type (ink chart type not permitted).
DIESEL ENGINE-GENERATOR SET
16620-17 96013
20 OCTOBER 1997 DIESEL ENGINE-GENERATOR SET
Carlsbad City Library 16620-18
7. All fuel required for testing shall be provided by the contractor. At the
successful completion of on-site testing, the contractor shall fill the
generator set fuel tank.
8. Provide seven (7) certified copies of the site test report showing
compliance with specifications and approval of the installation for
warranty purposes.
l l l END OF SECTION l l l
96013
SECTION 16720
SECURITY ACCESS SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .Ol GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:
A. The provisions of Section 1601 I, “General Requirements, Electrical” and Section
16050, “Basic Electrical Materials and Methods” apply to this section as if fully
repeated herein.
1.02 SPECIAL CONDITIONS:
A. The security access system components and wiring shall be an Owner furnished -
vendor installed system. The security system manufacturer shall be Radionics, Inc.
(Model #8112-G2), and the system vendor shall be Ranch0 Santa Fe Security
Systems (942-0688). The Contractor shall provide an outlet box and conduit system
(3/4”C. minimum) between the security system panel in Room #109, and each
intrusion detector, security system key pad, and magnetic door switch. All conduit
shall be run concealed. The Contractor shall coordinate all work with the vendor prior
to rough-in.
1.03 SUBMITTALS:
A. Shop Drawings:
1. Provide the following items:
(a) A complete conduit and box system single line diagram drawing per
the manufacturer’s requirements and as indicated.
(W Scaled (l/8” = I’-,“) floor plans indicating the location of devices,
conduit runs, and types of devices.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 TRIM AND COVERPLATES: See Section 16140.
2.02 OUTLET BOXES: See Section 16130.
2.03 CONDUITS: See Section 16110.
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
SECURITY ACCESS SYSTEM
16720-I 96013
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION:
A. Security Access System:
1. Finish and install a complete conduit, box and ternfinal system for security
access services per the manufacturer’s requirements and as indicated.
2. See Section 16110, “Raceway and Fittings”.
l l l END OF SECTION * l l
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
SECURITY ACCESS SYSTEM
16720-2 96013
SECTION 16721
FIRE ALARM DETECTION SYSTEMS
PART I- GENERAL
1 .Ol GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:
A. The provisions of Section 16011, “General Requirements, Electrical” and Section
16050, “Basic Electrical Materials and Methods” apply to this section as if fully
repeated herein.
B. Scope: This section of the specification includes, but is not limited to:
1. All labor, tools, appliances, materials, and equipment required to furnish and
install the complete installation shown on the drawings for this section of the
work including that which is reasonably inferred.
1.02 SPECIAL CONDITIONS:
A. The fire alarm system vendor shall review the mechanical system design and
ductwork layout to determine the type of duct detector to be used for each
application. This review shall be done prior to the submittal, and the information
gathered shall be reflected in the submittal documents. The submittal shall also
indicate the number and location of detectors to be provided.
1.03 SCOPE AND RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. The work covered by this section of the specifications includes the furnishing of all
labor, equipment, materials, and performance of all operations associated with the
installation of the Fire Alarm System as shown on the drawings and as herein speci-
fied.
B. The requirements of the conditions of the Contract, Supplementary Conditions, and
General Requirements apply to the work specified in this section.
C. The complete installation shall conform to the applicable sections of NFPA-72, NFPA
71, Local Code Requirements and the National Electrical Code (NEC) with particular
attention to Article 760. The installation shall also conform to CCR Title 19 and 24,
and all equipment shall be State Fire Marshal approved.
D. The work covered by this section of the specifications shall be coordinated with the
related work as specified elsewhere under the project specifications.
1.04 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE:
A. Main sprinkler risers.
B. Main sprinkler water valve and P.I.V.
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
FIRE ALARM DETECTION SYSTEMS
16721-1 96013
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Each and all items of the Fire Alarm System shall be the latest standard product of
Simplex Time Recorder Co. or approved equal as manufactured by Pyrotronics,
Gamewell or Notifier under the appropriate category by Underwriters’ Laboratories,
Inc. (UL), and shall bear the “UL” label. All control equipment shall be listed under
UL category UOJZ as a single control unit. Partial listing shall NOT be acceptable.
B. All control equipment must have transient protection to comply with UL864
requirements.
C. Where Fire Alarm circuits leave the building, additional transient protection must be
provided for each circuit. Devices must be UL listed under standard #497B (Isolated
Loop Circuit Protectors). In addition to the UL-UOJZ requirement mentioned above,
the system controls shall be UL listed for Power Limited Applications and all circuits
must be marked in accordance with NEC article 760-23.
1.06 DESIGN CRITERIA:
A. Furnish and install a complete Fire Alarm System as described herein and as shown
on the plans; to be wired, connected, and left in first class operating condition.
Include sufficient control panel(s), annunciator(s), manual stations, automatic fire
detectors, smoke detectors, alamr indicating appliances, wiring, terminations,
electrical boxes, and all other necessary material for a complete operating system.
1. The fire alarm system shall allow for loading and editing special instructions
and operating sequences as required. The system shall be capable of on site
programming to accommodate system expansion and facilitate changes in
operation, All software operations shall be stored in a non-volatile program-
mable memory within the fire alarm control panel. Loss of primary and
secondary power shall not erase the instructions stored in memory.
2. Full flexibility for selective input/output control functions based on ANDing,
ORing, NOTing, timing, and special coded operations shall also be incorpo-
rated in the resident software programming of the system.
3. Resident software shall allow for full configuration of initiating circuits so that
additional hardware shall not be necessary to accommodate changes in, for
instance, sensing of normally open contact devices to sensing of normally
closed contact devices, or from sensing of normally open contact devices to
sensing a combination of current limited and non-current limited devices on
the same circuit and being able to differentiate between the two (2) or chang-
ing from a non-verification circuit to a verification circuit or vice-versa.
B. Resident software shall also allow for configuration of indicating appliance and
control circuits so that additional hardware shall not be necessary to accommodate
changes in, for instance changing a non-coded indicating appliance circuit to a coded
circuit, or from a slow march time (20 BPM) to a fast march time (120 BPM).
C. The system shall have the capability of recalling alarms and trouble conditions in
chronological order for the purpose of recreating an event history.
20 OCTOBER 1997 FIRE ALARM DETECTION SYSTEMS
Carlsbad City Library 16721-2 96013
.C 1.07 SERVICE ORGANIZATION QUALIFICATIONS:
A. Offer an annual maintenance contract including complete service and equipment
costs for maintenance of complete system.
B. Provide for twenty-four (24) hour emergency service.
C. The system contractor shall be located within a fifty (50) mile radius and have been
in business as a fire alarm vendor for a minimum of five (5) years.
1.08 SUBMITTALS:
A. The following information shall be submitted on equipment being supplied under this
project for review and approval in accordance with section 16011, “General
Requirement, Electrical”.
1. Catalog Cuts (As Applicable):
IF
ii:
F’ ::
I.
i
Control panel
Remote annunciator panels
Detector base
Photoelectric detector
Pull station
Duct detector (in-duct type)
Duct detector
Zone adapter modules
Audio/visual devices
Fire alarm system communicator
2. Shop drawings:
a. The entire system shall be submitted to and approved by the local
Fire Marshal.
(1) Wiring diagrams as follows:
(a) Point to point wiring diagrams showing wiring from
panel terminals to each device.
@I Scaled floor plans indicating the location of devices,
conduit runs, types, and number of conductors.
0 Riser diagram.
(2) State Fire Marshal listing sheets for all components and
devices.
(a) Include sheets showing appropriate interrelations of
components and devices.
20 OCTOBER 1997
Cartsbad City Library
(3) Provide battery power supply calculations, indicate point of
FIRE ALARM DETECTION SYSTEMS
16721-3 96013
(4) Provide detailed information on conductors to be used-
manufacturer, type, size, insulation, etc.
(5) Provide voltage drop calculations for longest conductor run
modified or added.
(6) Provide written sequence of system operation - include
operation of the system following actuation of any device.
(7)
(8)
(9)
Provide list of zones or addresses.
Provide information indicating extent of supervision of circuits.
Provide operation and maintenance manual and test proce-
dures for system.
(10) Approval by local Fire Marshal required prior to installation.
1.09 OPERATION:
power supply connection, means of disconnect, over-current
protection, etc., for any new or “added to” panel.
A. The system alarm operation subsequent to the alarm activation of any manual
station, automatic detection device, or sprinkler flow switch shall be as follows:
8. All audible alarm indicating appliances shall sound a Master Code until silenced by
the alarm silence switch at the control panel or at the remote annunciator. The
Master Code will consist of a temporal code.
1. All visible alarm indicating appliances shall flash continuously until the system
is reset.
2. The audible alarms shall be inhibited from being silenced for a period of 3
minute(s) after commencing operation.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Any subsequent zone alarm shall reactivate the alarm indicating appliances.
All doors normally held open by door control devices shall release.
A supervised signal to notify an approved central station shall be activated.
The mechanical controls shall activate (or shut down) the air handling
systems in accordance with NFPA 90.
D. The alarm shall be displayed on an eighty (80) character LCD display. The top line
of forty (40) characters shall be the point label and the second line shall be the
device type identifier. The system alarm LED shall flash on the control panel (and
any remote LCD annunciator) until the alarm has been acknowledged. Once
acknowledged, this same LED shall latch on. A subsequent alarm received from
another zone shall flash the system alarm LED on the control panel and remote
20 OCTOBER 1997 FIRE ALARM DETECTION SYSTEMS
Carlsbad City Library 16721-4 96013
,- annunciator. The LCD display shall show the new alarm information.
E. A pulsing alarm tone shall occur within the control panel and the remote annunciator
until the event has been acknowledged.
F. The alarm activation of any elevator lobby, equipment room or hoistway smoke
detector shall, in addition to the operations listed above, cause the elevator cabs to
be recalled according to the following sequence:
1. If the alarmed detector is on the second floor, the main level of egress, the
elevator cabs shall be recalled to the main level of egress.
2. If the alarmed detector is on the main egress level, the elevator cabs shall be
recalled to the second level.
G. The activation of any system smoke detector shall initiate an Alarm Verification
operation whereby the panel will reset the activated detector and wait for a second
alarm activation. If, within one (1) minute after resetting, a second alarm is reported
from the same or any other smoke detector, the system shall process the alarm as
described previously. If no second alarm occurs within one (1) minute the system
shall resume normal operation. The Alarm Verification shall operate only on smoke
detector alarms. Other activated initiating devices shall be processed immediately.
The alarm verification operation shall be selectable by zone.
1. The control panel shall have the capability to display the number of times
(tally) a zone has gone into a verification mode. Should this smoke veri-
fication tally reach a pm-programmed number, a trouble condition shall occur.
2. Alarm verification zones shall be able to be divided into eight (8) separate
groups whereby only verification zones from the same group will confirm the
first activation and cause the alarm sequence to occur.
H. The control panel shall have a dedicated supervisory service LED and a dedicated
supervisory service acknowledge switch.
1. The activation of any standpipe or sprinkler valve supervisory (tamper) switch
shall activate the system supervisory service audible signal and illuminate the
LED at the control panel and the remote annunciator. Differentiation between
valve tamper activation and opens and/or grounds on the initiation circuit
wiring shall be provided.
2. Pressing the Supervisory Service Acknowledge Key will silence the
supervisory audible signal while maintaining the Supervisory Service LED
“on” indicating the off-normal condition.
3. Restoring the valve to the normal position shall cause the Supervisory
Service LED to extinguish, indicating restoration to normal. Restoring the
valve to the normal position shall cause the supervisory service audible signal
to pulse indicating the restoration to normal position. The Supervisory
Service Acknowledge Key shall silence the audible signal.
20 OCTOBER 1997 FIRE ALARM DETECTION SYSTEMS
Carlsbad City Library 16721-5 96013
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
A manual evacuation (drill) switch shall be provided to operate the alarm indicating
appliances without causing other control circuits to be activated. However, should
a true alarm occur, all alarm functions would occur as described previously.
Activation of an auxiliary bypass switch shall override the selected automatic
functions.
The system shall have a single key that will allow the operator to display all alarms,
troubles, and supervisory service conditions including the time of each occurrence.
All doors normally held open by door control devices shall release upon AC power
failure.
The actuation of the “enable walk test” program at the control panel shall activate the
“Walk Test” mode of the system which shall cause the following to occur
1. The city circuit connection shall be bypassed.
2. Control relay functions shall be bypassed.
3. The control panel shall show a trouble condition.
4. The alarm activation of any initiation device shall cause the audible signals
to activate for two (2) seconds.
5.
6.
The panel shall automatically reset itself aftersignaling is complete.
Any momentary opening of an initiating or indicating appliance circuit wiring
shall cause the audible signals to sound for four (4) seconds indicating a
trouble condition.
7. The system shall have the capacity of eight (8) distinctive walk test groups.
Such that only a portion of the system need be disabled during testing.
The activation of a heat detector in the elevator shaft or equipment room shall initiate
general alarm and cause the elevator power to be removed by the shunt trip of the
feeder breaker which is specified and provided elsewhere.
1.10 SUPERVISION:
A. The system shall contain Class “B” (Style “4”) independently supervised signaling line
circuits. The capacity of circuits shall be as required with an additional 30% spare
capacity. The alarm activation of any initiating device shall not prevent the subse-
quent alarm operation of any other initiating device.
B. There shall be supervisory service initiation device circuits for connection of all
sprinkler valve supervisory (tamper). Device activation shall cause a supervisory
alarm at the control panel.
C. There shall be independently supervised and independently fused indicating
appliance circuits for alarm horn and flashing alarm lamps. The number of circuits
20 OCTOBER 1997 FIRE ALARM DETECTION SYSTEMS
Carlsbad City Library 16721-6 96013
0.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
shall be as required with an additional 30% spare capacity. Disarrangement
conditions of any circuit shall not affect the operation of other circuits.
Auxiliary manual controls shall be supervised so that an “off normal” position of any
switch shall cause an “off normal” system trouble.
Each independently supervised circuit shall include a discrete LCD readout to
indicate disarrangement conditions per circuit.
The incoming power to the system shall be supervised so that any power failure must
be audibly and visually indicated at the control panel and the remote annunciator.
A green “power on” LED shall be displayed continuously while incoming power is
present.
The system batteries shall be supervised so that a low battery condition or
disconnection of the battery shall be audibly and visually indicated at the control
panel and the remote annunciator.
The System Modules shall be electrically supervised for module placement. Should
a module become disconnected the system trouble indicator shall illuminate and the
audible trouble signal shall sound.
The system shall have provisions for disabling and enabling all circuits individually
for maintenance or testing purposes.
1 .l 1 POWER REQUIREMENTS:
A. The control panel shall receive 120 VAC power (as noted on the plans).
B. The system shall be provided with sufficient battery capacity to operate the entire
system upon loss of normal 120 VAC power in a normal supervisory mode for a
period of twenty-four (24) hours with five (5) minutes of alarm operation at the end
of this period. The system shall automatically transfer to the standby batteries upon
power failure. All battery charging and recharging operations shall be automatic.
C. All external circuits requiring system operating power shall be 24VDC and shall be
individually fused at the control panel.
1 .I2 WARRANTY:
A. Warranty shall comply with the provisions of Section 16011, “General Requirements,
Electrical”.
1.13 ADDITIONAL DEVICES:
A. The Contractor shall provide the following devices to be installed in locations
determined by the Owner’s Representative during construction, or if no location is
selected, turned over to the Owner at the conclusion of the project:
1. Five (5) pull stations
2. Ten (10) audio/visual devices
20 OCTOBER 1997 FIRE ALARM DETECTION SYSTEMS
Carlsbad City Library 16721-7 96013
3. Five (5) duct detectors ’
4. Five hundred (500) feet of 314” conduit (EMT)
5. Wiring per manufacturer’s requirements
B. Reconfiguration of wiring in areas selected for additional devices shall be included
as a base bid item at no additional cost to the Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL (SIMPLEX #4020), CSFML #7165-0026;160):
A. Control Panel construction shall be modular with solid state, microprocessor based
electronics. It shall display only those primary controls and displays essential to
operation during a fire alarm condition. Keyboards or keypads shall not be required
to operate the system during fire alarm conditions. A local audible device shall sound
during Alarm, Trouble or Supervisory conditions. This audible device shall sound
differently during each condition to distinguish one condition from another without
having to view the panel. This audible device shall also sound during each keypress
to provide an audible feedback to ensure that the key has been pressed properly.
B. The following primary controls shall be visible through a front access panel:
::
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Eighty (80) character liquid crystal display
Individual red system alarm LED
Individual yellow supervisory service LED
Individual yellow trouble LED
Green “power on” LED
Alarm Acknowledge key
Supervisory Acknowledge key
Trouble Acknowledge key
Alarm Silence key
System Reset key
C. The following secondary control switches and LED’s shall be available behind an
access door:
:*
3:
4.
5.
City disconnect/switch
Manual evacuation (drill)
Elevator bypass
Door holder release bypass
Future
D. The control panel shall provide the following:
1. Setting of time and date
2. LED testing
3. Alarm, trouble, and abnormal condition listing
4. Enabling and disabling of each monitor point separately
5. Activation and deactivation of each control point separately
6. Changing operator access levels
20 OCTOBER 1997 FIRE ALARM DETECTION SYSTEMS
Carlsbad City Library 16721-8 96013
,- 7. Walk Test enable
8. Running diagnostic functions
9. Displaying software revision level
10. Displaying historical logs
11. Displaying card status
12. Point Listing
E. For maintenance purposes the following lists shall be available from the point lists
menu.
1. All points list by address
2. Monitor point .list
3. Signal/speaker list
4. Auxiliary control list
5. Feedback point list
6. Pseudo point list
7. LED/switch status list
a. Scrolling through menu options or lists shall be accomplished in a
self-directing manner in which prompting messages shall direct the
User. These controls shall be located behind an access door.
1. Primary Keys, LED’s and LCD Display
a. The Control Panel shall have a two (2) line x forty (40) character liquid
crystal display which shall be backlit for enhanced readability. So as
to conserve battery standby power, it shall not be lit during an AC
power failure unless an alarm condition occurs or there is keypad
activity. The display shall support both upper and lower case letters.
Lowercase letters shall be used for softkey titles and prompting the
User. Uppercase letters shall be used for System Status Information.
A cursor shall be visible when entering information.
F. System Front Panel Operation and Capabilities:
1. Under normal condition the front panel shall display a “System is Normal”
message and the current time and date.
2. Should an abnormal condition be detected the appropriate LED (Alarm,
Supervisory or Trouble) shall flash. The panel audible signal shall pulse for
alarm conditions and sound steady for trouble and supervisory conditions.
3. The LCD shall display the following information relative to the abnormal
condition of a point in the system.
a.
b.
C. d.
Forty (40) character custom location label
Type of device (i.e. smoke, pull station, water-flow)
Point status (i.e. alarm, trouble)
For NFPA 72 requirements: Pressing the appropriate acknowledge
button shall globally acknowledge every point in the list.
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
FIRE ALARM DETECTION SYSTEMS
16721-9 96013
e. These acknowledged functions may be passcode protected if the
User has insufficient privilege to acknowledge such conditions. A
message shall indicate insufficient privilege but allow the User to view
the points without acknowledging them. Should the User have
sufficient privilege to acknowledge, a message will be displayed
informing the User that the condition has been acknowledged.
4. After all points have been acknowledged, the LED% shall glow steady and
the Sonalert will be silenced. The total number of alarms, supervisory and
trouble conditions shall be displayed along with a prompt to review each list
chronologically. The end of the list shall be indicated by an end of list
message “END of LIST”.
G. Alarm Silencing
1. Should the “Alarm Silence” button be pressed all alarm signals shall cease
operation.
2. Signals shall not be silenced during alarm silence inhibit mode.
H. System Reset
1. The SYSTEM RESET shall be used to return the system to its normal state
after an alarm condition has been remedied. The LCD display shall step the
User through the reset process with simple English Language messages.
Messages, “SYSTEM RESET IN PROGRESS”, will first be displayed followed
by the message , “SYSTEM RESET COMPLETED’, and finally, “SYSTEM IS
NORMAL”, should all alarm conditions be cleared.
2. If any initiating device remains in an alarm condition, system control relays
shall not reset. The Sonalert and the Alarm LED will be on. The display will
indicate the total number of alarms and troubles present in the system along
with a prompt to use the ACK keys to review the points. These points will not
require acknowledgment if they were previously acknowledged.
a. Should the Alarm Silence Inhibit function be active, the (SYSTEM
RESET) KEY PRESS WILL BE IGNORED. THE MESSAGE,
“SYSTEM RESET INHIBITED”, will be displayed for a short time to
indicate the action was not taken. As feedback to the operator, the
message, “SYSTEM RESET NO LONGER INHIBITED”, will be
displayed when the inhibit function times out.
I. Additional function keys shall be provided to access status data for the following
points:
1. Initiating device circuits
2. Indicating appliance circuits
3. Auxiliary relays
4. All other input/output points
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
FIRE ALARM DETECTION SYSTEMS
16721-10 96013
J. The following status data shall be available:
1. Primary State of point
2. Zone, PID and Card type information
3. Current priority of outputs
4. Disable/Enable status
5. Verification tallies of initiating devices
6. Automatic/Manual Control Status of output points
7. Acknowledge status
0. Relay Status
K. The system shall be capable of logging and storing 300 events in an alarm log and
300 events in a trouble log. These events shall be stored in a battery protected
random access memory. Each recorded event shall include the time and date of that
event’s occurrence.
1. The following Historical Alarm log events shall be stored:
a.
b.
z:
;*
Alarm
Alarm Acknowledgment
Alarm Silence
System Reset
Alarm Historical log cleared
The following Historical Trouble log events shall be stored:
1) Trouble conditions
2) Supervisory alarms
3) Trouble acknowledgment
4) Supervisory acknowledgment
5) Alarm Verification tallies
6) Walk Test results
7) Trouble Historical log cleared
L. Silent Walktest with History Logging
1. The system shall be capable of being tested by one (1) person. While in
testing mode the alarm activation of an initiating device circuit shall be silently
logged as an alarm condition in the historical data file. The panel shall
automatically reset itself after logging of the alarm.
2. The momentary disconnection of an initiating or indicating device circuit shall
be silently logged as a trouble condition in the historical data file. The panel
shall automatically reset itself after logging of the trouble condition.
3. Should the walktest feature be on for an inappropriate amount of time it shall
revert to the normal mode automatically.
4. The control panel shall be capable of supporting up to eight (8) separate
testing groups whereby one (1) group of points may be in a testing mode and . the other (non-testing) groups may be active and operate as programmed per
normal system operation. After testing is considered complete, testing data
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
FIRE ALARM DETECTION SYSTEMS
16721-11 96013
may be retrieved from the system in chronological order to ensure
device/circuit activation.
5. Should an alarm condition occur from an active point, not in walk test mode,
it shall perform operations described in paragraph 1.08.
M. LED Supervision
1. All slave module LED’s shall be supervised for burnout or disarrangement.
Should a problem occur the LCD shall display the module and LED location
numbers to facilitate location of that LED.
N. System Trouble Reminder
1. Should a trouble condition be present within the system and the audible
trouble signal silenced, the trouble signal shall resound at preprogrammed
time intervals to act as a reminder that the fire alarm system is not 100%
operational. Both the time interval and the trouble reminder signal shall be
programmable to suit the Owner’s application.
0. Access Levels
1. There shall be four (4) access levels with level four (4) being the highest
level. Level one (1) actions shall not require a passcode. Passcodes shall
consist of up to ten (10) digits. Changes to passcodes shall only be made by
authorized personnel.
2. In order to maintain security when entering a passcode the digits entered will
not be displayed but a cursor will move along filling the position with an ‘X
to indicate that the digit has been accepted. All key presses will be acknowl-
edged by a local audible sound.
3. When a correct passcode is entered, the message “Access Granted” shall
be displayed. The new access level shall be in effect until the operator
manually logs out or the keypad has been inactive for ten (10) minutes.
4. Should an invalid code be inputted, the operator shall be notified with the
message, “ERROR...INCORRECT PASSCODE”, and shall be allowed up to
three (3) chances to enter a valid code. After three (3) unsuccessful tries, the
message, “ACCESS DENIED”, shall be displayed. The level shall not be al-
tered, and the operator shall no longer be in the menu option.
5. Access to a level will only allow the operator to perform all actions within that
level plus all actions of lower levels, not higher levels.
6. The following keys/switches shall have access levels associated with them:
a.
b.
i:
Alarm Silence
System Reset
Set Time/Date
Manual Control
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
FIRE ALARM DETECTION SYSTEMS
16721-12 96013
F--
t ’
E:
I.
j.
On/Off/Auto Control
Disable/Enable
Clear Historical Alarm Log
Clear Historical Trouble Log
Walk Test
Change Alarm Verification
7. Acknowledge keys shall also require privileged access to acknowledge
points. If the operator presses an (ACK) key with insufficient access, an error
message will be displayed. The points will scroll with (ACK) key presses to
view the points on the list, but the points will not get acknowledged in the
database.
P. Equipment Enclosures
1. Provide cabinets of sufficient size to accommodate the aforementioned
equipment. Cabinet shall be equipped with locks and transparent door panel
providing freedom from tampering yet allowing full view of the various lights
and controls.
Q. RS-232-C Output
1. Fire Alann Control Panel shall be capable of operating remote CRT’s and/or
printers; output shall be ASCII from an EIA RS-232-C connection with an
adjustable baud rate.
2.02 REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR(S) (SIMPLEX 4602-9101, CSFML #7120-0026;156):
A. Where shown on the plans, provide and install an LED annunciator. The
annunciator(s) shall have a beige enamel finish and shall provide one (1) alarm lamp
per initiation device circuit. The annunciator shall communicate to the control panel
over one (1) twisted shielded pair of wires and operating power shall be 24VDC and
be fused at the control panel. Point-wired annunciators will not be considered as
equal.
2.03 MULTIPLE ADDRESSABLE PERIPHERAL NETWORK (MAPNET):
A. Communication with addressable devices.
1. The system shall provide communication with initiating and control devices
individually. All of these devices shall be individually annunciated at the
control panel. Annunciation shall include the following conditions for each
point:
a.
b.
;:
e.
Alarm
Trouble
Open
Short
Device missing/failed
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
FIRE ALARM DETECTION SYSTEMS
16721-13 96013
B. All addressable devices shall have the capability of being disabled or enabled
individually.
C. Up to 127 addressable devices may be multidropped from a single pair of wires.
Systems that require factory reprogramming to add or delete devices are
unacceptable.
D. Format -
1. The communication format must be a completely digital poll/response
protocol to allow t-tapping of the circuit wiring. A high degree of communi-
cation reliability must be obtained by using parity data, bit error checking
routines for address codes and check sum routines for the data transmission
portion of the protocol. Systems that do not utilize full digital transmission
protocol are not acceptable.
E. Identification of Addressable Devices
1. Each addressable device must be uniquely identified by an address code
entered on each device at the time of installation. The use of jumpers to set
address will not be acceptable due to the potential of vibration and poor
contact. Device identification schemes that do not use uniquely set
addresses but rely on electrical position along the communication channel
are unacceptable. These systems cannot accommodate t-tapping and the
addition of an addressable device between existing devices requires
reprogramming all existing electrically further devices. The system must
verify that the proper type device is in place and matches the desired
software configuration.
F. Wiring Type, Distances, Survivability and Configuration
1. Wiring types will be fire rated and approved by the equipment manufacturer.
The system shall allow a line distance of up to 2,500 feet to the furthest
addressable device on a Class B (Style 4) circuit. To minimize wire routing
and to facilitate future additions, t-tapping of the communications channel will
be supported.
G. Addressable Device Types
1. The system control panel, must be cepable of communicating with the types
of addressable devices specified below. Addressable devices will be located
as shown on the drawings.
2.04 ANALOG SENSOR BASES (SIMPLEX #4098-9781 CSFML #7300-0026:165):
A. All addressable smoke and heat sensors as specified below will be plugable into their
bases. The base shall contain electronics that communicate the detector status
(normal, alarm, trouble) to the control panel over two (2) wires. The same two (2)
wires shall also provide power to the base and detector. Different sensors (smoke
or heat) shall be interchangeable. Upon removal of the sensor, a trouble signal will
be transmitted to the control panel.
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
FIRE ALARM DETECTION SYSTEMS
16721-14 96013
.- 2.05 PHOTOELECTRIC SMOKE SENSOR (SIMPLEX #4098-9701 CSFML #7272-0026:166):
A. The Photoelectric type sensor shall be a plug-in unit which mounts to a twist-lock
base, and shall be UL approved.
B. The detectors shall be of the solid state photoelectric type and shall contain no
radioactive material. They shall use a pulsed infrared LED light source and be
sealed against rear air flow entry.
C. The sensor shall fit into a base that is wmmon with both the heat sensor and
photoelectric type sensor and shall be compatible with other addressable detectors,
addressable manual stations, and addressable Zone Adapter Modules on the same
circuit.
D. There shall be no limit to the number of detectors or Zone Adapter Modules which
may be activated or “in alarm” simultaneously.
2.06 ANALOG PHOTOELECTRIC DUCT SENSOR HOUSING (SIMPLEX #4098-9702 CSFML
#3240-0026:159) Furnished by Division 16, installed by Division 15, connected and tested
by Division 16:
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
The housing shall be a non-polarized 24VDC type which is compatible with the
Universal Transponder and obtains its operating power from the 24VDC transponder
power supply via dedicated power wires.
Sensors shall be of the solid state photoelectric type and shall operate on the light
scattering, photodiode principle. To minimize nuisance alarms, detectors shall have
an insect screen and be designed to ignore invisible airborne particles or smoke
densities that are below the factory set alarm point. No radioactive material shall be
used.
The 24VDC detector may be reset by actuating the control panel reset switch.
Sensor construction shall have a mounting base with a twist-lock detecting head that
is lockable. The locking feature shall be field removable when not required. Contact
between the base and head shall be of the bifurcated type utilizing spring type, self-
wiping contacts. Removal of the sensor head shall cause a trouble signal at the
control panel.
It shall be possible to alarm the duct housing by using a test switch.
For maintenance purposes, it shall be possible to clean the duct housing sampling
tubes by accessing them through the duct housings front cover.
To minimize false alarms, voltage and RF transient suppression techniques shall be
employed as-well-as smoke signal verification circuit and an insect screen.
Two (2) normally open and one (1) normally closed contacts shall be provided in all
duct detectors.
20 OCTOBER 1997 FIRE ALARM DETECTION SYSTEMS
Carlsbad City Library 16721-15 96013
I. A remote LED shall be provided below each detector installed in interior ceiling
space.
2.07 ANALCG PHOTOELECTRIC IN-DUCT SENSOR HOUSING (SIMPLEX $4098-9704 CSFML
#3240-0026:159) Furnished by Division 16, installed by Division 15, connected and tested
by Division 16:
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
The housing shall be a non-polarized 24VDC type which is compatible with the
Universal Transponder and obtains its operating power from the 24VDC transponder
power supply via dedicated power wires.
Sensors shall be of the solid state photoelectric type and shall operate on the light
scattering, photodiode principle. To minimize nuisance alarms, detectors shall have
an insect screen and be designed to ignore invisible airborne particles or smoke
densities that are below the factory set alarm point. No radioactive material shall be
used.
The 24VDC detector may be reset by actuating the control panel reset switch.
Sensor construction shall provide an in-duct assembly that mounts an analog sensor
directly into the airflow. The sensor shall monitor an airflow velocity range from O-
2000 ft/min. The sensor shall be suitable for monitoring square rectangular ducts
from 8” square to 36” square. Contact between the base and the head shall be of
the bifurcated type utilizing spring type, self-wiping contracts. Removal of the sensor
head shall cause a trouble signal the control panel.
It shall be possible to alarm the duct housing by using a test switch.
For maintenance purposes, it shall be possible to clean the in-duct by accessing
them through the duct housings front cover.
To minimize false alarms, voltage and RF transient suppression techniques shall be
employed as-well-as smoke signal verification circuit and an insect screen.
Two (2) normally open and one (1) normally closed contacts shall be provided in all
duct detectors.
A remote LED shall be provided below each detector installed in interior ceiling
space.
2.08 ADDRESSABLE PULL STATIONS (SIMPLEX #2099-9795 CSFML #7150-0026:175):
A. Addressable pull stations shall contain electronics that communicate the station’s
status (alarm, normal) to the transponder over two (2) wires which also provide
power to the pull station. The address shall be set on the station. The station shall
mechanically latch upon operation and remain so until manually reset by opening with
a key common to all system locks. Pull stations shall be single action.
B. The front of the station shall be hinged to a backplate assembly and shall be opened
with a key to reset the station. The key shall be common with the control panels.
Stations which use Allen wrenches or special tools to reset, will not be accepted.
20 OCTOBER 1997 FIRE ALARM DETECTION SYSTEMS
Carlsbad City Library 16721-16 96013
- The station shall consist of high impact lexan plastic, red in color.
C. The addressable manual station shall be capable of field programming of its
“address” location on an addressable initiating circuit. The manual station shall be
fitted with screw terminals for field wire attachment.
D. There shall be no limit to the number of stations, detectors or Zone Adapter modules,
which may be activated or “in alarm” simultaneously.
E. The addressable manual station shall be Underwriters” Laboratories Inc. listed.
2.09 ZONE ADAPTER MODULE (CSFML #7300-0026: 182):
A. Zone Adapter Modules shall be used for monitoring of waterflow, valve tamper, Halon
Control Panels, non-addressable detectors, and for control of evacuation indicating
appliances and air handling systems).
1. An addressable interface module shall be provided for interfacing normally
open direct contact devices to an addressable initiating circuit. The device
shall be a Simplex type Zone Adapter Module (ZAM).
2. ZAMs will be capable of mounting in a standard electric outlet box. ZAMs will
include cover plates to allow surface or flush mounting. ZAMs will receive
their 24VDC power from a separate two (2) wire pair running from an appro-
priate power supply.
3. Type 1, Monitor ZAM (Simplex #2190-9155):
a. This type of addressable module will monitor the status of a powered
and/or non-powered initiating device. The supervision of the device
wiring will be Style B. These modules will communicate the device’s
status: normal, alarm, trouble to the FACP.
4. Type 2, Signal ZAM (Simplex #2190-9161):
a. This type of addressable module will provide double pole double
throw relay switching that can be used to connect (through easily re-
placeable two (2) amp fuses) a zone of signals to a power source.
The module will provide Style Y supervision. These modules will
communicate the supervised wiring status (normal, alarm, trouble) to
the fire alarm control panel and will receive a command to transfer
the relay from the fire alarm control panel.
5. Type 3, Control ZAM (Simplex #2190-9163):
a. This type of addressable module will provide double pole double
throw relay switching for loads up to 12OVAC. It will contain easily
replaceable two (2) amp fuses, one (1) on each common leg of the
relay.
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
FIRE ALARM DETECTION SYSTEMS
16721-17 96013
b. The module shall be supervised and uniquely identified by the control
panel. Device identification shall be transmitted to the control panel
for processing according to the program instructions. Should the
module become non-operational, tampered with, or removed, a dis-
crete trouble signal, unique to the device, shall be transmitted to, and
annunciated at, the control panel.
c. - The module shall be capable of being programmed for its “address”
location on the addressable device initiating circuit. The module shall
be compatible with addressable manual stations and addressable
detectors on the same addressable initiating circuit.
d. The module provided in the elevator equipment rooms shall provide
a software controlled pulsed output to initiate the shunt trip on the
circuit breakers serving the elevators within the machine room.
B. The fire alann system supplier shall provide auxiliary relays with ten (10) ampere
silver contacts for equipment requiring control current above two (2) amperes.
2.10 AUDIO/VISUAL DEVICES:
A. The visual unit shall be Simplex #4904-9137, CSFML #7125-0026:198.
B. The audio unit shall be Simplex #4903 Series.
2.11 MAGNETIC DOOR HOLDERS: (Furnished and installed as part of the door hardware,
connected and tested by Division 16)
A. Provide all conduit and wiring and make connections from door holder to fire alarm
system. Provide a.dedicated control IAM for magnetic door holders.
2.12 MAIN SPRINKLER WATERFLOW SWITCH: (Furnished and installed by Division 15,
interconnected by Division 16).
A. Provide alarm wiring circuit and make connections from switch terminals to fire alarm
system. Provide a dedicated monitor IAM for main sprinkler water-flow detector.
2.13 SPRINKLER AND STANDPIPE FLOW ALARM SWITCHES: (Furnished and installed by
Division 15, interconnected by Division 16).
A. Provide alarm wiring circuit and connections from switch terminals to fire alarm
system. Provide a dedicated monitor IAM for each flow alarm switch.
2.14 MAIN SPRINKLER WATER VALVE AND PIV TAMPER SWITCHES: (Furnished and
installed by Division 15, interconnected by Division 16).
A. Provide alarm wiring circuit and connections from switch terminals to fire alarm
system. Provide a dedicated monitor IAM for each tamper switch.
20 OCTOBER 1997
Cartsbad City Library
FIRE ALARM DETECTION SYSTEMS
16721-18 96013
,“- 2.15 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM COMMUNICATOR:
I-
A. The fire alarm system communicator shall be a Radionics #8112 Series system to
match the existing alarm reporting system for the City of Carlsbad.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION:
A. Provide and install the system in accordance with the plans and specifications, all
applicable codes and the manufacturer’s recommendations. All wiring shall be
installed in strict compliance with all the provisions of NEC - Article 760 A and C,
Power-Limited Fire Protective Signaling Circuits of if required may be reclassified as
non-power limited and wired in accordance with NEC-Article 760 A and B. Upon
completion, the Contractor shall so certify in writing to the Owner and General
Contractor.
1. All junction boxes shall be sprayed red and labeled “Fire Alarm”. Wiring color
code shall be maintained throughout the installation.
2. All Wiring shall be installed in conduit (minimum 3/4”). Conduit shall be
provided in accordance with Section 16111, “Raceways and Fittings”.
3. All Wiring required for complete system operation shall be provided in
accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations.
B. Installation of equipment and devices that pertain to other work in the contract shall
be closely coordinated with the appropriate subcontractors.
C. The Contractor shall clean all dirt and debris from the inside and the outside of the
fire alann equipment after completion of the installation.
D. The manufacturer’s authorized Representative shall provide on site supervision of
installation.
3.02 TESTING:
A. The completed fire alarm system shall be fully tested in accordance with NFPA-72
by the Contractor in the presence of the Owner% Representative and the Local Fire
Marshal. Upon completion of a successful test, the Contractor shall so certify in
writing to the Owner and General Contractor.
B. The Contractor Quality Control Representative shall perform all field inspection and
witness all other field tests required to demonstrate the operational capability of the
system. The Contractor shall perform all field tests, and provide all labor, equipment,
and incidentals required for testing.
C. Provide a manufacturer’s Representative or manufacturer to supervise installation
and final testing of system.
D. The entire system shall test free from opens, grounds, and short circuits.
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
FIRE ALARM DETECTION SYSTEMS
16721-19 96013
E. Test the system to satisfaction of State and local fire authorities.
F. All systems shall be operated in both normal and emergency (loss of a.c. input)
modes.
G. All supervisory features of the system shall be tested.
H. All signal tnitiating devices shall be tested.
I. All defective material and workmanship disclosed as a result of the tests in this
section shall be replaced and retested. The Contractor shall show by demonstration
in service that all circuits and devices are in good operating condition. Tests shall
be such that each item of control equipment shall function no less than five (5)
times.
3.03 TRAINING:
A. Provide eight (8) hours of training for User staff and maintenance personnel in the
operation of the fire alarm system.
l l l END OF SECTION l l l
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
FIRE ALARM DETECTION SYSTEMS
16721-20 96013
SECTION 16730
MASTER CLOCK SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .Ol GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:
A. The provision of Section 16011, “General Requirements, Electrical” and Section
16050, “Basic Electrical Materials and Methods” apply to this section as if fully
repeated herein.
B. Scope: This section of the specification includes, but is not limited to:
1. All labor, equipment, materials, and performance of all operations in
connection with the installation of the Master Clock System as shown on the
drawings and as herein specified.
2. The complete installation shall conform to the applicable sections of Local
Code Requirements and National Electrical Code with particular attention to
Article 760.
3. The work covered by this section of the specification shall be coordinated
with the related work as specified elsewhere under the project specifications.
4. The work covered by this specification includes the system equipment
specified, installation, and necessary control wiring to insure a fully operable
system. In addition, the initial installation shall include memory and software,
pushbuttons, indicator lamps, and electronic hardware for an operable
system.
5. The system specified shall be microprocessor-based and totally solid state
(except for control relays).
6. This system shall be UL listed, Ref. UL863, and shall bear the UL label. It
shall also pass the applicable FCC Standard for noise emission.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM:
A. Complete Master Clock System as described herein and as shown on the plans; to
be wired, connected, and left in first class operating condition. The system shall use
3 wire, 12OV synchronous wired circuits wired to all wall clocks shown. Include a
time control center, receiving wall clocks, time tone units, and other necessary
material for a complete operating system.
B. The Time Control Center (TCC) shall be designed for operation on a seven (7) day
four (4) schedule basis. Any or all schedules may be activated at any time. Any or
all output circuits may be programmed on any or all days or schedules using one
program entry.
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
MASTER CLOCK SYSTEM
16730-l 96013
C. Program instructions shall be programmed and reviewed through the twelve (12) key
panel mounted keypad and displayed on the LCD display. It shall be possible to
validate each instruction after programming. All program instructions shall be made
by the keypad and shall be User changeable at any time.
D. Transient suppression for inductive loads will be supplied for all output circuits as
part of the basic TCC package.
1.03 WARRANTY:
A. Warranty shall comply with the provisions of Section 16011, “General Requirements,
Electrical”.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Each and all items of the Master Clock System shall be listed as a product of a
SINGLE system manufacturer under the appropriate category by Underwriters’
Laboratories, Inc. (UL) and shall bear the “U.L.” label.
1.05 SERVICE ORGANIZATION QUALIFICATIONS:
A. Offer an annual maintenance contract including complete service and equipment
costs for maintenance of the complete system.
1.06 SUBMITTALS:
A. The following information shall be sumittled for review and approval in accordance
with Section 16011, “General Requirements, Electrical”:
1. Catalog Cuts:
a. Time Control Center (TCC)
b. Solid State Signal Generator
C. Wall clocks
2. Shop Drawings:
a. Wiring Diagrams:
b. Point to point wiring diagrams showing wiring from each control panel
to each terminal device.
C. Scaled floor plans indicating the location of devices, conduit runs,
types, and number of conductors.
d. Riser diagram.
e. Provide written sequence of system operation.
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
MASTER CLOCK SYSTEM
16730-Z 96013
*c 1.07 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS:
A. Manufacturer must have a local service organization.
8. Master Clock System: Simplex or approved equal. Evaluation of equivalency shall
be by the Owner’s Representative. The determination of the Architect will be final.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 TIME CONTROL CENTER (TCC) SIMPLEX MODEL #6400-9001:
A. The Time Control Center (TCC) shall be microprocessor-based solid state and shall
provide accurate timekeeping for control of synchronous wired clocks. The TCC shall
have user programmable time and day of week referenced control of output control
circuits.
1. All LCD display shall be used to show the time, day of week, and status of the
output circuits without having to scroll through programming schedules, and
is also used for programming, editing and viewing of stored programs.
2. The state of the output circuits are to be programmed by the user through a
keypad or may also be controlled by manual override switches, one per
circuit, which allow the user to turn the output circuits on, off, or to automatic
control.
3. The user shall be able to program from one to four independent schedules
within the TCC; changing between schedules will be accomplished through
the keypad and may be done at any time.
4. The TCC shall have seconds programming resolution for the output circuits
when using on/off type program commands. Additional programming modes
available include pulse, delay, delay/pulse as well as coded and dual coded
relay control.
5. The TCC shall be powered from 120 VAC 60 Hz, however, during a power
failure it will retain its program and continue time keeping for up to 60 days.
(Time keeping accuracy can be selected to be based either on AC power line
frequency or a DC quartz crystal oscillator). (Time keeping accuracy shall be
a high accuracy, three (3) seconds/month, temperature compensated crystal
oscillator). The unit shall be a Simplex 6400-9001.
2.02 WALL CLOCKS:
A. Provide 12” round semi-flush wall clocks. Wall clocks shall be Simplex Model #6310-
9122. Wall clocks shall be mounted in the 2975-9038 back box.
1. Provide one (1) wall clock in each clock outlet location.
f--
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
MASTER CLOCK SYSTEM
16730-3 96013
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION:
A. Install all components as indicated and in accordance with manufacturers
instructions and recommendations.
1. AH-wiring shall be in conduit. Minimum conduit size shall be 3/4”.
B. All wiring shall be provided in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and
recommendations. Wiring shall comply with all local and state fire codes.
3.02 TESTING:
A. The Contractor shall perform all field inspection and witness all other field tests re-
quired to demonstrate the operational capability of the system. the Contractor shall
perform all field tests, and provide all labor, equipment and incidentals required for
testing.
1. Provide a manufacturers representative to supervise installation and final
testing of system.
B. Entire system shall test free from opens, grounds, and short circuits.
C. All defective material and workmanship disclosed as a result at the tests in this
section shall be replaced and retested. The contractor shall show by demonstration
in service that all circuits and devices are in good operating condition. Tests shall
be such that each item of control equipment will function no less than five times.
3.03 TRAINING:
A. As an addition to the requirements in Section 16011, “General Requirements,
Electrical” the Contractor shall provide a minimum of eight (8) hours of training for
User staff and maintenance personnel as part of the base bid.
l l l END OF SECTION l l *
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
MASTER CLOCK SYSTEM
16730-4 96013
SECTION 16740
TELEPHONE/DATA SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .Ol GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:
A. The provisions of Section 16011, “General Requirements, Electrical” and Section
16050, “Basic Electrical Materials and Methods” apply to this section as if fully
repeated herein.
1.02 SPECIAL CONDITIONS:
A. The telephone/data system components and wiring shall be an Owner furnished -
vendor installed system. The Contractor shall provide an outlet box and a 1” conduit
to the backboard in Computer Room #109 for each combination telephone/data outlet
indicated. Telephone and data outlets in flush floor boxes shall have (1) 3/4”C. to the
backboard in Computer Room #109 for each outlet indicated. The Contractor shall
coordinate all work with the vendor prior to rough-in. See specifications for additional
requirements.
B. All telephone and data system wiring run in underground conduits shall be UL listed
for wet locations.
f- 1.03 SUBMITTALS:
A. Shop Drawings:
1. Provide the following items:
(4 A complete conduit and box system single line diagram drawing per
the manufacturer’s requirements and as indicated.
(W Scaled (l/8” = l’-0”) floor plans indicating the location of devices,
conduit runs, and types of devices.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 TELEPHONE BACKBOARDS:
A. Provide a 3/4 inch thick plywood panel, grade AD, with other dimensions as
indicated.
2.02 TRIM AND COVERPLATES: See Section 16140.
2.03 OUTLET BOXES: See Section 16130.
- 2.04 CONDUITS: See Section 16110.
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
TELEPHONE/DATA SYSTEM
16740-l 96013
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION:
A. Telephone/Data System:
1. Finish and install a complete conduit, box and terminal system for
telephone/data services per the manufacturer’s requirements and as
indicated.
2. See Section 16110, “Raceway and Fittings”.
l l * END OF SECTION l * *
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
TELEPHONE/DATA SYSTEM
16740-Z 96013
,- SECTION 16770
PAGING SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .Ol GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:
A. The provision of Section 16011, “General Requirements, Electrical” and Section
16050, “Basic Electrical Materials and Methods” apply to this section as if fully
repeated herein.
B. Scope: This section of the specification includes, but is not limited to:
C. All labor, tools, appliance, material, and equipment required to furnish and install the
complete installation shown on the drawings for this section of the work including that
which is reasonably inferred.
D. The entire system and all components shall be Underwriter Laboratory (U.L.) listed.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM:
A. The paging system shall include, but not be limited to, a paging preamplifier, a
paging amplifier, speakers, zone page relay packs, microphones, and associated
wiring. The amplifier shall be installed in the main electrical room and shall interface
with the telephone system. The system shall be single zone.
1.03 DESIGN CRITERIA:
A. Complete paging system design, wiring diagrams, and operational details by system
manufacturer or authorized technical representative.
1.04 SERVICE ORGANIZATION QUALIFICATIONS:
A. Offer an annual maintenance contract including complete service and equipment
costs for maintenance of the complete system.
1.05 SUBMITTALS:
A. The following information shall be submitted for review and approval in accordance
with Section 16011, “General Requirements, Electrical”.
1. Catalog Cuts:
a.
b.
ii:
f’
Input Preamplifier
Amplifier
Speakers (each type)
Horns
Wiring
Equipment Rack
20 OCTOBER 1997
Cartsbad City Library
PAGING SYSTEM
16770-l 96013
2.
9. Microphones
Shop Drawings:
a. Wiring Diagrams:
b. Point to point wiring diagrams showing, wiring from the control panel
to each terminal device.
C. Scaled floor plans indicating the location of devices, conduit runs,
types, and number of conductors.
d. Riser diagram.
e. Provide written sequence of system operation.
1.06 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS:
A. Manufacturer must have a local service organization.
. B. Paging System: As manufactured by Peavey or equal.
1.07 WARRANTY:
A. Warranty shall comply with the provisions of Section 16011, “General Requirements,
Electrical”.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 INPUT PREAMPLIFIER:
A. The input preamplifier shall include, but not be limited to, the following features or
options:
1. Rated Output: +GdBm into 10,000 ohm load, OdBm into 600 ohm load.
2. Overall Headroom: 20dB.
3. Frequency Response: +/-3dB, 20 to 20,000 Hz at +4dBu.
4. Distortion: Less than 5%, 20 to 20,000 Hz.
5. Rack Mounted.
6. Associated Power Supply.
7. Eight (8) channel mixer.
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
PAGING SYSTEM
16770-2 96013
rC 2.02 AMPLIFIER (RAULAND FAX 250):
A. The input preamplifier shall include, but not be limited to, the following features or
options:
1. Rated Output: 250 watts RMS.
2. Frequency Response: +/-2dB, 30 to 20,000 Hz.
3. Total Harmonic Distortion: Less than 2% at rated power, +/-.5dB, 50 to
15,000 Hz.
4. Regulation: Better than 2dB from full load to no load.
5. Rack Mounted.
6.
2.03 HORNS:
Associated Power Supply.
A. The paging horns shall include, but not be limited to, the following features or
options:
1. Frequency Response: 375 to 14,000 Hz
2. Power Rating: Program-30 watts; Peak-60 watts
3. Sensitivity: 110 dB at 1 meter with 1 watt input
4. Impedance: 45 ohm to 2.5 kohm taps
5. Wattage Taps: 70 volt-l .8 to 30 watts
6. 25 volt-l.8 to 15 watts
2.04 COMPONENT CABINET:
A. Wall mounted cabinet constructed of 16 gauge steel with a hinged, lockable louvered
door, suitable for 19” rack panels, finished in black enamel paint.
2.05 WIRE:
A. The speaker wiring shall be 2 conductor, twisted pair, jacketed, copper, insulated, 18
AWG, plennum rated except as noted herein.
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
PAGING SYSTEM
16770-3 96013
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION:
A. Install all components as indicated and in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions and recommendations.
B. All Wiringshall be installed in conduit (minimum 3/4”) or ceiling cable tray. Conduit
shall be provided in accordance with Section 16111, “Raceways and Fittings”. Cable
tray shall be provided in accordance with Section 16114, “Cable Trays”.
C. All Wiring required for complete system operation shall be provided in accordance
with manufacturers instructions and recommendations.
3.02 TESTING:
A. The Contractor Quality Control Representative shall perform all field inspection and
witness all other field tests required to demonstrate the operational capability of the
system. The Contractor shall perform all field tests, and provide all labor, equipment
and incidentals required for testing.
B. Provide a manufacturers representative to supervise installation and final testing of
system.
C. Entire system shall test free from opens, grounds, and short circuits.
D. All defective material and workmanship disclosed as a result of the tests in this
section shall be replaced and retested. The Contractor shall show by demonstration
in service that all circuits and devices are in good operating condition. Tests shall
be such that each item of control equipment will function no less than five (5) times.
3.03 TRAINING:
A. As an addition to the requirements in Section 16011, “General Requirements,
Electrical” the Contractor shall provide a minimum of eight (8) hours of training for
User staff and maintenance personnel as part of the base bid.
l l * END OF SECTION l l l
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
PAGING SYSTEM
16770-4 96013
SECTION 16915
LIGHTING DIMMING SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:
A. The provisions of Section 16011, “General Requirements, Electrical” and Section
16050, “Basic Electrical Materials and Methods” apply to this section as if fully
repeated herein.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Testing and Certification:
1. Each system shall be checked out and started up on site by a factory trained
and authorized representative of the manufacturer. Representative shall
inspect, and after any necessary corrections, certify the installation and
operation of the system.
1.03 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS:
A. Manufacturer’s Product Data:
1. Submit for review and approval material specifications handling, shipping,
storage, and installation data for products specified under PART 2 -
PRODUCTS.
2. Submit for review and approval complete product data, including physical,
environmental and electrical characteristics on each unit of equipment.
Include complete control sequences: functional operations, controls, and
coverplates, engraving schedules.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Submit for review and approval shop drawings for fabrications, erection,
wiring, and connections not fully described by manufacturer’s data. Submit
scaled drawings of equipment, including code clearances and working
clearance, complete wiring interconnection drawings and schedules.
1.04 GENERAL MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS:
A. Source Quality Control:
1. Obtain materials (of each type) from a single manufacturer or source.
2. Do not change source or brands of materials during course of construction.
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carisbad City Library
LIGHTING DIMMING SYSTEM
16915-1 96013
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 Acceptable Manufacturers
A. Lutron Electronics Co., Inc., or equal (no known equal).
1. The listing of a manufacturer as “acceptable” does not imply automatic approval. It
is the sole responsibility of the electrical contractor to ensure that submittals made
are for devices that meet or exceed the specifications included herein.
2.02 Integral Dimming
A. Preset dimming control shall be capable of operating at rated capacity without
adversely affecting design lifetime.
B. Preset dimming control shall mount individually in standard 2, 3, or 4 gang U.S.
wallboxes.
C. Preset dimming control shall operate in an ambient temperature range of OeC (32eF)
to 4OeC (104eF).
D. Preset dimming control shall incorporate an airgap switch relay which shall be
accessible without removing the faceplate. The airgap switch shall be capable of
meeting applicable requirements of UL 20 for airgap switches in incandescent
dimmers.
E. Preset dimming control shall meet IEC 801-2, tested to withstand 15kV electrostatic
discharge without damage or loss of memory. .
F. Preset dimming control shall meet ANSIIEEE Std. C62.41-1980, tested to withstand
voltage surges of up to 6000V and current surges of up to 200A without damage.
G. Preset dimming control shall meet the UL 20 limited short circuit test requirementfor
snap switches.
H. Preset dimming control shall be voltage regulated.
I. Preset dimming control shall utilize an LC filtering network to minimize interference
with properly installed radio, audio, and video equipment.
J. Minimum light levels shall be user adjustable in order to compensate for different
sources and loading.
K. Separate power booster/interface shall increase dimmer capacity. Capacity shall
range from lOOOW/VA to 30,OOOWNA. Quantities and sizes of each type of power
booster shall be provided to control each type of load shown on the load schedule
and/or the drawings.
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
LIGHTING DIMMING SYSTEM
16915-2 96013
P-- 2.03 Dimming Panels
Panels
A. Panels shall be wall mounted NEMA grade, constructed of sheet steel plates not less
than #16 U.S. gauge. Contractor shall reinforce wall as required for wall-mounted
panels.
B. Panels shall be completely pre-wired by the manufacturer. The contractor shall be
required to provide input feed wiring, load wiring, and control wiring. No other wiring
or assembly by the contractor shall be permitted.
C. Unless the panel is a dedicated feed through switching panel or otherwise indicated,
panels shall contain branch circuit protection for each dimming module. Branch
circuit breakers shall have the following performance characteristics:
1. Be UL listed under UL 489 as a molded case circuit breaker for use on
lighting circuits.
2. Contain a visual trip indicator and shall berated at 10,000 AIC (12OV) or
14,000 AIC (277V), unless otherwise noted.
3. Be thennal-magnetic in construction for both overload and dead short
protection. The use of fully magnetic breakers shall not be acceptable, even
when used in conjunction with individual dimmer thermal cut-outs.
4. Be switching duty (SWD) rated so that the loads can be switched off via the
breakers.
D. Panels shall be shipped with each dimmer in a BYPASS position via a jumper bar
inserted between the input and load terminals. These jumpers shall carry the
complete load current and shall be reusable at any time.
E. Panels shall be cooled via free-convection, unaided by fans, and capable of
continuous operation to all of these section specifications within an ambient
temperature range of OeC (320F) to 400C (1040F). To provide the utmost in
reliability, panels which normally use cooling fans must have the panel capacity
derated by 50%. A lesser derating shall be allowed providing that manufacturer can
substantiate, via an independent test laboratory, that with no fans operating, and at
full-rate dimmer capacity, the temperatures of the main semiconductors are at least
200C below maximum temperature rating and the temperatures of the filter chokes
are within the maximum allowable temperatures of these components at an ambient
temperature of 400C.
F. Panels shall have the following additional performance characteristics:
1. Be designed to prevent any foreign objects from coming in contact with any
part of the panel which would be at an elevated temperature, such as the
dimmer extrusions or heat fins.
20 OCTOBER 1997 LIGHTING DIMMING SYSTEM
Carlsbad City Library 16915-3 96013
2. Be designed to provide air flow across the heat sink areas and through the
dimmer chassis. Panel sections which provide air flow only across heat sinks
shall not be mounted one above another in order to allow for adequate heat
dissipation.
G. Panel shall provide capability to electronically assign each circuit to any zone in the
dimming system. Panels using mechanical switches, rewiring, or EPROMS shall not
be acceptable.
H. Multiple panels shall be capable of operating in one system.
I. For panels fed with a normal/emergency feeder, panel shall include electronics to
bring all circuits to a full-on condition upon the loss of normal power and the
subsequent presence of emergency power. Electronics shall switch both the
intensity signal and the on/off signal of each dimmer connected to an emergency
circuit between the local control stations and a full-on constant drive supply. This
type of emergency full-on may be used with either a normal/emergency generator or
a constant hot secondary utility feed where the emergency transfer occurs on the line
- side (upstream) of the dimming panel and requires only a
J. A positive air gap relay shall be employed with each card in the power panel to
ensure that the load circuits are open when the “off’ function is selected at a control
station. These relays need not be integral to the module but must be integral to the
panel. Lighting control manufacturer shall provide and warrant both the relays and
the necessary control interface(s) as part of the control system.
K. One type of modular dimming card shall be used for all sources, Systems requiring
different types of modules or modular dimming cards shall not be acceptable.
L. All dimmers shall be voltage regulated so that a iilO% variation in line voltage shall
cause no more than a fi5% variation in load voltage when dimmer is operating at 40V
(5% light output).
M. Under full-load conditions in a 400C environment, all silicon thyristors shall operate
at a minimum 200C safety margin below the component temperature rating.
N. The maximum allowable asymmetry in the load waveform shall be ii 1 VDC.
0. Each dimmer shall incorporate an electronic “soft- start” default at initial turn-on that
smoothly ramps the lights up to the appropriate levels within 0.5 seconds.
P. Once installed as part of a complete system, the silicon thyristors used to control the
power furnished to the loads shall be both designed and tested to withstand surges,
without impairment to performance, of 6OOOV, 3000A (equivalent to a near lightning
strike) as specified by ANSVEEE std. C62.41. Upon request, the manufacturer shall
provide a means to demonstrate conformance to this specification using the
appropriate surge-generation equipment.
Q. Filtering shall be provided in each dimmer so that current rise time shall be at least
350msec at 50% rated dimmer capacity as measured from lO-90% of the load
current waveform at a 900 conduction angle, and at no point rise faster than 30
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
LIGHTING DIMMING SYSTEM
16915-4 96013
mA/msec. Manufacturers should note that additional filters may be required to meet
this specification. These filters need not be integral to the dimming module, but must
be integral to the dimming cabinet.
R. Dimmer output voltage shall be a minimum 95% of input voltage at maximum
intensity setting.
Switching Module
S. Relays shall be mechanically latching.
T. A positive air gap relay shall be employed with each card in the power panel to
ensure that the load circuits are open when the “off’ function is selected at a control
station. These relays need not be integral to the module but must integral to the
panel. Lighting control manufacture shall provide and warrant both the relays and the
necessary control interface(s) as part of the control system.
U. Once installed as a complete system, the relays used to control the power furnished
to the loads shall be both designed and tested to withstand surges, without
impairment to performance, of 6OOOV, 3000A (equivalent to near lighting strike) as
specified by ANSIIEEE std. C62.41. Upon request, the manufacture shall provide the
means to demonstrate conformance to this specification using the appropriate surge-
generation equipment.
V. Relays shall be rated for 16 Amps continuous duty, for the following load types:
incandescent/tungsten - electronic and magnetic low-voltage - neon/cold cathode -
high intensity discharge - high inrush electronic and magnetic fluorescent lamp
ballasts.
W. Load shall be switched in a manner that ensures no arcing will occur at the
mechanical contacts when power is applied to the load circuits.
X. The voltage drop across the switching circuit shall not exceed 100 millivolts RMS
when in the closed state. Power efficiency shall be in excess of 99 percent at full
load RMS voltage.
2.04 Sources
A. Dimmers shall operate the following sources/load types with a smooth continuous
Square Law dimming curve. Dimmers shall also be capable of operating these
sources on a non-dim basis. Dimmers shall be electronically assigned to the
appropriate load type/dimming curve and can be reassigned at any time. Universal-
type dimmers that do not adjust the dimming curve shall not be acceptable.
1. Incandescent, Tungsten and Magnetic Low Voltage Transformer
a. Dimmer shall contain circuitry specifically designed to control and provide a
symmetrical AC waveform to the input of magnetic low voltage transformers.
b. Dimmer shall not cause a magnetic low voltage transformer to operate above
the transformers rated operating current and temperature.
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
LIGHTING DIMMING SYSTEM
16915-5 96013
C.
2.
a.
b.
3.
a.
b.
C.
d.
e.
f.
9.
h.
I. Ballasts shall have a minimum starting temperature of 1OeC.
j. Ballasts shall not be damaged by miswiring line voltage and control wire inputs.
20 OCTOBER 1997
Dimmer shall contain circuitry to control dioded lamps.
Electronic Low Voltage Transformer
No flicker or interaction shall occur at any point in the dimming range.
For integral dimming, an interface shall be required.
Fluorescent Electronic Dimming Ballasts
Dimmer shall be rated to control T-12, T-12 high output, T-8, T-5 and T-4
lamps. All lamps on the same circuit must have the same current rating (i.e.,
T-8). but may be different lengths (i.e., 3’4’). Ballasts for fluorescent fixtures
must be Lutron Hi-lume “FDB” or EcoIO” series. See fixture schedule and/or
dimming schedule for specific ballast model numbers. The dimming
performance shall be as follows:
All lamps on the same circuit must have the same current rating (i.e., T-8), but
may be different lengths (i.e., 3’,4’). See fixture schedule and/or dimming
schedule for specific ballast model numbers. Manufacturer shall provide
single, two, or three lamp electronic dimming ballasts as required.
1. Architectural dimming ballasts -Lutron Hi-lume FDB series with
dimming performance in accordance with 2.04k.
2. Controllable ballasts - Lutron Eco-10 series with dimming
performance in accordance with 2.041.
Ballasts shall withstand 4000 volt surges as specified in ANSI C62.41.
Ballast shall preheat lamp cathodes before applying arc voltage to ensure rated
lamp life is not diminished.
Ballasts shall internally limit inrush current to not exceed three amps at 277
volts or seven amps at 120 volts to avoid computer problems, nuisance circuit
breaker trips, and control contact malfunctions.
Light level output shall be continuous, even and flicker-free over the entire
dimming range.
Ballast shall be inaudible in a 27dB ambient throughout the dimming range,
Ballast shall be capable of striking lamps at any light level. This shall be
accomplished without first flashing to full light.
Ballasts must comply with FCC Part 18 regulations for non-commercial R
lighting devices.
LIGHTING DIMMING SYSTEM
Carlsbad City Library 16915-6 96013
,-
k. Architectural dimming ballasts (“Hi-lume FDB”)
1. Dimming range of ballasts shall be from 100% to 1% light level for T-
12 and T-8 lamps, 100% to 5% light level for T-5 and T-4 lamps.
2. Ballast shall have: a ballast factor equal to .93 throughout the entire
dimming range, magnitude of harmonic distortion shall not exceed
10% THD of current at full light output b lamp current crest factor less
than or equal to 1.6.
I. Controllable ballasts (“Eco-10”):
1. Dimming range of ballasts shall be from 100% to 10% light level.
2. Ballast shall have: p a power factor greater than .95 b a ballast factor
equal to .85 p throughout the entire dimming range, magnitude of
harmonic distortion shall not exceed 10% THD of current at full light
output b lamp current crest factor less than or equal to 1.6.
m. For integral dimming, an interface shall be required.
2.05 Control
A. General
1. Definitions: A “scene” or “preset” is a specific look or mood created by
different lighting zones set at different intensities. A “zone” is one or more
lighting circuit which are controlled together as a group.
2. Preset dimming control shall provide power failure memory. Should power be
interrupted and subsequently returned, the lights will come back on to the
same levels set prior to the power interruption. Restoration to some other
default level is not acceptable, unless specifically noted elsewhere.
3. Faceplate shall attach using no visible means of attachment.
4. Wiring from dimming panel to preset dimming control and accessory control
shall be low voltage type Class 2 wiring (SELV).
B. Four Scene Preset Control
Where indicated on the drawings, control shall provide 4 preset lighting scenes and
off for up to 24 control zones. Control shall be capable of storing an additional 12
preset lighting scenes. Up to 64 zones may be tied together in one system.
Controls shall incorporate built-in wide angle infrared receiver, providing control via
a separate wireless remote control transmitter from up to 50 feet away. Preset shall
be set via easy- to-use raise/lower switches, one raise and lower switch per zone.
The intensity for each zone shall be indicated via an illuminated bargraph, one
bargraph per zone. More than one zone may be proportionately raised or lowered
at the same time. Programming of preset scenes shall be accomplished without the
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
LIGHTING DIMMING SYSTEM
16915-7 96013
use of an ENTER or STORE button. Additionally, one or more zones may be
temporarily ovemdden without altering the scene values which are stored in memory.
Lighting levels shall fade smoothly between scenes at time intervals of O- 5 9
seconds or 1 to 60 minutes. The fade time shall be separately selectable for each
scene and shall be indicated by a digital display for the current scene. Pressing a
scene select button will all light the corresponding scene LED and simultaneously
begin changing the bargraph levels to reflect the currently selected scene.. In the
event that-a preset scene with a fade time greater than 5 seconds is initially selected
from an OFF condition, the programmed fade time shall be temporarily overridden,
unless otherwise noted, and the lights shall fade up to that scene over a five-second
time span.
C. Accessory Control Options
Provide the following controls for use with the preset control(s) as shown on the
drawings:
1. Two Scene Entrance Control(s) shall be capable of recalling Scene One plus
Off.
2. Four Scene Control(s) shall be capable of recalling any one of four scenes,
master raise/lower and Off. Control shall provide access to up to 16 scenes.
3. Wireless Infrared Transmitter(s) shall be capable of recalling any one of four
preset scenes and Off. In addition, a master raise/lower shall be provided.
The transmitter shall be manufactured by the dimming system manufacturer.
The range of the transmitter to any single receiver shall be at least 50 feet.
a. Wall receiver shall incorporate four scene select, master raise/lower, and off
buttons.
4. Special Function Control(s) shall provide the following functions:
a. Sequencing shall allow the user to set up and operate a sequence of 4, 12, or
60 steps. A sequence shall be defined as a series of steps, while a step shall
be defined as the recall of a scene. Each step interval is adjustable from 1
second to 60 minutes.
b. Zone lockout shall allow temporary changes without altering the light levels
preset for each scene.
c. Scene lockout shall lockout the control, maintaining current scene and
disabling all buttons on the preset dimming control.
d. Fade override shall set all fade times to zero.
5. Partition Control(s) shall provide two or four buttons for operating multiple
preset units independently or in combination. Each button shall have a
corresponding LED to indicate status of a specific partition or “door.”
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
LIGHTING DIMMING SYSTEM
16915-8 96013
6. Equipment Interface(s) shall allow access to preset dimming control(s) via one
of the following methods:
a. Isolated momentary/maintained dry contact closures. Where indicated on the
drawings, each interface shall provide isolated maintained contact closures
rated at 200mA at 30VDC for pilot light status feedback.
b. For use with four scene preset control, RS232 serial communication.
c. For use with four scene preset control, astronomic timeclock with 60
events/day and 4 schedules.
d. For use with multiple area centralized control, DMX512 interface with control
of 32 continuous dimming zones via external DMX512 device.
2.06 Quality Control
A. Equipment shall be fully tested for proper operation prior to shipment from the
factory.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 Installation
A. Wiring from preset dimming control to dimming panel and accessory control shall be
low voltage Class 2 (SELV) wiring.
B. Contractor shall furnish all equipment, labor, system setup, and other services
necessary for the proper installation of the devices as indicated on the drawings and
specified herein. System setup shall include defining each dimmer’s load type,
assigning each load to a zone, and setting the control functions.
C. Unless otherwise noted, Manufacturer shall provide a one year warranty on all
equipment supplied. Warranty shall cover 100% of the cost to repair or replace any
parts required over the first year which are directly attributable to the manufacturer.
Warranty coverage shall begin from date of final system commissioning or three
months from date of delivery, whichever is the earlier.
D. The system shall be installed utilizing complete manufacturer’s shop drawings and
in accordance with these specifications.
E. Upon completion of the installation and prior to removal of the bypass jumpers, the
Contractor shall completely test all line voltage power and low voltage control wiring
for continuity and accuracy of connections. The jumpers shall remain in place until
all loads have been fully tested and found to be free of miswires, short circuits or
other wiring defects.
20 OCTOBER 1997
Cartsbad City Library
LIGHTING DIMMING SYSTEM
16915-9 96013
3.02 SYSTEM CHECK OUT:
A. Upon completion of the installation, the system shall be completely checked out by
a Lutron factory based Engineer. The check out will be performed upon notification
by the Contractor that the system installation is complete and that all loads have
been tested live for continuity and freedom from defects and that all control wiring
has been connected and checked for proper continuity.
B. Upon completion of the system check out, the Engineer shall demonstrate the
operation of the system to the Architect.
C. Warranty service to be done by factory based Engineer.
3.03 TRAINING:
A. In addition to the requirements of Section 16011, “General Requirements, Electrical”,
the Contractor shall provide a minimum of eight (8) hours of training for the User staff
and maintenance personnel.
3.64 PROGRAMMING:
A. All system programming shall be done by the manufacturer as part of his base bid.
The system performance requirements shall be closely coordinated with the User.
PART 4 FIELD SUPPORT
Manufacturer shall be capable of providing on-site service support within 24 hours
anywhere in the continental U.S.A., and within five business days anywhere in the world,
except where special visas are required.
l l l END OF SECTION l l l
‘20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
LIGHTING DIMMING SYSTEM
16915-10 96013
SECTION 16920
LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHING SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .Ol GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:
A. The provisions of Section 16011, “General Requirements, Electrical” and Section
16050, “Basic Electrical Materials and Methods” apply to this section as if fully
repeated herein.
B. Scope: This section of the specification includes, but is not limited to:
1. All labor, tools, appliances, materials, and equipment required to furnish and
install the complete installation shown on the drawings for this section of the
work including that which is reasonably inferred.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. The work covered by this section of the specifications includes the furnishing of all
labor, equipment, materials, and performance of all operations associated with the
installation of the Low-Voltage Switching System as shown on the drawings and as
herein specified.
B. The extent of lighting control system work is indicated by drawings and by the
requirements of this section. It is defined to include, but not be limited to, the
following:
1. Low voltage switching system with lighting automation relay panels,
associated low voltage switches, and occupancy sensors.
2. Master ON/OFF control capability.
3. Softwire grouping capability with intelligent scenarios.
a. Network timeclock
b. Factory service
1) Startup
2) Training
3) Documentation
4) Programming
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHING SYSTEM
16920-l 96013
1.03
C. Types of lighting control equipment and wiring specified in this section include the
following:
1. Low Voltage Remote Control Relay Panel.
2. Low Voltage Switches and Plates
3. Low Voltage Occupancy Sensors
4. Master ON/OFF Control Capability
5. Learn Mode Softwiring Grouping Capability
6. Central Network Timeclock
D. Requirements are indicated elsewhere in these specifications for work including, but
not limited to, raceways and electrical boxes and fitting required for installation on
control equipment and wiring.
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
Manufacturers: Finns regularly engaged in manufacture of lighting control equipment
and ancillary equipment, of types and capacities required, whose products have been
in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.
Component Pretesting: All components and assemblies are to be factory pretested
and burned-in prior to installation.
System Support: Factory applications engineers shall be available for telephone
support.
NEC Compliance: Comply to NEC as applicable to electrical wiring work.
NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of NEMA standards pertaining
to types of electrical equipment and enclosures.
UL Approvals: Remote panels are to be UL listed under UL 916 Energy Management
Equipment.
FCC Emissions: All assemblies are to be in compliance with FCC emissions
Standards specified in Part 15, Subpart J for Class A application.
1.04 SUBMITTALS:
A. The following information shall be submitted on equipment being supplied under this
project for review and approval in accordance with section 16011, “General
Requirements, Electrical”.
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHING SYSTEM
16920-2 96013
1. Project Data:
a. Submit manufacturer’s data on the low voltage switching system and
all components.
2. Shop Drawings:
a. The entire system shall be submitted for approval:
(1) Wiring diagrams as follows:
(a) Point to point wiring diagrams showing wiring from
panel terminals to each device, including, but not
limited to, relays, low voltage switches, occupancy
sensors, programmable system switch panels, central
timeclock module, and wire.
0.9 Scaled floor plans indicating the location of devices,
conduit runs, types, and number of conductors.
(c) Riser diagram.
(2) Provide detailed information on conductors to be used -
manufacturer, type, size, insulation, etc.
3. Operation and maintenance manuals per section 1601 I, “General Require-
ments, Electrical”.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 LOW VOLTAGE SWITCHING SYSTEM
A. System Description
1. The Low Voltage Switching System shall consist of relay panel assemblies,
low voltage switches, and occupancy sensors, as well as their associated
wiring.
2. The relay panels shall be mounted in electrical closets as indicated on the
drawings. The numbered relays in the panel shall be wired to control the
power to each load as indicated on the Panel Wiring Schedules included in
the drawings. All power wiring will be identified with the number of relay
controlling it as the load.
3. Low voltage switches, and occupancy sensors, shall be located as indicated.
Low voltage wiring from the switches and sensors to the relay panel shall be
Class 2 as required by the National Electrical Code and local standards.
Each low voltage wire shall be labeled with the relay number (l-48) at each
switch or sensor. Use only properly color coded, stranded #20 AWG (or
larger) wire as indicated on the drawings. All relays and switches shall be
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHING SYSTEM
16929-3 96013
tested after installation to confirm proper operation and the loads recorded
on the directory card in each panel.
4. The panels shall provide a mounting bracket for the addition of master
ON/OFF sequences or photosensor control modules. These devices shall be
totally compatible with the manual operation of the low voltage switches and
occupancy sensors; and, in the event of a sequencer or photocontrol failure,
the switches and occupancy sensors shall continue to operate to provide
relay control.
B. Hardware Features
1. Modular Relay Panels shall be UL listed and consist of the following:
a. Tub: Empty NEMA 1 enclosure sized to accept an interior with either,
l-36 or 148 GE RRSP relays as indicated.
b. Interior: Bracket and circuit board backplane with pm-mounted GE
RRSP relays. Interiors shall be sized to accept either, 1-36 or 148
relays. Each relay shall be capable of direct ON/OFF control by a low
voltage switch or occupancy sensor. Relays shall be momentary-
pulsed mechanically latching contacton rated at 20 amps, 120-277
VAC. They shall attach to the interior by a single plug-in connector.
C. Power Supply: Transformer assembly with two 40VA transformers
with separate secondaries; one providing power to relays and
associated low voltage switches and sensors, the second providing
power for accessory devices. Transformers include internal
overcurrent protection with automatic reset and metal oxide varistor
protection against powerline spikes. Transformers shall be 277 VAC,
50/60 Hz. +I- 10%.
d. Panels shall-be surface type with captive screws in a hinged, lockable
configuration. A wiring schedule directory card shall be affixed to the
covers back to allow identification of circuits/relays/ loads controlled
when the door is open.
2. Switches/Plate
a. Provide Specification Grade standard, pilot, configuration momentary
pushbutton type switches as shown on the plans for overriding the
relays. Switch and plate color shall be white.
3. Occupancy Sensors
a. General
1) All sensors shall be directly compatible with the modular relay
panels described above and shall wire directly to same (Class
2 wiring) without any auxiliary components or devices required
above the ceiling.
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHING SYSTEM
169204 96013
2) Sensors shall be specifically designed for energy conserva-
tion and use a fully integrated circuit design with operating
frequency crystal controlled to within +/-00.010%. All ultra-
sonic transducers shall be protected from damage.
3) Separate sensitivity and timedelay adjustments shall be
readily accessible to the user with LED indication of sensed
movement to simplify set up.
4) When the sensor detects motion, it shall trigger the ON coil of
the relay by momentarily shorting the Red (ON) wire to White
(common). If it fails to detect motion during the user selected
time delay period, it shall pulse to relay OFF (short the Black
to White). The LED shall come ON each time the unit senses
motion. However, it shall only pulse the relay ON if it had
pulsed it OFF previously.
5) Unit shall provide manual override in the event of a failure and
allow board replacement without removing the unit or its
wiring.
6) Operation shall be silent.
7) Sensors shall be designed specifically for the size and use of
the area in which they will be used as indicated below.
b. General Purpose Room Sensors
1)
2)
3)
4)
These units shall be available with either a single direction
coverage pattern or a two-way pattern designed to detect the
types of movement typical of an office, conference room, or
classroom.
One-way sensors shall provide 900 sq. ft. coverage of “l/2
step” motion and 670 sq. ft. coverage of “working-at-desk”
motion. Multiple one-way sensors may be wired in a “Master-
Slave” format to extend their area of coverage.
Two-way sensors shall provide 1,800 sq. ft. coverage of “112
step” motion and 1,344 sq. ft. coverage of “working-at-desk”
motion. Multiple two way sensors may be wired in a “Master-
Slave” format to extend their area of coverage.
User adjustable time-delay shall be from 30 seconds to 12
minutes.
4. Master ON/OFF Sequences
a. General
20 OCTOBER 1997 LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHING SYSTEM
Carlsbad City Library 16920-5 96013
1) Each low voltage switching panel shall have two (2) master
ON/OFF sequencers. The sequencer outputs will be wired to
the ON (Red)/OFF (Black) terminals of the relays to be
included in the Master Group. The Master Sequencer shall
provide ON/OFF control of all relays in the panel while still
allowing individual relays to be overridden by their local
switches.
b. Hardware Features
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
The Master ON/OFF functions shall be provided by a Master
Sequencer modules with 48 relay outputs.
Each sequencer shall allow for either all ON or all OFF
operation, thus doubling the number of relays it may control.
Each sequencer shall have two independent switch input
channels. These switch inputs shall be 3+&e, maintained or
momentary dry contact.
All of the relays in a panel shall be sequenced ON/OFF in less
than 4 seconds.
Each output shall be capable of operating up to 3 relays in
parallel.
5. Low Voltage Wire
a. All low voltage wiring shall be color coded to match the relays,
switches, and sensors. It must also be UL listed as conforming to
Class 2 wiring requirements.
b. Switch color codes as follows:
Red/BlacklWhite/Yellow (pilot)
C. Remote relay color coding
Red/Black/Blue/Yellow/Yellow
d. Occupancy Sensor
Red/Black/White/Blue (same as locator switch)
6. Dataline
a. Contractor shall provide for future addition of intelligence networking
by providing a dataline between all panels and terminating same in a
J-box in the computer room “MDF”, Room 109.
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHING SYSTEM
16920-6 96013
b. Dataline shall be 18/2 twisted pair (Red = +, Black = -) with shield.
Rated for Class 2P, Minimum 1 turn per inch; 50 pf/ft. max.
7.
C. Maximum dataline length = 4000 ft.
Photocells
a. General
Each photocontrol point shall consist of an architecturally compatible
sensor mounted in ttie appropriate location for measuring the
available daylighting. Each sensor will have a separate con-
trol/calibration module mounted in an enclosure in the electrical
closet. The sensor shall connect to the control/calibration unit via a
single 2014 shielded conductor with a maximum distance of 500 feet.
The control unit shall be powered by 24 VAC.
b. Control/Calibration Unit
20 OCTOBER 1997 LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHING SYSTEM
Carlsbad City Library 16920-7
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
Control unit shall allow for either direct control of up to three
separate devices. These devices can be a relay or any other
device which allows control by a three wire momentary
contact.
Control unit shall be a standard device which can work with
the sensor device. The unit shall be switchable between four
footcandle measurement ranges (l-l 0 FC, 1 O-l 00 FC, 1 OO-
1,000 FC, 1,000-l 0,000 FC), depending on the sensor head
and application.
Control unit shall have separate trip points for the High and
Low response settings. These settings will be entered via
easily readable dial switches, and will not require a separate
meter or look-up table to insure a reliable footcandle setting.
LEDs shall be provided to illustrate whether the sensor is
below the “Low” setting, above the “High” setting, or in the
deadband range.
Control unit shall allow for a momentary contact device to
override all of the photocell relays to either an ON or OFF
state.
Control device shall employ a three (3) minute time delay
between switching outputs to avoid nuisance tripping. It shall
be possible to disable the time delay to aid in initial setup and
troubleshooting.
96013
C. Sensor Devices
The sensors shall be available to match the specific application. The
sensors shall employ photodiode technology to allow a linear
response to daylight in it’s given footcandle range.
1) Indoor Lighting:
A sensor with a fresnel lens providing for a 60 degree cone
shaped response area shall be employed to monitor indoor
offke lighting levels. The sensor shall require only a 3/8 inch
penetration hole in the ceiling for mounting.
C. Approved Manufacturers
1. General Electric, or approved equal.
a. The contractor shall be completely responsible for providing a system
which meets this specification in its entirety. All deviations from this
specification must be listed and individually signed off by the
Architect.
2. GE Catalog Numbers
a. Low Voltaqe Remote Control Relay (Modular Relay Panel)
RTUB36 and RTUB48, RINTER3636R and RINTER4848R, RRSP,
RPWR277, RCOV36SL, RCOV48SL
b. Switches and Plates
Pushbutton type: RS2-37P and RS2-37PK with wall plates as
required.
C. Occupancv Sensors
RSENSOR-1 or RSENSOR-2
d. y&
Switches: RSWIRE-4
Remote Mount Relays: RRWIRE-5
Occupancy Sensors: ROSWIRE-4
Dataline: RDWIRE-2S
e. Master ON/OFF Sequencer
RMS32
f. Photocells
Control/Calibration Unit: RPCON
Sensor: RPSEN-IN
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHING SYSTEM
16920-8 96013
- 2.02 LOW VOLTAGE SWITCHING SYSTEM WITH SOFTWIRED GROUPING CAPABILITY
A. System Description
1. The low voltage switching system defined in section 2.01 will not change.
2. Softwired grouping capability will be enabled by adding a single relay driver
card for each 12 relays and a single Learn Mode card per panel into the base
panel’s expansion slots. Each relay driver card also serves to enable 3
separate programmable system switches.
3. Any group of relays can be softwired to any programmable system switch by:
a. Turning every relay that is to be part of a softwired group ON, and all
others OFF.
b. Pressing the “Learn” button on the Learn Mode Card. The Learn LED
will start blinking rapidly.
C. Pressing either the ON or OFF side of programmable system switch.
At this point the Learn LED will stop blinking, and the programmable
system switch has been assigned control of that group of relays.
4. Every Programmable System Switch can be assigned on of two scenarios.
They are:
a. ON & OFF
If the ON side of the programmable switch is pressed when learning
a group of relays, the switch will turn the relay group ON when
pressed ON, and turn the relays OFF when pressed OFF.
b. ON & Flick then OFF
If the OFF side of the programmable switch is pressed when learning
a group of relays, the switch will turn the relay group ON when
pressed ON, and will flicker the relays (turn them off for about one
second, then turn them back on) when pressed OFF. 5 minutes later,
all relays that flickered will go OFF automatically. However, any relay
that is pressed ON during the 5 minute wait period will be exempted
from the OFF sweep.
5. In addition to the programmable system switches, every panel includes 2
master switch inputs labeled A and B that can be assigned to control any
group of relays using two other scenarios:
a. Cleaninn Switch
If the ON side of the master switch is pressed when learning a group
of relays, it has been assigned a cleaning scenario. The switch shall
allow the cleaning crew to turn ON any assigned relay group, but it
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHING SYSTEM
16920-g 96013
will not turn OFF any relay which is scheduled ON or has an occupant
override in effect; ie, occupant overrides will have priority over
cleaning.
B. Hardware Features
1. Relay Driver Cards
a. The softwired grouping function shall be enabled by plug-in relay
driver cards controlling 12 relays each. The 24 relay panel shall have
two relay banks (I-12 and 13-24) and accept up to two relay driver
cards. The 48 relay panel shall have four banks and accept up to
four cards.
b. Each card shall include three associated programmable system
switches which signal the Learn card to control its associated relays
ON/OFF according to the different scenarios listed above while still
allowing direct switch control of each relay. These switch inputs may
be either a 3-v&e, momentary dry contact closure.
C. Programmable Switch inputs within a panel or in different panels shall
be capable of being paralleled for wmmon control. This requires that
all panels be powered by circuits on the same phase.
d. Each output shall be capable of operating 3 relays in parallel.
2. Learn Mode Card
a. The Learn Card shall provide 2 momentary contact switches mounted
on it’s front. The Right Switch is a relay All On/All Off override. The
Left button, when pushed, puts the card into the Learn Mode. The
next programmable system switch that is triggered will be assigned
to control all the On relays. If no programmable switch is pressed
within 30 seconds, the card will cancel out of the learn mode, and go
back to its normal state.
b. The Learn Mode Card shall provide 2 LEDs for visual status
feedback. The Right LED indicates that the Learn Card has power
and can function. The second LED is used to show memory status;
Rapidly Flashing means nothing in memory; Slow Flashing means
that the learn button has been pressed and the next programmable
system switch that is hit will be assigned to control all the ON relays;
Steady ON means that the card has been at least partially
programmed.
C. The learn card shall use a EEPROM to record the user defined switch
assignments, thus insuring a 40 year backup of information in case
of power failure. Systems that require a changeable battery with less
than IO year’s life for information backup shall not be allowed.
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHING SYSTEM
16920-10 98013
C. Approved Manufacturers
1. GE or approved equal
2. GE TLC Catalog Numbers
a. Relay Driver Card
RRDC12
b. Learn Mode Card
RLM48
2.03 DATALINE COMMUNICATIONS AND NETWORK TIMECLOCK
A. System Description
1. The Learn Cards in each intelligent panel shall be linked over a single
dataline. The dataline shall provide a highly reliable communications bus for
transferring control and status data to and from the lighting automation
panels.
2. A network timeclock panel shall provide power to the dataline as well as
flexible central scheduling for up to 99 Learn relay panels. The timeclock
panel shall also include card slots for 1 optional telephone override card and
two optional global switch/annunciation cards.
3. The network timeclock will provide programming and editing capability for its
own schedule function. In addition, it shall provide similar program-
ming/editing capability for all of the devices on the dataline...Leam Relay
Panels, Phone Override cards, and Global Switching cards.
4. The Network timeclock shall be capable of controlling a Learn relay panel
Programmable System Switches (PSS) and relays. It shall do this by
transmitting commands over the dataline. A typical command will consist of
the Programmable System Switch address (Panel #/PSS Input#) and the ON
or OFF action desired. If the PSS address transmitted matches that of a PSS
in a Learn panel, that PSS will be actuated ON or OFF as commanded. The
relays associated with the PSS input will then be turned ON (OFF) using the
scenario (Master ON/OFF of Flick Warn) programmed for that input.
5. During normal operation, the network timeclock dataline commands will be
annunciated on its LCD display showing the action and the time transmitted.
Learn Panel PSS overrides, telephone overrides, and global switch overrides
will also be displayed as they occur.
B. Hardware Features
1. Mechanical
a. The network timeclock will be enclosed in a NEMA 1 panel with a
hinged lockable door keyed the same as the relay panels.
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHING SYSTEM
16920-l 1 96013
b. The unit will include three expansion card slots..;one for a telephone
override card, the other two for global switch/annunciator cards.
C. All wiring terminations will be made on a motherboard. Replacement
of a defective cards shall not require removaL OF ANY WIRING.
2. Data Entry/Display
The data entry and display capability will stress ease of programming and the
ability to confirm the operation of the unit. The following are minimum
requirements:
a. 40 character x 8 line LCD backlit LCD display
b. Function-specific keypad
C. Single screen format with “M-in-the-black” approach to both new data
entry and editing.
d. Programming manual and datasheets will be provided and a plastic
sleeve included for storage inside in the unit.
e. The same data entry/display will be capable of programming the
Learn Panels and the other optional dataline devices (telephone and
global switches).
3. Startup/Testing
The network timeclock shall provide a simple means for testing all devices on
the dataline and demonstrating the operation of all program data.
4. Program
a. The network timeclock shall allow up to 99 schedule events.
b. The unit shall use a 365 day clock with the ability to define up to 32
holidays by date, provide automatic Daylighting Savings Time,and
compensate for leap years.
C. An internal power backup shall provide up to 10 year carryover in the
event of a power outage.
5. Data Retention
The user program data will be stored in EEPROM providing lo-year data
retention without external power. Units retying on batteries with limited life for
data retention will not be allowed.
20 OCTOBER 1997
Cartsbad City Library
LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHING SYSTEM
16920-12 96013
6. Dataline Monitoring
C.
The network timeclock will monitor and annunciate dataline commands,
including its own transmissions and those of the Learn relay panels.
7. Dataline
a. Dataline shall be 18/2 twisted pair (Red = +, Black = -) with shield
meeting Class 2P NEC code requirements.d Minimum 1 turn per 3
inches; 50 pf/ft. max.
b. Max length...4000 ft.
C. Maximum number relay panels on a dataline. ..99
Approved Manufacturers
1. GE or equal.
2. GE TLC Catalog Numbers
a. Dataline
RDWIRE-2SP
b. Network Timeclock
RCLOCK
RDLPWR-1
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION:
A. Install all components as indicated and in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions and recommendations. .
1. All wiring shall be in conduit. Minimum conduit size shall be 3/4”.
B. All wiring shall be provided in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and
recommendations. Wiring shall comply with all local and state fire codes.
3.02 TESTING:
A. The Contractor shall perform all field inspection and witness all other field tests re-
quired to demonstrate the operational capability of the system. the Contractor shall
perform all field tests, and provide all labor, equipment and incidentals required for
testing.
1. Provide a manufacturers representative to supervise installation and final
testing of system.
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHING SYSTEM
16920- 13 96013
B. Entire system shall test free from opens, grounds, and short circuits.
C. All defective material and workmanship disclosed as a result at the tests in this
section shall be replaced and retested. The contractor shall show by demonstration
in service that all circuits and devices are in good operating condition. Tests shall
be such that each item of control equipment will function no less than five times.
3.03 PROGRAMMING
A. All system programming shall be done by the Manufacturer as part of the base bid.
The system performance requirements shall be closely coordinated with the User.
3.04 STARTUP:
A. The Contractor/Manufacturer shall provide a four (4) hour period from startup of the
system.
3.05 TRAINING:
A. As an addition to the requirements in Section 16011, “General Requirements,
Electrical” the Contractor shall provide a minimum of eight (8) hours of training for
User staff and maintenance personnel as part of the base bid.
1. The eight (8) hour training period shall not be part of the startup or
programming period.
l * l END‘OF SECTION l l l
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHING SYSTEM
16920-14 96013
SECTION 16930
THEATRICAL LIGHTING DIMMING SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:
A. The provisions of Section 16011, “General Requirements, Electrical” and Section
16050, ‘Basic Electrical Materials and Methods* apply to this section as if fully
repeated herein.
1.02 SPECIAL CONDITIONS:
A. The manufacturer of the theatrical lighting dimming system may provide the “House”
dimming system specified in Section 16915, “Lighting Dimming System” as part of
a combination system. Combination systems shall include all system functions,
components, training, programming and testing specified in both specification
Sections 16915 and 16930.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Testing and Certification:
1. Each system shall be checked out and started up on site by a factory trained
and authorized representative of the manufacturer. Representative shall
inspect, and after any necessary corrections, certify the installation and
operation of the system.
1.04 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS:
A. Manufacturer’s Product Data:
1. Submit for review and approval material specifications handling, shipping,
storage, and installation data for products specified under PART 2 -
PRODUCTS.
2. Submit for review and approval complete product data, including physical,
environmental and electrical characteristics on each unit of equipment.
Include complete control sequences: functional operations, controls, and
coverplates, engraving schedules.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Submit for review and approval shop drawings for fabrications, erection,
wiring, and connections not fully described by manufacturer’s data. Submit
scaled drawings of equipment, including code clearances and working
clearance, complete wiring interconnection drawings and schedules.
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
THEATRICAL LIGHTING DIMMING SYSTEM
16930-I 96013
2. Submit for review and approval shop drawings for the mounting of the
connector strips and theatrical lighting over the seating area and over the
stage area.
1.05 GENERAL MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS:
A. Source Quality Control:
1. Obtain materials (of each type) from a single manufacturer or source.
2. Do not change source or brands of materials during wurse of construction.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 Acceptable Manufacturers:
A. Electronic Theatre Controls (ETC), Inc., or equal.
1. The listing of a manufacturer as “acceptable” does not imply automatic
approval. It is the sole responsibility of the electrical contractor to ensure that
submittals made are for devices that meet or exceed the specifications
included herein.
CONTROL CONSOLE
A. General:
1. The lighting control console shall be a microprocessor based system
specificalty.designed to provide complete control of stage and studio lighting
systems. The control console shall be an ETC Express 24/48 or equal.
2.
3.
4.
The system shall provide control of 1,024 DMX512 controlled dimmers or
devices on a maximum of 48 control channels. Any or all of the DMX512
outputs may be controlled by a channel, and patched at a proportional level.
A maximum of 600 cues, 500 groups, ten pages of 24 submasters, 2,000
macros and a variety of user programmable default assignments shall be
contained in non-volatile electronic memory. This information shall constitute
a “show” and may be stored to a single 3.5-inch high density disk (one show
per disk).
The console shall provide two modes of operation: two-scene operation and
single-scene operation. In two-scene mode, the console shall provide two
scenes of 24 control channels each. In single-scene mode, the console shall
combine the two-scene channel fader controls into one scene of 48 control
channels or one scene of 24 control channels and 24 submasters. Selection
of the operating mode shall be a menu option under the System Setup
Display.
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
THEATRICAL LIGHTING DIMMING SYSTEM
16930-2 96013
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Two pile-on playback fader pairs shall be provided, with highest level
operation between each pair and last action operation within each pair. Each fader pair may execute a crossfade we, an allfade cue, a multipart cue, a
subroutine cue or an effect we. Dynamic rate control shall be provided for all
cues. Cue Only or Track options shall be available for cue recording.
48 overlapping additive channel sliders shall provide access to individual channels. In single scene - submaster mode, the first 24 sliders will remain
channel sliders. The last 24 sliders will function as submasters, providing access to additive looks or effects. The submasters may also be recorded as inhibitive.
A trackpad shall be provided for level and rate control or simultaneous control of linked channel groups for control of color changers and moving lights.
The console shall provide a standard VGA video output signal. System status information, including current channel intensities, cue information, and
system configuration may be displayed on a single high resolution VGA color
monitor.
The system shall direct user input through on-screen dynamic prompts and integral LEDs on console keys indicating current operating mode. An on-line
Help feature shall be provided to explain the operation of each feature of the
system.
Console software upgrades shall be made by the user via 3.5inch diskettes;
changing internal components shall not be required.
Connections for ETCLink and ETCNet shall be standard. ETCNet is the
system high-speed network based on Ethernet protocol that shall provide
communications between control devices and remote or peripheral devices.
Through ETCLink, the lighting control system shall be able to provide
communication with an ETC Sensor dimming system. ETCLink shall allow monitoring dimming system, rack and individual dimmer information from the
console. This information may be filtered by the user, allowing only critical
information to be posted. Dimmer information may be changed and backup
looks recorded from the console and sent to the dimming system via the
network.
13. Systems that do not provide the above capabilities shall not be acceptable.
B. Controls and playback:
The console shall provide, but not be limited to, the following:
1. Console keypad and trackpad
a. The console shall include a keypad with direct action keys. The keypad shall be grouped by function such as cue, group, and submaster record functions, numeric keys, level assignment
20 OCTOBER 1997 Carlsbad City Library THEATRICAL LIGHTING DIMMING SYSTEM 16930-3 96013
functions, display functions and display controls, softkeys, and macro
keys. Integral LEDs shall be associated with selected function keys for visual feedback.
b. A trackpad shall be associated with the keypad for proportional intensity control over selected channels or groups and for control of we and submaster playback timing. The trackpad may also be used
to simultaneously control two groups of linked channels. Two buttons
shall be associated with the trackpad to control its sensitivity
(Coarse/Low and Fine/High).
2. Playbacks
a. Single-Scene Operation
(1)
(2)
The playback faders shall consist of A/B and C/D pile-on automatic timed faders, each with [Go], [Hold], [Back], [Rate], and [Clear] keys and two 60 mm potentiometers for manual
override of the up and down fades.
It shall be possible to instantaneously halt an active cue, manually override the fade, and release it. Each fader may be assigned to the trackpad for proportional modification of cue
timing. The actual modified time value for the cue shall be
dynamically displayed as the rate is altered. The modified rate
may then be recorded as an attribute of the cue.
b. Two-Scene Preset Operation
(1)
(2)
Fading between scenes shall be accomplished with the AB
fader pair. Each crossfader may be operated manually in real time or may be assigned a time. Timed crossfades are assigned using [Rate] for proportional modification of cue
timing. The actual modified time value for the cue shall be dynamically displayed as the rate is altered. The AB fader’s [Go] and [Hold] buttons shall allow basic
control of the timed fade. [Back] and [Clear] shall allow for
quick stepping between the two scenes, ignoring the set
times.
3. Channel Faders
a. (48) proportional, fully overlapping faders shall be provided with
45mm potentiometers and bump buttons. Bump buttons may be
enabled or disabled. Removable write-on strips shall be provided.
b. The (48) faders, placed in channel mode, shall provide direct manual
control of the 48 channels. Channel levels may be affected at any
time by the individual channel sliders, by the keypad, by submasters or by recorded we levels.
20 OCTOBER 1997 Carlsbad City Library THEATRICAL LIGHTING DIMMING SYSTEM
169304 96013
4. Submasters
a. The last (24) sliders shall be capable of being programmed as submasters. Ten pages of submaster memory shall be provided.
b. Crossfade cues and groups may be individually or bank loaded to
submasters. The current stage look or a subset thereof may be recorded directly to a submaster. Each submaster may be assigned
an upfade and downfade time of up to 9959 and a dwell time, which may be manual, held or up to 99:59. The fade action may be initiated
by pressing the submaster bump button or executing a macro that
activates the submaster bump button.
C. Submaster timing may be modified by the trackpad. Modifications to
rates shall be automatically recorded as an attribute of the submaster.
d. Additionally, a submaster may have an effect recorded into it. When
the effect is activated either by pressing the submaster bump button
or by moving the submaster fader, the upfade time shall correspond
to the fade-in time for the running effect, and the downfade time for
the fade-out time of the effect. Effects may be left running indefinitely,
to be faded out by a second depression of the submaster bump
button or by moving the fader back to the home position.
e. The submasters may also be placed in inhibitive mode. Changes in
submaster status between additive and inhibitive, or when changing
pages shall not become effective until the submaster is set to its home position. Submaster LEDs shall flash to indicate submasters in
a “loading” state.
5. Master fader and Blackout key
A 45mm potentiometer shall be provided that shall be user-selectable as a Grandmaster, a Sub Grandmaster, a Scenemaster or disabled. An alternate action Blackout key shall be located near the Master fader. It may be disabled
in the Setup Menu.
C. Operating modes:
All operating modes shall have softkey access to functions specific to that mode. The
system shall provide, but not be limited to, the following functions:
1. Stage Mode
The Stage Mode shall allow live changes.
a. Channel lists may be constructed using the [And], [Thru] and [Except]
keys. Levels may also be set with the keypad or trackpad. “Selected” channels shall be those last addressed and under trackpad or keypad
,-
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
THEATRICAL LIGHTING DIMMING SYSTEM
16930-5 96013
b.
C.
d.
e.
f.
h.
I.
j.
k. Any cue number may be recorded as an effect or a subroutine cue.
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
control. “Captured” channels shall be those whose current level has
been set with the keypad.
Channels may be controlled by the trackpad, as determined by the Channel Link map. Accessing a linked channel shall place it on the
appropriate axis and shall place its linked channel(s) on the opposing
axis.Any channel may be assigned independent status and will not be
effected by the Master, blackout, flash and solo operations.
Channels may be set at a user defined default level using the [Level]
key.
The [Release] key shall be used to restore selected channels, captured channels and then independent channels to current
playback levels
Selected channels may be set at a level or held to current values while all other channels are set to zero using [Solo]. Toggling [Solo] shall restore all unselected channels to original levels.
[Sneak] shall fade a channel(s) from its current setting to a specified level or a level set by fader or submaster input. Channels may fade in a user-defined default time or be given a specific time by the operator.
Non-independent channels may be isolated and flagged between its
current value and full or zero using [Flash].
Channels may be recorded into groups at proportional levels for fast
recall of commonly used looks. 500 groups, shall be available.
Groups may then be used as building blocks for cues, submasters and other groups.
The recorded contents of submasters and cues may also be accessed as groups, allowing numerous discrete looks to be quickly compiled.
(600) cues may be recorded in any order. Each crossfade or allfade
cue may have up to eight parts. Up to nine decimal cues may be inserted between any two (2) whole number cues. It shall be possible
to record cues with the following information:
(1)
ii;
(4)
ii;
Fade time of up to 99:59, with split up and down as required Wait time for the up or down fade of up to 99:59
Link to Cue or Link to Macro command
Follow times of up to 99:59
Menu-definable default fade time1 A modified rate
THEATRICAL LIGHTING DIMMING SYSTEM 16930-6 96013
I. Channels levels may be specified to track or not track when
modifications are made to existing cues.
m.
n.
The [Only] key shall allow specific parameters to be adjusted for several selected groups. The [Except] key may be used during recording to exclude cues,
submasters, groups, or channels from the record destination.
0. [Update] may be used to selectively add modified channel levels to the designated cue, cue part, group or submaster without recording
other stage information.
[Quickstep] shall provide a means to run through a show, checking all cues, without having to wait for fades. When Quickstep is active, the faders shall ignore all upfade, downfade and wait times. Quickstep shall be accessible in Stage or Fader modes.
[About] shall allow the operator to access information about a selected dimmer or a selected channel. About Show shall provide memory capacity information. About shall be accessible in any mode.
r. The [Learn] feature, accessible in any mode, shall allow the user to record macros in real time, using any key on the console.
S. On-line Help commands, describing each key, trackpad and fader function (including softkeys) shall be provided. This feature shall be
accessible in any mode.
t. Dimmer check and channel check functions shall be provided.
2. Blind Mode
The Blind Mode allows modification to cues, groups, submasters, effects, and subroutines without affecting stage levels.
a. The Blind Cue display shall allow preview, creation, deletion and modification of cues, cue parts, effects, and subroutines. Modifications may be recorded in a “Cue Only” or “Tracking” manner. All cue attributes may be changed in this mode. The Cue List shall display the recorded cues with all associated attributes. Range editing
of cue attributes shall be possible in this display.
b. The Blind Group display shall allow preview, creation, deletion and modification of groups. The Group List shall display recorded groups.
C. The Blind Submaster display shall allow preview and modification of
submasters. All submaster attributes may be changed in this mode. The Submaster List shall display each submaster number, up/dwelt/down fade times, current output level, type, and bump button status. Range editing of attributes shall be possible in this display.
,-
20 OCTOBER 1997 Carlsbad City Library THEATRICAL LIGHTING DIMMING SYSTEM 16930-7 96013
d. Effect cues and submasters may be created and edited in the Blind
Effect Mode.
(1)
- (2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
Any cue or any submasters may be programmed as an effect. Effect channels operate in a “last action” manner when run through a fader, and are “highest level” when accessed through a submaster. An effect may contain (100) steps, with ten (10) channels or
groups per step. Each step may contain a step time, fade in, dwell and fade out time, high and low level. Range editing of steps shall be provided. Each effect may be recorded with overali fade in, dwell and
fade out times. The dwell time may be “held”, allowing the
operator to manually initiate the fade out of the effect. The
timing values shall be associated with the submaster bump button when an effect cue is loaded to a submaster.
Effects attributes may be assigned in a variety of
combinations. Attributes shall include positive, negative,
reverse, bounce, build, alternate and random. A random rate
may be assigned to any effect. Steps may be edited with [+] and [-] commands. Steps may
be inserted and deleted, with subsequent steps automatically
renumbered.
During effect we playback, the left fader shall become a level
master and the rate may be controlled by the trackpad. The rate may then be recorded as an attribute of the effect. The level of an effect loaded on a submaster shall be controlled by the submaster and the rate shall be controlled
by the trackpad. The proportional time value shall be
automatically recorded as a submaster attribute.
e. Subroutines shall be created and edited in the Blind Subroutine
Mode.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Subroutines are special cues that control the playback of a
series of existing cues, similar to an effect. Subroutines shall allow modification of each we’s fade time and crossfade level without changing those elements in the base cue. Any cue
may be recorded as a subroutine and any cue (other than a
subroutine cue) may be placed in a subroutine. Subroutines may contain up to (100) steps, each of which may control a cue, its crossfade level, up and down fade time,
follow time and fade type. Any step may also be programmed
to loop back, bounce, hold for go command or jump to a
specified cue when the follow time has elapsed.
Subroutine steps may be inserted and deleted, with
subsequent steps automatically renumbered. Range editing
is also provided.
During subroutine playback, the left fader shall become a
level master and the rate may be controlled by the trackpad.
20 OCTOBER 1997 THEATRICAL LIGHTING DIMMING SYSTEM
Carlsbad City Library 16930-a 96013
3. Patch Mode
The Patch Mode shall be used to display the system control channels with their associated dimmer assignments, proportional level and profiles.
a. A dimmer may be assigned a proportional level and one of ten
profiles.
b. Multiplex dimmer assignments shall allow A/B patching when the
system supports ETC Source Four fixtures, multiplexers and Sensor
dimmers.
4. Setup Mode
The Setup Mode shall access system configuration information and provide
access to memory functions.
a. The Setup menu shall allow access to a number of secondary
operations and sub menus. The date and time shall be set in the
Setup menu. A ZO-character show name may be entered as well.
b. The Systems Settings menu shall allow access to system defaults,
including:
(1)
(2)
;:; (5)
I;;
g; (10)
Number of system channels and dimmers Default up and down fade times Default level Default fader clear time Default Sneak time
Flexichannel mode selection
1 Z/24 hour clock option Record Lockout option Master function selection
Blackout Button option
C. The Input/Output menu shall be used to define the starting DMX number for each DMX output port, or to specify Multiplex operation on
a port to port basis, to support the Source Four Multiplexer. The DMX
transmission speed may be varied to accommodate a variety of DMX receivers.
d. The Diskette Functions menu shall provide access to disk procedures, including formatting, storing to and loading from 3-l/2” diskette. It shall be possible to load all show data from disk. Each show shall be date and time stamped.
e. The Clear Functions menu shall allow clear memory functions. It shall be possible to clear the entire memory, or to clear specified sections as required.
20 OCTOBER 1997 Carlsbad City Library THEATRICAL LIGHTING DIMMING SYSTEM 16930-g 96013
f.
h.
I.
i
k.
I.
The Print Menu shall allow hard copy printouts of selected parts of the show memory. Printing shall be a background task, and shall not prohibit other functions of the console.
The Options Settings Menu shall allow the user to enable and select
ETC MIDI, MIDI Show Control (Vl.0) or MIDI Time Code functions, or Dimmer monitoring features, and set the Display screen preferences.
The Macro Menu shall provide a method to record, view and edit
system macros. A maximum of 2,000 macros may be recorded, either
in this display or in Learn mode. Macros may contain up to 50 key
presses each. Most console keys may be programmed into macros.
Macro Wait and Link macro commands shall be provided.
A Dimmer Monitoring display shall be provided for feedback from ETC Sensor dimming systems, via ETCLink network. This shall provide information about the system, individual racks and individual dimmers, as required. Individual dimmer loads may be recorded and monitored if the racks are equipped with the Advanced Features
option.
A Channel Attributes display shall allow channel attributes to be
programmed. A channel may be programmed for independent operation. Independent channels are not effected by the
Grandmaster, Blackout, solo or flash. A channel may also be
assigned a “flip” attribute, which places an inverse profile on the dimmers controlled by that channel.
The Channel Link List option shall allow channels and groups to be linked together and assigned to appear on the trackpad. When one or more linked channels are selected, their respective channels shall
be automatically assigned to. the appropriate axis.
Real Time Clock Event programming shall allow initiation of up to
(500) events at specified times on selected days of the week.
D. Interface options:
1. Full Console
The full console shall support a variety of standard peripheral devices. The console shall provide connectors for the following:
a. AC input for external power supply
b. DMX512 output (two connectors)
C. MIDI In/Out
d. Parallel printer
20 OCTOBER 1997 THEATRICAL LIGHTING DIMMING SYSTEM Carlsbad City Library 16930-10 96013
e. Remote Focus Unit
f. VGA CRT (one connector)
ETCLink
.-
h. ETCNet (Twisted Pair or ThinNet only)
i. Remote Macros and Remote Output for switched contact closures
E. Physical:
1. All operator controls and console electronics for a standard system shall be
housed in a single desktop console, 43” long, 15” deep, 6” high, weighing 30
pounds. Console power shall be 90 - 240V AC at 50 or 60 Hz, supplied via
an external power supply.
F. Provide the following:
(1) - Express 24/48 Memory Control Console(s). Each console includes:
(1) - VGA Monitor (one required for each console)
(1) - Monitor Dust Cover (one per monitor) (1) - Console Dust Cover (l)- Remote Interface Unit(s) (l)- Remote Video Interface Unit(s) (I)- High Speed Dot Matrix Printer with 10’ cable
(l)- 300 dpi Laser Printer
(l)- Printer Dust Cover /
2.03 INTEGRATED PROCESSOR UNIT:
A. The processor unit is the electronic center of the architectural controls system. The
integrated processor unit shall support 32 wall stations or remote devices in any
number of rooms. A maximum of 512 DMX512 dimmers may be assigned to one of
128 system control zones. A maximum of 250 presets and system events shall be allowed. The processor shall receive inputs from wall stations, lighting control consoles, Windows’ based PCs, and/or third party devices. It shall process the
information and distribute it to dimmer racks, building management systems,
audio/visual systems, and/or other associated devices. A Windows@’ based
configuration program shall allow patching dimmers to zones, with proportional levels and user selectable dimmer output curves; programming presets and system events;
naming of presets and channels; and setting room and station assignments.
B. Electrical:
1. The processor unit shall be a microprocessor based, solid state device. The field programmable system configuration and program information shall be
stored in Flash Memory, which does not require battery backup. Systems
requiring battery backup memory shall not be acceptable. A PCMCIA socket
shall be provided for system configuration and program information backup
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
THEATRICAL LIGHTING DIMMING SYSTEM
16930-l 1 96013
and update. Systems without a simple method of backup shall not be
acceptable.
2. A DMX512 input shall be provided for snapshot input via the Control Electronics Module (CEM) with which it is mounted. This input shall accept level information from any DMX source. The DMX512 input shall be opto-
isolated from the rest of the electronics, with the isolation exceeding 1500 V.
Systems without opto-isolation shall not be acceptable.
3. A DMX512 output shall be provided. This output shall transmit level
information to dimmers and other DMX devices.
4. An Echelon@ Link Power” network port shall be provided for communications
with wall stations, remote interfaces, and other third party network devices.
The Link Power network shall utilize polarity-independent, low-voltage Class
II unshielded twisted pair (UTP) wiring, type Belden 9471, or equivalent. The
network topology may be bus, loop, home-run, or any combination of these
three. Systems utilizing a proprietary low voltage station network shall not be acceptable.
5. Operating voltage for the processor shall be provided by the CEM on which the integrated processor is mounted. In the event of power loss, the processor shall return to its last valid state when power is restored. The CEM
LCD display and keypad shall provide the user interface for the integrated
processor. All contractor terminations shall be via pressure connections on an edge connector mounted terminal strip.
System Functions:
1. It shall be possible to record presets, consisting of any number of zones set
to any level with an associated fade time. It shall be possible to recall a
preset from a pushbutton, remote input, Astronomical Time Clock event (ATC), or macro.
2. A macro language shall allow sequences of presets and system events to be stored and recalled. Conditional arguments may be used within a macro to check time or input states. Macros may be assigned to pushbuttons, remote
inputs, and/or ATC events.
3. An internal ATC shall allow presets and system events to be recalled at a
preprogrammed time relative to sunrise or sunset or at a specific time of day.
Systems not providing an internal ATC shall not be acceptable.
4. A room combine function shall allow adjacent sections of a dividable room to be combined or divided, such that their combined lighting may be controlled from any or all of their wall stations. Room combine functions may be assigned to pushbuttons remote inputs, macro, or ATC events.
20 OCTOBER 1997 THEATRICAL LIGHTING DIMMING SYSTEM Carlsbad City Library 16930-12 96013
D. Setup:
1. A setup menu shall be provided with the processor. This menu shall be accessed using the LCD display and keypad of the CEM on which the
processor is mounted. This menu shall provide basic setup functions. A
Windows@ based configuration program shall be provided for setup and
programming of any size system. All functions of the system may be configured and monitored using this program. Configuration shall not be required in systems with only one room.
E. Mechanical:
1. The Unison integrated processor shall be installed in the CEM of a Sensor dimmer. rack.
2.04 INSTALLATION RACK
A. The installation rack shall be the Sensor as manufactured by Electronic Theatre Controls, Inc., or equal. The fully digital dimmer rack shall consist of up to 48 dimmer module spaces. Sensor rack systems shall be UL Listed and CSA Approved, and shall be so labeled when delivered to job site.
B. Electrical:
1. Sensor racks shall operate at up to 120/208V, three phase, four wire + ground, 47 to 63 Hz at 800 amps. Other voltage and phase options are available upon request. Sensor racks shall automatically compensate for frequency variations during operation. Provisions shall be made for optional amp trap devices for fault current protection. Standard AIC fault current protection shall be 10,000, with up to 100,000 available optionally.
2. All load and neutral terminals shall accept up to a #2 AWG wire.
C. Electronics:
1. Dimmer control electronics shall be contained in one plug-in Control Electronics Module (CEM). Each CEM shall contain no discrete wire connections, and be housed in a formed steel body with an injection-molded face panel. The CEM shall have three phase-status LED indicators. A 25-key control pad and a two-line-by-ZO-character backlit LCD shall be provided for
system configuration, testing and diagnostics. LCD shall also display rack
status and error messages.
2. The following keys shall be provided: ten numeric keys, [Reset], [Dimmer], [Setup], [About], P=Jwl, [AtI, PJe4, WBI, [ClearI, [(I, [(II Nl, [ThM, [EnterI, and [Exit].
3. The CEM shall contain the following user displays:
a. Status display to show rack identification and errors. Error Messages
shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
THEATRICAL LIGHTING DIMMING SYSTEM
16930-13 96013
b.
C.
d.
e.
f.
9.
h.
(1) Dimmer has shut down due to over temperature
;;
DMX port A or B has an error or has failed
Phase A, B or C is below 90 volts
g; Phase A, B or C is above 140 volts Rack has shut down due to improper startup voltage
(6) Rack has shut down due to air flow loss
[ii;
Ambient temperature is below 32°F
Ambient temperature is above 104°F
(9) Rack has shut down - ambient temperature exceeds 114°F
Dimmer display to set a dimmer or dimmers to a level. (CEM shall
allow user to set single dimmers or groups of dimmers from integral
keypad.)
Backup display to program and activate system-wide backup looks.
About display shall allow monitoring of system, rack or dimmer status.
About System shall provide information about Sensor’s Multiplex mode, Panic circuits, Backup looks and System name
About Rack shall provide information about rack voltage, starting addresses, ambient temperature and rack type.
About Dimmer shall provide information about dimmer size and type,
location, output levels including source, recorded loads and current loads.
Setup display shall allow but not be limited to, configuring of rack
addresses, dimmer firing mode, and boost values.
(1)
(2)
The CEM shall respond to control changes in less than 25 milliseconds. Dimmer outputs shall exhibit no oscillating or hunting for levels. Dimmers set to the same level shall output within *lV of each other, regardless of phase or electronic
module control.
Dimmer output shall be regulated for incoming line voltages. The regulation shall adjust for both RMS voltage changes and deformations in the incoming AC wave form. The CEM shall
monitor and adjust each dimmer’s output to maintain a
constant power to the load. Regulation shall maintain the
desired output voltage *lV for the entire operating range (90-140V AC) with the exception that the maximum output will be no greater than the line voltage minus dimmer insulation loss. The regulation shall compensate for dips and anomalies in the AC wave form on a dimmer-by-dimmer basis. There shall be no interaction between dimmers in the system or any other equipment. The output shall be nominally regulated to
12OV, but shall be field adjustable on a dimmer-by-dimmer
basis to allow for varying cable length.
20 OCTOBER 1997 THEATRICAL LIGHTING DIMMING SYSTEM Carlsbad City Library 16930-14 96013
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
D. ETCLink Network:
The entire response to incoming line changes shall take no more than 25 milliseconds. Dimming systems that do not respond to line fluctuations and do not contain wave
deformation detection shall not be acceptable.
Two optically isolated DMX512 inputs shall be provided,
allowing overlapping or separation of any control level. 2,500V
of optical isolation shall be provided between the DMX512
inputs and the CEM. This shall protect the DMX512 inputs from a failed control module and the CEM from failed
DMX512 inputs. Systems that do not have optical isolation on
a prewired factory plug-in device shall not be acceptable. The CEM shall be completely digital without employing any digital-to-analog demultiplexing schemes or analog ramping circuits. Each rack shall, in the event of signal loss, maintain the last level for a user-programmable time of zero to five minutes or indefinitely. Systems that do not offer this feature shall not be acceptable. The CEM shall contain diagnostic routines to allow the user
to test and troubleshoot the system. The CEM shall contain
a Test/Bypass switch to turn all dimmers on to full for testing. This switch shall bypass all electronics and shall force the fan on. A system-wide panic circuit shall be provided. Any dimmer in
any rack may be assigned to the panic circuit.
The CEM shall be able to record up to 32 backup looks (16 in systems exceeding 2,000 dimmers). Backup looks shall be programmable by recording current dimmer levels (as set by the console), by entering dimmer levels on the CEM directly, or a combination of both methods. When a backup look is active, the DMX512 inputs shall be ignored. All system functions may be activated by the CEM’s integral keypad and shall not require any remote unit. Systems that do
not offer this feature shall not be acceptable.
Through the ETCLink network, optional remote control devices shall be available.
1. The ETCLink network shall provide remote monitoring, programming and backup functions for the system through any Sensor-compatible console, PC,
or hand-held remote device. System information shall also be displayed on
any system interface including the CEM and the devices listed above.
Systems that do not provide both types of user interface shall not be
acceptable.
2. ETCLink shall provide an integral link to connect all racks in the system for
rack-to-rack communication. Information for all configuration and backup looks shall be stored in all CEM’s to allow swapping of CEM’s throughout the system. Systems not storing all configuration data and backup looks for each
dimmer in all control modules shall not be acceptable.
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library THEATRICAL LIGHTING DIMMING SYSTEM 16930-15 96013
3. A technician shall be able to program all parameters onsite, using a laptop personal computer. These parameters shall include, but not be limited to,
defining rook type, module type, output voltage (boost) for each dimmer, firing
mode, curve, dimmer numbering and DMX512 port assignments. Systems requiring factory programming shall not be acceptable.
E. Advanced Features:
1. Sensor’s Advanced Features (AF) option shall add an additional sensor in the
individual dimmer modules. The AF option shall allow monitoring of current
and output voltage on a dimmer-by-dimmer basis and provide information on
lamp burnouts, dimmer status, and input voltages.
2. Dimmer-specific information, such as dimmer failure or SCR failure shall be
displayed as an error on the CEM and any monitoring device. Advanced Features dimmer errors to be detected shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
a. Load has dropped below recorded value
b. Load has raised above recorded value
C. DC detected on dimmer output
d. One SCR has failed on (off)
e. Dimmer has failed on (both SW’s)
f. Dimmer has failed off or circuit breaker has tripped
Dimmer has been removed
h. Dimmer load has failed
3. The CEM shall allow the user to record the loads of all AF dimmers in the
system. The CEM shall, during operation, test each AF dimmer, determine
its load, and compare it to the recorded load. Any change from recorded loads greater than five percent shall display an error on the CEM and any
monitoring device on the ETCLink network.
F. Physical:
1. The Sensor dimmer rack shall be a free-standing, deadfront switchboard,
substantially framed and enclosed with X-gauge, formed steel panels. All
rack components shall be property treated, primed and finished. Exterior
surfaces shall be finished in fine texture, scratch resistant, gray epoxy paint.
Removable top and bottom panels shall facilitate conduit termination on the
48 module rack. Knockouts shall sewe the same purpose on 12 and 24 module racks.
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
THEATRICAL LIGHTING DIMMING SYSTEM
16930-16 96013
2. Racks shall be designed for front access to allow back-to-back or
side-by-side installation.
3. Racks shall be designed to allow easy insertion and removal of all modules
without the use of tools. Supports shall be provided for precise alignment of dimmer modules into power and signal connector blocks. With modules removed, racks shall provide clear front access to all load, neutral and control terminations. Racks that require removable panels to access load, neutral or
control terminations shall not be acceptable.
4. An optional bus bar kit shall be available from the factory to allow adjacent
racks to be powered by a single line feed. No hard, rack-to-rack wiring shall be required. Racks that require discrete cabling to connect adjacent racks shall not be acceptable.
5. Module spaces shall be mechanically keyed to accept only the module type (ZOA, 50A or 1OOA) specified for that space. Racks that allow modules of varying wattages to plug into the same space shall not be acceptable. The rack shall be configurable to accept mixed dimmer types and sizes throughout the rack.
6. Each rack shall provide a lockable full-height door containing an integral
electrostatic air filter that shall be removable for easy cleaning. A single low-noise fan shall be located at the top of each rack. The fan shall draw all intake air through the integral electrostatic air filter, over the surfaces of the
module housing and out the top of the rack. The fan shall maintain the
temperature of all components at proper operating levels with dimmers under
full load, provided the ambient temperature of the dimmer room does not
exceed 4O(C/104(F. Dimmer racks that do not employ both locking doors and electrostatic air filters shall not be acceptable. The fan shall turn on whenever any dimmer in the system is activated. In the event of an over-temperature
condition, only the affected dimmer module(s) shall shut down and a
message shall appear on the control module LCD. The fans shall remain on during thermal shutdown of individual dimmer modules.
7. An air flow sensor shall be provided. In the event of inadequate air flow, the
affected rack shall shut down until the error is corrected.
8. If the ambient room temperature drops below O(C/32(F or rises above
4O(C/104(F, a warning shall appear on the dimmer rack LCD. If the
temperature rises above 46(C/115(F, the rack shall shut down until the condition is corrected.
9. A 3 x .5-inch LED status indicator (beacon) shall be mounted in the rack door.
The beacon shall be visible throughout a wide viewing angle. In normal
operation conditions, this LED is illuminated. If the rack’s control module
senses an error condition, the beacon shall flash until the error is corrected.
An optional indicator shall be available for remote locations.
20 OCTOBER 1997 THEATRICAL LIGHTING DIMMING SYSTEM Carlsbad City Library 16930-17 96013
2.05 DIMMER MODULES:
A. The dimmer modules shall be the Sensor dimmer modules as manufactured by
Electronic Theatre Controls, Inc., or equal. Sensor dimmer modules shall be
designed for dependable, economical service in theatrical and video applications.
B. Electrical:
1. Each dimmer shall provide, but not be limited to, the following:
a. Each dimmer module shall contain one or two single-pole circuit
breakers, a solid state switching module, associated toroidal filters,
and power and control connectors.
b. Modules shall not have any protruding pins subject to physical
damage when the module is not installed.
C. Modules shall be keyed so that dimmer modules of different capacity
shall not be interchangeable.
d. Circuit breakers shall be fully magnetic so the trip current is not
affected by ambient temperature. Circuit breakers shall be rated for
tungsten loads having an inrush rating of no less than 20 times
normal current. Circuit breakers shall be rated for 100 percent
switching duty applications.
C. SCR Assembly:
1. Each dimmer module shall use a solid state module (SSM) consisting of two
silicon-controlled rectifiers (SCRs) in an inverse parallel configuration, and all
required gating circuitry on the high voltage side of an integral, opto-coupled
control voltage isolator. Rectifiers, copper leads and a ceramic substrate shall
be reflow soldered to an integral heat sink for maximum heat dissipation. The
SSM shall also contain a control LED, a thermistor for temperature sensing,
and silver-plated control and load contacts. The Advanced Features version
of the SSM shall include an integral output LED, output voltage sensors and
current sensors for feedback to the control module. The entire SSM shall be
sealed in a plastic housing requiring only a screwdriver to replace. Dimmers
employing triac power devices, pulse transformers, or other isolating devices
not providing at least 2,500V RMS isolation, shall not be acceptable. Dimmer
modules requiring disassembly;heat sink grease or additional tools for repair
shall not be acceptable.
2. All electronic components (current/voltage sensors and indicators) shall be
contained in a single, field-replaceable housing. Modules requiring discrete
wiring of electronic components shall not be acceptable.
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
THEATRICAL LIGHTING DIMMING SYSTEM
16930-18 96013
3. SCR power switching devices shall have the following minimum ratings:
Module Size:
Single cycle:
Peak surge current
a $oJ 1 OOA
625A 1200A 2300A
Half cycle: 12T
Transient over
voltage
1620 4150
600V 600V
Die size (in) 0.257 0.394
D. Filtering:
22000
600V
0.570
Dimmer modules shall include toroidal filters to reduce the rate of current rise time
resulting from switching the SCRs. The filter shall limit objectionable harmonics,
reduce lamp filament sing and limit radio frequency interference on line and load
conductors. Modules shall be available in six models offering 350, 450, 500, or 800
ms. filter rise times. Rise time shall be measured at the worst case slew rate (about
50 percent) from 10 to 90 percent of the output wave form with the dimmer operating
at full load.
E. Performance:
Power efficiency for standard dimmers shall be at least 97 percent at full load with
a no-load loss of 3V RMS. The dimmer shall accept hot patching of a cold
incandescent load up to the full rated capacity of the dimmer.
F. Physical:
Dimmer modules shall be fully plug-in and factory wired. Dimmer modules shall
consist of a heavy duty, die-cast aluminum chassis with integral face panel. No tools
shall be required for module removal and insertion. All parts shall be property treated,
primed and finished in fine-texture, scratch resistant, gray epoxy powder coat. With
the exception of the circuit breaker, the module shall contain no moving parts. Each
module shall be labeled with the manufacturer’s name, catalog number and rating.
Modules constructed of molded plastic for structural support are not equivalent and
are not acceptable. Dimmer modules shall be UL Recognized.
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
THEATRICAL LIGHTING DIMMING SYSTEM
16930-19 96013
2.06 CONNECTOR STRIPS:
A. Description:
1. Wiring devices shall be fabricated from 16 gauge cold rolled steel, in 8’0”
sections. Devices shall be properly cleaned, primed and painted with
tine-textured, scratch resistant, black powder coat. Circuit numbers shall be
3/4” Lexan tags with white letters on black background.
2. Individual pigtails and outlets shall be evenly spaced, on 12” centers in
connector strips, or as otherwise specified. Where a circuit would fall on a
joint it shall be moved 3” towards the junction box end of the strip.
3. Pigtails shall be three-wire type “SO” rubber jacketed cable sized for the
circuit capacity. Connectors are 20 amp twistlocks with ground. Internal
wiring shall be sized to circuit capacity and terminated in feed through
compression terminals at one end for ease of installation. Wire shall be rated
at 125’.
4. Devices except for wall mounted boxes shall be supplied with appropriate
hardware for mounting as shown on the drawings. Connector strips shall
have brackets on 5’ centers.
5. Wiring devices shall be UL Laboratories Listed.
2.07 ELLIPSOIDAL SPOTLIGHTS
A. The instrument shall be a Source Four ellipsoidal spotlight as manufactured by
Electronic Theatre Controls, Inc., or equal.
B. Physical:
1. The unit shall be constructed of rugged, die cast aluminum, free of burrs and
pits, finished in black, high temperature epoxy paint. Tools shall not be
required for either lamp alignment or cleaning the reflector or lens
2. The following shall be provided:
a. Integral cable clamp for power leads.
b. Positive locking of lamp focus and independent lamp alignment
controls.
C. High impact, thermally insulated knobs and shutter handles.
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
THEATRICAL LIGHTING DIMMING SYSTEM
16930-20 96013
,- d. Reflector secured with shock mounts
8. Lens secured with silicone shock mounts
f. Rotating shutter assembly - 50( rotation
20 gauge stainless steel shutters
h. Interchangeable lens tubes for different field angles with Teflon
guides for smooth tube movement
i. Sturdy gel frame holders with two accessory slots, and a top
mounted, quick release gel frame retainer
j. Rugged 3116” x l-114” steel yoke with two mounting positions allowing
300(+ rotation of the fixture within the yoke
k. Positive locking, hand operated yoke clutch
I. Slot with sliding cover for motorized pattern devices or optional iris
C. Optical:
1. The optical train shall combine a compact filament lamp with a precision
molded borosilicate, ellipsoidal reflector and aspheric lens to produce an
optimum cosine field.
2. The unit shall provide, but not be limited to:
a. Molded borosilicate reflector with multiple dichroic layers
b. 95% of visible light shall be reflected while 90% of infrared light as
heat shall be transmitted through the reflector
C. Low gate and beam temperature
d. Sharp imaging through a bi-planar shutter design
e. Projector-quality, high contrast aspheric lens, with an anti-reflective
coating to increase transmission
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
THEATRICAL LIGHTING DIMMING SYSTEM
16930-2 1 96013
D. Performance:
1. The unit shall be precision engineered to use a 575W lamp to deliver an
even, intense field with cosine distribution.
2. The unit shall provide, but not be limited to:
a. 5, 10, 19, 26, 36, and 50 degree field angles
b. Projector-quality pattern imaging
C. Sharp shutter cuts without halation
d. Shutter warping and burnout in normal use shall be unacceptable
e. Adjustable hard and soft beam edges
3. The unit shall be UL and CUL listed and so labeled.
E. Lamp:
1. The high efficiency lamp shall be a 575 watt HPL lamp which is a compact
tungsten filament contained in a krypton-filled quartz envelope. The lamp
shall mount axially within the reflector. The lamp base shall have a integral
die cast aluminum heat sink that reduces seal temperature and ensures
proper lamp alignment. The lamp socket shall be ATP 220 nickel gold plated.
2.08 SPOTLIGHT WITH REFLECTOR:
A. The instrument shall be a Source Four par spotlight as manufactured by Electronic
Theatre Controls, Inc., or equal.
B. Lamp:
1. The instrument shall utilize a 575 watt HPL lamp which is a compact
tungsten filament contained in a krypton-filled quartz envelope.
2. The lamp shall mount axially within the reflector and shall be prefocused
within the reflector.
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
THEATRICAL LIGHTING DIMMING SYSTEM
16930-22 98013
3. The lamp base shall have a integral die cast aluminum heat sink that reduces
seal temperature and ensures proper lamp alignment.
4. The lamp socket shall be ATP 220 nickel gold plated.
5. All versions of the instrument shall use only lamp type, the HPL lamp.
Fixtures which require the purchasing of multiple lamp types to achieve
different field angles shall not be acceptable.
C. Physical:
1. The spotlights are constructed of rugged, die cast aluminum, free of burrs
and pits, finished in black, high temperature epoxy paint. Tools shall not be
required for cleaning the reflector or lens
2. The spotlight shall provide, but not be limited to:
a. Integral cable clamp for power leads
b. High impact, thermally insulated knobs
C. Sealed reflector housing shall prevent all light leaks. Temperature
control of reflector is obtained through 17 heat sink fins cast into the
housing.
d. Interior of unit shall contain ten baffles to eliminate beam scattering
and spill light.
e. Lamp socket shall be held into place by a brass self retaining screw.
f. Lens shall be secured with cast bosses and high temperature bronze
spring release. No tools shall be required to change lenses.
Sturdy gel frame holders with two accessory slots and a top mounted,
quick release gel frame retainer
h. Rugged steel yoke with two mounting positions 300(+ Rotation of
fixture within yoke
i. Positive locking, hand operated yoke clutch
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
THEATRICAL LIGHTING DIMMING SYSTEM
16930-23 96013
D.
i Each unit shall be provided standard with wlorframe and 36” bare
lead.
k. Unit shall be nominally 1l”long by 10” wide
I. Weight without “C” clamp shall be 8 Ibs.
m. The spotlight shall be UL and CUL approved
Lenses:
1. It shall be possible to change field type of the spotlight through
interchangeable lenses. No tools shall be necessary for lens changing. 360(
Beam rotation shall be possible while the unit is active. No tools shall be
necessary for lens rotation. Fixtures which require user to touch the lamp or
lamp socket to orientate the beam shall not be acceptable.
a. Interchangeable lens sets shall consist of clear, very narrow spot,
narrow spot, medium flood, and wide flood. Lenses shall be heat
resistant, borosilicate glass.
b. Beam orientation of MFL and WFL lenses shall be possible through
rotation of lenses in a rotatable collar housed in the front of the unit.
Collar shall be a high temperature heat resistant rotating collar with
finger holds for precise movement.
E.. Optical:
1. The optical train shall combine a compact filament lamp with modified
parabolic and multifaceted reflector. Reflector efficiency shall be a minimum
of 93%. Reflector shall be cast into a heat sink assembly. Reflector finish
shall be an enhanced aluminum deposition. Reflectors of pressed aluminum
sheet construction shall not be acceptable.
2.09 MATERIALS:
A. The theatrical lighting dimming system shall consist of the following materials. The
catalog information is based on Electronic Theatre Controls (ETC), Inc., or equal.
B. Dimmer Rack - Model Sensor to contain:
(1) SR12 dimmer enclosure for 12 modules, designed for 3 phase, 4 wire and
ground operation at a maximum of 200 amps, 208/12OV, 60Hz AC.
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
THEATRICAL LIGHTING DIMMING SYSTEM
16930-24 96013
(12) D20E Dual 20A dimmer modules 500~s rise time (24 dimmers)
(3) AFM Air Flow modules
(1) CEM 48UP Sensor
(1) Locking doors with filter
C. EXPRESS 24148 Control Console - 24.48 channels x 1,024 dimmers - to contain:
(24) Channel two scene operation
(48) Channel one scene operation
(600) Cues
(500) Groups
(1) Set effects with 100 steps each
(2,000) Macros/Regions
(24) Submasters
(2) Timed/Manual fader pairs
(1) 3.5” Diskette drive
(1) Single VGA output
1. Accessories
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
CD-25DMX Digital control cable
CD25ETCLink control cable
ECPB-DMWLINK Console plug-in station
Control console dust wver
VGA Color monitor
D. Unison Link power Supply - Model ULPSA - surface wall mounted.
E. Model U10005-11 F - (1) required - Unison Control Station with:
(1) White faceplate assembly to inlude the following:
a. (4) “Preset X” Select Switches
b. (1) “Off” Select Switch
F. Model ULCD-1 F - (1) required - Unison Control Station with:
(1) White faceplate assembly to include the following:
a. (1) LCD Touchscreen
G. Model U2RSP-11 F - (1) required - Unison PC Interface Station with:
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
THEATRICAL LIGHTING DIMMING SYSTEM
16930-25 96013
(1) White faceplate assembly to include the following:
a. “Computef Unison PC connector
H. Connector Strips:
(2) 89_28-12-06-PA-R1 Connector strip 28’0” long with (12) 20A twistlock
connectors wired on (6) 20A circuits plus (7) hanging brackets
(2) 892512-06PA-Rl Connector strip 20’0” long with (12) twistlock connectors
wired on (6) 20A circuits plus (6) hanging brackets
I. Theatre Fixtures:
(4) ETC Source Four PAR spotlights complete with “C clamp, wlor frame,
safety cable, 4 lens set, 1M lead with 20A twistlock connector and
HPL575/115 lamp
(6) ETC 436A Source Four Ellipsoidal spotlights complete with “c” clamp, wlor
frame, safety cable, 4 lens set, 1M lead with 20A twistlock connector and
HPL575/115 lamp
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Wiring shall be per manufacturer’s recommendations.
B. Contractor shall furnish all equipment, labor, system setup, and other senrices
necessary for the proper installation of the devices as indicated on the drawings and
specified herein. System setup shall include defining each dimmer’s load type,
assigning each load to a zone, and setting the control functions.
C. Unless otherwise noted, Manufacturer shall provide a one year warranty on all
equipment supplied. Warranty shall wver 100% of the cost to repair or replace any
parts required over the first year which are directly attributable to the manufacturer.
Warranty coverage shall begin from date of final system commissioning or three
months from date of delivery, whichever is the earlier.
D. The system shall be installed utilizing complete manufacturer’s shop drawings and
in accordance with these specifications.
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
THEATRICAL LIGHTING DIMMING SYSTEM
16930-26 96013
E. Upon completion of the installation and prior to removal of the bypass jumpers, the
Contractor shall completely test all line voltage power and low voltage control wiring
for continuity and accuracy of connections. The jumpers shall remain in place until
all loads have been fully tested and found to be free of miswires, short circuits or
other wiring defects.
3.02 SYSTEM CHECK OUT:
A. Upon completion of the installation, the system shall be completely checked out by
a Lutron factory based Engineer. The check out will be performed upon notification
by the Contractor that the system installation is complete and that all loads have
been tested live for continuity and freedom from defects and that all control wiring
has been connected and checked for proper continuity.
B. Upon completion of the system check out, the Engineer shall demonstrate the
operation of the system to the Architect.
C. Warranty service to be done by factory based Engineer.
3.03 TRAINING:
- A. Training of User staff and maintenance personnel in the operation of the theatrical
lighting dimming system shall be provided in two (2) four (4)-hour sessions for a total
of eight (8) hours. Training dates and times shall be at the discretion of the User.
PART 4 FIELD SUPPORT
Manufacturer shall be capable of providing on-site service support within 24 hours anywhere
in the continental U.S.A., and within five business days anywhere in the world, except where
special visas are required.
l l l END OF SECTION * l *
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
THEATRICAL LIGHTING DIMMING SYSTEM
16930-27 96013
SECTION 16950
ACCEPTANCE TESTING OF ELECTRICAL POWER DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .Ol OBJECTIVES
A. The intent of these acceptance tests is to ensure that all equipment supplied is
operational, within industry and manufacturer tolerances, and is installed in acwr-
dance with design specifications. All costs shall be included as part of the base bid.
1.02 APPLICABLE CODES, STANDARDS AND REFERENCES
A. All inspections and tests shall be in accordance with the following applicable codes
and standards except as provided otherwise herein,
1. National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association - NEMA
2. American Society for Testing and Materials - ASTM
3. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers - IEEE
4. International Electrical Testing Association - IETA
5. American National Standards Institute - ANSI:
c2 National Electrical Safety Code
2244-l American National Standard for Personnel Protection
6. California Code of Regulations, Title 24.
7. Insulated Cable Engineers Association - ICEA
8. Association of Edison Illuminating Companies - AEIC
9. Occupational Safety and Health Administration
Part 1910 Subpart S, 1910.308
Part 1926 Subpart V, 1926.950 through 1926.960
10. National Fire Protection Association - NFPA:
ANSI/NFPA 708 Electrical Equipment Maintenance
NFPA 70E Electrical Safety Requirements for Employee
Workplaces
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
ACCEPTANCE TESTING OF ELECTRICAL
POWER DISTRIBUTION
16950-l 96013
B.
ANSVNFPA 70 National Electrical Code
ANSVNFPA 780 Lightning Protection Code
ANSVNFPA 101 Life Safety Code
All inspections and tests shall utilize the following references:
1. Project Design Specifications
2. Project Design Drawings
3. Manufacturer’s instruction manuals applicable to each particular apparatus
1.03 QUALIFICATIONS OF TESTING AGENCY
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
The Testing Agency shall be a corporately independent testing organization which
can function as an unbiased testing authority, professionally independent of the
Manufacturers, Suppliers, and Installers of equipment or systems evaluated by the
Testing Firm.
The Testing Agency shall be regularly engaged in the testing of electrical equipment
devices, installations, and systems including those required under this project.
The Testing Agency shall have been engaged in such practices for a minimum of five
(5)-years. The testing agency personnel shall have a minimum of five (5) years or
experience.
The Testing Agency shall meet federal OSHA criteria for accreditation of testing
laboratories, Title 29, Parts 1907, 1910, and 1926. Full membership in the Intema-
tional Electrical Testing Association constitutes proof of such criteria.
The lead (on-site) Technical Representative shall be currently certified by the
International Electrical Testing Association (IETA) in Electrical Power Distribution
System Testing.
The Testing Agency shall utilize only full-time technicians who are regularly employed
by the Firm for testing services. Electrically unskilled employees are not permitted
to perform testing or assistance of any kind. Electricians may assist, but may not
perform testing and/or inspection services.
The Testing Agency shall submit proof of the above qualifications to the Architect.
Testing Agency qualifications shall be submitted for review and approval in
accordance with Section 16011, “General Requirements, Electrical”.
The Testing Agency shall be an independent organization as defined by OSHA Title
29, Part 1926, and the International Electrical Testing Association.
All instruments used by the Testing Agency to evaluate electrical performance shall
meet NETA’s Specifications for Test Instruments.
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
ACCEPTANCE TESTING OF ELECTRICAL
POWER DISTRIBUTION
16950-2 96013
/---
J. The terms used in this document such as Testing Firm, Test Contractor, Testing
Laboratory, or Contractor Test Company shall mean Testing Agency.
K. The Testing Agency shall be Electra Test, Inc. or equal, no known equal.
1.04 RESPONSIBILITIES
A. The Contractor shall notify the Architect two (2)-weeks prior to the commencement
of any testing.
B. The Contractor shall coordinate with the scheduling of all phases of the project.
C. Acceptance Testing shall be completed thirty (30)-days prior to occupancy of the
facility to allow for correction of defective systems, materials, or workmanship.
D. Any system, material, or workmanship which is found defective on the basis of
acceptance tests shall be reported to the Architect within twenty-four (24)-hours.
E. The Contractor shall maintain a written record of all tests and, upon completion of
project, assemble and certify a final test report.
1.05 TEST EQUIPMENT
A. Test Instrument Calibration.
1. The Contractor shall ensure that the Testing Agnecy has a calibration
program which assures that all applicable test instruments are maintained
within rated accuracy.
2. The accuracy shall be directly traceable to the National Bureau of Standards.
3. Instruments shall be calibrated in accordance with the following frequency
schedule:
a. Field instruments: Analog:
Digital:
6-months maximum
1 2-months maximum
b. Laboratory instruments: 12-months
C. Leased specialty equipment: 1Zmonths
(Where accuracy is guaranteed by lessor)
4. Dated calibration labels shall be visible on all test equipment.
5. Records must be kept up to date which show date and results of instruments
calibrated or tested.
6. An up-to-date instrument calibration instruction and procedure will be
maintained for each test instrument.
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
ACCEPTANCE TESTING OF ELECTRICAL
POWER DISTRIBUTION
16950-3 96013
7. The calibrating standard shall be of higher accuracy than that of the
instrument tested.
1.06 TEST REPORTS
A. The test report shall include the following:
1. Summary of project
2. Description of equipment device tested
3. Description of test including date, time, and duration of test
4. Test results
5. Conclusions and recommendations
6. Appendix, including appropriate test forms
7. Identification of test equipment used
8. Signature of responsible test organization authority
B. Provide seven (7) copies of the complete report to the Owner’s Representative no
later than thirty (30)-days after completion of project unless directed otherwise.
C. Provide and fasten a label in most visible area of the following components which
identifies the “DATE OF TEST”, the “COMPANY NAME” of the testing agency and
the name of the “TECHNICIAN” performing the test.
1.07 SAFETY AND PRECAUTIONS
A. Safety practices shall include, but are not limited to the following requirements:
1. Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970-OSHA.
2. Accident Prevention Manual for Industrial Operations, National Safety
Council, Chapter 4.
3. Applicable State and Local safety operating procedures.
4. NETA Safety/Accident Prevention Program.
5. Owner’s safety practices.
6. National Fire Protection Association - NFPA 70E.
7. American National Standards for Personnel Protection - ANSI 2244.1.
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
ACCEPTANCE TESTING OF ELECTRICAL
POWER DISTRIBUTION
16950-4 96013
B. All tests shall be performed with apparatus de-energized, except where otherwise
specifically required.
C. The Contractor shall ensure that the Testing Agency has a designated Safety
Representative on the project to supervise operations with respect to safety.
1.08 GENERAL SCOPE OF EQUIPMENT TO BE CERTIFIED:
A. Testing shall include, but not be limited to, the following items:
1. Cables - Low Voltage (600 Volts and Less)
2. Switchgear and Switchboard Assemblies
3. Low Voltage Power and Insulated Case Circuit Breakers
4. Distribution Switchboard
5. Disconnect Switches
6. Grounding Systems
7. Interior Dry Transformers
8. Panelboards
9. Distribution Panelboards
10. Molded Case Circuit Breakers
11. Fuses
12. Automatic Transfer Switches
13. Digital Instrumentation Package (DIP)
PART 2 - PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY
2.01 REQUIREMENTS
A. A protective device coordination study shall be performed by a Registered Electrical
Engineer (California) to select or to check the following:
1. Coordination with power fuse ratings
2. Protective relay characteristics and settings
3. Ratios and characteristics of associated voltage and current transformers
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
ACCEPTANCE TESTING OF ELECTRICAL
POWER DISTRIBUTION
16950-5 96013
4. Low voltage breaker trip characteristics and settings
B. The coordination study shall include all voltage classes of equipment from the
SDG&E circuit protective devices to and including the distribution panelboards,
distribution switchboards, and panelboards.
C. The time-current characteristics of the specified protective devices shall be plotted
on the appropriate log-log or semi-log paper. The time-current plots shall include the
following:
1. Complete titles
2. Representative one-line diagram and legends
3. Associated SDG&E relays or fuse characteristics
4. Significant motor starting characteristics
5. Transformer full load, inrush points, and damage lines per ANSI-57-109.
6. Complete operating bands of low voltage circuit breaker trip curves
7. Fuse curves
D. The coordination plots shall include the following:
1. Characteristics of protective devices
2. Proposed relay taps
3. Time dial and instantaneous trip settings
4. Cable damage curves
5. Transformer damage curves
6. Symmetrical and asymmetrical fault currents
7. Single line diagram of the portion of the system considered in the curve set.
E. All requirements of the current National Electrical Code shall be followed.
F. Reasonable coordination intervals and separation of characteristic curves shall be
maintained. Separate coordination plots for phase and ground protective devices
shall be provided on a system basis. Separate curves shall be used to clearly
indicate the coordination achieved for utility main breaker and feeder breaker, with
downstream fuses.
G. There shall be a maximum of six (6) protective devices per plot.
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
ACCEPTANCE TESTING OF ELECTRICAL
POWER DISTRIBUTION
16950-6 96013
H. Information about what criteria was used to set the devices shall be submitted.
I. The selection and setting of the protective devices shall be provided separately in a
tabulated form listing circuit identification, IEEE device number, current transformer
ratios, manufacturer, type, range of adjustment and recommended settings.
J. Discrepancies, problem areas, or inadequacies shall be promptly brought to the
attention of the Owner’s Representative.
K. Seven (7) copies of coordination curves and tabulated data indicating selection and
settings of protective devices shall be submitted to the Architect for approval.
L. A short circuit study shall be perfomred to determine the following maximum fault
current at each substation:
1. Three-Phase
2. Phase-to-Phase
3. Phase-to-Ground
M. The short circuit study report shall include, but not be limited to, the. following
information:
1. One-line diagram of the impedance network that shows buses, branches, and
branch impedances (resistance and reactance) used in the study.
2. Calculations used to determine branch impedances.
3. Calculations used to determine equivalent model of utility interconnection.
4. A table that lists the following information:
a. SubIswitchstation name
b. Medium voltage circuit breaker identification at that sub/switchstation
C. Breaker interrupting capability
d. Fault currents in MVA as identified in paragraph L above and
percentage of breaker interrupting capability for each type of fault.
N. The study shall be submitted for review and approval with the electrical equipment
submittals in accordance with Section 16011, “General Requirements, Electrical”.
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
ACCEPTANCE TESTING OF ELECTRICAL
POWER DISTRIBUTION
16950-7 96013
PART 3 - EQUIPMENT VERIFICATIONS, TESTS, AND CALIBRATIONS
3.01 CABLES - LOW VOLTAGE (600 VOLTS AND LESS)
A. Visual and Mechanical Inspection
1.
2.
Inspect cables for physical damage and proper connection.
Torque test cable connection. Tighten connections in accordance with
industry standards.
B. Electrical Tests
1. Perform insulation resistance test of each cable with respect to ground and
adjacent cables.
3.02 SWITCHGEAR AND SWITCHBOARD ASSEMBLIES
A. Visual and Mechanical Inspection
1.
2.
3.
4.
Inspect for physical damage and code violations.
Clean interior and insulator surfaces.
Inspect for proper alignment, anchorage, and grounding.
Check tightness of bolted bus joints by torque wrench method. Tighten
connections in accordance with industry standard torque levels. Identify all
torqued connections tested (mark with blue felt pen).
5. Make closure attempt on locked open devices. Make opening attempt on
locked closed devices.
6.
7.
Operate devices that are in the normally off position.
Verify that all equipment meets the requirements set by the specifications and
drawings.
8. Ensure all nameplates and labels are correct and in place.
B. Electrical Tests
1. Measure insulation resistance of each bus section phase-to-phase and
phase-to-ground.
2. Inspect all accessible bus joints and cable connections by infrared scanner
to detect loose or high resistance connections or other circuit abnormalities.
3. Ensure of all control wiring is correctly connected.
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
ACCEPTANCE TESTING OF ELECTRICAL
POWER DISTRIBUTION
16950-8 96013
3.03 LOW VOLTAGE POWER AND INSULATED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A. Visual and Mechanical Inspection
1. Check circuit breaker for proper mounting and physical damage.
2. Check mechanical operation.
B.
3. Check tightness of electrical wire/cable connections.
Electrical Tests
1.
2.
Measure contact resistance.
Measure long-term delay by primary current injection at three (3)-times long-
time pickup current.
3. Measure instantaneous pickup current by primary current injection.
4. Check trip unit reset operation.
5. Perform insulation resistance test phase-to-ground, phase-to-phase and
across open contacts.
6. Measure short-time pickup by primary current injection.
7. Measure short-time delay of one and one-half (I-l/2)-times short-time pickup.
3.04 DISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARDS
A. Visual and Mechanical Inspections
1. Inspect for physical damage and code violations.
2. Clean interior and insulator surfaces.
3. Inspect for proper alignment, anchorage, and grounding.
4. Check tightness of bolted bus joints by torque wrench method. Tighten
connections in accordance with industry standard torque levels. Identify all
torqued connections tested (mark with blue felt pen).
B.
5. Ensure all nameplates and labels are correct and in place.
Electrical Tests
1. Measure insulation resistance of each bus section phase-to-phase and
phase-to-ground.
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
ACCEPTANCE TESTING OF ELECTRICAL
POWER DISTRIBUTION
16950-g 96013
2. Inspect all accessible bus joints and cable connections by infrared scanner
to detect loose or high resistance connections or other circuit abnormalities.
3. Ensure of all control wiring is correctly connected.
3.05 DISCONNECT SWITCHES
A. Visual and Mechanical Inspection
1. Inspect for physical damage and code violations.
2. Ensure all nameplates and labels are correct and in place.
3.98 GROUNDING SYSTEMS
A. Visual and Mechanical Inspection
1. Inspect ground system connections for completeness and adequacy.
B. Electrical Tests
1. Perform “Fall Of The Potential” tests on the main grounding electrode of
system per IEEE Standard No. 81, Section 9.04.
2. Perform the two (2)-point method test per IEEE No. 81, Section 9.03 to
determine the ground resistance between the main grounding system and all
major electrical equipment frames, system neutral, and/or derived neutral
points.
3.07 INTERIOR DRY TRANSFORMERS
A. Visual and Mechanical Inspection
1. Inspect for physical damage, proper installation, anchorage and grounding.
2. Check tightness of external bolted electrical joints.
3. Ensure all nameplates and labels are correct and in place.
B. Electrical Tests
1. Perform insulation resistance test winding-to-winding and winding-to-ground.
2. Perform turns ratio test between windings for all tap positions.
3. Inspect all accessible bus joints and cable connections by infrared scanner
to detect loose or high resistance connections at other circuit abnormalities.
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
ACCEPTANCE TESTING OF ELECTRICAL
POWER DISTRIBUTION
16950-10 96013
3.08 PANELBOARDS
A. Visual and Mechanical Inspection
1. Inspect for physical damage and code violations.
2. Ensure all nameplates and labels are correct and in place.
B.
3. Verify panel schedule accuracy.
Electrical Tests
1. Inspect all accessible bus joints and cable connections by infrared scanner
to detect loose or high resistance connections at other circuit abnormalities.
3.09 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS
A. Visual and Mechanical Inspections
1. Inspect for physical damage and code violations.
2. Clean interior and insulator surfaces.
3. Inspect for proper alignment, anchorage, and grounding.
4. Check tightness of bolted bus joints by torque wrench method. Tighten
connections in accordance with industry standard torque levels. Identify all
torqued connections tested (mark with blue felt pen).
5. Ensure all nameplates and labels are correct and in place.
B. Electrical Tests
1. Measure insulation resistance of each bus section phase-to-phase and
phase-to-ground.
2. Inspect all accessible bus joints and cable connections by infrared scanner
to detect loose or high resistance connections or other circuit abnormalities.
3. Ensure of all control wiring is correctly connected.
3.10 MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (FRAME SIZE LARGER THAN 100 AMPERE)
A. Visual and Mechanical Inspection
1. Check circuit breaker for proper mounting and physical damage.
2. Check mechanical operation.
3. Check tightness of electrical wire/cable connections.
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
ACCEPTANCE TESTING OF ELECTRICAL
POWER DISTRIBUTION
16950-I 1 96013
B. Electrical Tests
1. Measure contact resistance.
2. Measure long-term delay by primary current injection at three (3)-times long-
time pickup current.
3. Measure instantaneous pickup current by primary current injection.
4. Check trip unit reset operation.
5. Perform insulation resistance test phase-to-ground, phase-to-phase and
across open contacts.
3.11 FUSES
A. Visual and Mechanical Inspection
1. Inspect for physical damage.
2. Check cleanliness of contact surfaces.
3. Clean all creepage surfaces.
8. Electrical Tests
1. Perform a resistance test to verify fuse element is not broken.
3.12 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES
A. Visual and Mechanical Inspection
1. Inspect for physical damage and code violations.
2. Ensure all nameplates and labels are correct and in place.
B. Electrical Tests
1. Inspect all accessible bus joints and cable connections by infrared scanner
to detect loose or high resistance connections at other circuit abnormalities.
See Section 16490, “Automatic Transfer Switches”, for additional testing
requirements.
3.13 DIGITAL INSTRUMENTATION PACKAGE (DIP)
A. Visual and Mechanical Inspection
1. Verify all connections with electrical diagrams including ratio, polarity, and
ring-out tests.
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
ACCEPTANCE TESTING OF ELECTRICAL
POWER DISTRIBUTION
16950-12 95013
2. Inspect physical condition.
B. Electrical Tests
1. Program DIP and verify data log utilizing computer via RS232C ports.
2. Test DIP using active source test set.
3.14 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS)
A. See Section 16610, “Uninterruptible Power Supply”, for additional testing
requirements.
3.15 DIESEL ENGINE-GENERATOR SET
A. See Section 16620, “Diesel Engine-Generator Set”, for testing requirements.
PART 4 - INFRARED INSPECTION
4.01 REQUIREMENTS
A. All doors and covers on equipment to be tested shall be removed by the Contractor
and, upon completion of test by the Testing Agency, be reinstalled by the Contractor.
B. Additional testing requirements shall be as indicated in the individual sections of
Division 16.
C. The following equipment shall be energized and, after a minimum of four (4)-hours
(under load), infrared scans shall be made of all components including, but not
limited to, all bus joints and all cable connections.
1. Main Service Entrance Equipment
2. Main Switchboard “MSB”
3. Main Distribution Panelboard “MDPL”
4. Computer Distribution Panel “CDP”
5. Uninterruptible Power Supply “UPS”
6. Automatic Transfer Switches
7. Distribution Switchboards
8. Distribution Panelboards
9. Panelboards
. . .
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
ACCEPTANCE TESTING OF ELECTRICAL
POWER DISTRIBUTION
16950-I 3 96013
D.
Problem areas shall be photographed before and after correction. After corrections,
another test of two (2)-hours (under load) shall be made. Infrared scans shall be
made at that time to confirm correct operation.
An infrared inspection shall be performed eleven (11) months after the building is
occupied. Infrared scans shall be made on all equipment listed in this specification
section. Correction of problem areas shall be the Contractor’s responsibility. All
doors and covers on equipment to be tested shall be removed by the Contractor and,
upon completion of the tests, be reinstalled by the Contractor.
* l l END OF SECTION l l l
20 OCTOBER 1997
Carlsbad City Library
ACCEPTANCE TESTING OF ELECTRICAL
POWER DISTRIBUTION
16950-14 96013
January 12,19%
TAYLOR - BALL OF CALIFORNIA, INCORPORATED
7777 Alvarado Road, Suite 501
La Mesa, California 9 1941
RE: NOTICE TO PROCEED; CARLSBAD CITY LIBRARY PROJECT
Gentlemen:
On December 16, 1997, the Carlsbad City Council awarded the contract for the construction of
the Carlsbad City Library, Project No. 32441, to Taylor - Ball of California, Incorporated. The
contract documents for this project have been recently executed by both Taylor - Ball and the
City of Carlsbad, copies of which Shall be furnished to your offices within the next few days.
This letter shall serve as the official “Notice to Proceed” with the work effective Monday,
January 12, 1998. In accordance with Articles 8.2.3.1 and 8.2.3.2 of the mental . . Provisions to AIA A201. 1987 Editron work shall begin within 7 calendar days after receipt of
this “Notice to Proceed” and achieve sibstantial completion within 426 calendar days of January
12, 1998.
The City of Carlsbad has authorized Mr. Bill Bowdle of B & G Consultants, Incorporated of San
Diego, California to act on its behalf as Construction Manager for this project. Please direct all
questions, correspondence, submittals, and all other project documents and communications to
Mr. Bowdle.
The City of Carlsbad welcomes your partnership in this most exciting and invaluable public
Municipal Projects Manager
c: City Attorney, City Manager, Assistant City Manager, Administrative Services Director,
Community Development Director, Purchasing Officer, City Clerk, Library Director,
Assistant Library Director, Finance Director, Bill Bowdle - B & G Consultants, Norm
Luker - McGraw/Baldwin, Architects, Rich Cardwell - CardweWThomas, Architects,
Ken Baldwin - McGraw/Baldwin, Architects
2075 Las Palmas Dr. l Carlsbad, CA 92009-l 576 - (619) 438-11610 FAX (619) 438-0894 613
0 : GROSSMONT BANK
The Bank To Believe In
January 13, 1998
Jane Mobaldi, Esq.
City Attorney’s Office
City of Carlsbad
1200 Carlsbad Village Drive
Carlsbad, CA 92008
via fax (760) 434-8367
and federal express
Re: Escrow Retention Agreement Between City of Carlsbad and
Taylor Ball, Contractor and Grossmont Bank, Escrow Agent
Dear Ms. Mobaldi:
This will confirm our several conversations of the past couple days regarding the
requirement of the Public Contracts Code of E & 0 coverage for escrow agents handling
retention pursuant to contracts between the City and its contractors.
You have agreed to reduce the requirement from $1 ,OOO,OOO stated in the Escrow
Agreement to the statutory requirement of $100,000. This will confirm Grossmont Bank’s
representation to you that it is covered by such a policy, issued to Zions Bancorporation and its
affiliates, of which Grossmont is one. The insurer, USF & G, is licensed to do business in
California and has a rating of A-XIV which rating is higher than the contractually required A-V.
In order not to delay the process further, I am causing a note to be affixed to the
executed copies of the Escrow Agreement changing the insurance requirement.
I have enclosed a copy of our 194 (the latest) annual report which contains audited
financial statements of the Bank. If you have any further questions or concerns, please give me
a call.
I appreciate your timely response and assistance in this matter.
Sincerely,
Peggy J. Standefef;,
General Counsel
enclosure
cc: Tom Chubb/Taylor Ball
4320 La Jolla Village Drive, Suite 355, San Diego. CA 92122
(619) 623-3190 - Fax (619) 552-0463
619-552-0463 GROSSMONT BfINK 710 P01-‘02 JRN 13 ‘98 14:X1
@ l GROSSMONT RINK
77mBmkIbBellevuin
January 13, 1998
Jane Mobaldi, Esq.
City Attorney’s Offi=
City of Carl&ad
1200 Carlsbad Village Drive
Carlsbad, CA 92008
via fax (760) 434-8367
and federal express
RfX Escrow Retention Agreeme& Between City of Carlsbad and
Taylor Ball. Contractor and Grossmont Bank, Escrow Agent
Dear Ms. Mobaldi:
This will confmn our several conversations of the past Couple days regarding the
requirement of the Public Contracts Code of E & 0 coverage for escrow agents handling
retention pursuant to contracts between the City and its contractors.
You have agreed to reduce the requirement from $I.OOO,OOO stated in the Escrow Agreement to the statutory requirement of $100,000. This will confii Grossmont Bank’s
representation to you that it is covered by such a policy, issued to Zions Bancorporation and its
affiliates, of which Grossmont is one. The iusurer, USF & G, is licensed to do business in
California aud has a rating of A-XIV which rating is higher than the contractually required A-V.
In order not to delay the process further, I am causing a note to be affixed to the
executed copies of the Escrow Agreement changing the insurance requirement.
I have enclosed a copy of our 1997 (the latest) annual report which contains audited
financial statements of the Bank. If you have any further questions or concerns, .please give me
a call.
I appreciate your timely response and assistance in this matter.
Sincerely,
Peggy J. Standefer
General Counsel
enclosure
CC: Tom Chubb/Taylor Ball
4320 La lolla Village Drive. Suite 355. San Olegn. CA 92122
(619) 623-3190 - Fax (619) 552-0463
January 13,1990
WILLIAM HALL, VICE PRESIDENT
TAYLOR - BALL OF CALIFORNIA, INCORPORATED
7777 Alvarado Road, Suite 501
La Mesa, California 91941
RE: NOTICE TO PROCEED; CARLSBAD CITY LIBRARY PROJECT
Dear Mr. Hall:
On December 16, 1997, the Carlsbad City Council awarded the contract for the construction of
the Carlsbad City Library, Project No. 32441, to Taylor - Ball of California, Incorporated. The
contract documents for this project have been recently executed by both Taylor - Ball and the
City of Carlsbad, copies of which are being forwarded to your offices under separate cover.
This letter shall serve as the official “Notice to Proceed” with the work effective Monday,
January 19, 1998. In accordance with Articles 8.2.3.1 and 8.2.3.2 of the Supnlemental
Pr v’ i n 7 work shall begin within 7 calendar days after receipt of
this “Notice to Proceed” and achieve substantial completion within 426 calendar days of January
19, 1998.
The City of Carlsbad has authorized Mr. Bill Bowdle of B & G Consultants, Incorporated of San
Diego, California to act on its behalf as Construction Manager for this project. Please direct all
questions, correspondence, submittals, and all other project documents and communications to
Mr. Bowdle.
The City of Carlsbad welcomes your partnership in this most exciting and invaluable public
J
Municipal Projects Manager
c: City Attorney, City Manager, Assistant City Manager, Administrative Services Director,
Community Development Director, Purchasing Officer, City Clerk, Library Director,
Assistant Library Director, Finance Director, Bill Bowdle - B & G Consultants, Norm
Luker - McGraw/Baldwin, Architects, Rich Cardwell - CardwellKhomas, Architects,
Ken Baldwin - McGraw/Baldwin, Architects
2075 Las Palmas Dr. - Cartsbad, CA 92009-l 576 - (619) 438-1161 l FAX (619) 438-0894 @
t t 1’ l’r’l i. 1’ 1’ 1 ri I /I I ifJ Mil I cl’ I.1 I-‘kl,r’ Jr-Pi 1.1 ’ ‘!tj ll:48
ESCROWAGREEMENTFORSECLIRITY
DEPOSITS IN LfEU OF RETENTfON (OPTfONAL) .
-his Escrow Agreement is made and entered into by and between the City of Carlsbad whose
Iddress is 1200 Carisbad Village Drive. Carlsbad, California, 92008, hereinafter called “City” and
of california,whose address is
7777 Al- S&z- 501, Lm. CA 91941 hereinafter called
Contractor” and GROSSMONT BANK LA MESA OFFICE whose address is
5500 GROSSMONT CENTER DRIVE LA MESA, CA 91942 hereinafter
zaalled “Escrow Agent.”
-or the consideration hereinafter set forth, the City, Contractor and Escrow Agent agree as follows:
I. Pursuant to sections 22300 and 10263 of the Public Contract Code of the State of California,
he contractor has the option to deposit securities with the Escrow Agent as a substitute for retention
zarnings requirkd to be withheld by the City pursuant to the Construction Contract entered into
letween the City and Contractor for Carlsbad City Library, Contract No.: 32441 in the amount of
59.183.800-00 dated -17/ 97 (hereinafter referred to as the
‘Contract”). Alternatively, on written request of the contractor, the City shall make payments of the
-etention earnings directly to the escrow agent. When the Contractor deposits the securities as a
xbstitute for Contract earnings, the Escrow Agent shall notify the City within 10 days of the deposit.
The Escrow Agent shali maintain insurance to cover negligent acts and omissions of the escrow
agent in connection with the handling of retentions under these sections in an amount not less than
$I,OOO,OOO per contract. This insurance is to be placed with insurers that have a rating in Best’s Key
?ating Guide of at least A-M Insurers must also be authorized to transact the business of insurance
3y the State of California Insurance Commissioner as admitted carriers as evidenced by a listing in
:he official publication of the Department of insurance of the State of California and/or under the
standards specified by the City Council in Resolution No. 91-403. The market value of the securities
at the time of the substitution shall be a least equal to the cash amount then required to be withheld
as retention under the terms of the con ract between the City and Contractor. Securities shall be ) held in the name of the *Grossmo%ta Bank Escrow and shall designate the
Contractor as the beneficial owner. Account # O1 6z9301 Oy *
2. The City shall make progress payments to the Contractor for such funds which otherwise would
be withheld from progress payments pursuant to the Contract provisions, provided that the Escrow
Agent holds securities in the form and amount specified above.
3. When the City makes payment of retentions earned directly to the escrow agent, the escrow
agent shall hold them for the benefit of the contractor until such time as the escrow created under
this contract is terminated. The contractor may direct the investment of the payments into securities.
Ail terms and conditions of this agreement and the rights and responsibilities of the parties shall be
equally applicable and binding when the City pays the escrow agent directly.
4. The contractor shall be responsible for paying ail fees for the expenses incurr_ed by the Escrow
Agent in administering the Escrow Account and’ all expenses of the City. These expenses and
payment terms shall be determined by the City, Contractor, and Escrow Agent.
?3 10120197 Contract No.: 32441 Page 23 of 36
+6978499 rCl’fLOR EM-L 494 P03 JQN 12 '98 11:48
. .
! . The interest earned on the securities or the money market accounts held in escrow and all
i lterest earned on that interest shall be for the sole account of Contractor and shall be subject to I rithdrawal by Contractor a! any time and from time to time without notice to the City.
t _ Contractor shall have the right to withdraw all or any par! of the principal in the Escrow Account
( nly by written notice to Escrow Agent accompanied by written authoriiation from City to the Escrow
I .gent that City consents to the withdrawal of the amount sought to be withdrawn by Contractor.
; . The City shall have a right to draw upon the securities in the event of default by the Contractor. 1 lpon seven days’ written notice to the Escrow Agent from the City of the default, the Escrow Agent
z hall immediately convert the securities to cash and shall distribute the cash as instructed by the
( :ity.
I . Upon receipt of written notification from the City cer!ifying that the Contract is final and complete
i nd that the Contractor has complied with all requirements and procedures applicable to the ( iontract. the Escrow Agent shall release to Contractor all securities and interest on deposit less I screw fees and charges of the Escrow Account. The escrow shall be closed immediately upon ( isbursement of ail moneys and securities on deposit and payments of fees and charges.
c . . The Escrow Agent shall rely on the written notifications from the City and the contractor pursuant t ) sections (1) to (8). inclusive, of this agreement and the City and Contractor shall hold Escrow I .gent harmless from Escrow Agent’s release, conversion and disbursement of the securities and
i lterest as set forth above.
* 0. The names of the persons who are authorized to give written notices or to receive written notice
( n behalf of the Cii and on behalf of Contractor in connection with the foregoing, and exemplars of
I leir respedive signatures are as follows:
I ‘or Contractor:
I :or Escrow Agent:
Title Mayor
Address 1200 Carlsbad Village Dr., Carlsbad CA
Title Vice President
Name Will&#~Rall.,/
Signature ste, sui
Address-. CA 91941
Title Vice President Operations Officer
,Qjd,-ess 5500 Grossmont Center Drive La Mesa, CA 91942
, it the time the Escrow Account is opened, the City and Contractor shall deliver to the Escrow Agent
I fully executed counterpart of this Agreement.
P I # 1 o/20/97 Contract No.: 32441 Page 24 of 36
+6978499 TQYLOR BFILL 494 PC34 JFlN 12 ‘98 11:48
I V WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties have executed this Agreement by their proper officers on the
t ate first set forth above.
i ‘or City:
- itle Mayor
)ddress 1200 Carlsbad Village Drive, Carlsbad
F or Contractor:
1 itle vice president
tame Willia8d Ball
c ignature L 5977
Eddress- &ma. CA 91941
F 3r Escrow #pent
1 tie ce President Operations Officer
Grossmont Bank
Address 5500 Grossmont Center Drive
La Mesa, CA 91942
* amount of insurance coverage required reduced to statutory minimum of $100,000
per letter confirmation dated Januray 13, 1998.
4s 1 o/20/97 Contract No.:32441 Page 25 of 36
: :., ..:...:: ..... :: .:.: :::. ...............................
y:.: : : : : : : :,r,: .:‘:‘.jj:‘i:i ii ji j i’: .:.: ... j:.: :‘i:::‘i.j .. ...... . : .. j ... . DATE (MMIDDNYl
........... 3/23/98 I .......
THIS C- _____ _-___- _- ONLY AND CONFER:
..: .,..,:,..,,,.,,, ..:.
ERTlFlCATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION S NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE 800-441-l 344
Kirke-Van Orsdel,
P.O. Box 10395
Des Moines, Iowa
515-243-I 830
Incorporated
50306-0395
HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW.
COMPANIES AFFORDING COVERAGE ____ --___-
COMPANY A Allied Insurance Compan
USURED COMPANY Taylor Ball of California, Inc. C.” US Fire Insurance Co
‘,777 Alvarado Road, Suite 501 COMPANY
La Mesa CA 91941 C --
COMPANY D
THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD
INDICATED, NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS
CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS.
EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAII
:0 TO TYPE OF INSURANCE I POLICY NUMBER POLICY EFFECTIVE POLICY EXPIRATION “ATE ‘Y!.fl/DO/YY) OATE ::fiM!DCNY1
A GENERAL LIABILITY a71 801 a3577 4foi 198 4101 f99
x COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY
CLAIMS MADE
OWNER’S & CONTRACTOR’S PROT
M
A ~AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY I 6A7.i 80183577 i 4foif98 4fOlf99
GARAGE LIABILITY b ANY AUTO
4 i ! / H I I I
B EXCESS LIABILITY
b x UMBRELLA FORM
553-059727 1 4folf98
I
4101 I99
AGGREGATE
1 OTHER THAFI UMBRELLA FORM I t ’ $ --- L--
A WURKERS COMi’ENS~T;ilON MO ‘ivC7 1 CD’1 33GS5 4;‘3113c 4’0, j”? 7% 1 WC ?TATLI- 1 IOTH-, , dd l-or< I’ i.lir;l-rS / I Es.:.. EMPLOYERS’ LIABILITY EL EACH ACCIDENT 5 500000 ---
THE PROPRIETOR/ EL DISEASE-POLICY LIMIT $ 500000 PARTNERS/EXECUTIVE
OFFICERS ARE: EL DISEASE EA EMPLOYEE 5 500000
OTHER
‘ESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONSILOCATlONS/VEHlCLES/SPECIAL ITEMS Certificate holder is named as an additional insured with regard to
Project No. 32441, Carlsbad City Library. Coverage is on a Primary and
Noncontributory basis per the attached endorsement.
S. -__
LIMITS
GENERAL AGGREGATE s 2000000
2000000~
FIRE DAMAGE IAny one fire1
MED EXP (Any one person)
COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT 1300000 --__
BODlLY INJURY IPer ;letsonl -_-----~..---.- .---. __-.-
BODILY INJURY I
PROPERTY DAMAGE
,,,,,,,,., Waiver of Subrogation per the attached. . . . . . ,.:. : :.: ,,., :,,.:.::.,::, ..,: ..::.: ;~g[$$g$g :pjQ$p~qi ;: y&y j ‘: ‘: : . . : : ; ; ; ;; ; ;,; ,! :j $gj f$ jy; ; .; ‘; : .: ; ; ; ,, .; ij :j: ;: ; j F yfy; ‘;, I ; i .I :i ;j; ij ii:~~l~~i;‘~AarR~~~ ~~.ij:,iii;iii;;:~ :; :;y : i’.“;j.;,F:.+;:~;; ;; j; :; ;; :?; ; ‘: ; ! ; ; ; y ;,., ‘ii”;, :! .j.$ ;, ;: ; :. ., 1 ,j :: 3;:; :$ j
I” “.‘.‘..
City of Carlsbad
Purchasing Department
SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE
EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, THE ISSUING COMPANY WILL ENDEAVOR TO MAIL
30 DAYS WRITTEN NOTICE TO THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER NAMED TO THE LEFT,
1200 Carlsbad Village Drive BUT FAILURE TO MAIL SUCH NOTICE SHALL IMPOSE NO OBLIGATION OR LIABILITY
Carlsbad, CA 93008-I 980
. .** , .- . . .‘* . , l -
BQNO NO. 5966722
BOND FOR RELEASE OF STOP NdTlCE CMJmmfA
foa4.w 5Y THESE PRESENTS:
That WC. Tzylor EaLl of CzLis"orM.a, Inc. 7777 Alvarado Rozd. SLLLte %I. ta u a'LaII1 w...
Six&s - IndiF ’ 8s %Xk!a)fd, and MURANCE COMPANY. B corporatiw~ ~fhorizeci m tranaa suns buaines in (f-ye SWz oi C&mia. as Surety, are hefd and firmiy bound unto Retainina Wu Co anv Nofix. 15~~~1 Pbrrrw CA Wn6q
, 83 Obligea, in Ihe penal sum of A’ )OQLlARS,tawhrlmonsy~fths UniiedS$f~~O~ AmMickfcrthe paymentof which,
frcu, aurhcirs, lapal r~rasan~s, succersjwsandassbps, jaintty and aevcAly. firmly
tr, tila3u pB%ms.
/or mrtarids or toti? ta City Of Carlsbad
NH-! a catin Stop Nutica zbated D33nber 31
vb due
he-been filed against car&in funds which
WCI &incipal in co~%ctfQn with said mc4 In the arnoutit of a&k ?“nousand L+~n~v 2nd rs . - )&J~FI$~ tieUiri& blls Commnv North - J:venue . San ~PTarcos -CA 97069 _ ,md,
WHE!EAS, Princip&f d!spu~ 8~ co~V~s9 or velidity cr: said Slup Notice end c!&ras U’A Yw lunds now due Principal undar
he yornsiuns cl sa!d contact shaU be delivered to Principal notw’thstanding said S&p hike. and,
~wm~si wth 3225 sJr 3162 ltrrs Cafifamia Civil Code r3~tifus tRat a bunti In 8 ml sum equ3i k~ one and of-t+3 fQtih (16) ~th*unauntdC~~5~NatlCrbe~‘s~remam~atsaidtu~
N?W. TMREFQEE THE CONIXTtQN UP THIS 06UoATlON fS SUCH THAT. if Lhe P rindpal shafl fully protuct the Ubfigee ~~ainsf~~~~QIor~ngOUZot~~~~~trond,arttrerd+Maot~aid~~,orthepayma~tnarwt
hsP::ncipsl,arrdsnd=ayany~wNttr~~S~NatIar~moyrscawv~n~writisd~m,~wilhthecOdt(3t
suit in the4 a&cm. net azmedng Ba pew4 sun at &is bumi Ihen ttris ubi&sim &U x void, cdtwwlss 10 remain rn lull bfca
wehi%
cmNEDAN0SEALEDth4 *sh
v ‘v I -
. ’ .‘.
KNOW ALL BY THESE PRESENTS:
POWER
OF ATTORNEY
JIERICAN STATES INSURANCE COMPANY
INDIANAPOLIS, INDIANA 46206
No. 10616
That AMERlCAN STATES INSURANCE COMPANY, a Indiana corporation, does hereby appoint
****************WILLIAM R. PHILLIPS; DEAN M. CLARK; STEPHEN W. KENT, CURTIS VAN VELDHULZEN; BRENDA K. VINCENT, LARRY D. SLEGH, MERRIE E.
ROMINGER, PAMELA A. McCOIGE, West DesMoines, Iowa *******************************************************************************************************
its true and lawful attorney(s)-in-fact, with full authority to execute on behalf of the company fidelity and surety bonds or undertakings and other documents of a similar
character issued by the company in the course of its business, and to bind AMERICAN STATES INSURANCE COMPANY thereby as fully as if such instruments had
been duly executed by its regularly elected officers at its home office, in amounts or penalties not exceeding the sum of:
DOLLARS ($ UNLIMITED 1
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, AMERICAN STATES INSURANCE COMPANY has executed and attested these presents
this 5th day of March
R.A. PIERSON, SECRETARY W. RANDALL ST0 T
CERTIFICATE
Extract from the By-Laws of AMERICAN STATES INSURANCE COMPANY:
“Article 8, Section 8.1 1. - FIDELITY AND SURETY BONDS . the President, any Vice President, the Secretary, and any Assistant Vice President appointed forthat
purpose by the officer in charge of surety operations, shall each have authority to appoint individuals as attorneys-in-fact or under other appropriate titles with authority to
execute on behalf of the corporation fidelity and surety bonds and other documents of similar character issued by the corporation in the course of its business. . On
any instrument making or evidencing such appointment, the signatures may be affixed by facsimile. On any instrument conferring such authority or on any bond or
undertaking of the corporation, the seal, or a facsimile thereof, may be impressed or affixed or in any other manner reproduced; provided, however, that the seal shall
not be necessary to the validity of any such instrument or undertaking.”
I, R. A. Pierson, Secretary of AMERICAN STATES INSURANCE COMPANY, do hereby certiv that the foregoing extracts of the By-Laws of this corporation, and of a
Power of Attorney issued pursuant thereto, are true and correct, and that both the By-Laws and the Power of Attorney are still in full force and effect.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, 1 have hereunto set my hand and affixed the facsimile seal of said corporation
this 25th day of March 8 1999
>.- : -, .:‘
: - z
-dRkz&?-
R.A. PIERSON, SECRETARY
S-4910lASEF IO/98
315199 PDF
:. 7
. ’ 8.’ . * ’ -
CORPORATION ACKNOWLEDGMENT
State of Iowa
county of Polk
On this 25th day of March , 1999 ,before me personally
came Larry D. Slerrh to me known, who being by me duly
sworn, did depose and say: that he resides in Madrid. Iowa >
that he is the Attornev-In-Fact of the American States Insurance Comnanv
the corporation described in and which executed the above instrument; that he knows the seal of
said corporation; that the seal affixed to said instrument is such corporate seal; that it was so
affixed by order of the board of directors of said corporation; and that he signed his name thereto
by like order.
My Commission Expires: ,p- I;z (, -cr> v -
h
April 21,1999
TO: HELGA STOVER, FINANCE DEPARTMENT
FROM: JOHN CAHILL, COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT DEPARTMEN
RE: MONTHLY PROGRESS PAYMENT FOR CARLSBAD
, CITY LIBRARY PROJECT
Helga: Enclosed is are 2 copies of the progress payment along with 1 set of back-up materials
for March, 1999 for the Carlsbad City Library Project.
Please note we have included for payment the $110,883.31 amount previously withheld for the
“Stop Notice” filed by one of the subcontractors. The general contractor has provided a bond for
this amount which has been reviewed and approved by the City Attorney, Finance, and
Community Development Departments. I am enclosing this bond with this payment to be kept
by Finance until the matter is resolved.
If you have any questions, please call me at x-4386.